The National Geographic Magazine_ Vol. III. (Complete)_ 1891 Various 977 downloads.pdf

406 pages · Make another flipbook

Page 1

Page 2

Page 3

The Project Gutenberg eBook of The National Geographic
Magazine, Vol. III. (Complete), 1891
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.

Title: The National Geographic Magazine, Vol. III. (Complete), 1891

Author: Various

Release date: December 30, 2020 [eBook #64180]
Most recently updated: October 18, 2024

Language: English

Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/64180

Credits: Ron Swanson

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE NATIONAL
GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE, VOL. III. (COMPLETE), 1891 ***

THE

Page 4

NATIONAL

Page 5

GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE

VOLUME III, 1891

WASHINGTON

PUBLISHED BY THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY

1892

Page 6

OFFICERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
1891

GARDINER G. HUBBARD, President
HERBERT G. OGDEN
EVERETT HAYDEN
A. W. GREELY Vice-Presidents
C. HART MERRIAM
HENRY GANNETT
CHARLES J. BELL, Treasurer
MARCUS BAKER
Secretaries
C. A. KENASTON
ROGERS BIRNIE, JR.
G. K. GILBERT
G. BROWN GOODE
WILLARD D. JOHNSON
Managers
W J MCGEE
T. C. MENDENHALL
W. B. POWELL
B. H. WARDER

PRINTERS
JUDD & DETWEILER
WASHINGTON

Page 7

ENGRAVERS
MOSS ENGRAVING CO.
NEW YORK

CONTENTS.

South America: Annual Address by the President, GARDINER G. HUBBARD

Geography of the Land: Annual Report by Vice-President HERBERT G.
OGDEN

Geography of the Air: Annual Report by Vice-President A. W. GREELY

An Expedition to Mount St. Elias, Alaska; by ISRAEL C. RUSSELL
Introduction—The Southern Coast of Alaska
Part I—Previous Explorations in the St. Elias Region
Part II—Narrative of the St. Elias Expedition of 1890
Part III—Sketch of the Geology of the St. Elias Region
Part IV—Glaciers of the St. Elias Region
Part V—Height and Position of Mount St. Elias
Appendix A—Official Instructions governing the Expedition
Appendix B—Report on topographic Work; by MARK B. KERR
Appendix C—Report on auriferous Sands from Yakutat Bay; by J.
STANLEY-BROWN
Appendix D—Report on fossil Plants; by LESTER F. WARD
Index

The Cartography and Observations of Bering's First Voyage; by A. W.
GREELY

Page 8

Height and Position of Mount St. Elias; by ISRAEL C. RUSSELL

The Heart of Africa; by E. C. HORE

Report of Committee on Exploration in Alaska

Notes—La Carte de France, dite de l'Etat Major, par M. J. COLLET

Polar Regions

The Crossing of Tibet

Statistics of Railways in United States

Index to volume III

Title-page and Imprimatur of Board of Managers

Contents and Illustrations

Publications of the National Geographic Society

Proceedings of the National Geographic Society

Officers of the Society for 1892

Members of the Society

ILLUSTRATIONS.

Page 9

Plate 1—South America (map)
2—Sketch Map of Alaska
3—Map of the St. Elias Region, after La Pérouse
4—Map of the eastern Shore of Yakutat Bay, after Dixon
5—Map of the St. Elias Region, after Malaspina
6—Map of Bay de Monti, after Malaspina
7—Map of Disenchantment Bay, after Malaspina
8—Sketch Map of St. Elias Region, by MARK B. KERR
9—The Hubbard Glacier
10—Wall of Ice on eastern Side of Atrevida Glacier
11—View on Atrevida Glacier
12—Entrance of an Ice Tunnel
13—Deltas in an abandoned Lake Bed
14—A River on the Lucia Glacier
15—Entrance to a glacial Tunnel
16—View of Malaspina Glacier from Blossom Island
17—Moraines on Marvine Glacier
18—View of the Hitchcock Range from near Dome Pass
19—View of Mount St. Elias from Dome Pass
20—View of Mount St. Elias from Seward Glacier
21—Carte Générale des Découvertes de l'Amiral de Fonte (1752)

RUSSELL: Figure 1—Diagram illustrating the Formation of Icebergs
2—View of a glacial Lakelet
3—Section of a glacial Lakelet
4—Diagram illustrating the Formation of marginal
Crevasses
5—Crevasses near Pinnacle Pass
6—Snow Crests on Ridges and Peaks
7—Faulted Pebble from Pinnacle Pass
8—Faulted Pebble from Pinnacle Pass

Page 10

PUBLICATIONS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC
SOCIETY.

REGULAR PUBLICATIONS.

In addition to announcements of meetings and various circulars sent to
members from time to time, the Society issues a single serial publication
entitled THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE. During the first two years
of the existence of the Society this serial was issued in quarterly numbers.
With the beginning of the third year of the Society and the third volume of
the Magazine the form of publication was changed, and the serial now
appears at irregular intervals in parts or brochures (designated by pages and
designed either for separate preservation or for gathering into volumes)
which consist either of single memoirs or of magazine brochures made up
of articles, notes, abstracts, and other geographic matter, together with the
Proceedings and other administrative records of the Society.

The Magazine is mailed free to members of the Society and to exchanges.
The first two volumes, as well as the separate brochures of the third and the
complete volume, are sold at the prices given below by the Secretary, Mr. F.
H. Newell, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C.

To To the
Members. Public.
Volume I, 1889: 4 numbers, 334 pages, 16 plates and 26 $2
$1 40
figures 00
Volume II, 1890: 5 numbers, 344 pages, 10 plates and 11
1 40 2 00
figures
Volume III, 1891: Comprising:
South America; Annual Address by the President, $0
$0 15
Gardiner G. Hubbard: pp. 1–30, pl. 1, March 28, 1891 25
Geography of the Land; Annual Report by Vice-
0 10 0 25
President Herbert G. Ogden: pp. 31–40, April 30, 1891

Page 11

Geography of the Air; Annual Report by Vice-President
0 10 0 25
A. W. Greely: pp. 41–52, May 1, 1891
An Expedition to Mount St. Elias, by I. C. Russell: pp.
0 85 1 50
53–204 (with 8 figures), pls. 2–20, May 29, 1891
Magazine brochure, pp. 205–261, i–xxxv, pl. 21,
0 40 0 75
February 19, 1892
1 60 3 00

IRREGULAR PUBLICATIONS.

In the interests of exact bibliography, the Society takes cognizance of all
publications issued either wholly or partly under its auspices. Each author
of a memoir published in THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE receives
25 copies, and is authorized to order any number of additional copies at a
slight advance on the cost of press-work and paper; and these separate
brochures are identical with those of the regular edition issued by the
Society. Contributors to the magazine brochures are authorized to order any
number of copies of their contributions at a slight advance on cost of press-
work and paper, provided these separates bear the original pagination and a
printed reference to the serial and volume from which they are extracted;
but such separates are bibliographically distinct from the brochures issued
by the Society. The Magazine is not copyrighted, and articles may be
reprinted freely; and a record of reprints, so far as known, is kept.

The following separates and reprints from volume III have been issued:

Editions uniform with the Brochures of the Magazine.

Pages 1–30, plate 1: 150 copies,March 28, 1891.
Pages 31–40, 25 copies,May 2, 1891.
Pages 41–52, 25 copies,May 2, 1891.

Page 12

Pages 53–204, plates 2–20: 250 copies,May 29, 1891.

Special Editions.

Pages 205–230, plate 21: 50 copies,February 18, 1892.
Pages 231–237, 100 copies,February 16, 1892.
Page v, 1000 copies,February 19, 1892.
Pages xv–xxxv, 50 copies,February 13, 1892.

Reprints.

Pages 196–198, 100 copies,January 3, 1892.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY.

(Abstract of Minutes.)

March 6, 1891. 49th meeting.

Meeting held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club. Vice-President
Hayden in the chair. Attendance, 50.

Page 13

Captain E. C. Hore, master mariner, delivered an address on "A narrative of
ten years' work and travel in the African lake region." Abstract entitled "The
Heart of Africa" printed in this volume, pp. 238–243.

March 13, 1891. Special meeting.

Meeting held in the Lecture Room of the National Museum. Vice-President
Ogden in the chair. Attendance, 850.

Captain E. C. Hore repeated his former lecture with additions. Abstract
printed in this volume, pp. 243–247.

March 20, 1891. 50th meeting.

Meeting held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club. Mr. G. K. Gilbert
in the chair. Attendance, 35.

Vice-President Greely read a paper on "The cartography and observations
of Bering's first voyage." The paper was discussed by Messrs Dall,
Blodgett, Littlehales, and Vice-President Hayden. Printed in this volume,
pp. 205–230, pl. 21.

Mr. J. Stanley-Brown presented a paper on "Auriferous sands from Yakutat
bay." Printed in this volume, pp. 196–198.

Mr. I. C. Russell read a paper on "The geology of the Mount St. Elias
region, Alaska." The paper was discussed by Messrs Gilbert (who had
resigned the chair to Vice-President Hayden), Dall, Johnson, and Russell.
Incorporated in the memoir forming pp. 53–204, pls. 2–20, of this volume.

March 31, 1891. Special meeting.

Meeting held in the Law Lecture Room of Columbian University. Vice-
President Ogden in the chair. Attendance, 300.

Mr. Sergius Stepniak delivered an address on "The Russian peasantry."

Page 14

April 3, 1891. 51st meeting.

Meeting held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club, Vice-President
Hayden in the chair. Attendance, 35.

A paper on "The Mackenzie river and Colinson," by Vice-President Greely,
was read by title in the absence of the author.

Ensign J. A. Hoogewerff, U. S. N., presented an account of the "Magnetic
work of the United States Naval Observatory." The paper was discussed by
Messrs Baker, Abbe, Ogden, Hayden, and Hoogewerff.

Mr. F. H. Bigelow presented a paper on "Auroral streamers."

Mr. Cleveland Abbe made some remarks on "Theories of magnetic
phenomena."

April 11, 1891. Special meeting.

Meeting held in the Lecture Hall of the National Museum. President
Hubbard in the chair. Attendance, 750.

Major J. W. Powell delivered an address on "The Grand cañon of Colorado
river."

April 17, 1891. 52d meeting.

Meeting held in Lincoln Hall. President Hubbard in the chair. Attendance,
1,000.

Mr. Geo. W. Melville, Engineer-in-Chief, U. S. N., briefly explained the
purposes of arctic exploration.

Civil Engineer R. E. Peary, U. S. N., addressed the Society on the subject of
his proposed northern Greenland expedition of 1891–92. The lecturer

Page 15

exhibited and explained a number of lantern-slide views illustrating arctic
scenery and modes of traveling.

On the conclusion of the address a United States flag, provided for the
purpose by Miss Ulrica Dahlgren, was presented by the President on behalf
of the Society to Lieut. Peary, who responded feelingly.

April 24, 1891. Special meeting.

Meeting held in the Lecture Room of the National Museum. Attendance,
400.

Mr. H. M. Wilson, of the United States Geological Survey, delivered an
address on the subject "India: Its geography and people." At the close of the
lecture Mr. Wilson exhibited and explained a number of lantern-slides made
from views taken by him while traveling in India.

May 1, 1891. 53d meeting.

Meeting held in the Lecture Hall of the National Museum. Vice-President
Hayden in the chair. Attendance, 600.

Mr. Courtenay De Kalb delivered an address on "The great Amazon:
Personal investigations on the Great River and in its upper valley." At the
close of the lecture Mr. De Kalb exhibited a number of lantern-slide views,
which he described.

May 15, 1891. 54th meeting.

Meeting held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club. Vice-President
Hayden in the chair. Attendance, 25.

At the request of the Board of Managers, Mr. Marcus Baker made a
statement relative to plans by the Board for further Alaskan exploration in

Page 16

the vicinity of Mount St. Elias under the conduct of Mr. I. C. Russell, to be
prosecuted the coming season.

Mr. Gilbert, complying with the request of the Chairman, addressed the
Society upon some of the questions involved in Alaskan geology.

Dr. Sheldon Jackson, at the invitation of the Society, spoke on the general
aspects of the Alaskan coast and the inhabitants of the country.

Remarks were made, following Dr. Jackson's address, by the Chairman, Mr.
J. H. Blodgett, and others.

In connection with the announcement of the proposed Field Day, June 3 and
4 next, to the grottoes near Shendun, in the Shenandoah valley, Virginia,
Major Jed. Hotchkiss gave an interesting account of the topography of the
valley.

An exhibition of lantern-slide views of Alaskan coast scenery followed, the
pictures being explained by Mr. I. C. Russell.

May 29, 1891. 55th meeting.

Meeting held in the Lecture Room of the National Museum. Attendance,
800.

Reverend Dr. H. C. Hovey delivered an address on "Subterranean scenery
as found in the grottoes of the Shenandoah and other caverns of Virginia,"
with illustrations from lantern-slide views exhibited for the first time.
Following the address, Major Hotchkiss illustrated with free-hand sketches
on the blackboard the topography of the valley of Virginia, interspersing his
remarks with war reminiscences.

June 3 and 4. Field meeting.

About 80 members left Washington on special train June 3, arriving at 3
p.m. at Shendun, Virginia, where they were entertained by the Grottoes

Page 17

company. Weir cave was visited that afternoon, and in the evening a
meeting was held in the hotel parlor, at which remarks were made by Mr. G.
K. Gilbert, Reverend Dr. H. C. Hovey, Major H. E. Alvord, Captain
Morton, General J. J. Reynolds, and Hon. J. Randolph Tucker. The next
morning Major Hotchkiss entertained the company with a description of the
resources of the Valley of Virginia, his remarks being illustrated by free-
hand sketches. The Cave of the Fountain was then visited, and, after
presenting a testimonial to Major Hotchkiss for the hospitality of the
Grottoes company, the party left for Washington.

October 15, 1891. Special meeting.

Meeting held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club. President Hubbard
in the chair. Attendance, 50.

Professor T. McKenney Hughes, professor of geology at Cambridge
University, England, gave a sketch of geological problems and the larger
questions of geology in England.

Messrs Powell, McGee, and Gilbert made remarks on the geologic subjects
touched upon by Professor Hughes.

November 13, 1891. 56th meeting.

Meeting held in the Lecture Hall of Columbian University. President
Hubbard in the chair. Attendance, 400.

The exercises consisted of an exhibition of Arctic photographs by General
A. W. Greely, U. S. A., comprising lantern-slide views from photographs
taken during the expedition to Lady Franklin bay in 1881, and never before
exhibited in the city.

November 27, 1891. 57th meeting.

Page 18

Meeting held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club. Vice-President
Hayden in the chair. Attendance, 65.

Mr. Herbert G. Ogden made an oral communication on "The geographic
position of Mount St. Elias," illustrated by a chart exhibiting the position of
St. Elias, Icy bay, Yakutat bay, and the adjacent coast as determined (1)
from various surveys compiled by the United States Coast and Geodetic
Survey, (2) by Mark B. Kerr during the first expedition of the Society, and
(3) by I. C. Russell during the second expedition.

The communication was discussed by Messrs Mendenhall, Douglas, and
Vice-President Hayden.

Mr. E. E. Howell then exhibited and briefly described a relief model of the
United States, constructed on the natural curvature, the vertical scale being
three times that of the horizontal.

Remarks were made by Messrs Ogden, McGee, Johnson, Mendenhall,
Howell, Hayden, and others.

December 4, 1891. Special meeting.

Meeting held in the Lecture Hall of Columbian University.

Mr. William Eleroy Curtis delivered an address on "Portraits of Columbus."
The lecturer exhibited copies of all Columbus' portraits extant, these having
been prepared for the World's Columbian exposition.

December 11, 1891. 58th meeting.

Meeting held in the Lecture Hall of Columbian University. Vice-President
Greely in the chair. Attendance, 400.

Mr. I. C. Russell gave an account of the Mount St. Elias exploration of last
summer, illustrated by a map and lantern slides.

Page 19

December 18, 1891. Special meeting.

Meeting held in the Lecture Hall of Columbian University. Vice-President
Hayden in the chair. Attendance, 100.

Mr. F. H. Newell delivered an address on "Petroleum and natural gas." The
lecture was illustrated by lantern slides made from photographs taken in the
oil regions of the United States.

December 23, 1891. 59th (4th annual) meeting.

Meeting held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club. Vice-President
Greely in the chair.

The annual report of the Secretaries was presented, amended, and adopted.

The annual report of the Treasurer was presented and referred to an auditing
committee consisting of Messrs P. H. Christie, Middleton Smith, and E. E.
Haskell.

The annual election of officers for the year 1892 was then held, with the
following result:

President—Gardiner G. Hubbard.

Vice-Presidents—H. G. Ogden (land).
Everett Hayden (sea).
A. W. Greely (air).
C. Hart Merriam (life).
Henry Gannett (art).

Treasurer—C. J. Bell.

Recording Secretary—F. H. Newell.

Corresponding Secretary—E. R. Scidmore.

Page 20

Managers—Marcus Baker.
H. F. Blount.
G. K. Gilbert.
John Hyde.
W J McGee.
T. C. Mendenhall.
W. B. Powell.
Edwin Willits.

The following resolution was adopted:

Resolved, That the Board of Managers be requested to consider
whether, instead of the present policy of publishing only a few selected
articles, these might not advantageously be replaced by a greater
variety of less lengthy and expensive works, and whether a few pages
of geographic notes might not be inserted.

Mr. Hayden gave notice of the following proposed amendment to the By-
laws:

In article IV, instead of five vice-presidents, read six vice-presidents,
and insert at the end of list of departments of geographic science, after
geographic art, the words "commercial geography."

December 30, 1891. Special meeting.

Meeting held in the Lecture Hall of the National Museum. President
Hubbard in the chair. Attendance, 200.

Professor Benjamin Sharp of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, made an address upon Peary and the western
Greenland expedition. The lecture was illustrated by lantern slides from
photographs taken on the expedition while along the shores of Greenland
and at Peary's camp.

January 8, 1892. 60th meeting.

Page 21

Meeting held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club. Vice-President
Merriam in the chair. Attendance, 150.

Mr. W J McGee delivered an address on "The Eastern Sierra Madre of
Mexico," his lecture being illustrated by lantern slides made from
photographs taken in the vicinity of Monterey, Saltillo, Matehuala,
Miquihuana, Doctor Arroyo, and the hacienda El Carmen. Professor R. T.
Hill described the similarity of topographic features of that region to those
of the Great Basin of the United States.

January 15, 1892. Special meeting.

Meeting held in the Lecture Hall of Columbian University. Vice-President
Hayden in the chair. Attendance, 100.

The President, Mr. Gardiner G. Hubbard, delivered his annual address on
the subject of "The Evolution of Transportation." Major J. W. Powell
prefaced the President's address by brief introductory remarks.

OFFICERS OF THE SOCIETY.

1892.

President.

GARDINER G. HUBBARD.

Page 22

Vice-Presidents.

HERBERT G. OGDEN.
EVERETT HAYDEN.
A. W. GREELY.
C. HART MERRIAM.
HENRY GANNETT.

Treasurer.

CHARLES J. BELL.

Secretaries.

F. H. NEWELL.
E. R. SCIDMORE.

Managers.

MARCUS BAKER.
HENRY F. BLOUNT.
G. K. GILBERT.
JOHN HYDE.
W J MCGEE.
T. C. MENDENHALL.
W. B. POWELL.
EDWIN WILLITS.

MEMBERS OF THE SOCIETY.

Page 23

1892.

a, original members. c, corresponding members.
l, life members. * Deceased.
In cases where no city is given in the address, Washington, D. C., is to be understood.

ABBE, PROF. CLEVELAND, a, l,
Weather Bureau.

ABERT, S. T.,
722 Seventeenth Street.

ACKERMAN, ENS. A. A., U. S. N., c,
Navy Department.

ACKLEY, LIEUT. COMDR. S. M., U. S. N.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

ADDISON, A. D.,
808 Seventeenth Street.

AHERN, LIEUT. GEORGE P., U. S. A., c,
College of Montana, Deer Lodge, Mont.

AHERN, JEREMIAH,
U. S. Geological Survey, Los Angeles, Cal.

ALLEN, DR. J. A.,
American Museum Natural History, New York, N. Y.

Page 24

ALTON, EDMUND,
Wormley's Hotel.

ALVORD, MAJ. HENRY E., c,
Md. Agricultural College, College Park, Maryland.

ANDREWS, ENS. PHILIP, U. S. N.,
Navy Department.

APLIN, S. A., JR.,
Geological Survey.

ASPINWALL, REV. J. A.,
17 Dupont Circle.

AYRES, MISS SUSAN C., a,
1813 Thirteenth Street.

BABB, CYRUS C.,
Geological Survey.

BABER, HON. GEORGE,
1416 K Street.

BAKER, DR. FRANK, a,
Smithsonian Institution.

BAKER, LUCIUS, c,
P. O. Drawer T, Fresno, Cal.

BAKER, MARCUS, a,
Geological Survey.

BALDWIN, H. L., JR., a,
Geological Survey.

BALL, CHAS. B.,

Page 25

942 T Street.

BANCROFT, REV. DR. CECIL F. P., c,
Phillips Academy, Andover, Mass.

BARKER, COMDR. ALBERT S., U. S. N.,
Navy Department.

BARNARD, E. C., a,
Geological Survey.

BARNES, CHARLES A., c,
P. O. Box 1198, Seattle, Wash.

BARROLL, LIEUT. HENRY H., U. S. N., c,
Navy Department.

BARTLE, R. F.,
947 Virginia Avenue SW.

BARTLETT, COMDR. J. R., U. S. N., a,
Navy Department.

BARTLETT, P. V. S.,
U. S. Geological Survey, Berkeley, Cal.

BASSETT, C. C., a,
Geological Survey.

BATCHELDER, C. F., c,
7 Kirkland Street, Cambridge, Mass.

BAUER, LOUIS A.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

BAYLEY, DR. W. S., c,
Colby University, Waterville, Me.

Page 26

BEAMAN, W. M.,
Geological Survey.

BELL, A. GRAHAM, a,
Volta Bureau, 3414 Q Street.

BELL, PROF. A. MELVILLE,
1525 Thirty-fifth Street.

BELL, C. J., a,
1406 G Street.

BERGMANN, H. H.,
511 Seventh Street.

BERNADOU, ENS. JOHN B., U. S. N., c,
Navy Department.

BIEN, JULIUS, a,
P. O. Box 3557, New York, N. Y.

BIEN, MORRIS, a,
Geological Survey.

BIGELOW, PROF. FRANK H.,
1416 K Street.

BIRCH, CHARLES E.,
Hydrographic Office.

BIRNEY, GEN. WILLIAM,
458 Louisiana Avenue.

BLAIR, H. B., a,
Geological Survey.

Page 27

BLODGETT, JAMES H., a,
1237 Massachusetts Avenue.

BLOUNT, HENRY F.,
1405 G Street.

BODFISH, SUMNER H., a,
58 B Street NE.

BOURSIN, HENRY,
Douglas, Alaska.

BOWERS, DR. STEPHEN, c,
Ventura, Cal.

BRECKINRIDGE, GEN. J. C., U. S. A.,
War Department.

BRIGHT, RICHARD R.,
Navy Department.

BRITTON, A. T.,
1405 G Street.

BROWNELL, ERNEST H., c,
Bristol, R. I.

BUCKLEY, MISS M. L.,
Bureau of Pensions.

BURNETT, CHARLES A., c,
620 Burke Building, Seattle, Wash.

BURTON, PROF. A. E., a,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.

CAMPBELL, M. R.,

Page 28

Geological Survey.

CANNON, H. B.,
Department of Agriculture.

CANTWELL, LIEUT. J. C., U. S. R. M., c,
1818 Sacramento Street, San Francisco, Cal.

CARMAN, MISS ADA,
1351 Q Street.

CARROLL, CAPT. JAMES, c,
Juneau, Alaska.

CHAMBERLIN, PROF. T. C., c,
772 Langdon Street, Madison, Wis.

CHAPIN, FREDERICK E.,
3043 P Street.

CHAPIN, DR. J. H.,
Meriden, Conn.

CHAPMAN, R. H., a,
U. S. Geological Survey, Berkeley, Cal.

CHATARD, DR. THOMAS M., a,
Geological Survey.

CHENERY, LIEUT. COMDR. LEONARD, U. S. N., c,
University Club, New York, N. Y.

CHESTER, COMDR. C. M., U. S. N., c,
U. S. Naval Academy, Annapolis, Md.

CHRISTIE, JAMES II., c,
Olga, Wash.

Page 29

CHRISTIE, P. H.,
Geological Survey.

CLARK, E. B., a,
Geological Survey.

CLARK, DR. WM. B., c,
Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.

CLOVER, LIEUT. COMDR. RICHARDSON, U. S. N.,
Hydrographic Office.

COLE, T. L.,
12 Corcoran Building.

COLONNA, B. A.,
138 B Street NE.

COLTON, FRANCIS,
The Shoreham.

COMSTOCK, MRS. SARAH C.,
1464 Rhode Island Avenue.

COOK, FRED. W., c,
P. O. Box 140, Sault de Ste. Marie, Mich.

COURT, E. E.,
Hydrographic Office.

CRAIGHEAD, REV. DR. J. G.,
1223 Eleventh Street.

CROFFUT, W. A.,
Geological Survey.

Page 30

CUMMIN, ROBT. D., a,
Geological Survey.

CUMMINGS, PROF. GEO. J.,
Howard University.

CUNNINGHAM, JOHN M., c,
Cosmos Club, San Francisco, Cal.

CURTIS, WILLIAM E., a,
2 Lafayette Square.

DALL, MRS. CAROLINE H.,
1526 Eighteenth Street.

DALL, WM. H.,
National Museum.

DALY, HON. CHAS. P.,
84 Clinton Place, New York, N. Y.

DARTON, N. H.,
Geological Survey.

DAVIDGE, WALTER DORSEY, JR.,
1 Corcoran Building.

DAVIDSON, PROF. GEORGE, a, c,
U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, San Francisco, Cal.

DAVIS, ARTHUR P., a,
U. S. Geological Survey, Los Angeles, Cal.

DAVIS, PROF. W. M., a,
2 Bond Street, Cambridge, Mass.

DAWSON, MISS A. B.,

Page 31

Geological Survey.

DAY, DR. DAVID T.,
Geological Survey.

DAY, E. WARREN,
War Department.

DENNEY, MISS L. A.,
707 Thirteenth Street.

DENNY, A. A., c,
1328 Front Street, Seattle, Wash.

DIEBITSCH, EMIL,
U. S. Naval Station, Port Royal, S. C.

DILLER, J. S., a,
Geological Survey.

DOBBINS, J. W.,
U. S. Geological Survey, Berkeley, Cal.

DOUGLAS, E. M., a,
Geological Survey.

DOW, CAPT. JOHN M.,
83 W. Seventy-first Street, New York, N. Y.

DUNCKLEE, JOHN B.,
912 French Street.

DUNNINGTON, A. F., a,
Geological Survey.

DURAND, JOHN,
164 Bd. Montparnasse, Paris, France.

Page 32

DUTTON, MAJ. C. E., U. S. A., a,
San Antonio, Tex.

DYER, LIEUT. G. L., U. S. N.,
Navy Pay Office, San Francisco, Cal.

EDMANDS, PROF. J. RAYNER,
Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.

EDSON, JOHN JOY,
1003 F Street.

EDSON, JOSEPH R., a,
1003 F Street.

EIMBECK, WILLIAM,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

ELDRIDGE, G. H.,
Geological Survey.

ELIOT, CHARLES,
Room 50, 50 State Street, Boston, Mass.

ELLICOTT, ENS. JOHN M., U. S. N.,

Page 33

2023 I Street.

ELMORE, HERBERT W.,
Geological Survey.

ERBACH, JOHN,
Geological Survey.

EVANS, H. C.,
804 Eleventh Street.

FAIRCHILD, PROF. H. L., c,
University of Rochester, Rochester, N. Y.

FAIRFIELD, GEORGE A., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

FAIRFIELD, W. BROWNE, a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

FARMER, R. A.,
Geological Survey.

FERNOW, B. E., a,
Department of Agriculture.

FEUSIER, H. E. CLERMONT,
819 Grove Street, San Francisco, Cal.

FISCHER, E. G., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

FISCHER, L. A.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

FITCH, C. H., a,
3025 N Street.

Page 34

FLEMER, J. A.,
412 A Street SE.

FLETCHER, L. C., a,
Geological Survey.

FLETCHER, DR. ROBERT, a,
Army Medical Museum.

FLINT, CHARLES,
1519 O Street.

FLINT, COL. WESTON,
1101 K Street.

FLOYD, FRED. W.,
539 W. Twentieth Street, New York, N. Y.

FOGG, LINDLEY,
Sixth Auditor's Office.

FOSTER, PROF. RICHARD,
Howard University.

FRASER, DANIEL,
458 Pennsylvania Avenue.

FREER, DR. JAMES A.,
1523 I Street.

FULLER, MISS ADELAIDE H.,
1321 Rhode Island Avenue.

GAGE, N. P., a,
Seaton School.

Page 35

GANE, H. S., c,
Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.

GANNETT, HENRY, a,
Geological Survey.

GANNETT, S. S., a,
Geological Survey.

GARDNER, C. L.,
1710 Sixteenth Street.

GARRISON, MISS CARL L.,
Phelps School.

GILBERT, G. K., a,
Geological Survey.

GILL, WILSON L., c,
Room 57, 115 Broadway, New York, N. Y.

GILMAN, DR. DANIEL C., a,
Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.

GOLDIE, R. H., c,
P. O. Box 1110, Seattle, Wash.

GOODALL, F. H.,
Second Auditor's Office.

GOODALL, OTIS B.,
932 P Street.

GOODE, DR. G. BROWN, a,
Smithsonian Institution.

GOODE, R. U., a,

Page 36

Geological Survey.

GOODFELLOW, EDWARD, a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

GOODISON, PROF. JOHN,
State Normal School, Ypsilanti, Mich.

GORHAM, GEO. C.,
1763 Q Street.

GRAHAM, MISS A. M.,
1234 Massachusetts Avenue.

GRAHAM, ANDREW B.,
1230 Pennsylvania Avenue.

GRANGER, F. D.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

GRAVES, WALTER H.,
Geological Survey.

GREELY, GEN. A. W., U. S. A., a,
1914 G Street.

GRIFFITH, G. BERKELEY,
1630 Rhode Island Avenue.

GRISWOLD, W. T., a,
U. S. Geological Survey, Boise, Idaho.

GROEGER, G. G., c,
310 Chamber of Commerce Building, Chicago, Ill.

GULLIVER, F. P., c,
Norwich, Conn.

Page 37

GUNION, MRS. REBECCA E.,
927 O Street.

GURLEY, CHARLES L.,
1401 Sixteenth Street.

HACKETT, M., a,
Geological Survey.

HAGADORN, LIEUT. CHAS. B., U. S. A., c,
Fort Leavenworth, Kans.

HALE, L. P., c,
Canton, N. Y.

HARRINGTON, PROF. MARK W.,
Weather Bureau.

HARRIS, DR. T. W.,
Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.

HARRISON, D. C., a,
Geological Survey.

HARRISON, PROF. THOS. F., c,
221 W. Forty-fifth Street, New York, N. Y.

HARROD, MAJ. B. M.,
City Engineer's Office, New Orleans, La.

HART, PROF. ALBERT BUSHNELL,
15 Appian Way, Cambridge, Mass.

HART, JUAN, c,
El Paso, Tex.

Page 38

HASBROUCK, E. M.,
1610 Fifteenth Street.

HASKELL, E. E., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

HAWKINS, GEO. T.,
Geological Survey.

HAY, PROF. ROBERT,
P. O. Box 562, Junction City, Kans.

HAYDEN, EVERETT, a,
Hydrographic Office.

HAYDEN, J. J.,
929 K Street.

HAYES, DR. C. WILLARD,
Geological Survey.

HAYES, PROF. ELLEN, c,
Wellesley College, Wellesley, Mass.

HAYS, J. W.,
Oxford, N. C.

HAZARD, DANIEL L.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

HEATON, A. G.,
1618 Seventeenth Street.

HEILPRIN, GILES F.,
1227 Pennsylvania Avenue.

HENRY, A. J., a,

Page 39

948 S Street.

HENSHAW, H. W., a,
Bureau of Ethnology.

HERRLE, G., a,
Hydrographic Office.

HERRON, WM. H., a,
Geological Survey.

HILL, PROF. R. T.,
910 Fifteenth Street.

HINDS, DR. CLARA BLISS,
1331 Fourteenth Street.

HINMAN, RUSSELL,
806 Broadway, New York, N. Y.

HITCHCOCK, PROF. C. H., c,
Dartmouth College, Hanover, N. H.

HOBBS, DR. WM. H., c,
University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.

HODGKINS, PROF. H. L., a,
Columbian University.

HODGKINS, W. C.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

HOLDEN, PROF. E. S., c,
Lick Observatory, Mount Hamilton, Cal.

HOLDEN, MRS. L. E.,
P. O. Box 1027, Salt Lake, Utah.

Page 40

HOLDEN, LUTHER L.,
7 Warren Square, Jamaica Plain, Mass.

HOLLERITH, HERMAN,
501 F Street.

HOLMES, PROF. J. A., c,
Chapel Hill, N. C.

HOLT, H. P. R.,
Takoma Park, D. C.

HORE, CAPT. EDWARD C., c,
Royal Geographical Society, London, England.

HORNADAY, W. T., a,
44 Niagara Street, Buffalo, N. Y.

HORNBLOWER, J. C.,
1402 M Street.

HOSKINS, PROF. L. M., c,
University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.

HOSMER, EDWARD STURGES, l,
1330 L Street.

HOTCHKISS, MAJ. JED.,
Staunton, Va.

HOVEY, REV. DR. H. C.,
60 Crescent Street, Middletown, Conn.

HOWARD, ENS. W. L., U. S. N., c,
Navy Pay Office, San Francisco, Cal.

Page 41

HOWELL, D. J., a,
918 F Street.

HOWELL, EDWIN E., a,
612 Seventeenth Street.

HUBBARD, GARDINER G., a,
1328 Connecticut Avenue.

HUTCHINSON, JOHN,
933 H Street.

HUTCHINSON, W. J.,
1707 Massachusetts Avenue.

HYDE, G. E.,
Geological Survey.

HYDE, JOHN,
2820 P Street.

IARDELLA, C. T., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

INGRAHAM, PROF. E. S., c,
Seattle, Wash.

JACKSON, REV. DR. SHELDON,
1830 Ninth Street.

JENNEY, DR. W. P.,
Geological Survey.

JENNINGS, J. H., a,
Geological Survey.

JEWETT, W. P., c,

Page 42

180 E. Third Street, St. Paul, Minn.

JOHNSON, MISS ALICE BURGES,
501 Maple Avenue.

JOHNSON, A. B., a,
Light House Board.

JOHNSON, E. KURTZ,
1600 Massachusetts Avenue.

JOHNSON, DR. H. L. E.,
1400 L Street.

JOHNSON, J. B.,
Howard University.

JOHNSON, REV. J. G.,
381 Dearborn Avenue, Chicago, Ill.

JOHNSON, JEROME F.,
1326 F Street.

JOHNSON, MRS. MARY DAVIS, c,
Sitka, Alaska.

JOHNSON, STUART P.,
U. S. Geological Survey, Berkeley, Cal.

JOHNSON, WILLARD D., a,
U. S. Geological Survey, Berkeley, Cal.

JUDD, JOHN G.,
420 Eleventh Street.

JUDSON, EGBERT, c,
402 Front Street, San Francisco, Cal.

Page 43

JUNKEN, CHARLES,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

JUNKEN, CHAS. A.,
Ordnance Office, War Department.

JÜSSEN, EDMUND,
In care W. Tudor, Temple, Ga.

KARL, ANTON, a,
1230 Eleventh Street.

KAUFFMANN, S. H., a,
1421 Massachusetts Avenue.

KAVANAUGH, MISS K.,
Sixth Auditor's Office.

KENASTON, PROF. C. A., a,
Room 4, 26 Court Street, Brooklyn, N. Y.

KENDALL, MISS ELIZABETH, c,
Wellesley College, Wellesley, Mass.

KENNAN, GEORGE, a,
In care J. B. Pond, Everett House, New York, N. Y.

KENNEDY, DR. GEO. G., l,
284 Warren Street, Roxbury, Mass.

KENNON, LIEUT. L. W. V., U. S. A.,
War Department.

KERR, H. S., c,
Salt Lake, Utah.

Page 44

KERR, MARK B., a,
402 Front Street, San Francisco, Cal.

KIMBALL, E. F.,
Post Office Department.

KIMBALL, DR. E. S.,
737 Thirteenth Street.

KIMBALL, S. I., a,
Life Saving Service.

KING, PROF. F. H.,
1500 University Avenue, Madison, Wis.

KING, PROF. HARRY, a,
Geological Survey.

KING, WM. B.,
1328 Twelfth Street.

KLAKRING, ALFRED,
Hydrographic Office.

KLOTZ, OTTO J., c,
Interior Department, Preston, Ontario, Canada.

KNAPP, HON. LYMAN E.,
Sitka, Alaska.

KOCH, PETER, a,
Bozeman, Mont.

KRAMER, WILLIAM,

KÜBEL, S. J.,
Geological Survey.

Page 45

LACKLAND, W. E., a,
Geological Survey.

LADD, GEORGE E.,
Melrose Highlands, Mass.

LAMBERT, M. B.,
Geological Survey.

LAMBORN, DR. ROBERT H.,
32 Nassau Street, New York, N. Y.

LAWSON, PROF. A. C.,
University of California, Berkeley, Cal.

LAWSON, MISS JEANNE W.,
1231 New Hampshire Avenue.

LEACH, BOYNTON,
Hydrographic Office.

LEVERETT, FRANK, c,
U. S. Geological Survey, Madison, Wis.

LIBBEY, PROF. WILLIAM, JR., c,
20 Bayard Avenue, Princeton, N. J.

LINCOLN, JOHN J.,
Geological Survey.

LINDENKOHL, A., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

LINDENKOHL, H., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

Page 46

LINDSLEY, WM. L., c,
Corner Banner and Republican Streets, Seattle, Wash.

LITTLEHALES, G. W.,
928 Twenty-third Street.

LOOKER, HENRY B.,
918 F Street.

LOOKER, THOS. H., U. S. N.,
1312 Thirtieth Street.

LOOMIS, HENRY B., c,
Seattle, Wash.

LOVELL, W. H.,
Geological Survey.

LYONS, JOSEPH,
1003 F Street.

MCCARTENEY, LIEUT. CHAS. M., U. S. N.,
Hydrographic Office.

MCCRACKEN, R. H., c,
P. O. Box 495, San Antonio, Tex.

MCGEE, MRS. ANITA NEWCOMB,
2410 Fourteenth Street.

MCGEE, W J, a,
Geological Surrey.

MCGILL, MISS MARY C.,
336 C Street.

MCGRATH, JOHN E.,

Page 47

Coast and Geodetic Survey.

MCKEE, REDICK H., a,
U. S. Geological Survey, Berkeley, Cal.

MCKINNEY, R. C., a,
Geological Survey.

MCLAUGHLIN, DR. T. N.,
1226 N Street.

MACKAYE, J. M., c.
Shirley, Mass.

MAHER, JAMES A., a,
P. O. Box 35, Johnson City, Tenn.

MANNING, VAN. H., JR., a,
Geological Survey.

MARINDIN, HENRY L.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

MARKS, DR. A. J., c,
419 Madison Street, Toledo, O.

MARSHALL, R. B.,
U. S. Geological Survey, Berkeley, Cal.

MASON, PROF. O. T.,
1777 Massachusetts Avenue.

MATTHEWS, DR. W., U. S. A., a,
Fort Wingate, N. M.

MELVILLE, ENG. IN CHIEF GEO. W., U. S. N., a, l,
Navy Department.

Page 48

MENDENHALL, DR. T. C.,

Page 49

Coast and Geodetic Survey.

MENOCAL, CIV. ENG. A. G., U. S. N., a,
44 Wall Street, New York, N. Y.

MERRIAM, DR. C. HART, a,
Department of Agriculture.

MERRILL, PROF. J. A., c,
State Normal School, Warrensburg, Mo.

MESTON, R. D.,
1227 L Street.

METZGER, F. P.,
Geological Survey.

MILEY, A. E.,
Sixth Auditor's Office.

MINDELEFF, MME. JULIE,
1401 Stoughton Street.

MINDELEFF, VICTOR,
Ohio National Bank Building.

MITCHELL, PROF. HENRY, a,
18 Hawthorne Street, Roxbury, Mass.

MOSMAN, A. T., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

MUIR, PROF. JOHN,
Martinez, Cal.

MUIR, ENS. W. C. P., U. S. N.,
In care Hon. J. L. Beckham, Shelbyville, Ky.

Page 50

MUNROE, HERSEY,
Geological Survey.

MURLIN, A. E.,
Geological Survey.

MURRAY, B. P.,
10 Third Street NE.

NELL, LOUIS, a,
Geological Survey.

NEWELL, F. H.,
Geological Survey.

NILES, PROF. WM. H.,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.

NORDHOFF, CHARLES, a,
Coronado, Cal.

NORMAN-NERUDA, L., c,
Devonshire Club, St. James Street, London, England.

NORTHUP, C. G.,
U. S. Senate.

NOYES, CROSBY S.,
1101 Pennsylvania Avenue.

OGDEN, HERBERT G., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

O'HALLORAN, T. M.,
Hydrographic Office.

O'HARE, DANIEL P.,
Geological Survey.

Page 51

OLDRINI, PROF. ALEXANDER,
1437 L Street.

OLNEY, CHAS. F.,
137 Jennings Avenue, Cleveland, O.

OSBORN, LIEUT. A. P., U. S. N., c,
Navy Pay Office, San Francisco, Cal.

OSBORNE, DR. GEO. L., c,
State Normal School, Warrensburg, Mo.

OTIS, HAMILTON, c,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.

OTIS, WILLIAM H.,
U. S. Geological Survey, Berkeley, Cal.

PALMER, T. S.,
Department of Agriculture.

PARKER, E. W.,
Geological Survey.

PARSONS, FRANCIS H., a,
210 First Street SE.

PEALE, DR. A. C., a,
Geological Survey.

PEARY, CIV. ENG. R. E., U. S. N.,
Navy Department.

PELLEW, HENRY E.,
1637 Massachusetts Avenue.

PENROSE, R. A. F., JR.,

Page 52

1331 Spruce Street, Philadelphia, Pa.

PERKINS, E. T., JR., a,
Geological Survey.

PETERS, EUGENE,
458 Pennsylvania Avenue.

PETERS, LIEUT. G. H., U. S. N., a,
Navy Department.

PETERS, WILLIAM J., a,
Geological Survey.

PETROFF, IVAN, c,
2148 Pennsylvania Avenue.

PHILLIPS, ASA E.,
District Engineer Department.

PHILLIPS, R. HENRY,
Room 110, 1419 New York Avenue.

PICKERING, PROF. EDWARD C.,
Harvard Observatory, Cambridge, Mass.

PICKING, CAPT. HENRY F., U. S. N.,
Navy Department.

PIERCE, JOSIAH, JR.,
11 South Street, Baltimore, Md.

POLLOK, ANTHONY,
620 F Street.

*POND, EDWIN J.,

POWELL, MAJ. J. W., a,

Page 53

Geological Survey.

POWELL, PROF. W. B., a,
Franklin School.

PRENTISS, DR. D. WEBSTER, a,
1101 Fourteenth Street.

PRINCE, HON. L. BRADFORD, c,
Santa Fe, N. M.

PROWELL, GEO. R., c,
Hanover, Pa.

PUMPELLY, PROF. RAPHAEL,
U. S. Geological Survey, Newport, R. I.

RAMSEY, F. M., c,
Lampasas, Tex.

RANKIN, REV. DR. J. E.,
Howard University.

REID, PROF. HARRY FIELDING, c,
Case School of Applied Science, Cleveland, O.

RENSHAWE, JNO. H., a,
Geological Survey.

RICE, PROF. WM. NORTH, c,
Wesleyan University, Middletown, Conn.

RICHARDSON, DR. C. W.,
1102 L Street.

RICHARDSON, T. J., c,
734 E. Fifteenth Street, Minneapolis, Minn.

Page 54

RICHMOND, CHAS. W.,
In care U. S. Consul, Greytown, Nicaragua.

RICHTER, MISS C. M.,
330 A Street SE.

RICKSECKER, EUGENE, a, c,
P. O. Box 289, Seattle, Wash.

RITTER, H. P., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

RIZER, COL. H. C.,
Geological Survey.

ROBBINS, A. G., c,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.

ROBERTS, A. C., a,
Hydrographic Office.

ROCHESTER, GEN. WM. B., U. S. A.,
1320 Eighteenth Street.

ROCK, MILES,
1430 Chapin Street.

ROGERS, JNO. B., c,
Columbia Athletic Club.

ROTCH, A. LAWRENCE,
3 Commonwealth Avenue, Boston, Mass.

RUSSEL, LIEUT. EDGAR, U. S. A., c,
Fort Sam Houston, San Antonio, Tex.

RUSSELL, ISRAEL C., a,
Geological Survey.

Page 55

SANDERS, HENRY P.,
1504 Twenty-first Street.

SARGENT, PROF. C. S., a,
Brookline, Mass.

SCHAAP, C. H., c,
P. O. Box 32, Sitka, Alaska.

SCHLEY, CAPT. W. S., U. S. N., a,
Navy Department.

SCHMIDT, FRED. A.,
504 Ninth Street.

SCHMITT, EWALD,
2235 Thirteenth Street.

SCHWATKA, FREDERICK, c,
1108 First Avenue, Rock Island, Ill.

SCIDMORE, MISS ELIZA RUHAMAH,
1502 Twenty-first Street.

SCOTT, W. O. N.,
603 Fifteenth Street.

SCUDDER, PROF. S. H., a,
Cambridge, Mass.

SHALER, PROF. N. S., a,
25 Quincy Street, Cambridge, Mass.

SHEPARD, PROF. EDWARD M.,
Drury College, Springfield, Mo.

SHEPARD, J. L. N., c,

Page 56

402 Front Street, San Francisco, Cal.

SHEPARD, CAPT. L. G., U. S. R. M.,
Treasury Department.

SINCLAIR, C. H.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

SINCLAIR, J. C.,
718 Arch Street, Philadelphia, Pa.

SLOAN, ROBERT S., c,
Oswego. N. Y.

SMITH, EDWIN, a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

SMITH, REV. ERNEST C., c,
Framingham, Mass.

SMITH, PROF. EUGENE A., c,
University, Ala.

SMITH, MIDDLETON, a,
P. O. Box 572.

SMOCK, DR. J. C., c,
State Geological Survey, Trenton, N. J.

SNELL, MERWIN-MARIE,
Catholic University of America.

SOMMER, E. J., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

SPENCER, JAS. W.,
Geological Survey.

Page 57

STANLEY-BROWN, JOSEPH,
Geological Survey.

STANWOOD, JAMES HUGH, c,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.

STEDMAN, J. M., c,
Trinity University, Durham, N. C.

STEIN, ROBERT,
Geological Survey.

STOCKTON, LT. COMDR. CHARLES H., U. S. N., a, c,
Naval War College, Newport, R. I.

STONE, JAMES S., c,
131 Vernon Street, Newton, Mass.

SUTTON, FRANK,
Geological Survey.

SWAN, HON. JAMES G., c,
Port Townsend, Wash.

TALBOT, MRS. LAURA OSBORNE,
927 P Street.

TARR, R. S., c,
Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.

TAYLOR, DANIEL F.,
918 F Street.

TAYLOR, JAS. L.,
1515 Twentieth Street.

THOMAS, MISS MARY VON E., a,
235 New Jersey Avenue SE.

Page 58

THOMPSON, PROF. A. H., a,
Geological Survey.

THOMPSON, GILBERT, a,
Geological Survey.

THOMPSON, LAURENCE, a,
1628 S Street.

THOMPSON, CAPT. R. E., U. S. A., a,
War Department.

THOMPSON, J. W.,
1419 I Street.

TISDELL, WILLARD P.,
1323 Thirteenth Street.

TITTMANN, O. H., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

TOWNSEND, MRS. JULIA C.,
1316 R Street.

TOWSON, R. M., a,
Geological Survey.

TURNER, J. HENRY,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

TWEEDY, FRANK, a,
Geological Survey.

URQUHART, CHAS. F., a,
Geological Survey.

VAN HISE, PROF. C. R., l,

Page 59

U. S. Geological Survey, Madison, Wis.

VASEY, DR. GEORGE, a,
Department of Agriculture.

VERGES, L. F., c,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.

VINAL, W. IRVING, a,
1106 A Street NE.

VIVIAN, THOMAS J.,
212 New Jersey Avenue.

WADDEY, JOHN A.,
Hydrographic Office.

WADHAMS, LIEUT. A. V., U. S. N., c,
Andover, Mass.

WALCOTT, CHAS. D., a,
National Museum.

WALKER, ELTON D., c,
Fort Sheridan, Ill.

WALLACE, HAMILTON S., a,
Geological Survey.

WANAMAKER, HON. JOHN,
1731 I Street.

WARD, PROF. HENRY A., c,
10 College Avenue, Rochester, N. Y.

WARD, LESTER F., a,
1464 Rhode Island Avenue.

Page 60

WARD, ROBERT DEC.,
Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.

WARDER, B. H.,
1515 K Street.

WARTEGG, ERNST VON HESSE, c,
Bern, Switzerland.

WEED, WALTER HARVEY, a,
Geological Survey.

WEIR, JOHN B., a,
The Fredonia.

WELD GEO. F.,
Metropolitan Club.

WELLING, DR. JAMES C., a,
1302 Connecticut Avenue.

WELLS, E. HAZARD,
The "Post," Cincinnati, O.

WEST, PRESTON C. F., c,
Calumet, Mich.

WHITE, DR. C. H., U. S. N.,
In care A. B. Gilman, Haverhill, Mass.

WHITE, DAVID,
Geological Survey.

WHITING, HENRY L.,
U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, West Tisbury, Mass.

WILDER, GEN. J. T., a, l,
Johnson City, Tenn.

Page 61

WILDER, MISS MARY,
Johnson City, Tenn.

WILLENBÜCHER, EUGENE,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

WILLENBÜCHER, W. C.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

WILLIAMS, CHARLES AUGUSTUS,
1301 Eighteenth Street.

WILLIAMS, DR. GEO. H.,
803 Cathedral Street, Baltimore, Md.

WILLIAMS, PROF. H. S., c,
Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.

WILLIAMS, WILLIAM, c,
University Club, New York, N. Y.

WILLIS, BAILEY, a,
Geological Survey.

WILLIS, MRS. BAILEY,
1006 Twenty-second Street.

WILLITS, HON. EDWIN,
Department of Agriculture.

WILSON, H. M., a,
Geological Survey.

WILSON, THOMAS,
1218 Connecticut Avenue.

WINCHELL, PROF. N. H., c,

Page 62

120 State Street, Minneapolis, Minn.

WINES, M. W.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

WINSLOW, PROF. ARTHUR,
State Geological Survey, Jefferson City, Mo.

WINSTON, ISAAC,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

WINTER, DR. JOHN T.,
1528 Ninth Street.

*WOODWARD, A. E.,

WOODWARD, R. S., a,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

WRIGHT, ENS. BENJAMIN, U. S. N.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

YEATES, CHAS. M., a, c,
404½ Liberty Street, Winston, N. C.

YOUNG, F. A.,
Coast and Geodetic Survey.

Summary.

Active members 373
Corresponding members 95
Life members 6
Total 474

Page 63

VOL. III, PP 1–30, PL 1 MARCH 28, 1891.

THE

Page 64

NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE.

SOUTH AMERICA.
ANNUAL ADDRESS BY THE PRESIDENT,

GARDINER G. HUBBARD.

(Presented to the Society December 19, 1890.)

Two years ago I selected for my annual address Africa, or the Dark Continent;
last year Asia, the Land of Mountains and Deserts; this year I have chosen
South America, the Land of Rivers and Pampas.

NAT GEOG. MAG. VOL. III, 1891, PL. 1.

Page 65

From the International Cylopedia, by permission of Dodd, Mead & Company.

Page 66

The recent meeting of the Pan-American Congress has called attention to
South America, a part of our continent under republican forms of
government and rich in products which we lack, while it relies mainly on
other foreign countries for goods which we manufacture. North America
and South America should be more closely united, for the one is the
complement of the other.

The prominent features of South America are its long ranges of mountains
—next to the Himalayas the highest in the world,—its great valley, and its
immense plateau extending from the Straits of Magellan to the Caribbean
sea.

THE MOUNTAINS.

The Andes rise in the extreme south at Cape Horn, run in a northerly course
through Patagonia and southern Chili; thence continuing in three nearly
parallel ranges, the western chain called the Andes, the others known as the
Cordilleras, through Peru, Bolivia and Ecuador to Colombia. The
Cordilleras and the Andes are connected in several places by knots or cross-
chains of mountains. In Colombia the Andes turn to the northwest, reaching
their lowest elevation at the Panama canal, and continue thence, through
Central America and North America as the Rocky Mountains, to the Arctic
ocean. Near the source of the Magdalena and Cauca rivers in Colombia, the
eastern range is deflected to the east along the northern coast of South
America. The central range disappears between the Magdalena and Cauca
rivers.

The Andes form the water-shed of the continent. The waters on the western
slope flow into the Pacific ocean. The rivers that rise on the eastern slope, in
northern Peru and Ecuador, force their way through the Cordilleras and at
their foot drain the montaña of Bolivia, Peru and Brazil. In the southern part
of Peru and upper Chili there is a broad sierra or plateau, at an elevation of
from twelve to fourteen thousand feet. The streams that rise in this sierra
either empty into salt or alkaline lakes or sink into the ground.

Page 67

Unlike all other long ranges of mountains, the continental or eastern side of
the Cordilleras is nearly as precipitous as that extending to the Pacific.
Craters of extinct volcanoes and volcanoes now in eruption are found in all
parts of the chain. In Ecuador there are fifty-two volcanoes, and twenty of
these, covered with perpetual snow and presided over by Chimborazo and
Cotopaxi, rise out of a group of mountains encircling the valley of Quito,
and are all visible from a single point. Three are active and five others have
been in eruption at one or more times since the conquest. One of these,
Sangai, is the most active volcano on the globe: it sends forth a constant
stream of fire, water, mud and ashes, and some assert that it has done so
without intermission for 300 years; 267 explosions have been counted in
one hour. This is also the land of earthquakes: in 1868, 50,000 lives, we are
told, were lost in one day; the tremor was felt over four countries and from
the Andes to the Sandwich Islands. The tidal wave washed a gunboat of the
United States on shore at Arica in lower Peru, 1000 miles to the south, and
sixteen hours later the wave was felt across the Pacific at New Zealand.

A range of mountains separates Eastern Venezuela and Guiana from the
valley of the Amazon. Other ranges south of the Amazon run
southwestwardly, following the Atlantic coast line from Cape St. Roque to
the Rio de la Plata.

RIVER SYSTEMS.

A great oceanic current flows along the western coast of Africa to the
equator, where it is deflected across the Atlantic ocean and becomes the
equatorial current. On reaching the coast of South America near Cape St.
Roque, it is again deflected north and south. Trade winds blowing over the
equatorial current reach the coast at Brazil surcharged with vapor; as they
follow up the valley of the Amazon the vapors are partially condensed and
frequent showers refresh the land; but when the clouds at the foot-hills of
the Andes meet the colder winds from the south and strike the snow
summits of the Cordilleras, all the moisture is condensed, and the rain falls
in tropical showers for half the year and waters the largest and richest valley
in the world.

Page 68

In this valley, among the Cordilleras, three great rivers—the Orinoco, the
Amazon and La Plata—rise. The mountain ranges north and south of the
Amazon divide this great valley into three lesser valleys, down which the
Orinoco, the Amazon and La Plata flow, watering three-fourths of South
America.

The Orinoco.

The headwaters of the Orinoco rise in two ranges of mountains; the
Cordilleras in the west, and the mountains of Venezuela many hundred
miles to the east. Four hundred tributaries, abounding in beautiful falls and
cataracts, unite to form this great river.

The whole valley for 1600 miles is filled with dense and tangled forests.
Noble trees of unrivalled beauty blossom in endless prodigality. Birds of
gorgeous plumage nestle in their lofty recesses. Tall ferns, vines, creeping
plants and parasites form a dense tangle of undergrowth, swarming with
life. Myriads of insects in great variety, reptiles of strange and singular
form, lizards and venemous serpents find their homes and sustenance in the
wild, dense mass of vegetation.

The Amazon.

The valley of the Amazon collects its waters from a region 1800 miles wide
from north to south and 2500 miles long from the Andes to the Atlantic
ocean. Even at the foot of the Andes the Amazon is a mighty river. The
valley rapidly narrows to a width of 600 or 700 miles, and then more
gradually to the ocean, where it is only 150 miles wide. Its total fall from
the foot-hills of the Andes to the Atlantic is very slight, not over three or
four hundred feet, and probably considerably less.

The rims of the valley are formed of diorite and sandstone, and are raised
only a little above the flood-plain, which is formed of mud and silt, the
detritus brought down by the Amazon and its tributaries. The flood-plain is
from fifty to one hundred miles wide, gradually narrowing as it approaches
the ocean. Through this valley the Amazon cuts its way, separating often

Page 69

into channels which sometimes run parallel to each other for several
hundred miles, frequently forming large islands, or expanding into lakes.
Similar flood-plains are found on all its larger tributaries.

Up from the ocean into this valley an immense tidal wave rolls, with a bore,
twice a day, forcing back the current of the Amazon 500 miles and
inundating a portion of the flood-plain.

In the early autumn the equatorial rise commences in the headwaters of its
tributaries, far south of the equator. The rains and melting snow raise the
streams, and these the waters of the Amazon. As the sun crosses the equator
and moves to the north the rain follows its course, and the branches that
have their source in the east and northeast add their flood to the waters of
the southerly branches. The flood in the Amazon is thus continued for
nearly six months, raising its waters from 30 to 50 feet. The channels are
filled, and the flood-plains are overflowed. The whole valley becomes a
net-work of navigable waters, with islands and channels and lakes
innumerable, forming a great inland sea, which the Brazilians call the
Mediterranean of America. The upland, though only a little above the flood-
plain, is rarely overflowed.

The plants and animals of the flood-plain were formerly considered as
distinct from those of the upland as are the plants and animals of Europe
from those of America; but later investigations show that there is but little
difference between the species.

The sea breeze blows up the valley about a thousand miles. Then for 1500
miles the atmosphere is stagnant and sultry; the climate is that of a
permanent vapor bath. The dense foliage forms dark, lofty vaults which the
sunlight never penetrates, and over all hangs a perpetual mist. The
abundance and beauty of vegetation increases, and the trees which at the
mouth of the river blossom only once a year, here bloom and bear fruit all
the year round.

Many great rivers run into the Amazon from the north and the south, most
of them navigable, for many hundred miles. The Madeira, its greatest
tributary, after running 2000 miles, empties into the king of rivers, without
making any perceptible difference in its width or depth.

Page 70

This mighty current, rushing into the ocean, meets the equatorial current
and for over one hundred miles keeps on nearly a straight course, when the
stronger and mightier oceanic current deflects it to the north. At from 200 to
300 miles from land, the sea is strongly tinged, and in April and May has
nearly the clay-yellow hue of the Amazon. And even further north, about
400 miles from its mouth, the naturalist on the Amazon tells us, "we passed
numerous patches of floating grass mingled with tree trunks and withered
foliage; among these I espied many fruits of the Amazonian palm. And this
was the last I saw of the Amazon."

The Rio de la Plata.

The La Plata, the outlet of the waters of central South America, is formed
by the union of the Uruguay and Parana, about 150 miles from the ocean; a
little lower down, at Montevideo, it is 62 miles wide and widens rapidly to
the Atlantic, where it discharges more water than all the rivers of Europe.
The tributaries of the Parana are fan-shaped. Its most eastern branches rise
in the mountains of Brazil, within seventy miles of the Atlantic ocean; and
1500 miles away, on the other side of the continent, its most western
tributaries rise only 125 miles from the Pacific.

Steamers ascend the Parana, Paraguay and Cuyaba, 2100 miles to Cuyaba,
and the river with its branches is navigable for 5000 miles.

The San Francisco.

The San Francisco, about 1800 miles long, rises near Rio de Janeiro and
flows north about 1200 miles between parallel ranges of mountains, then
turns east and forces its way through the coast range to the Atlantic ocean. It
runs through the gold and diamond regions of Brazil, and has a considerable
population along its banks. It has many falls and rapids, and considerable
slack-water navigation.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION.

Page 71

In Asia, the different countries have natural boundaries; the people, soil and
climate of one country are unlike those of others. In Europe there are few
natural boundaries, though different races inhabit the several states.

In South America only one dominant race is found, and though natural
boundaries exist, yet they do not serve as boundaries to the different states,
other than Venezuela and Guiana. Venezuela and Guiana are watered by the
Orinoco and by several rivers that flow from the Amazonian mountains to
the ocean. The whole coast is low and fertile, but hot and unhealthy. The
principal product is sugar, raised by negroes and coolies. The interior is
sultry and thickly wooded; it is inhabited by Indian tribes, the principal of
which are the cannibal Caribs, and by negroes as uncivilized as any of the
tribes in Africa. Guiana is controlled by the English, French, and Dutch.
Cayenne, the prison for French convicts, is the capital of French Guiana.

Colombia and Ecuador occupy the northwestern part of South America.
They are situated on both sides of the Andes, and have every variety of
climate. The country is well watered; fertile but unhealthy on the coast,
fertile and healthy on the elevated plains, cold and barren on the mountains.

In Brazil, besides the Amazon, La Plata and San Francisco, there are several
large rivers with fertile valleys; but occasional droughts, sometimes lasting
for two years, will prevent portions of Brazil from becoming densely
inhabited.

On the Pacific coast south of Ecuador, the rainfall becomes less and less.
For three thousand miles along the coast of Peru and Chili there is no
natural harbor; a plain from ten to fifty miles in width extends from the
Pacific to the foot-hills of the Andes. The Antarctic current runs along this
coast; the southeasterly winds blow over it on to the land and cool the air;
but as the winds are of low temperature their scanty vapor is dissipated by
the heat radiated from the land, and not a drop of rain refreshes the thirsty
soil. Many mountain torrents run from the snow-clad summits of the Andes,
and the beauty of their narrow valleys forms a grateful contrast to the dry
and barren sands of the plain.

In the southern part of Chili and in that part formerly called Patagonia, rain
is abundant and the country is fertile.

Page 72

The longest stretch of low and comparatively level land to be found in the
world extends through the center of South America. A boat starting from the
Caribbean sea could sail up the Orinoco over a thousand miles, then down
the Casquiare, which runs from the Orinoco into the Rio Negro, down that
river to the Amazon, up the Amazon to the Madeira, then up that river and
one of its branches through Brazil and Bolivia, and with a short portage of
six and a half miles to one of the branches of the Paraguay, down the
Paraguay and La Plata to the ocean.

The level land crosses the La Plata and continues southward through the
Argentine Republic and Patagonia to the Straits of Magellan. Within this
plain lie all the interior of Venezuela and Brazil, a part of Bolivia, all
Paraguay, Uruguay, and the Argentine Republic. The pampas resemble our
prairies, but run from north to south, while the prairies run from east to
west.

The streams in the plain south of the valley of the La Plata rise in the Andes
and flow southeastward to the Atlantic.

THE ABORIGINES.

The aborigines of America, except the Esquimaux, are unlike the natives of
other countries; the most marked difference is in their language. They are
divided into a number of tribes differing from each other in some respects,
yet with manners, customs and religious beliefs generally similar.

In South America there are more than one hundred distinct languages, and
two thousand dialects. About five or six million Indians have as many
dialects as are found among the 800,000,000 inhabitants of Europe and
Asia. Their languages are polysynthetic, being of a higher type than the
agglutinative languages. In the polysynthetic tongue the substantive,
adjective and verb are joined or combined, and oftentimes a whole sentence
will be comprised in a single word.

The natives in the valleys of the Orinoco and Amazon are forced to
cultivate a little ground on the flood-plains, as the forests are thick and
impenetrable. They live principally on the fruit of the palm (of which there

Page 73

are five hundred varieties), cocoa and bananas, fish and turtles. There are no
roads or paths through the forests except the numerous channels of the
rivers, called igarapes or furos. The tribes on the pampas live principally on
game and wild cattle.

Humboldt tells us that the navigator on the Orinoco sees with surprise at
night the palm trees illuminated by large fires. From the trunks of these
trees are suspended the habitations of a tribe of Indians, who make their
fires on mats hung in the air and filled with moist clay. The same palm tree
furnishes also food and wine and clothing, and thus supplies every want and
even the luxuries of life.

The Indian race as a whole is believed to be superior to both the negro and
the Malay, as neither of those races has ever attained to the civilization of
the Incas of Peru or of the Indians of Mexico and the Aztecs of Central
America. Many of their myths and folk tales are common, not only to the
Indians of one part of the country, but also to other tribes in distant parts of
the continent, and even to the negroes of Africa, and the Arabs of upper
Egypt. All the tribes on the continent have substantially the same habits of
life, the same methods of warfare, the same general characteristics, and a
language built substantially on the same plan.

From these observations it might seem that the Indian tribes of South
America were allied to those of Africa or to the Malays, but on further
consideration the similarity seems due rather to a like stage of civilization
than to identity of race.

THE INCAS OF PERU.

In crossing from Arequipa in Peru to La Paz in Bolivia, the road ascends the
Andes, makes a slight descent into the barren, desolate valley between the
Andes and Cordilleras, crosses Lake Titicaca, and then descends to La Paz.
Lake Titicaca, the largest lake of South America, is on a plateau between
twelve and thirteen thousand feet in height, the most elevated table land on
the globe, excepting Thibet. This lake is surrounded by lofty, snow-clad
mountains, the highest of which is Illampa, 22,300 feet in height.

Page 74

On this lake are the remains of the most ancient civilization of South
America. Cyclopean ruins of temples and fortresses stand as perpetual
monuments of a vanished culture; when and by whom they were erected,
we know not; their builders left no other record of their existence. The
wandering Indians told the first Spaniards that they existed before the sun
shone in the heavens. From one of the rocky islands of Lake Titicaca, about
the year 1000 or 1100, the Sun, parent of mankind and giver of every good
gift, taking compassion on the degraded condition of the Indians, sent two
of his children, Manco Capac and Mama Oello Huaco, to gather the
wandering tribes into communities, to teach them the arts of civilized life
and to inculcate the worship of the Sun. From Lake Titicaca, this brother
and sister, husband and wife, went down the valley to Cuzco, where they
were bidden to found an empire. Manco Capac was thus the first Inca.
There were ten or twelve Incas before the conquest of Peru. Their conquests
extended through the entire valley of the Cordilleras, until over four
hundred tribes, with a population of many millions, became subject to their
dominion.

The territory of the Incas extended from the southern part of Chili
northward into Colombia, beyond Quito, a distance of two thousand miles,
and west to the Pacific Ocean. On the eastern slope of the Cordilleras,
toward the great plain of the Amazon, the Incas met a stronger and more
savage people, with whom they were in constant warfare. In the several
passes of the Cordilleras they constructed fortifications to protect their
borders and prevent invasion.

The capital of the territory, Cuzco, was situated in a beautiful valley ten
thousand feet above the sea. Amidst the Alps, such a valley would be buried
in eternal snow, but within the tropics it enjoys a perpetual spring. Here the
Incas loved to dwell, and remains of immense fortresses, palaces and
temples, testify to their power and culture, and to the number of their
subjects. Tens of thousands of laborers must have been required to construct
such edifices. When we reflect that these people had no beasts of burden
except the llama, which could only carry light loads, and no mechanical
means for transporting the vast blocks of stone used in constructing these
buildings, we are astonished at what they accomplished. The pyramids of
Egypt are not more wonderful.

Page 75

Great highways were built, running north, south and west, connecting
different parts of the Empire. One followed the valley between the
Cordilleras and Andes to Quito, another crossed the Andes and followed the
sea-coast north and south to the extreme limits of their country. All
traveling was on foot. Large and comfortable tambos, or inns, were erected
every few miles, and larger ones at the end of a day's journey. Couriers were
stationed at regular intervals, each of whom had his allotted station,
between which and the next it was his duty to run at a certain pace bearing
his message, and on his approach to the next station he signalled to the next
chasquir, as the couriers were called, to be ready to carry forward the
message. In this way, it is said, about 150 miles a day were made.

These couriers traveled more quickly than the mail-carriers of Europe, and
the means of communication were then, Squier tells us, far better than they
are to-day. Many of these old tambos are still maintained. One in which
Squier spent the night was 180 feet in length, with rooms forming three
sides of a court.

The country of the Incas had every variety of climate, and the products
were those of every part of the new world. On the coast, perpetual summer
reigns, with all the variety and beauty of tropical vegetation. At a higher
elevation, the trees are always green, and while one kind sheds its blossoms
and ripens its fruit another is budding and unfolding its bloom. Meantime,
on the top of the mountains is eternal winter. In some places, as at Potosi,
the changes of temperature are frequent and extremes of heat and cold are
experienced in a single day. The weather in the early morning is frosty; in
the forenoon, mild and balmy; in the afternoon, scorching, and in the
evening, cool and delicious.

On the Pacific slope of the Andes, reservoirs were constructed, from which
irrigating canals watered the whole plain now lying desolate and barren.

The conquered tribes were incorporated into the nation and became the
people of the Incas. If the conquered tribe was strong and warlike, some of
its members were removed to distant parts of the country and were replaced
by the inhabitants of those regions, to whom privileges and immunities
were given as compensation for the change of home. The conquered tribes

Page 76

quickly realized the benefits of the rule of the Incas and became faithful and
loyal subjects.

The government of the Incas was a paternal despotism controlling the most
minute affairs of daily life. Knowledge, the Incas taught, "was not intended
for the people, but for those of generous ability, for it would render persons
of low degree vain and arrogant."

The Incas established a communal system similar to that of Russia. One-
third of the land belonged to the Inca, one-third to the priests of the Sun,
and the remainder to the people, who were required to cultivate the land of
the Inca and of the priests, as well as their own. The land was divided
among the families yearly, according to their number. Every newly married
couple received a stated portion which was increased as the family
increased.

Their only means of writing was by a cord, called quippus, about two feet
long, composed of threads of different colors twisted together, from which a
quantity of smaller threads hung like a knotted fringe. The colors denoted
sensible objects or sometimes abstract ideas, though the principal use of the
quippus was for arithmetical purposes.

The civilization of the Incas appears to have been of a higher order than that
of the Mexicans. It is not probable that hieroglyphics were in use among
any of the South American Indians, though it is said that traces of a pictorial
alphabet have been found. The people were contented and happy, although
they were deprived of personal liberty, although their daily life was
supervised by their rulers, and although they held only communal rights of
property. They had neither ambition nor strong love of country.

When Pizarro landed in Peru there were two Incas, one at Cuzco and the
other at Quito, and the bitter conflict which was raging between them made
the conquest of both easy. Pizarro had only 180 followers, but they were
Spanish cavaliers, carrying fire-arms; and with this small force he
overturned the Incas and enslaved the people. The descendants of the
Quichuas, or the people of the Incas, still inhabit the land—a mild,
apathetic, servile and dejected race. It is said that after the conquest the

Page 77

women put on a black mantle, which they have worn ever since, as
perpetual mourning for the last of the Incas.

There are a few descendants of Spaniards in Peru, but the population
consists chiefly of the descendants of the Quichuas and mixed Spaniards
and Quichuas. The Peruvians of to-day are less civilized than those who
lived 400 years ago; they have less liberty and are poorer.

DISCOVERY OF THE AMAZON.

Great rivers have usually been discovered and explored by ascending them
from the ocean to their sources; the Congo and the Amazon were explored
downward from their sources to the ocean.

Three hundred and fifty years ago, Gonzalo Pizarro, then governor of Upper
Peru, heard of a land of silver and gold, spices and precious stones; a land
where spring reigned and all tropical fruits abounded. He determined to
follow the little stream which, rising in the Andes, near Quito, flowed
eastward; to explore the country, and find the happy land. He set out with
350 Cavaliers, mounted on Spanish horses and attended by 4000 Indian
slaves.

The first part of the route was easy; the little stream soon became a river,
then broadened into the Napo; but the farther they went, the slower and
more difficult was their progress as they passed from the open forest and
the cool and invigorating breezes of the Andes into the sultry valley of the
Napo. Their way now led through forests more dense, darker and more
impenetrable than those described by Stanley, for the valley of the Amazon
is richer than the valley of the Congo. Natives armed with poisoned arrows
opposed their progress; food became scarce, treachery was on every side,
and their number gradually diminished by death and by desertion of the
slaves.

The natives told them of a greater river than the Napo which they would
find a few days' voyage farther down. This river, they said, flowed through
a more populous and richer country, where food was abundant and gold was
found in every stream. Pizarro determined to build a bark and to send

Page 78

Orellano as commander to find and return with food and succor. For this
vessel, the forests furnished the timber; the shoes of the horses were
converted into nails, distilled gum was used for pitch, and the garments of
the soldiers were a substitute for oakum. In two months, a brigantine was
launched, the first European vessel that ever floated on the waters of the
Amazon. The Napo grew broader and deeper as the little company rapidly
floated down, until it became a mile wide. Three days after they left Pizarro,
they saw before them a river, many times larger than the Napo, which the
Indians called Parana-tinega, King of Waters; but we call it the Amazon.
There was no cultivation, little food could be obtained, and the Indians were
hostile instead of friendly. What was to be done? Behind them was the
wilderness, before them the promised land. The journey back would be
difficult and dangerous; the temptation to explore the wonderful river was
too great to resist. One man alone was faithful to Pizarro, and he was left on
the bank while Orellano sailed down the river. The wonder of the explorers
daily increased as other rivers larger than the Napo flowed into the Amazon,
now on the north, more frequently on the south. Month after month passed,
the river grew so broad that they could not see from one side to the other.
Great islands were passed, channels running parallel with the main stream
larger than any river they had ever seen. Still on they went, till after several
months they reached the Atlantic Ocean. Then they sailed north in their
little boat, skirting the coast to Trinidad, where they found a vessel which
bore them to Spain. They recounted the story of the great river; the
wonderful country through which they passed; and the rich mines of which
they had heard. They told fabulous tales of the Amazonians they had
encountered, strong and masculine women, armed with bows and arrows,
living by themselves, admitting men into their country only one month in
the year, killing or sending away the male children and training the girls to
become amazons and warriors.

Orellano was received by the Queen; his treachery was forgotten and a new
expedition was sent out under his command; but he died before reaching the
river.

Meantime, Pizarro and his followers slowly and with difficulty made their
way down the Napo, taking as many months to reach the Amazon as
Orellano had taken days. They looked in vain for their companions, but

Page 79

found only the solitary man who had been left behind, scarcely alive, and
from him learned of Orellano's desertion. Further explorations being
impossible, they turned back, reached Quito two years after their departure,
their horses gone, their arms broken or rusted, the skins of wild animals
their only clothing. "The charnel house seemed to have given up its dead, as
they glided onward like a troop of spectres." Half of the Indians had
perished, and of the three hundred and fifty cavaliers only eighty were left.

Such was the end of an expedition which for dangers and hardships, length
of duration, and constancy displayed is probably unmatched in the annals of
American discovery.

GUIANA.

Guiana is the only country of South America not inhabited by the Latin
race. It was acquired for Great Britain by one who acted contrary to his
instructions in attacking a power, Spain, with which his own country was at
peace.

Gonzalo Pizarro, on his journey down the Napo in 1539, heard wonderful
stories of a golden city far away on the banks of the Orinoco, surrounded by
mountains of gold. Rumors of this golden city were carried by English
navigators to Great Britain, with legends of a prince of Guiana, whose body,
first smeared with turpentine, was then powdered with gold dust, so that he
strode among his people a majestic golden statue. Adventurers started in
search of this El Dorado, some from Peru, others from Quito and from
Trinidad; but the golden city was never found. They, however, brought back
reports of chiefs whose bodies sparkled with gold dust as they danced, who
had golden eagles dangling from their breasts and great pearls from their
ears; they told of mines of diamonds and gold, and of the natives who
longed to exchange their jewels for jews-harps.

Sir Walter Raleigh determined to find this country and bring to his queen its
fabulous riches, for he believed that the silver and gold mines of Mexico
and Peru had made Spain the first state in Christendom—"that purchaseth
intelligence and creepeth into counsels and endangereth and disturbeth all
the nations of Europe."

Page 80

In 1595, Sir Walter sailed from England and arrived at the Isle of Trinidad,
where he overthrew the Spaniards, then sailed up the Orinoco, or one of its
branches, four hundred miles, until hunger and sickness compelled him to
return. Although he did not reach the golden city, he could see the
mountains far in the distance which he believed surrounded it, and he found
the shining sand on the banks of the Orinoco. In Guiana he raised the flag
of England and compelled the Indians to swear fealty to his queen.

Twenty years later, a prisoner in the Tower, he was released in order to
make a second voyage in search of this El Dorado for King James. He
sailed in 1617, accompanied by his eldest son; but disaster and sickness met
him at every step. He reached the Orinoco again, too feeble to land. So his
son and Captain Keymis went instead. Keymis returned after a month of
exploration, bringing Raleigh the news of the death of his son in an attack
on a Spanish town. He brought reports of the golden city, of the mines of
gold, diamonds and emeralds, but neither gold, diamonds nor emeralds to
confirm the truth of these reports. Raleigh said, "I am undone;" Keymis
replied, "I know then, Sir, what course to take." He went to his cabin and
killed himself.

Raleigh returned to England, a broken down old man. The Spaniards
demanded his life of James as they had demanded it of Elizabeth after his
first expedition, on the ground that in time of peace Raleigh had attacked
the Spanish forces and invaded their country. Elizabeth had refused, but
James yielded. Raleigh was executed, but Guiana became an English
colony.

The gold and silver mines of Peru have failed; little gold has been found in
Guiana, but its rich and fertile soil, watered by tropical rains, has been a
source of greater wealth than the gold mines of Peru.

POPULATION OF SOUTH AMERICA.

As the countries of South America were all settled at about the same time
and by the same race and have passed through a like history, they can be
considered as a whole.

Page 81

The United States and Canada, with a rough, uncongenial climate and
sterile soil, were settled by the Anglo-Saxons, the remainder of the western
continent by the Latin race and, excepting Brazil and Guiana, by Spaniards.
In North America the Anglo-Saxon race has dominated, carrying
civilization from the Atlantic to the Pacific, expelling and exterminating the
aborigines. There has been no mingling of the Anglo-Saxon and Indian
races, no backward step, but ever civil, religious and intellectual progress.
The Latin race conquered Central America and South America, a perfect
Eden of natural loveliness, one hundred years prior to the settlement of the
Anglo-Saxon; yet to-day they constitute but a thin layer over a scarcely
populated country. Their leaders were men of unbounded ambition,
rapacious, of great endurance, but cruel and unscrupulous. They sought
adventure, expecting it would bring them gold and silver. For that end they
plundered, despoiled and enslaved the Indians. Gold and silver flowed into
their hands; luxury, effeminacy, and weakness followed.

The Spaniards in America have scarcely retained the civilization they
brought from the old world. They have intermarried with the Indians, and
this mixed race is said to inherit the vices of each of their ancestors without
the virtues of either.

A sparse population, mostly Spanish and foreigners, inhabit a zone ten to
twenty miles in depth along the coast of South America, from the Bay of
Panama to the Caribbean sea. All the cities and settlements, excepting a few
in the Argentine Republic, are near the coast.

Back of this zone, on the Pacific, is a mixed Spanish-Indian population,
much larger than the Spanish and foreign population; and on the Atlantic a
population which is Spanish-Indian, Spanish-Negro, and Negro-Indian,
occupies a zone from twenty to one hundred miles wide. Beyond the first
zone a few Spanish families and foreigners are found at the gold and silver
mines, on the pampas, at the cattle ranches, and on a few haciendas in Peru
and Chili. In Brazil the Portuguese and some Englishmen and Germans
raise coffee and sugar, and oversee the diamond and gold fields. On the
Amazon there are a few small settlements to collect the India rubber and
cacao of that valley.

Page 82

Save these sparse settlements, the interior of South America is inhabited by
wild tribes of Indians, uncivilized save for the presence of a few Catholic
priests, who have given the Indians the cross and the image of the Virgin
Mary, which they worship, mingling the Catholic religion with their old
idolatries and barbarous rites. The natives are believed to be more idle and
less civilized than when the Spaniards discovered America.

The Spaniards are the grandees of the country; too proud to work, they
leave all business to the foreigners and all labor to the Indians, retaining in
connection with the half-breeds all political power. When the regents
appointed by Spain were expelled in the early part of the present century,
republics were established, but they were republics only in name; the
people were neither educated nor fitted for self-government. Their
presidents generally exercised the powers of dictators and often assumed
that title. They have rarely enjoyed a long rule, for their power and position
were sought by others. Revolution in these countries has passed from the
acute to the chronic stage.

A recent traveller in Peru, who wished to inspect its railroad system, was
informed that only 26 miles were in running order, the remainder being
under the control of the revolutionists who were then less than 80 miles
from the capital. He asked why the rebels did not take Lima, the capital, and
was told, "because there is no unanimity among them; they are suspicious
of each other, and cannot depend upon any one man." Instead of being
anxious to serve their country they are only interested in robbing her.

Another traveller in Bolivia, who witnessed some of these revolutions, says
they sometimes occurred three times in as many weeks, and that it would
have been ludicrous had not their results been often violent and tragic.
There has been no settled government, no continued peace, no permanent
policy, in any Spanish country. The hope for the future is that the English,
German, and French population will increase and become permanently
identified with the country; they will then take an active interest in politics
and direct the policy and administration of the government.

Commercial and banking business is in the hands of the French, Germans,
and English. The Italians carry on a small trade at corner groceries and fruit

Page 83

stores; the French keep the hotels and restaurants; the English and Germans
are the shippers, merchants and bankers.

Regular lines of English, French, and German steamers run from Europe to
Panama and thence along the western coast of South America, stopping at
ports en route; some return by Panama, others sail around Cape Horn to
Europe by Buenos Ayres and Rio Janeiro. Other lines run direct from
Europe to Brazil, and twenty-four lines connect Europe and the Argentine
Republic; while there are only four lines of American steamers trading to
South America.

BRAZIL.

We have given a general description of South America, but three countries
—Brazil, the Argentine Republic and Peru—require further notice: Brazil,
because it is the largest country, occupying three-sevenths of South
America, and the only considerable state that was not settled by the
Spaniards; the Argentine Republic, because it is the largest and most
populous of the Spanish states and, with Peru, illustrates the political and
financial phases through which the Spanish republics have passed.

The valley of the Amazon makes Brazil the most fertile region of the world.
The tropical woods are so thick and the creepers and undergrowth so
luxuriant that animal life is almost entirely confined to the trees above and
the waters below.

The valley is not unhealthy, and, though under the equator, the climate is
tempered by the trade winds and the evaporation from the vast Amazonian
waters. Beyond the valley is the montaña district, where the land is higher
and the climate semi-tropical, where there are few creepers, little
underbrush, and open forests, and where both animal and vegetable life is
less abundant. Southward, beyond the montaña district, are the evergreen
pampas, where no trees grow and where the animal and vegetable life are
unlike either that of the valley of the Amazon or that of the montaña. As in
Africa, so here, men who live in the dark forest, die in the open. Mr. Stanley
selected thirty dwarfs from the tropical forests of Africa to take to England,

Page 84

but as soon as they came into the grass-lands, the clear air and bright sun,
they languished and died before the coast was reached.

Northeast of the pampas, on the Atlantic coast, south of the Amazon, is a
province bounded on the south by a range of high mountains, where rain is
abundant; at Maranhao, its seaport, there are 280 inches of rainfall in the
year. South of Maranhao there is much less rain; and instead of two seasons,
the wet and the dry, which prevail in the valley of the Amazon, there are the
four seasons of the year, but without extremes of heat and cold.

Over the greater part of Brazil grows the coffee tree, the sheet-anchor of
Brazilian prosperity, since it furnishes 60 per cent. of all the coffee grown in
the world. The plant is not indigenous to Brazil, but was brought there
about one hundred years ago from the old world.

Brazil, inhabited by the Portuguese, with an imperial government, has been
saved from the anarchy and insolvency of the Spanish republics. Her
railroads have been built with economy and have been generally successful.
It had a population in 1885 of 11,000,000; two-thirds of whom were Indians
and negroes, and many of the negroes were slaves. Slavery existed longer in
Brazil than in any other civilized country; the lash was commonly used on
the plantation, and work continued from early in the morning until late at
night until 1888, when a law was passed finally emancipating 1,300,000
slaves. It was opposed by the planters, who said freedmen would not work,
but would let the coffee and sugar plantations fall to ruin. It was probably
this act which caused the overthrow of the empire, for in revenge the
planters joined the insurgents in establishing the Republic.

The Portuguese and Brazilians are more peaceable and orderly than the
Spaniards or Spanish-Americans; we may therefore reasonably hope that
Brazil will not repeat the history of the Spanish republics, which has been
one of disintegration, for these republics have separated into two or more
States. The greatest difficulty in maintaining its immense domain will arise
from the enormous distances and the time required to travel between
different parts of the country. From Rio de Janeiro to Matto Grosso is 140
days' journey by land, and by water the distance is 3000 miles.
Communication is maintained by steamer through the Argentine Republic
up the Rio de la Plata and its branches. Although the country has many long

Page 85

and navigable rivers, yet the means of intercommunication are very poor;
for the rivers are little used, and the forests, creepers, and undergrowth are
so dense that the country back of the river-banks is impenetrable, and even
if roads should be opened the soil is so luxuriant that they would be quickly
overgrown and soon become impassable.

Lines of steamers have been subsidized by the Brazilian government and
run up the Amazon 2000 miles to Tabatinga, at the boundary line of Peru;
there connecting with lines subsidized by the Peruvian government, which
run 1500 miles farther up the river. These vessels carry supplies to the
settlers and bring back India rubber, Brazil-nuts, cacao, quinine, and the
beautiful woods of the forest.

Yet steamers are rarely seen on the Amazon; they have few passengers, and
have not opened the country; we are told that the Mississippi carries more
vessels in a month, and the Yang-tse-kiang in a day, than the Amazon in a
year.

THE ARGENTINE REPUBLIC.

The history of South American republics is illustrated in the Argentine
republic.

It is a vast pampas or prairie, extending from Brazil to the Andes, and from
Bolivia with a southeasterly trend 2000 miles to southeastern Terra del
Fuego.

The climate of the northern portion is tropical; of the central part, semi-
tropical; of the extreme south, temperate or cold. The country is generally
well watered excepting in the northwestern part, where the land is dry and
alkaline, like the arid regions of North America. The soil is a rich, deep
loam, from four to six feet in depth, excepting in Patagonia and the western
pampas, where there is a coarse gravel and detritus from the Andes. Instead
of the dense tropical forest of the Amazon valley, the pampas are covered
by a coarse grass, three or four feet high, growing in large tussocks and all
the year round of a dark green. The strong grass crowds out all trees and

Page 86

almost all plants, so that scarcely a flower relieves the uniform, everlasting
verdure.

Instead of the arboreal animals of the Amazon there is the rhea or American
ostrich, "ship of the wilderness," adapted to the pampas, but unable to live
in the forests. The gauchos have hunted it for the last three centuries, but it
is now passing away and will soon be lost to the pampas, as the buffalo has
been to the North American prairie.

The pampas are far better adapted to the raising of cattle than our prairies,
for the grass is always green and the winters are milder. Cattle, horses, and
sheep imported by the Spaniards and turned on to the pampas rapidly
increased, and now immense herds feed on the plains.

The Indians who inhabit the pampas, instead of being confined to one
locality and journeying only by canoe, like the Indians on the Amazon,
wander over the length and breadth of the pampas, hunting the ostrich and
cattle. The cattle are tended by gauchos, as the cow-boys are called, half-
breeds as wild as the herds they tend. Constant warfare exists between the
Indians and the gauchos, unless they unite to attack the settlers. After one of
the Indian raids the government dug an immense ditch from a river to the
Andes and drove the Indians to the farther side, and since then there have
been fewer raids—and fewer Indians.

The land was held in large blocks of many thousand acres, worked by
overseers and gauchos. The animals were killed by hundreds of thousands
for their skins. This state of things is, however, gradually passing away, for
during the last twenty years emigrants from the old world have settled in the
country as farmers and planters.

The fourteen provinces which form the Argentine Republic have never been
welded into one nation, and have seldom had a moment's peace. The
gauchos have been a continual scourge, and the gaucho generals its rulers
and harriers combined. Unfortunately, here, as in other Spanish states, one
dictator has succeeded another. Thirty presidents, or dictators, have reigned
within fifty years. At one time five provinces had each a separate dictator.
The neighboring republic of Uruguay, formerly a part of the Argentine

Page 87

Confederation, had 26 revolutions in the twenty-three years from 1864 to
1887.

For some time Buenos Ayres and its dictator ruled the republic; then the
country provinces rebelled, and civil war ensued; one province was arrayed
against another, and all against Buenos Ayres. The provinces prevailed and
the gaucho general, Rosas, occupied Buenos Ayres. Scarcely was this civil
war ended when a war arose with the republics of Uruguay and Paraguay.

Money was required to pay the army and the cost of civil and foreign wars.
Every dictator had his friends for whom provision must be made. Large
debts were created; banks were chartered; $200,000,000 of paper money
were issued. There were several different circulating mediums; each
province strove to outdo the others in the issue of a currency which quickly
depreciated. Companies for different purposes were organized, and many
were subsidized, directly or indirectly. We are told that in one case
$1,500,000 was paid for a concession, and that "Turkish officials, who have
hitherto been the champion artists in backsheesh, leave off where Argentine
blackmailers begin; the price of a drainage scheme at Buenos Ayres would
buy a whole cabinet of pashas at Galata."

Railroads were built running from Buenos Ayres in different directions, as
each province demanded a railroad, with little regard to its population or
business.

A road was commenced to cross the Andes and open communication
between the Atlantic and Pacific over mountains which had never been
crossed by a carriage of any kind.

The country was not settled so rapidly as the rulers desired. Inducements
were therefore offered to immigrants. The passage money from Europe and
the expenses of the immigrant to his new home have been paid and land for
settlement sold at low rates. It is estimated that over 1,000,000 foreigners
have settled in the country during the last twelve years, and the
proportionate increase of population in the same period has been twice as
great as that of the United States. Grazing lands have been sold at nominal
prices to immigrants, or leased for terms of years in lots of 6,000 acres at a
rental of $100 a year. Bonds were issued not only by the government but by

Page 88

the provinces, by the municipalities and by the railroads, and all were
readily taken in England and Germany. To enable the emigrants to pay for
and to cultivate their land, the owner of real estate on depositing his title
deeds with the hypothecary banks and having a valuation of his real estate,
received cedulas, or bonds of the bank, for one-half its appraised value;
these cedulas for large amounts were issued and sold in Europe; and thus, as
ever, more money was required, more bonds were issued. In 1889, a year of
peace, the public debt was increased 120 per cent., and it is now said to be
over one thousand four hundred millions of dollars, and the principal and
interest of two-thirds of this amount is payable in gold at a premium of 200
per cent.

In 1890 there was no money to meet the interest and general prostration
ensued.

It is difficult to ascertain the debt of the republic; but if the accounts given
in the English publications are correct the debt is greater in proportion to its
population and wealth than that of any other country in the world. The only
hope of the Argentine Republic is to wipe out the debt by insolvency and
bankruptcy.

PERU.

A strip of land with 1200 miles of sea coast, without a natural harbor, and
200 to 300 miles wide, consisting of a plain, mountains, a plateau, and still
another range of mountains—this is Peru.

In the west, where the rain never falls, are numerous small rivers, to-day
mountain torrents, to-morrow dry, rocky beds.

Between the lofty ranges of snow mountains is the highest plateau in the
world, after Thibet. The southern part of this plateau is dry and desolate, the
northern portion is well watered, with beautiful streams running now
through deep cañons and then through rich, fertile valleys steadily
descending toward the northeast; the valleys growing ever broader, warmer
and more delightful, until the montaña is reached, only a few hundred feet

Page 89

above the Atlantic, where the streams have become rivers, navigable to the
ocean.

The western slope of the mountains is dry and barren, so that breadstuffs
and provisions are imported from Ecuador on the north, or from lower
Chili, far to the south. Yet no other country has contributed so much to the
world's fertility; for here are the great deposits of guano and nitrates, more
valuable than mines of gold and silver. These deposits yielded for over
thirty years a net annual revenue of $20,000,000.

The eastern slope, rich and fertile, producing every tree and flower, all fruits
and vegetables grown in any part of the world; in the mountains, mines of
gold and silver, platinum and cinnabar, copper and tin, lead and iron, coal
and petroleum, nitrates and asphalt: a bankrupt nation in the midst of untold
wealth—such is Peru.

To bring the minerals down to the ocean, tens of millions of dollars were
expended on thirteen roads; but though none of them were ever finished,
they reached a few of the poorer mines. Seven of these roads were built by
the government, the others by private parties.

The sales of guano and the production of gold and silver made Peru a proud
and wealthy nation. Everything prospered until the war with Chili, from
1879 to 1883, ending in the defeat of Peru and the loss of a portion of her
territory, including a large part of her guano deposit. She was unable to
keep her railroads in operation, much less to extend them, or to pay the
interest on her bonds; and thus bankruptcy followed defeat. At last, after
fourteen years of default and six years of negotiation, a contract was
concluded with Peru by Mr. M. P. Grace, of New York, in January, 1890, on
behalf of the bondholders. The bondholders became concessionaires, and in
consideration of the release of the bonded debt due to them by Peru, receive
valuable concessions, of money, of mines, of railroads, of lands and of
guano. These concessions include among other things a government subsidy
of $400,000 a year, secured from the customs of Callao; the mines of Cerro
de Pasco, which have yielded a yearly average of $2,000,000 for over one
hundred years; the entire railway system (769 miles in length) of the state; a
grant of 5,000,000 acres for the extension of the Lake Titicaca railroad; a
grant of 4,500,000 acres for the extension of the Central or Oroya railroad

Page 90

to the navigable waters of the Ucayala, one of the main tributaries of the
Amazon; the exclusive control of the guano deposit until 2,000,000 tons
have been sold, from which they expect to sell at least 80,000 tons a year,
which will net $1,000,000. The concessionaires on their part agree to
liquidate the Peruvian debt, to repair the railroads, and construct 974 miles
in extension of the existing system at an estimated cost of $16,000,000, and
to assume certain other obligations to a limited amount.

This, perhaps the most remarkable settlement ever made between a
bankrupt nation and its creditor, is due largely to Mr. Grace, and cannot fail
to develop the resources of Peru and restore her days of prosperity.

TRADE RELATIONS WITH THE UNITED STATES.

It appears from the foregoing statement that all the carrying trade to and
from South America, by water, is by foreign steamers; that only four of
these are American lines; that the railroads are generally owned and
operated by Englishmen; that the bankers and merchants are Englishmen or
Germans; that many of the mines, cattle ranches, coffee plantations and
other estates are owned by non-resident foreigners; and that the largest
consumer of South American products is the United States, although this
country sells few of its manufactures and products to South America.

The English steamers, in the usual course of trade, load with English dry-
goods consigned to English houses in South America, where they are sold
and the proceeds invested in coffee and other products, which are sent in the
same vessels to the United States; there sold, and the money invested in our
produce for carriage to England. The English therefore obtain the profits on
manufacture, on the freight to South America, on the sale of the goods in
South America, on the freight from South America to the United States, on
the sale of those goods, and finally on the freight of the American
breadstuffs carried to Europe. For the successful prosecution of any trade
between two countries, it is essential that each shall produce what the other
wants: Thus, we raise breadstuffs which are not grown on the Caribbean sea
nor in the valley of the Amazon, nor in Peru or upper Chili, and we also
manufacture goods required in all parts of South America, where they have
few factories; there, coffee, wool, India rubber, cacao and other articles are

Page 91

produced, which we require. Here, therefore, are the factors necessary for a
prosperous trade. Such a trade we formerly enjoyed with South America: In
1852, six hundred United States vessels entered the harbor of Buenos Ayres,
or more than twice as many as those of all other nations combined; now
only two per cent. of the shipping entering that harbor belongs to us. Our
war came, iron steamers took the place of wooden sailing ships, we levied a
duty on coffee and rubber, South America levied a duty on our
manufactures, other countries subsidized lines of steamers, while we
refused all subsidies; and our trade with South America rapidly fell off, as
freights were carried cheaper in foreign than in American ships, and the
trade of South America passed from the United States to England, Germany
and France.

It is said that we cannot regain this trade, because we cannot, without
protection maintain our own manufactures, much less compete with the
Europeans in an open market; and therefore that it will be a waste of money
to subsidize our vessels. But the larger the market the cheaper we can
manufacture, and we can surely find a large and new market for our
breadstuffs. It is worth while to make the experiment at least, to give our
vessels the same subsidy and protection that has been given to the European
lines, and to our merchants and bankers, an opportunity to regain the trade
with South America. At first the odds will be greatly against us; but if we
show the same energy and ability in cultivating trade with South America
that our fathers exhibited, and that we have shown in other directions, we
must ultimately succeed.

It is now proposed to tax the products of South America, unless the South
American states reciprocate and admit our breadstuffs and manufactures
free. If this scheme can be carried out, a large and prosperous commerce
will be established between North America and South America, and
American houses will be started in the large cities to dispose of our
manufactures and ship the products to South America. By this interchange,
our manufacturers and farmers will find a market for their goods and
products, our mercantile navy freight for its vessels, and our bankers and
merchants a profitable business in the large cities of South America.

Page 92

RAILROADS.

We have already referred to the several railroads which start from the little
ports on the Pacific coast and run up the valleys toward the Andes. Three of
these, among the most remarkable roads in the world, ascend to a greater
elevation than any others, and to a height which in Europe or the United
States, would be above the snow level. They were intended to reach the
gold and silver mines between the Andes and Cordilleras.

The first, called the Oroya or Central railroad, 111 miles in length, starts
from Callao on the Pacific, and crosses the Andes, at an elevation of nearly
15,000 feet, to the plateau between the Andes and the Cordilleras. It is
expected that this road will be extended to the navigable waters of the
Amazon.

Three hundred miles southward, the second road runs from Mollendo, Peru,
by Arequipa to Puno on Lake Titicaca, and thence northward on the plateau
407 miles to San Rosas, on the route to Cuzco. The road from Mollendo to
Arequipa runs through a country so destitute of water that the only supply
for the engines and stations is by an iron pipe 8 inches in diameter, and 50
miles long, running from an elevation of 7,000 feet to the sea-coast.

Seven or eight hundred miles south of Mollendo, a line runs from
Valparaiso in Chili to Buenos Ayres, 870 miles. It crosses the Andes through
a tunnel two miles long, at an elevation of 10,568 feet above the sea; after
leaving the mountains it runs over the pampas two hundred miles, without a
curve or a grade over three feet above or below the plain, and will soon be
completed from ocean to ocean.

From Rio de Janeiro several roads have been constructed over the
mountains west of that city to different parts of Brazil. One of these runs
westwardly toward Bolivia.

Bolivia has recently granted concessions for the construction of a road from
La Paz to connect on the west with the Peruvian roads at Lake Titicaca, and
on the east with the Brazilian lines on the Pacific; and thus ultimately a road
will run from Mollendo on the Atlantic ocean by Lake Titicaca and La Paz
to Rio de Janeiro.

Page 93

There are now from 6000 to 7000 miles of road in operation in the
Argentine Republic, 5000 to 6000 in Brazil, and 3000 to 4000 miles in the
other states, making a total of about 15,000 miles of railroad in operation.

A proposition is now before the public for the construction of the Pan-
American railroad, from the Caribbean sea southward to the Argentine
Republic to connect with the Peruvian, with the Brazilian, and ultimately
with the Argentine roads.

The route that seems to be most feasible starts at Cartagena, where there is a
splendid bay and harbor, within three days sail from Galveston and six days
from New York. It follows the valley of the Magdalena river 800 miles to
Dividal, 1700 feet above the sea. Here, near the head waters of the
Magdalena, the route crosses the eastern Cordilleras at an elevation of about
6,500 feet to the head waters of the Caqueta, or Yapura, a branch of the
Amazon, and thence runs down that river 375 miles to the mouth of the
Engarros, only 550 feet above tide-water. From the Caqueta river, the route
passes through Ecuador to Iquitos, Peru, crossing fourteen tributaries of the
Amazon. From Iquitos the route ascends the Amazon and the Ucayle, one
of its southern tributaries, 500 miles to Napal, then continues across the
montaña and the numerous valleys of the Amazon about 600 miles, to Santa
Cruz in Bolivia, or 2400 miles from Cartagena; while a branch will run up
the Apurimac to Cuzco.

This road would run for 2000 miles along the foot hills of the Cordilleras,
and in these mountains is probably the richest mining region in the world;
here gold, silver, copper, lead and coal mines are found. The gold and silver
mines do not seem to have been thoroughly explored, although untold
millions of the precious metals have been extracted from them. These mines
are generally in cold and treeless regions, where coal, labor and food are
difficult to obtain; where freights are high and machinery of all kinds most
expensive. This road would greatly facilitate the opening and working of
these mines, and not only make them profitable but develop a large and
lucrative traffic.

Much of Bolivia is above the navigable waters of the Amazon, and many of
its provinces are now land-locked and almost isolated from communication
with the outer world. The proposed road would cross many branches of the

Page 94

Amazon, and thus connect with fifty thousand miles of navigable waters, at
least 9000 of which are above Iquitos; and it is claimed that the business
from 20,000 miles of navigable waters would find by this route a nearer
outlet to Europe and America than by Para.

There is every variety of climate on the route. The valley of the Magdalena
is sultry; every afternoon the water grows tepid, and the stones burning hot,
in the sun's rays. In crossing the Cordilleras the cool breezes of the
mountains are met. The road then descends into the valley of the Amazon,
through a rich and not unhealthy region, though it has the damp, hot,
climate of a tropical country, and thence passes through the montaña
district, which is generally high, healthy and fertile.

This country, under a wise government, is capable of sustaining an immense
population and giving abundant support to such a railroad; but it is now
unexplored, excepting the valleys of the navigable rivers, and is uninhabited
save by wild and savage Indians, though these are not numerous.

The route up the Magdalena may be expensive by reason of the climate, but
not otherwise. The road in the mountain district will necessarily be costly,
and also in the sierras, because it must cross the numerous branches of the
Amazon, and the precipitous mountains between the valleys, and from the
difficulty of obtaining labor and material for construction. Mr. Orton, who
crossed from one branch of the Napo to another, says:

"We crossed the stream and the intervening ridges, and their name is legion; sometimes we
were climbing up an almost vertical ascent, then descending into a deep dark ravine to find a
furious river, while on the lowlands the path seemed lost in the dense bamboos, until the
Indians opened a passage with their machetes and we crept under the low arcade of foliage."

Even if the railroad were built, almost all the produce of the Amazon and
montaña country could be carried more cheaply by water to Para than by
rail to Cartagena; while goods from England and America would be carried
cheaper by steamer to the Isthmus of Panama, and thence to all ports on the
Pacific ocean, than by steamer to Cartagena and up the Magdalena across
the Andes to the valley of the Amazon, and then a second time across the
Andes to the Pacific ocean. The greater part of the business to and from the
mines would be by the railroad.

Page 95

At present, as there could not be sufficient business to pay the operating
expenses of such a road, it must rely on government subsidies to build and
operate it.

Those who have given the most consideration to the subject say that the
road need not be an expensive one to operate, and in the important element
of time it would have a great advantage over the route via Para. As a means
of promoting the settlement of the country and developing commerce,
which cannot exist without population, the railroad would seem to be a
necessity, for navigation has neither opened the country nor brought in
emigrants and we may fairly assume that it will not suffice in the future.

CONCLUSION.

In conclusion I will quote from two writers on tropical America. Buckle
says:

"Amidst the pomp and splendor of nature, no place is left for man; he is reduced to
insignificance by the majesty with which he is surrounded. The forces that oppose are so
formidable that he has never been able to make head against them.

"The energies of nature have hampered his spirit; nowhere else is the contrast so painful
between the grandeur of the external world and the littleness of the internal, and the mind,
cowed by this unequal struggle, has been unable to advance.

"Here, where physical resources are the most powerful, where vegetation and animals are most
abundant, where the soil is watered by the noblest rivers and the coast studded by the finest
harbors, the profusion of nature has hindered social progress and opposed that accumulation of
wealth without which progress is impossible."

Mr. Bates, the naturalist, after a residence of many years on the Amazon,
closes his book as follows:

"The superiority of the bleak north to tropical regions is only in its social aspects, for I hold to
the opinion that although humanity can reach an advanced state of culture only by battling
with the inclemency of nature in high latitudes, it is under the equator alone that the perfect
race of the future will attain to complete fruition of man's beautiful heritage, the earth."

Page 96

Washington, January, 1891.

Page 97

Page 98

VOL. III, PP. 31–40 APRIL 30, 1891

THE

Page 99

NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE.

GEOGRAPHY OF THE LAND.
ANNUAL REPORT BY VICE-PRESIDENT

HERBERT G. OGDEN.

(Presented to the Society January 23, 1891.)

Very few of the geographic events of the past year have been of such an
essential nature as to require a reference in this report, and yet some of them
are of surpassing interest. Fraught, as many of them are, with policies that
must have a marked influence in the future in developing the still
uncivilized regions and increasing the prosperity of the established
communities, they present a field for research that has already attracted the
political economist, enlisted the labor of the philanthropist, and excited the
cupidity of commerce.

The division of Africa, as commonly referred to, has naturally aroused the
most profound attention of all civilized peoples. But few have attempted to
penetrate the darkness of the future with predictions of the ultimate results
of the partition of this great continent. That civilization will eventually
follow, we may feel reasonably assured; and if we could but see the end in

Page 100

the establishment of powerful nations without the repetition of history in the
quarrels, strife, and war that have preceded the settled order of political
progression on other continents, we might well hope the human had
improved his humanity and believe we had entered the border land of the
millennium that enthusiasts have so long held up to us as the final stage in
the progress of man.

The professions of the African powers are peaceful, but in the division of
these unknown millions of square miles it requires but little penetration to
discern the elements for protracted strife in future generations. The
agreement between Germany and England, by far the most important of the
compacts to extend the protection of European nations to particular zones
not embraced in the Kongo Free State, exemplifies in a marked degree the
disputes that may arise, and with what avidity the civilized nations have
sought mutual recognition of their right to dominate in specified spheres. As
might have been expected, however, in an attempt to divide great areas that
have not even been mapped, and with an economic value still to be
determined, the boundaries of the spheres are oftentimes indefinite, and
instead of settling disputed questions, but defer them to the generations yet
to come. There are colonies, protectorates, and spheres of influence, with
boundaries sometimes so ill defined that we may conceive they have been
purposely left indeterminate, that at the proper time the most powerful may
push their frontiers to include regions that the adventurous may proclaim
desirable acquisitions.

The area of Africa is computed at nearly 12,000,000 square miles; and
about 9,500,000 square miles are claimed by the powers as under their
control, protectorate, or influence within the tentative boundaries that seem
to have been very generally agreed upon. Fully 83 per cent. of this area has
been acquired during the past fifteen years. We have seen during this period
the possessions of Spain increase from 3,500 to 200,000 square miles;
England, from 280,000 to 2,000,000; France, from 280,000 to 2,300,000,
while Italy and Germany, that were without a square rod a few years ago,
now claim extensive areas—Italy about 360,000 and Germany over
1,000,000 square miles. Portugal, though not less grasping, seems to have
been less successful, as she has acquired less than 100,000 square miles.
Perhaps having encountered a more powerful nation in her path may

Page 101

account for this, but the total area within her "sphere" is nevertheless not
insignificant, reaching as it does over three-quarters of a million of square
miles. In the Kongo Free State we find another million square miles, which
many believe will ultimately become a Belgian colony; but in any event,
occupying as it does the larger part of the basin of the Kongo, it is destined
to be the scene of an activity in the development of the continent fruitful of
the most important results.

We must remember, too, that England now occupies Egypt, and that with
her protectorate over Zanzibar and her sphere of influence to the northward
of that state, that has not yet been limited, it is not improbable that she will
eventually reach the Mediterranean, establishing a more extended influence
in northern Africa than even that which she has exerted over the southern
end of the continent. Should England's influence in the north result in the
occupation of all the territory that is apparently within her "sphere," we may
conceive some of the complications likely to arise, and see the realization of
the proviso in the recent Anglo-German agreement granting her the right of
way to build a railroad through the German sphere east of Lake Tanganyika.
Englishmen have expressed grave doubts as to the wisdom of conceding to
Germany this large territory east of Lake Tanganyika, claiming it was
rightfully theirs through discovery, and as they are estopped from
intercommunication to the westward of the lake by the boundaries of the
Kongo Free State, view with alarm the possible intricacies of the situation
when they may attempt to exercise their rights in the German sphere. But
doubtless there are compensating advantages derived from the agreement,
as many earnest and able men commend the concessions made by their
government in view of the greater influence that has been acquired in other
regions where it has not heretofore been generally conceded.

South of the Zambesi there are still other elements that promise fruit for
strife ere the region is recognized as settled to the satisfaction of the
contending powers. Boundaries now but illy defined must be adjusted
before the venturous pioneers shall know to which nation their lands
belong, and we may well foresee in the sections where exploration develops
riches and abundance that the peaceful measures of arbitration will fail to
satisfy the claims to dominance. We have, too, an element in the south
African republic that must ere long find vent in a more pronounced

Page 102

movement to secure a seaport than that made a few years ago. The fact that
Delagoa bay, the finest harbor on this section of the African coast, is the
natural outlet for these people and for the extensive regions adjacent that
may eventually come under their control, points to this bay becoming a
bone of contention if the powers interested do not conclude the present
arbitration on a just and satisfactory basis. On the lower Niger there are also
points of friction, and even the sands of the great Sahara are becoming the
subject of dispute in the anxiety to establish power that may wield an
influence in distributing the wealth that may be found.

From what regions of the continent the future wealth is to be derived we
cannot predict. The uncertainty is, perhaps, the consideration in the problem
of development that leaves vast areas with undefined boundaries, though
nominally within the sphere of influence of a specified power. There are
fully 2,000,000 square miles yet to be explored before we may know the
general geographic features of the continent, and a much larger area that
must be examined and studied by experts before any reasonable estimate of
its value and adaptability to the schemes of civilized man can be
approached. The great strides that have been made in recent years in seizing
upon the unclaimed territories doubtless received the larger impetus from
the revelations in Mr. Stanley's explorations. The Kongo is recognized to be
a natural highway leading to a region believed to be susceptible of
remunerative development. Preparations have been made to construct a
railroad around the falls in the lower river to overcome the greatest practical
obstacle to its fullest utilization. We may reasonably expect commercial
enterprises on extensive scales to speedily follow the completion of this
road and hasten the acquisition of a more perfect knowledge of the Kongo
basin, not within the boundaries of the Kongo Free State alone, but also the
region drained by the great tributaries from the north and the sections
naturally dependent upon this great river system.

The Kongo is but one line on which the general advance is being made
upon the interior of the continent. The French seem determined upon
extending their influence on the northern and western coasts, and the
Portuguese, English, Germans, and Italians are pronounced in their efforts
on the eastern coast, while the English are careful, too, of their interests
from the south, and seem to have almost unlimited scope north of Victoria

Page 103

Nyanza. The progress of the advancing colonization will necessarily be
accelerated or retarded by the geographic conditions encountered in the
different regions. In some, it may be the difficulty of maintaining
communication with older settlements; in others, that the land is
unproductive or the probable gains not sufficiently attractive; and lastly, the
great density of the native population in certain districts is likely to prove a
hindrance that it may require many years to overcome. On the lower Niger,
in the British west African colony, in Egypt, in Natal, on the shores of Lake
Victoria Nyanza, and in parts of the Kongo basin, it is estimated that the
native population is nearly as dense as in India; but the climatic conditions
are so unfavorable that it is not probable that any attempt will be made to
advance in these regions for a more serious purpose than to maintain a
foothold for the future. The more attractive districts for the white man are
thought to be much less populous, and are not scourged with such an
unhealthy climate.

Even now the nations of Europe are planning to enter these great unknown
fields. There is an expedition on the western coast, under the explorer
Cameron, investigating the conditions for trade; and the rumors of the
organization of wealthy companies to work in the several "spheres of
influence" but impress upon us the fact that the Old World is moving to lay
bare the resources of the great continent, and we may hope with an energy
that will overcome all obstacles, open new fields to mankind, and relieve
the nations of the horrors of human traffic in which they have been too long
encouraged. But it would be vain to hope there will be no bloodshed, for
where man has great rival interests history teaches us they are settled by the
sword; and we can hardly believe the peaceful methods of arbitration will
have gained such sway as to rob history in her predictions as to the
regeneration of "darkest Africa."

On the western hemisphere also there have been events of most interesting
import, in that they foreshadow a closer union of the people of the two
continents. Unlike Africa, in that this hemisphere has been under the control
of the more intelligent races of men for several generations, so that
discovery and the cruelties attending the establishment of supremacy are

Page 104

virtually questions of the past, the interests involved are on a different
plane, though not on a higher moral sphere, as we can conceive no greater
Christian duty than the regeneration of the uncivilized, but a sphere
affecting the relations of established communities that for generations have
been wielding an influence in the world's history on principles recognized
to be the product of civilization. The metes and bounds of the states are well
defined, with few exceptions, and the ambition for territorial accretion has
been so greatly subdued by the misfortunes of their earlier histories, that the
time seems to be propitious for advancing those greater questions of public
policy that naturally arise from their community of interests. The
proposition to convene a Pan-American congress was for several years
viewed with suspicion, and was even designated by some as chimerical, but
the suggestion took root. Many thoughtful men believed such a conference
would lead to a better understanding between the people of the states
represented, and that, while the fruits might not be made immediately
apparent, the foundation would be laid for lasting benefits. The interest
manifested by the different nations and the high character of the
representatives they sent to the conference clearly indicated that
deliberations were to be undertaken in good faith. We need not follow the
deliberations of this body, nor even revert to the many questions discussed.
Since the adjournment we are beginning to appreciate some of the results.
The recent establishment of the "Bureau of the American Republics" is one
of the first practical evidences of work accomplished. This bureau is
maintained by proportionate contributions from the nations represented in
the congress, and is intended to be the medium for collecting and
disseminating information on commercial, industrial, and cognate subjects.
If we consider the different characteristics of the people of the two
continents—their manners, customs and methods of business—we can
readily conceive the bureau has before it a labor of no little magnitude, but
one that, fairly accomplished, cannot fail to be beneficial and of lasting
value.

Further evidence of the work of the congress is apparent in the organization
of a commission of experts to project the long-contemplated inter-
continental railway—a scheme that, dependent upon individual effort,
would doubtless require many years for accomplishment, but undertaken

Page 105

under international auspices we may hope will be pressed to a speedy
conclusion.

The assembly of delegates to consider a monetary unit for the republics of
the two continents is also the result of the congress. The progress of this
conference will doubtless be watched with peculiar interest, coming as it
does when our own people are in the midst of a reactionary effort to
habilitate silver as a standard coin.

The revolution a year ago that gave birth to the United States of Brazil, it
was feared by many would lead to a state of anarchy that would end
disastrously to the new nation and perhaps involve neighboring states.
Fortunately these forebodings have not been realized, and the recent general
election in Brazil, which seems to have been conducted without violence,
has caused a feeling of confidence that we may well believe will continue
and permit this great state to enter heartily into the new era of material
development that seems opening to our sister republics.

Work on the construction of the Nicaragua canal has steadily progressed
during the year. A harbor for light-draft vessels has been constructed at San
Juan del Norte, and satisfactory progress has been made in constructing the
railway designed to facilitate the work of excavation. It has been hoped by
the friends of this project that the canal would be constructed with funds
raised by private subscription. The admirable management of the
preliminary work of surveying and organization were good grounds for
their belief; but the bill recently introduced in Congress asking a guarantee
for one hundred millions of bonds to be issued, indicates that expectations
of friends were too sanguine, and that the financial backing that had been
believed to be assured has for some reason not been developed. This may be
only a temporary alarm, due to the general financial stringency that has
prevailed during the past few months, and on the recurrence of an easier
money market the necessity for the relief asked from Congress will
disappear.

Page 106

The Panama canal project, supposed to have been abandoned in hopeless
financial ruin, has recently been revived, with new concessions extending
the period for construction, and, it is currently reported, a scheme for a
colossal lottery company for raising the means for prosecuting the work. It
seems incredible that this canal shall become a fact in this generation; but if
it is the feasible route its projectors claim, it is not improbable that the
demands of a future generation may necessitate its construction.

A year ago I commented upon the improvement of the Mississippi river.
Since then one of the greatest floods on record has visited the lower river
country, devastating a large area. It brought to the settlers in the valley,
however, a new experience, and has inspired them with a confidence in the
levée system that finds expression in the demand for levées of approved
construction from Cairo to the Gulf. The flood of a year ago covered many
square miles. A large proportion of the area, however, was not protected by
levées, and another large proportion was only partially protected; and while,
therefore, the disaster impressed the general public with a belief that the
levées were a failure, the facts really point to the contrary. In former notable
floods it has not been unusual for one hundred or more miles of levée to be
washed away before the flood subsided, but on the recent occasion there
was a total length of less than five miles destroyed in some 1,100 miles of
levée that had been believed to be safe. This is a remarkable showing, and
has naturally inspired the advocates of the system with greater confidence.
It points to the possibility of constructing levées at a reasonable expense
that will stand the pressure of water for the height that it has been computed
necessary to build them. There is a grave doubt, however, in the minds of
some as to whether the computed heights, the levées holding intact, will
afford sufficient cross-section to carry off the volume of water draining
from the catchment basins. Some interesting computations on this subject
have recently been made by General Greely, the chief signal officer,1 from
observations made during an extended period.
1
North American Review, May, 1890.

The question raised is not a new one, but, considered in the light of the
statistics presented, seems to involve the problem of the improvement of the

Page 107

river with increasing difficulties. General Greely's figures indicate that the
cross-section of the lower river will only permit carrying to the sea a
volume of about sixty cubic miles of water during an ordinary flood season,
and that in the extraordinary flood years, such as 1882 and 1890, the
volume to be carried down is about eighty cubic miles, showing an excess
of about twenty cubic miles over the capacity of the river in a specified
time. These figures should be taken in the nature of a warning; and while it
must be admitted that the intricacy of the problem precludes precision, their
probable reliability should be carefully studied before an extended levée
system is built intended to guarantee protection against exceptional floods.

During recent years the complex and perplexing subject of geographic
nomenclature has received the careful consideration of a number of the
European nations, with a view to reaching a uniformity in treatment and the
transliteration of names of unwritten languages into Roman characters.
England, France, and Germany have adopted substantially the same system
of rules. Recent publications from these countries evidence the intention to
apply them as rapidly as circumstances will permit. Although we may rebel
at first on seeing such familiar names as Cairo spelled with a K, Mecca with
double k, and Muscat converted into Maskat, it is believed the general
principles adopted will eventually receive acquiescence—perhaps half-
hearted at first—and as the utility of the system becomes more apparent
through its universal adoption and we realize that maps from whatever
nation will give us the names of the same places in substantially the same
form, our prejudices must give way.

Under the provisions of an executive order issued on the fourth of
September last, our own Government has virtually adopted the European
system in the treatment of foreign names, thus bringing us in accord with
the principal nations upon a most important subject to students and
geographers the world over. The executive order constitutes a board
composed of ten representatives from different departments and bureaus of
the Government service, to which all questions relating to the work of the
board that may arise in the departments are to be referred, and requires all
persons in the Government service to respect the decisions that may be

Page 108

rendered. The board in its first bulletin, recently issued, has announced its
adoption of the English system for the treatment of foreign names and
transliteration into Roman characters, and has presented principles to guide
in reaching decisions affecting home names. These principles will doubtless
be added to as new questions arise, so that at no very distant day we may
see formulated a set of rules that will be instructive as well as useful in their
application. The first bulletin seems to have been received favorably, and
we may hope, as the work of the board advances and the importance of the
subject is more generally realized, that it will gain the hearty endorsement
of the public and a support that must largely increase the usefulness of its
labors.

In conclusion, permit me to congratulate the society upon its first attempt at
scientific exploration in the field. The Mount St. Elias expedition, under the
leadership of Mr. I. C. Russell, with Mr. Mark B. Kerr as topographer, left
Seattle, Washington, in June last, and after spending more than two months
on the mountain sides, one-half their time above the snow line, have
returned with notes, specimens, and data of the greatest interest. The
topography was sketched over an area of about one thousand square miles,
and includes the determination of the geographical position and elevation of
Mount St. Elias and many neighboring peaks. Mount St. Elias is indicated
to be not so high by some 4,000 feet as the heretofore accepted elevation,
19,500 feet. The difficulties attending the determination of the height of this
mountain are so great that the range between the extreme elevations that
have been given by different explorers is nearly 6,000 feet. This is believed
to be the first height for it that has been derived from a carefully measured
base, and it therefore should receive great weight. But I regret to say that in
the chain of triangles connecting with the top of the mountain, the difficulty
of placing well-conditioned triangles seems to have been so great that the
observers were forced to accept very small included angles, which
necessarily casts a doubt upon the resulting distances. We must therefore
accept the new elevation with caution until it is verified by further
observations.

Page 109

The party was unfortunately prevented from reaching the top of Mount St.
Elias by severe storms, but the ascent was so nearly accomplished that Mr.
Russell is confident he found a practicable route; and it seems probable that
had he been started ten days or two weeks earlier the first ascent of Mount
St. Elias would have been recorded as a part of the work of the expedition.

The full report of this expedition is now nearing completion, and will be
published by the Society at an early date. To this I must refer you for the
interesting details, and experiences encountered by the explorers.

The expedition was organized by the Society, but in congratulating
ourselves we should not forget that our thanks are due to the United States
Geological Survey for the assignment of officers to conduct the work in the
field and for assistance rendered in the organization; and we may hope the
substantial results that have been secured will prove as pleasing to that great
national work as they are to your board of managers.

Washington, January 23, 1891.

Page 110

Page 111

VOL. III, PP. 41–52 MAY 1, 1891

THE

Page 112

NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE.

GEOGRAPHY OF THE AIR.
ANNUAL REPORT BY VICE-PRESIDENT

A. W. GREELY.

(Presented to the Society January 23, 1891.)

In fulfilling the duties growing out of his official position in connection
with this Society, your Vice-President of the Geography of the Air has been
so closely occupied with executive and other official duties devolving upon
him as to preclude his giving that amount of time and labor to this annual
report that the subject merits. Indeed, no report would be submitted this
year had it not seemed better to insure a continuity of these annual
addresses, even if one of them might not be up to the high standard which
should be maintained for them.

It must have impressed every general reader of scientific journals that the
past year has been marked by the publication of an unusual number of
controversial articles relating entirely or in part to meteorology. Some of the
discussions of this subject appear to be in the nature of speculation, which,
by good authority, is defined to be "chiefly the work of the imagination, and
has little to do with realities." The status of the meteorological discussion
which has been going on for some time seems to be this: A number of men,

Page 113

applying themselves to investigation in separate branches or stages of the
same science, are attempting to reconcile their views, which, based as they
are upon entirely different processes of investigation, are not entirely
accordant. Some, at least, of these writers are still apparently groping in the
preliminary, the "natural history" stage of the science of meteorology, while
one alone stands as the exponent of the "natural philosophy" of
meteorology.

To me it seems that it could not have failed to impress any interested reader
who has followed the late publications on the convectional theory that, in
order to clear the ground for definite meteorological discussion, it is
necessary to determine the exact meaning of the various technical terms
employed by the various writers. Whether from looseness of verbiage
originally or from the not infrequent habit of disputants when worsted to
change their ground by claiming to be misunderstood, we find that some
writers are unwilling either to stand by their first criticisms or to openly
abandon them; they prefer to explain away their defective statements and
gradually shift around to positions almost diametrically opposed to those
originally assumed.

The generally accepted theory as to cyclones attributes their initiatory
formation to an unequal distribution of temperature with resulting mean
diminution of pressure, and the movement of the air from places of high to
places of low pressure, the lower air ascending with a gyratory motion,
while air particles moving from opposite directions form couples which
produce rotation. When energetic motions raise the ascending air to such a
height that the temperature, cooled dynamically in ascending, goes below
the dew-point, then the great store of latent heat thereby set free becomes, it
is assumed, the main source of energy in maintaining the upward
convectional movement. The subsidiary causes are attributed to the
diminution of pressure on the collapse of the vapor, and also to the direct
absorption of the sun's heat at the upper cloud surface.

In anticyclones a slow gyratory descending motion of the air is assumed.
Ferrel considers the cyclone and anticyclone one system, and believes that
air flowing into the cyclone from a "high" at the ground passes out into the
higher atmospheric strata.

Page 114

Dr. Hann has put forth the hypothesis that the genesis of cyclones and
anticyclones may be sought in the general atmospheric circulation through a
difference of temperature of the air from the equator to the poles. He speaks
of a congestion in the upper or anti-trade winds, where the air heaps up to a
great height, this being the cause of the anticyclones; and he maintains that
the low temperature of the "high" is due to ground radiation, and that no
part of the high pressure is the result of low temperature.

To this hypothesis of Dr. Hann, ascribing the genesis of storms to the
general circulation of the atmosphere, no application of the laws of
dynamics has yet been made with a view of developing it into an acceptable
"theory." If it should be established it does not follow that it will in any way
affect the truth of the commonly accepted "convectional system," which,
founded as it is on the well-known laws of thermo-dynamics, is not likely to
be successfully assailed. There may be an improved nomenclature for the
laws of statics and dynamics that will express to the mind more clearly the
relation of cause and effect; but until the advance of scientific research
modifies the present formulation of these laws the convectional theory will
be generally accepted as giving the true interpretation of all the phenomena
to which it could be applied.

Professor Russell, in commenting on this subject, expresses the opinion that
the low temperature is due to the convective interchange of air at a low
temperature in the upper strata with air of a high temperature in lower
strata, such convective interchange tending to make the whole body of air
of a temperature coinciding throughout with the adiabatic rate of upward
diminution, with the consequent result of rendering the air at the surface of
the earth cooler than previously and the upper air warmer. When the upward
diminution of temperature is less than the adiabatic rate, in the forced
circulation of air crossing a mountain ridge, there occurs the dynamic
heating which is observed in the case of the foehn winds. The low
temperature near the earth he does not believe could ever be entirely
produced by nocturnal radiation from the ground. The high pressure, in his
opinion, is largely the result of greater density due to low temperature, as is
very clearly indicated by the fact that the temperature is almost inversely
proportional to the pressure, and that the places of lower temperature
substantially coincide with the places of greatest pressure.

Page 115

In advancing hypotheses and inviting discussion the real object is, or at
least should be, to discover the essential cause or causes which determine
the initial formation and subsequent maintenance and progress of the
cyclone. Some real progress in charting lines of equal density seems to have
been made by M. Nils Ekholm following Professor Abbe's system of
"isostaths," one using the term density, the other buoyancy. Professor Abbe
also introduces the factor of the orographic gradient, but the latter is simply
the measure of a resistance. The objection to this form of determination is
this, that it is a measure of mass only. The density of two masses of air is
determined to be the same; but as the density may result from two entirely
different causes, their physical relations cannot be fully expressed in units
of gravity. The methods of Professor Abbe and of M. Nils Ekholm
undoubtedly give good results, partly from the coincidence that humidity
usually varies directly as the temperature.

The method proposed by Captain James Allen in 1888, which is briefly
described in appendix 24 to the annual report of the Chief Signal Officer for
1890, appears to afford the means of more clearly expressing the relations
that exist between the mass of the atmosphere and the forces available for
the generation and movement of storms. Its tentative application at the
Signal Office has anticipated and explained storm movements not indicated
or accounted for by the usual methods.

As pertinent to this matter, there is instanced a study of the progress of
thunder-storms made by Berg, who observes that the line of storm front in
every case investigated made a decidedly conspicuous bend into the densest
part of the lines representing the absolute humidity.

Scientific conditions have so changed that in these later years it becomes
more and more difficult for investigators to publish any work which may be
characterized as magnum opus. Under this head, however, must be classed
Buchan's important memoir on the distribution of atmospheric pressure,
temperature, and wind direction over the whole world; a large quarto
volume, which contains much new material. It has been incorporated with
the results of observations during the Challenger expedition, in which series
this work appears. The isobars and isotherms for each month in the year for

Page 116

the whole earth are charted on Mercator's projection, and for the northern
hemisphere on a chart constructed on a polar projection. In connection with
an abstruse subject, to which Buchan has paid so much attention, the
diurnal variation of pressure, he opines from the Challenger observations
that the oscillations are due to the heat taken from the solar rays directly in
passing through the air and instantaneously communicated through the
whole mass from top to bottom by heating and evaporation of water on
innumerable dust particles. The afternoon minimum, he thinks, is caused by
upward currents removing a portion of the lower air. Marked differences
exist between the continental and insular types, since on islands the
morning minimum is unusually large and the afternoon minimum so small
as to disappear, while in continental types the reverse conditions obtain.

Werner Von Siemens, in answering Sprung's criticism on his general air
currents, after repelling certain statements of Sprung, describes his own
theories, which are worthy of restating:

1. All winds are caused by the disturbances of indifferent equilibrium,
and the motion of the air is to restore equilibrium.

2. These disturbances are caused through overheating of the layers of
air near the surface of the earth by insolation, through unsymmetrical
cooling of the higher layers by radiation, and through the heaping up
of air masses caused by obstructions.

3. The disturbances are adjusted by ascending currents, wherein the
particular species of acceleration occurs in which the increase of
velocity is proportioned to the diminution of pressure.

4. The upward currents correspond to equally great descending
currents in which there is a decrease of velocity corresponding to the
acceleration in the upward velocity.

5. If the region of overheating of the air is limited locally, a local
upward current reaching to the highest layers of air arises, and
whirlwinds appear with interior spirally ascending currents and outside

Page 117

similar spiral descending currents. The result of this is dispersion of
the superfluous heat of the lower air by which the adiabatic
equilibrium is disturbed throughout the whole column of air taking
part in the whirling motion.

6. In case the region of disturbance of the indifferent (or adiabatic)
equilibrium is very extensive, as, for example, the whole of the
tropical zone, the temperature adjustment can no longer be
accomplished by locally ascending whirls, and a whirling current must
then arise involving the whole atmosphere. The same conditions apply
to these as to the local whirls of accelerated upward motion and
retarded descent in such a manner that the velocity at different
altitudes arising from heat converted to work is approximately
proportional to the prevailing pressure at the place.

7. In consequence of the meridional motion produced and maintained
by conversion of heat into work, the whole atmosphere in every
latitude must rotate with approximately the same absolute velocity.
Thus the meridional currents produced by overheating combine with
the currents embracing the whole wind system of the earth, with the
result of disseminating the excess of temperature and humidity of the
torrid zone over the temperate and arctic zones, thereby producing the
prevailing winds.

8. This is accomplished by the production of alternating local
depressions and elevations of barometric pressure by the disturbance
of indifferent equilibrium in the upper layers of the air.

9. "Highs" and "lows" are a consequence of the temperatures and
velocities of the upper currents.

Whence it follows that the most important problem of meteorology is the
investigation of the causes and consequences of the disturbance of
indifferent equilibrium of the atmosphere, and the weightiest problem in
weather prediction is the investigation of the geographical origin or
extraction of air currents pursuing their course above us toward the pole.

Page 118

In Pomortsew's treatise on synoptic meteorology, published in Russia, there
are full chapters on prediction of weather, whether from synoptic charts,
from observations at a single place, or from prognostics of great length
based on researches on the succession of warm and cold months. It also
contains Pomortsew's investigations on the types of pressure distribution in
eastern Europe, as well as the average path of cyclones.

The favorable opportunities afforded by the Eiffel tower have been utilized
by French meteorologists. M. Angot states that during the anti-cyclone of
November, 1889, the temperature on the tower was several degrees higher
than below. The change of weather set in earlier, with a strong and warm
wind, on the tower, while the air at the ground was cold and calm. Wind
observations on the tower show a ratio of 3.1 at that height (303 meters) to
the velocity at a height of 21 meters, as determined from 101 days'
observations, which, remarkable at such a small height, discloses the
peculiarity of high mountain stations.

Partsch, writing on evidence of climatic changes within historical times in
the Mediterranean region, remarks that too much attention has been given
to changes in crops, the introduction of plants, and the limits of domestic
animals. He states that existing information as to the harvest time of ancient
days indicates an unchanged climate, while the land-locked lakes in Tunis,
which afford the best evidence on rainfall variation, show absolutely no
climatic change.

Van Bebber, in writing on weather types, claims that a line drawn from the
center of a cyclone perpendicularly in the direction of the heaviest gradients
will in general be perpendicular to the subsequent path of the "low," and
that these lows leave high temperature on the right hand.

Page 119

Hill, in describing hail-stones and tornadoes in India, explains them on the
principle of the great diminution of temperature upwards in the air, but a
critic, in combating this theory, objects to the high and low stations selected
to show temperatures.

The so-called "weather plant" of the tropics has passed through the process
of investigation with the usual result. It appears surprising that in these days
it should be believed that any plant or animal can foretell weather 48 hours
in advance, particularly after considering the vast amount of proof as to the
enormous rapidity with which weather-changes progress from day to day.

Hugo Meyer, in treating the precipitation of central Germany for the ten
years ending in 1885, pertinently remarks that the same significance does
not attach to the same rainfall for all places and different times of the year,
for this average value is not the amount most likely to fall in any particular
interval of time, since there is a limit to the extent of the negative deviations
on one side—that is, 0 or no rainfall, while on the positive side there is no
limit. The most probable depth of rainfall, therefore, is less than the mean
value, the preponderance of negative over positive deviations being about
10 per cent. and sometimes as great as 20 per cent.

Professor W. M. Davis wrote an interesting review of Professor Ferrel's
popular treatise on the winds, published a year ago. Commenting on the
review, the editor of Meteorologische Zeltschrift, Vienna, remarks on a very
important omission in the treatise, namely, the absence of all reference to
the diurnal variation of the wind and the many interesting relations it bears
to other phenomena, a notable omission in a treatise specially devoted to
winds. The treatment of the monsoon wind and its relation to the general
circulation is highly commended by the editor, and indicated as being all
new.

Page 120

Your Vice-President has elsewhere expressed his opinion that monsoon
winds, applying the term by liberal construction to signify winds which
recur with returning seasons, cannot with any degree of correctness be
asserted to prevail in the United States. It is true that the prevailing surface
winds of the greater part of the United States come from the western
quadrants—that is, between southwest and northwest—and so are in
substantial harmony with the general atmospheric circulation as shown by
the upper-wind currents of Mount Washington (from the northwest) and
Pike's peak (from the southwest). But, apart from the easterly and
northeasterly trades on the Florida coast, it appears from the records that in
no case for any considerable section of the country do 50 per cent. of the
winds blow, for any consecutive number of months, either from any single
point or from two neighboring points of the compass. Occasionally,
however, the local configuration of the country is such that winds are drawn
up or down valleys, and, being diverted from their free and proper direction,
the wind in such cases follows the trend of the valley or depression.

In general your Vice-President would feel inclined to refer only casually to
the work proceeding from the Bureau over which he has the honor to
preside, but this year has been marked by special researches and
investigations of general interest. As the work of investigation has been
entrusted to the professors of the Signal Service, due credit should not be
refused them from their own official chief.

Special reference should be made to the work of Professor Charles F.
Marvin, whose successful experiments on wind pressures and velocities
have attracted the attention of experts both in Europe and in this country.
Unfortunately there was available only a small sum (about one hundred
dollars) for the expense of experiments, but with this petty sum,
supplemented by his ingenuity, Professor Marvin has very satisfactorily
determined the coëfficients of the various forms of the Robinson
anemometer, with which instrument the velocity of the wind is very
generally determined. Following these investigations, the Royal
Meteorological Society of England reopened the question, which, after a

Page 121

costly set of experiments with results widely differing from those of
Professor Marvin, had been considered closed.

The general results of these researches, which are believed to be sufficiently
definite for general questions, are not only prized by the scientist, but they
are of value to the engineer and the builder. Indeed, to all interested in
costly structures or extended works liable to harm from wind pressures, the
factor of safety is a matter of no small pecuniary importance. These
experiments show that, as was formerly believed to be the case, the wind
pressure varies as the square of the velocity of the wind, expressed in miles
per hour; but a most important fact has developed, namely, that the pressure
in pounds per square foot is equal to the miles of hourly velocity multiplied
by 0.004 instead of 0.005, as was formerly assumed.

Professor Marvin was not content with one system of experiments, but he
further attacked the problem in a direct manner by a method which checked
and verified his experiments with the whirling machine. On the summit of
Mount Washington, at an elevation of 6,300 feet, he obtained
simultaneously and under the same conditions, by automatic and electrical
apparatus, continuous registration of the pressure of the wind in pounds per
square foot and of the velocity in miles per hour.

The results thus verified can be considered as conclusive from a general
standpoint. The corrections for the Robinson anemometer thus determined
from these experiments are comparatively unimportant at low velocities,
say from 10 to 15 miles per hour, being only a fraction of a mile per hour.
The uncorrected velocities, however, are in all cases too large, and by
greater and greater amounts the higher the velocity. At 60 miles per hour the
observed velocities are about 12 miles per hour too high, and for an
indicated velocity of 90 miles the experiments show that the actual velocity
is but a fraction over 69 miles per hour.

The anemometer formula found to satisfy most closely the entire range of
experiments has the following form for velocities in miles per hour:

Log. V = 0.509 + 0.9012 log. v.

Page 122

This difference indicated by the formula may seem small and insignificant,
as it is in the case of light winds, but at very high velocities the differences
are very great. For instance, an actual velocity of 60 miles per hour may
occur at some time in almost any locality of the United States for a few
minutes, and even greater velocities are occasionally reported, apart from
severe tornadoes. Under the old coëfficients for the Robinson anemometer
an actual velocity of 60 miles per hour would have been reported as 77
miles per hour, which under the old factor of 0.005 would mean a pressure
of 29.6 pounds per square foot; but when considered with reference to the
true velocity of 60 miles, under the new factor of 0.004, the pressure would
only be 14.4 pounds per square foot—a reduction of over 50 per cent. from
the pressure-values formerly accepted.

Professor Marvin has undertaken to verify, and also to extend to even lower
temperatures, the observations of Regnault as to the pressure of aqueous
vapor at low temperatures, especial attention being given to temperature
conditions from 0° centigrade to –50° centigrade. These observations
disclose, below 0° centigrade, small but constant differences from the
values assigned by Regnault.

In all this work Professor Marvin has shown such ingenuity of resource,
such skill in adapting means to the end, and such deftness in improvising
and manufacturing the requisite instruments as have elicited commendation
from all who have seen his work and followed his methods. Your Vice-
President alludes to this not only to give that credit rightfully due to
Professor Marvin, but to illustrate this as a type of the highly important
work which is being done in all branches of science here in Washington by
young men sometimes illy equipped as to means, and still more illy paid.
Men engaged in work of original investigation should receive higher pay
than clerks in charge of routine duties; but unfortunately the majority of
them do not.

The work of Professor Hazen in charting tornadoes and in determining their
relative frequency and severity is directly in the line of the Geography of
the Air.

Page 123

Great attention had previously been given to this subject by Lieutenant John
P. Finley, who, with indefatigable industry, had accumulated an enormous
mass of data relative to these violent outbursts of nature's forces. The
figures and deductions previously put forth under the authority of the Signal
Service having been questioned, the Chief Signal Officer felt obliged, in
view of the growing practical importance of the question, as indicated by
the great sums annually paid out in the Ohio valley and in the trans-
Mississippi region for protection against tornadoes, to reöpen the subject.
Instructions of the most conservative character were given to Professor
Hazen to determine carefully the prevalence and number of tornadoes in the
United States, the areas devastated by them, and the number of lives lost
annually. This work was carefully scrutinized during its progress to see that
it should be devoid of theory and rest on the solid basis of fact. The results
are most assuring to every one, and must serve to allay the unreasonable
fears of the inhabitants of the so-called "tornado districts." It appears that
there is no part of the United States in which annually more than one square
mile of devastation or severe destruction can be expected for each 185,000
square miles, although cases of limited destruction may occur annually for
about every 5,000 square miles of area. In no state may destructive
tornadoes be expected, on an average, more than once in two years; and the
area over which total destruction can be expected is, as shown by the
foregoing figures, exceedingly small, even in localities most liable to these
violent storms. The annual death casualties from tornadoes have averaged,
in the last 18 years, 102 annually; but it is believed that the death rate from
lightning is greater than that from tornadoes, since during March to August,
1890, the names of 110 are on record who have lost their lives by lightning,
although the data are incomplete, especially as regards the southern states.
These statistics cannot be passed by lightly, however, and it is doubtful if in
the main they are much in error. By them it appears from five years' record
that the average annual death rate by lightning in the United States is 3.8
per million of inhabitants, or 0.2 above the average. In Sweden, for sixty
years, the average has been 3.0; in France, for forty-nine years, 3.1; in
Baden, for seventeen years, 3.8; and in Prussia, for fifteen years, 4.4 per
million.

Other figures, given by a life-insurance agent in St. Louis, which the author
claims to have compiled with great care, place the average annual rate of

Page 124

death from lightning in the United States at 206, being more than double the
deaths from tornadoes. It must be understood that these figures are not
vouched for, and must be very cautiously received, as originating with
companies interested pecuniarily in the statistics.

On the whole, therefore, it may be safely assumed that tornadoes are not so
destructive to life as thunder-storms.

Professor Thomas Russell has formulated a method for prediction of cold
waves. They always occur after "lows" and before "highs," and different
cold waves vary in extent from three "units" to sixty. A "unit" of
temperature-fall is taken as a fall of twenty degrees over an area of 50,000
square miles.

The temperature-fall curves in the United States are approximately elliptical
in shape. Perfect ellipses represent actual temperature falls with an error not
exceeding six degrees in most cases. These fall lines are intersections of
planes with a cone which graphically represents the totality of temperature-
fall, the contents of the cone being equal to the area of its base multiplied
by its altitude, which is the greatest fall in temperature at the center of the
cold wave.

A formula has been devised, based on 127 special cases, representing the
amount of fall in terms of the amount of barometric depression in a "low,"
and the amount of excess if a "high," and the density of the isothermal lines
in the region.

From proper consideration of the type of low area, shape of isobars, and
position of the long axis, definite conclusions can be drawn as to the
subsequent shape of the elliptical twenty-degree temperature-fall area and
its position.

A method has been devised, also by Professor Russell, for determining the
maximum fall of temperature at the center of the cold wave. The maximum
fall and extent of fall being known, from suitably prepared tables, the area
of twenty-degree fall can be derived. Previously prepared pieces of card-

Page 125

board are laid in the proper position on a map of suitable scale, and lines
drawn around them. Between the line representing the twenty-degree fall
and the center, the other falls of thirty degrees, forty degrees, etc., are
sketched in.

The foregoing sketch of the geography of the air may appear too superficial
and limited for the purposes of this Society, but its further elaboration was
impracticable. Indeed, the subject of meteorology could hardly have been
touched upon this year had it not been for the courtesy of Professor Russell
in placing at my disposal notes upon translations from foreign publications,
especially from the German; which publications I have been unable to
examine save in a casual way.

The address, as it is, is submitted only in the hope that it may serve, if no
other purpose, at least to indicate the great interest which now obtains in the
geography of the air, and which manifests itself in the production of
meteorological pamphlets and publications too numerous to permit any one
charged with important executive duties to examine them all, even in a non-
critical way.

Page 126

Page 127

VOL. III, PP. 53–204, PLS. 2–20 MAY 29, 1891

THE

Page 128

NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE.

AN EXPEDITION TO MOUNT ST. ELIAS, ALASKA

BY ISRAEL C. RUSSELL.

(Accepted for publication March 18, 1891.)

CONTENTS.

Introduction—The Southern Coast of Alaska

Part I—Previous Explorations in the St. Elias Region
Bering, 1741
Cook, 1778
La Pérouse, 1786
Dixon, 1787
Douglas, 1788
Malaspina, 1792
Vancouver, 1794
Belcher, 1837
Tebenkof, 1852
United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, 1874, 1880
New York Times Expedition, 1886
Topham Expedition, 1888

Page 129

Part II—Narrative of the St. Elias Expedition of 1890
Organization
From Seattle to Sitka
From Sitka to Yakutat Bay
Canoe Trip up Yakutat Bay
Base Camp on the Shore of Yakutat Bay
First Day's Tramp
Canoe Trip in Disenchantment Bay
From Yakutat Bay to Blossom Island
Blossom Island
Life above the Snow-Line
First Camp in the Snow
Across Pinnacle Pass
First full View of St. Elias
Summit of Pinnacle Pass Cliffs
Across Seward Glacier to Dome Pass
Up the Agassiz Glacier
Camp on the Newton Glacier
Highest Point reached
Alone in the highest Camp
The Return
Suggestions

Part III—Sketch of the Geology of the St. Elias Region
General Features
Yakutat System
Pinnacle System
St. Elias Schist
Geological Structure

Part IV—Glaciers of the St. Elias Region
Natural Divisions of Glaciers
Alpine Glaciers
Characteristics of Alpine Glaciers above the Snow-Line
Characteristics of Alpine Glaciers below the Show-Line
Piedmont Glaciers

Page 130

Part V—Height and Position of Mount St. Elias

Appendix A—Official Instructions governing the Expedition

Appendix B—Report on topographic Work; by Mark B. Kerr

Appendix C—Report on auriferous Sands from Yakutat Bay; by J. Stanley-
Brown

Appendix D—Report on fossil Plants; by Lester F. Ward

Index

Page 131

ILLUSTRATIONS.

Plate 2—Sketch Map of Alaska
3—Map of the St. Elias Region, after La Pérouse
4—Map of the Eastern Shore of Yakutat Bay, after Dixon
5—Map of the St. Elias Region, after Malaspina
6—Map of Bay de Monti, after Malaspina
7—Map of Disenchantment Bay, after Malaspina
8—Sketch Map of St. Elias Region, by Mark B. Kerr
9—The Hubbard Glacier; drawn from Photograph by A. L. Broadbent
10—Wall of Ice on Eastern Side of the Atrevida Glacier; from a
Photograph
11—View on the Atrevida Glacier; from a Photograph
12—Entrance of an Ice-Tunnel; from a Photograph
13—Deltas in an Abandoned Lake-Bed; from a Photograph
14—A River on the Lucia Glacier; from a Photograph (reproduced from
The Century, April, 1891)
15—Entrance to a Glacial Tunnel; from a Photograph
16—View of the Malaspina Glacier from Blossom Island; from a
Photograph
17—Moraines on the Marvine Glacier; from a Photograph
18—View of the Hitchcock Range from near Dome Pass
19—View of Mount St. Elias from Dome Pass; drawn from a Photograph
20—View of Mount St. Elias from Seward Glacier; drawn from a
Photograph

Figure 1—Diagram illustrating the Formation of Icebergs
2—View of a glacial Lakelet; from a Photograph
3—Section of a glacial Lakelet
4—Diagram illustrating the Formation of marginal Crevasses
5—Crevasses near Pinnacle Pass; from a Photograph
6—Snow Crests on Ridges and Peaks; from Field Sketches

Page 132

7—Faulted Pebble from Pinnacle Pass
8—Faulted Pebble from Pinnacle Pass

INTRODUCTION.

THE SOUTHERN COAST OF ALASKA.

The southern coast of Alaska is remarkable for the regularity of its general
outline. If a circle a thousand miles in diameter be inscribed on a map of the
northern Pacific with a point in about latitude 54° and longitude 145° as a
center, a large part of its northern periphery will be found to coincide with the
southern shore of Alaska between Dixon entrance on the east and the Alaska
peninsula on the west. On the northern part of this great coast-circle lies the
region explored in the summer of 1890 and described in the following pages.

From Cross sound, at the northern end of the great system of islands forming
southeastern Alaska, westward along the base of the Fairweather range, the
mountains are exceedingly rugged, and present some of the finest coast
scenery in the world. There are but two inlets east of Yakutat bay on this shore
which afford shelter even for small boats. These are Lituya bay and Dry bay.
Ships may enter Lituya bay, at certain stages of the tide, and find a safe harbor
within; but the approaches to Dry bay are not navigable. West of Yakutat bay
the coast is equally inhospitable all the way to Prince William sound.

As if to compensate for the lack of refuge on either end, there is in the center
of this great stretch of rock-bound coast, over 300 miles in extent, a
magnificent inlet known as Yakutat bay, in which a thousand ships could find
safe anchorage. On some old maps this bay is designated as "Baie de Monti,"
"Admiralty bay" and "Bering bay," as will be seen when its discovery and
history are discussed on another page.

Page 133

The southern shore of Alaska, for a distance of 200 miles along the bases of
the Fairweather and St. Elias ranges, is formed of a low table-land intervening
between the mountains and the sea. Yakutat bay is the only bight in this
plateau sufficiently deep to reach the mountain to the northward. This bay has
a broad opening to the sea; the distance between its ocean capes is twenty
miles, and its extension inland is about the same. Its eastern shore is fringed
with low, wooded islands, among which are sheltered harbors, safe from every
wind that blows. The most accessible of these is Port Mulgrave, near its
entrance on the eastern side.

The shores of Yakutat bay, on both the east and the west, are low and densely
wooded for a distance of twenty-five miles from the ocean, where the foot-
hills of the mountains begin. At the head of the bay the land rises in steep
bluffs and forms picturesque mountains, snow-capped the year round. These
highlands, although truly mountainous in their proportions, are but the foot-
hills of still nobler uplifts immediately northward. The bay extends through an
opening in the first range to the base of the white peaks beyond. This opening
was examined a century ago by explorers in search of the delusive "Northwest
passage," in the hope that it would lead to the long-sought "Strait of Annan"—
the dream of many voyagers. It was surveyed by the expedition in command
of Malaspina in 1792, and on account of his frustrated hopes was named
"Puerto del Desengaño," or "Disenchantment bay," as it has been rendered by
English writers.

The waters of Yakutat and Disenchantment bays are deep, and broken only by
islands and reefs along their eastern shores. A few soundings made in
Disenchantment bay within half a mile of the land showed a depth of from 40
to 120 fathoms. The swell of the ocean is felt up to the very head of the inlet,
indicating, as was remarked to me by Captain C. L. Hooper, that there are no
bars or reefs to break the force of the incoming swells.

The lowlands bordering Yakutat bay on the southeast are composed of
assorted glacial débris. Much of the country is low and swampy, and is
reported to contain numerous lakelets. Northwest of the bay the plateau is
higher than toward the southeast, and has a general elevation of about 500 feet
at a distance of a mile from the shore; but the height increases toward the
interior, where a general elevation of 1,500 feet is attained over large areas.
All of this plateau, excepting a narrow fringe along the shore, is formed by a
great glacier, belonging to what is termed in this paper the Piedmont type.

Page 134

There are many reasons for believing that the plateau southeast of Yakutat bay
was at one time covered by a glacier similar to the one now existing on the
northwest.1
1
This matter will be discussed in part IV of this paper, where it is also shown that Yakutat bay
itself was formerly occupied by glacial ice.

The mountains on the northern border of the seaward-stretching table-lands,
both southeast and northwest of Yakutat bay, are abrupt and present steep
southward-facing bluffs. This escarpment is formed of stratified sandstones
and shales, and owes its origin to the upheaval of the rocks along a line of
fracture. In other words, it is a gigantic fault scarp. The gravel and bowlders
forming the plateau extending oceanward have been accumulating on a
depressed orographic block (or mass of strata moved as a unit by mountain-
making forces), which has undergone some movement in very recent times, as
is recorded by a terrace on the fault scarp bordering it. West of Yakutat the
geological structure is more complex, and long mountain spurs project into the
platform of ice skirting the ocean. Filling the valleys between the mountain
spurs, there are many large seaward-flowing glaciers, tributary to the great
Piedmont ice-sheet.

This brief sketch of the geography of Yakutat bay, together with the
accompanying outline map of Alaska (plate 2), will, it is hoped, aid in making
intelligible the following historical sketch and the narrative of the present
expedition.

Page 135

PART I.

PREVIOUS EXPLORATIONS IN THE ST. ELIAS REGION.2
2
For more complete bibliographic references than space will allow in this paper, the reader is
referred to Dall and Baker's "Partial list of books, pamphlets, papers in serials, journals and other
publications on Alaska and adjacent regions;" in Pacific Coast Pilot: Coasts and Inlets of Alaska;
second series. U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, 1879; 4°, pp. 225–375.

BERING, 1741.

The first discovery of the southern coast of Alaska was made by Vitus Bering
and Alexei Cherikof, in the vessels St. Peter and St. Paul, in 1741. On July 20
of that year, Bering saw the mountains of the mainland, but anchored his

Page 136

vessels at Kyak island, 180 miles west of Yakutat bay, without touching the
continental shore. A towering, snow-clad summit northeast of Kyak island was
named "Mount St. Elias," after the patron saint of the day.

COOK, 1778.

The next explorer to visit this portion of Alaska was Captain James Cook, who
sailed past the entrance of Yakutat bay on May 4, 1778. Thinking that this was
the bay in which Bering anchored, he named it "Bering's bay." Mount St. Elias
was seen in the northwest at a distance of 40 leagues, but no attempt was made
to measure its height.

LA PÉROUSE, 1786.3
3
Voyage de la Pérouse autour du monde. Four vols., 4°, and atlas; Paris, 1797; vol. 2, pp. 130–
150.

Yakutat bay, in which we are specially interested, was next seen by the
celebrated French navigator, J. F. G. de la Pérouse, in command of the frigates
La Boussole and L'Astrolabe, on June 23, 1786.

The chart showing the route followed by La Pérouse during this portion of his
voyage is reproduced in plate 3. In the splendid atlas accompanying the
narrative of his travels, the explorer pictures the quaint, high-pooped vessels in
which he circumnavigated the globe. These French frigates were the first to
cruise off Yakutat bay. The last vessel to navigate those waters was the United
States revenue steamer Corwin, which took our little exploring party on board
in September, 1890, and then steamed northward to the ice-cliffs at the head of
Disenchantment bay. So far as I am aware, the Corwin is the only vessel that
has floated on the waters of that inlet north of Haenke island. One hundred
years has made a revolution in naval architecture, but has left this portion of
the Alaska coast still unexplored.

Page 137

La Pérouse sailed northward from the Sandwich islands, and first saw land,
which proved to be a portion of the St. Elias range, on June 23. At first the
shore was obscured by fog, which, as stated in the narrative of the voyage,
"suddenly disappearing, all at once disclosed to us a long chain of mountains
covered with snow, which, if the weather had been clear, we would have been
able to have seen thirty leagues farther off. We discovered Bering's Mount
Saint Elias, the summit of which appeared above the clouds."

The first view of the land is described as not awakening the feelings of joy
which usually accompany the first view of an unknown shore after a long
voyage. To quote the navigator's own words:

"Those immense heaps of snow, which covered a barren land without trees, were far from
agreeable to our view. The mountains appeared a little remote from the sea, which broke against a

Page 138

bold and level land, elevated about a hundred and fifty or two hundred fathoms. This black rock,
which appeared as if calcined by fire, destitute of all verdure, formed a striking contrast to the
whiteness of the snow, which was perceptible through the clouds; it served as the base to a long
ridge of mountains, which appeared to stretch fifteen leagues from east to west. At first we
thought ourselves very near it, the summit of the mountains appeared to be just over our heads,
and the snow cast forth a brightness calculated to deceive eyes not accustomed to it; but in
proportion as we advanced we perceived in front of the high ground hillocks covered with trees,
which we took for islands."

After some delay, on account of foggy weather, an officer was despatched to
the newly discovered land; but on returning he reported that there was no
suitable anchorage to be found. It is difficult at this time to understand the
reason for this adverse report, unless a landing was attempted on the western
side of Yakutat bay, where there are no harbors.

The name "Baie de Monti" was given to the inlet in honor of De Monti, the
officer who first landed. The location of this bay, as described in the narrative
and indicated on the map accompanying the report of the voyage, shows that it
corresponds with the Yakutat bay of modern maps.

Observations made at this time by M. Dagelet, the astronomer of the
expedition, determined the elevation of Mount St. Elias to be 1,980 toises.
Considering the toise as equivalent to 6.39459 English feet, this measurement
places the elevation of the mountain at 12,660 feet. What method was used in
making this measurement is not recorded, and we have therefore no means of
deciding the degree of confidence to be placed in it.

After failing to find an anchorage at Yakutat bay. La Pérouse sailed eastward,
and on June 29 discovered another bay, which he supposed to be the inlet
named "Bering's bay" by Captain Cook. It will be remembered that Cook's
"Bering's bay" is Yakutat bay as now known. It is evident that the French
navigator made an error in his identification, as the inlet designated as
Bering's bay on his chart corresponds with that now known as Dry bay. On the
maps referred to, a stream is represented as emptying into the head of this bay
and rising a long distance northward; this is evidently Alsek river, the
existence of which was for a long time doubted, but has recently been
established beyond all question.

Page 139

Finding it impossible to enter Dry bay, La Pérouse continued eastward and
discovered Lituya bay, as now known, but which he named "Port des
Francais." Here his ships anchored, after experiencing great difficulty in
entering the harbor, and remained for many days, during which trade was
carried on with the Indians, while surveys were made of the adjacent shores.

DIXON, 1787.4
4
The Voyage around the World; but more particularly to the Northwest Coast of America.
Performed in 1788–1789, in the King George and Queen Charlotte; Captains Portlock and Dixon:
4°, London, 1789.

Although the actual discovery of Yakutat bay is to be credited to the French,
the first exploration of its shores was made by an English captain. On May 23,
1787, Captain George Dixon anchored his vessel, the Queen Charlotte, within
the shelter of its southeastern cape, and, in honor of Constance John Phipps,
Lord Mulgrave, named the haven there discovered "Port Mulgrave." The
harbor is described in the narrative of Dixon's voyage as being "entirely
surrounded by low, flat islands, where scarcely any snow could be seen, and
well sheltered from any winds whatever."

The voyage of the Queen Charlotte was not made for the purpose of
increasing geographic knowledge, but with a commercial object. Trade was at
once opened with the natives, but resulted less favorably than was desired, as
only sixteen sea-otter skins and a few less valuable furs were secured.

On the chart accompanying the narrative of Dixon's voyage the inlet now
known as Yakutat bay is named "Admiralty bay."

A survey of the adjacent shores and inlets was made, and the astronomical
position of the anchorage was approximately determined. The map resulting
from these surveys, the first ever made of any portion of Yakutat bay, is
reproduced on a reduced scale as plate 4.

Page 140

Page 141

At the time of Dixon's voyage, the inhabitants numbered about seventy,
including men, women, and children, and were thus described:

"They are of about middle size, their limbs straight and well shaped, but, like the rest of the
inhabitants we have seen on the coast, are particularly fond of painting their faces with a variety
of colors, so that it is not any easy matter to discover their real complexion."

An amusing instance is narrated of inducing a woman to wash her face, when
it was discovered that—

"Her countenance had all the cheerful glow of an English milk maid, and the healthy red which
flushed her cheeks was even beautifully contrasted with the whiteness of her neck; her eyes were
black and sparkling; her eyebrows the same color, and most beautifully arched; her forehead so
remarkably clear that the transparent veins were seen meandering even in their minutest branches
—in short, she was what would be reckoned as handsome even in England. The symmetry of her
features, however, was marred, at least in the eyes of her English admirer, by the habit of wearing
a labret in the slit of her lower lip."

During our recent visit to Port Mulgrave we did not find the native women
answering to the glowing description of the voyager who discovered the
harbor; but this may be owing to the fact that we did not prevail upon any of
them to wash their faces.

One other discrepancy must be noted between the records of Dixon's voyage
and my own observations, made one hundred years later. The houses of the
natives are described in the narrative just cited as—

"The most wretched hovels that can possibly be conceived: a few poles stuck in the ground,
without order or regularity, recrossed and covered with loose boards, ... quite insufficient to keep
out the snow and rain."

While this description would apply to the temporary shelters now used by the
Yakutat Indians when on their summer hunting and fishing expeditions, it by
no means describes the houses in which they pass the winter. These are large
and substantially built of planks hewn from spruce trees, and in some
instances supported from the inside by four huge posts, carved and painted to
represent grotesque figures. In the center of the roof there is a large opening
through which the smoke escapes from the fire kindled in an open space in the

Page 142

floor. But few of the Indian villages of Alaska, excepting perhaps the homes of
the Thlinkets in the Alexandrian archipelago, are better built or more
comfortable than those at Port Mulgrave.

On the map of Port Mulgrave already referred to, "Point Turner" and "Point
Carrew" appear. The former was named for the second mate of the Queen
Charlotte, who was the first of her officers to land; the second name was
probably designed to honor another officer of the expedition, but of this I am
not positive.

DOUGLAS, 1788.5
5
Voyage of the Iphigenia; Captain Douglas: in Voyages made in the years 1788–1789 from China
to the Northwest Coast of America. John Meares, 4°, London, 1790.

In 1788, another trading vessel, the ship Iphigenia, in command of Captain
Douglas, visited the southern shore of Alaska and anchored in Yakutat bay; but
no special account of the country or the inhabitants is recorded in the narrative
of the voyage.

MALASPINA, 1792.6
6
Relacion del viage hecho por las goletas Sutil y Mexicana en el año de 1792 para reconocer el
estrecho de Fuca; con una introduccion en que se da noticia de las expediciones executadas
anteriormente por los Españoles en busca del paso del noroeste de la América [Por Don Dionisio
Alcala Galiano]. Madrid, 1802 [accompanied by an atlas]. Pp. CXII–CXXI.

About a hundred years ago the interest felt by the maritime nations of Europe
in a "Northwest passage," connecting the northern Atlantic with the northern
Pacific, was revived by the renewal of the discussion as to the authenticity of
Maldonado's reported discovery of the "Strait of Annan." The western
entrance to this strait was supposed to be about in the position of Yakutat bay.
Spain, in particular, after three hundred years of exploration and discovery in
all parts of the world, was still anxious to extend her conquests, and, if
possible, to discover the long-sought "Northwest passage." Two of her ships,
the Descubierta and Atrevida, were then at Acapulco, in command of Don
Alejandro Malaspina, who was engaged in a voyage of discovery.

Page 143

Malaspina, like Columbus, was a native of Italy in the service of Spain. Orders
were sent to him to cruise northward and test the truth of Maldonado's report.
The narrative of this voyage is supposed to have been written by Don Dionisio
Alcala Galiano, but his name does not appear on the title page. Still more
curious is the fact that Malaspina's name is omitted from the narrative of his
own voyage. On his return to Spain, he was thrown into prison, on account of
court intrigues, and his discoveries were suppressed for many years.

Malaspina left Acapulco on the first of May, 1791, and reached the vicinity of
the present site of Sitka on June 25. Two days later, Mount Fairweather, or
"Monte Buen-tiempo," as it is designated on Spanish maps, was sighted.
Continuing northwestward, the entrance to Yakutat bay was reached. The
opening through the first range of mountains at its head seemed to correspond
to Maldonado's description of the entrance to the mythical "Strait of Annan."

The eastern shore of Yakutat bay, called "Almiralty bay" on the Spanish chart,
was explored, and an excursion was made in boats into Disenchantment bay as
far as Haenke island. "Disenchantment bay," as the name appears on modern
charts, was named "Desengaño bay" by Malaspina, as previously stated, in
allusion to the frustration of his hopes on not finding a passage leading to the
Atlantic. Explorations in Disenchantment bay were checked by ice, which
descended from the north and filled all of the inlets north of Haenke island.
This is indicated on the map forming plate 7 (page 67), which is reproduced
from the atlas accompanying the narrative of Malaspina's voyage. Special
interest attaches to this map for the reason that by comparing it with that
forming plate 8 (page 75), made 100 years later, the retreat of the glaciers
during that interval can be determined.7 At the time of Malaspina's expedition,
the Hubbard and Dalton glaciers were united, and were probably also joined
by some of the neighboring glaciers which do not now reach tide-water; the
whole forming a confluent ice stream which occupied all of Disenchantment
bay northeast of Haenke island.
7
It must be remembered, however, that the map, plate 8, is not from detailed surveys; the portion
referred to was sketched from a few stations only and is much generalized.

A portion of the general map of the coast of southern Alaska, showing the
route followed by the Descubierta and the Atrevida, and depicting the
topography of the adjacent shores, has been reproduced in plate 5. It will be
noticed that on this map Lituya bay is called "Pt. des Francais," while Dry bay

Page 144

is designated as "Bering's bay." These and other names were adopted from the
maps of La Pérouse. A map of "Bahia de Monti," from Malaspina's report, is
reproduced in plate 6.

MAP OF THE ST. ELIAS REGION, AFTER MALASPINA

Page 145

An extract from Galiano's account of Malaspina's discoveries in Yakutat and
Disenchantment bays,8 translated by Robert Stein, of the U. S. Geological
Survey, is here inserted, in order that the reader may be able to form an
independent judgment of the value of the evidence just referred to as bearing
on the retreat of the glaciers:

"An observatory was established on shore, and some absolute altitudes were taken in order to
furnish a basis for the reckoning of the watches; but the great concourse of Indians, their
importunity and thievishness, made it necessary to transfer all the instruments on board. Still the
latitude was determined, the watches were regulated, the number of oscillations made by the
simple pendulum was observed, and the height of Mount St. Elias was measured, being 6,507.6
varas [17,847 feet] above sea-level. The launches being ready, put to sea on July 2 with the
commander of the expedition, in order to reconnoitre the channel promised by the opening,
similar to that depicted by Ferrer Maldonado in his voyage; but the small force of the tide noticed
at the entrance, and the indications of the natives, made it plain not only that the desired passage
did not exist there, but that the extent of the channel was very short; which was also rendered

Page 146

evident by the perpetual frost covering the inner west shore. The launches anchored there, having
penetrated into the channel with great difficulty, the oars being clogged by the floating masses of
snow; they measured a base, made some marks, gathered various objects and stones for the
naturalists, and, having reached the line of perpetual frost, returned to the bay where they had
anchored.9 They there observed the latitude to be 59° 59' 30", and six azimuths of the sun, which
gave the variation of the needle as 32° 49'. Before leaving that anchorage the commander buried a
bottle with record of the reconnoissance and possession taken in the name of the king. They called
the harbor Desangaño, the opening Bahia de las Bancas, and the island in the interior Haenke, in
memory of D. Tadeo Haenke, botanist and naturalist of the expedition. On the third day they set
out on their voyage to Mulgrave, where they arrived on the 6th, after reconnoitering various
channels and islands north of that port and mapping them."

8
Ibid., pp. XCIV–CXVI.

9
On the coast of the mainland east of Knight island.—I. C. R.

Following the portion of the narrative above quoted, there is an account of the
natives, containing much information of interest to ethnologists, but which it is
not necessary to follow in a geographic report. On July 5 the corvettes sailed
westward, and made a reconnoissance as far as Montegue island. Returning
eastward, they again sighted Mount St. Elias on July 22.

"On the 28th they were three leagues west of the capes which terminate in Bering bay [Dry bay];
the mountain of that name being about five leagues distant from the coast and rising 5,368.3 varas
[14,722 feet] above the sea-level, and in latitude 59° 0' 42" and longitude 2° 4' from Port
Mulgrave."

Mount Bering does not appear on any map that I have seen. Which of the
numerous high peaks in the vicinity of Dry bay should be designated by that
name remains to be determined.

In a record of the astronomical work of Malaspina's expedition10 there are
some interesting observations on the position and elevation of Mount St. Elias,
a translation of which, by Mr. Stein, is here given:

"True longitude of Mulgrave west of Cadiz, 133° 24' 12". On the same day, the 30th of June
[1792], at the observatory of Mulgrave, at 6h. 30' in the morning, the true altitude of the sun was
observed to be 16° 14' 20", and its inclination being 23° 11' 30" and the latitude 59° 34' 20", the
true azimuth of the sun from north to east was concluded to be 71° 43' 0". But having measured

Page 147

on the same occasion with the theodolite 110° 33' from the sun's vertical to the vertical of Mount
St. Elias, the difference between these two quantities is the astronomic azimuth. Hence, from the
observatory of Mulgrave, said mountain bears N. 38° 50' W., a distance of 55.1 miles, deduced by
means of good observations from the ends of a sufficient base. A quadrant was used to measure
the angle of apparent altitude of the mountain, 2° 38' 6", and allowing for terrestrial refraction,
which is one-tenth of the distance of 55.1 miles, the true altitude was found to be 2° 34' 39";
whence its elevation above sea-level was concluded to be 2,793 toises [17,860 feet], and the
length of the tangent to the horizon, 152 miles, allowance being made for the increase due to
terrestrial refraction....

"Lastly, with the rhumb, or astronomic azimuth, and the distance from the observatory of
Mulgrave to Mount St. Elias, it was ascertained that that mountain was 43' 15" to the north and 1°
9' to the west, whence its latitude is found to be 60° 17' 35" and its longitude 134° 33' 10" west of
Cadiz."

10
Memorias sobre las observaciones astronomicas hechas por les navegantes Españoles en
distintos lugares del globe; Por Don Josef Espinosa y Tello. Madrid, en la Imprente real, Año de
1809, 2 vols., large 8°; vol. 1, pp. 57–60.

Taking the longitude of Cadiz as 6° 19' 07" W. (San Sebastian light-house), the
longitude of St. Elias from this determination would be 140° 52' 17" W.

VANCOUVER, 1794.11
11
A Voyage of Discovery to the Northern Pacific Ocean and around the World, 1790–'95; new
edition, 6 vols., London, 1801. The citations which follow are from vol. 5, pp. 348–407.

The next vessels to visit Yakutat bay after Malaspina's voyage, so far as
known, were the Discovery and Chatham, under command of Captain George
Vancouver. This voyage increased knowledge of the geography of southern
Alaska more than any that preceded it, and was also of greater importance
than any single expedition of later date to that region. The best maps of
southern Alaska published at the present day are based largely on the surveys
of Vancouver.

The Discovery, under the immediate command of Vancouver, and the
Chatham, in charge of Peter Puget, cruised eastward along the southern coast
of Alaska in 1794. The Discovery passed the entrance to Yakutat bay without

Page 148

stopping, but the Chatham anchored there, and important surveys were carried
on under Puget's directions.

On June 28, the Discovery was in the vicinity of Icy bay, where the shore of
the ocean seemed to be composed of solid ice. Eastward from Icy bay the
coast is described as "bordered by lowlands rising with a gradual and uniform
ascent to the foot-hills of lofty mountains, whose summits are but the base
from which Mount St. Elias towers magnificently into the regions of perpetual
frost." A low projecting point on the western side of the entrance to Yakutat
bay was named "Point Manby." The coast beyond this toward the northeast
became less wooded, and seemed to produce only a brownish vegetation,
which farther eastward entirely disappeared. The country was then bare and
composed of loose stones. The narrative contains an interesting account of the
grand coast scenery from St. Elias to the eastern end of the Fairweather range;
but this does not at present claim attention.

While the Chatham continued her cruise eastward, Puget ascended Yakutat
bay nearly to its head, and also navigated some of the channels between the
islands along its eastern shore. A cape on the eastern side, where the bay
penetrates the first range of foot-hills, was named "Point Latouche;" but the
same landmark had previously been designated "Pa. de la Esperanza" by
Malaspina. The bay at the head of the inlet, which Malaspina had named
"Desangaño," was named "Digges sound," after one of the officers of the
Chatham. Boats were sent to explore this inlet, but found it "closed from side
to side by a firm, compact body of ice, beyond which, to the back of the ice, a
small inlet appeared to extend N. 55° E. about a league."12
12
Vancouver's Voyage, vol. 5, p. 389.

These observations confirm those made by Malaspina and indicated on the
chart reproduced on plate 7, where the ice front is represented as reaching as
far south as Haenke island.

Page 149

The evidence furnished by Malaspina and Vancouver as to the former extent of
the glaciers at the head of Yakutat bay is in harmony with observations made

Page 150

by Vancouver's party in Icy strait and Cross sound.13 Early in July, 1794, these
straits were found to be heavily encumbered with floating ice. At the present
time but little ice is met with in that region. On Vancouver's charts there is no
indication that he was aware of the existence of Glacier bay, although one of
his officers, in navigating Icy strait, passed its immediate entrance. These
records, although somewhat indefinite and of negative character, indicate that
the fields of floating ice at the mouth of Glacier bay were much more
extensive a hundred years ago than at present; but they do not show where the
glaciers of that region formerly terminated.
13
Ibid., pp. 417–421.

After the return of the Chatham's boats from the exploration of
Disenchantment bay, an exploration of the eastern shore of Yakutat bay was
made. The following extract indicates the character of work done there:

"Digges' sound [Disenchantment bay] was the only place in the bay that presented the least
prospect of any interior navigation, and this was necessarily very limited by the close connected
range of lofty snowy mountains that stretched along the coast at no great distance from the
seaside. Mr. Puget's attention was next directed to the opening in the low land, but as the wind
was variable and adverse to the progress of the vessel, a boat was again despatched to continue the
investigation of these shores, which are compact from Point Latouche and were then free from
ice. This opening was found to be formed by an island about two miles long, in a direction S. 50°
E. and N. 50° W., and about a mile broad, lying at the distance of about half a mile from the
mainland. Opposite to the south part of this, named by Mr. Puget KNIGHT'S ISLAND, is Eleanor's
cove, which is the eastern extremity of Beering's [Yakutat] bay, in latitude 59° 44', longitude 220°
51'. Knight's island admits of a navigable passage all round it, but there is an islet situated
between it and the mainland on its northeast side. From Eleanor's cove the coast takes a direction
S. 30° W. about six miles to the east point of a channel leading to the southwest between the
continent and some islands that lie off it. This was considered to lead along the shores of the
mainland to Point Mulgrave, and in the event of its proving navigable, the examination of the bay
would have been complete, and the vessel brought to our appointed place of meeting, which was
now supposed to be no very great distance."

In endeavoring to reach Port Mulgrave by a channel leading between the
islands on the eastern side of the bay and the mainland, the Chatham
grounded, and was gotten off with considerable difficulty. Many observations
concerning the geography and the natives are recorded in the narrative of this
exploration.

Page 151

BELCHER, 1837.14
14
Narrative of a Voyage round the World, performed in the ship Sulphur during the years 1836–
1842; by Captain Sir Edward Belcher: 2 vols., 8°, London, 1843.

The next account15 of explorations around Yakutat bay that has come to hand is
by Sir Edward Belcher, who visited that coast in Her Majesty's ship Sulphur in
1837.
15
A fort was built by the Russians, in 1795, on the strip of land separating Bay de Monti from the
ocean, and was colonized by convicts from Russia. In 1803, all of the settlers were killed and the
fort was destroyed by the Yakutat Indians. So complete was this massacre that no detailed account
of it has ever appeared. (Alaska and its Resources, by W. H. Dall, 1870, pp. 316, 317, 323.)

In the narrative of this voyage, a brief account is given of the ice cliffs at Icy
bay, which are stated to have a height of about thirty feet and to present the
appearance of veined marble. Where the ice was exposed to the sea it was
excavated into alcoves and archways, recalling to the narrator's mind the
Chalk cliffs of England. "Point Riou," as named by Vancouver, was not
recognized, and the inference seems to be that it was formed of ice and was
dissolved away between the visits of Vancouver and Belcher.

Accompanying the narrative of Belcher's voyage is an illustration showing
Mount St. Elias as it appears from the sea near Icy bay, which represents the
mountain more accurately than some similar pictures published more recently.

The Sulphur anchored in Port Mulgrave; but no account is given of the
character of the surrounding country.

TEBENKOF, 1852.16
16
Atlas of the Northwest Coast of America from Bering strait to Cape Corrientes and the Aleutian
Islands [etc.]: 2°, St. Petersburg, 1852. With index and hydrographic observations: 8°, St.
Petersburg, 1852.

Tebenkof's notes, which are often referred to by writers on Alaska, consist
principally of compilations from reports of Russian traders, which were

Page 152

intended to accompany and explain an atlas of the shores of northwestern
America, published in 1852 in St. Petersburg and in Sitka.

Map number 7 of the atlas represents the southern coast of Alaska from Lituya
bay westward to Icy bay. On the same sheet there is a more detailed chart of
the islands along the eastern border of Yakutat bay.

The height of St. Elias is given as 17,000 feet; its position, latitude 61° 2' 6"
and longitude 140° 4', distant 30 miles from the sea.17 It is stated that in 1839
the mountain "began at times to smoke through a crater on its southeastern
slope." At the time of an earthquake at Sitka (1847) it is said to have emitted
flames and ashes.
17
In a foot-note on page 33 it is stated that Captain Vasilef, in the ship Otkrytie (Discovery),
ascertained the height of Mount Fairweather to be 13,946 feet.

It will be seen from the account of the exploration carried on last summer that
Mount St. Elias is composed of stratified rocks, with no indication of volcanic
origin; and these reports of eruption must consequently be considered
erroneous.

The low country between Mount St. Elias and the sea is described by
Tebenkof as a tundra covered with forests and grass; "through cracks in the
gravelly soil, ice could be seen beneath." More recent knowledge shows that
this statement also is erroneous. The adjacent ocean is stated to be shallow,
with shelving bottom; at a distance of half a verst, five to twelve fathoms were
obtained, and at two miles from land, thirty to forty fathoms (of seven feet).

The Pimpluna rocks are said to have been discovered in 1779 by the Spanish
captain Arteiga. They were also seen in 1794 by the helmsman Talin, in the
ship Orel, and named after his vessel. These observations are interesting, and
indicate that possibly there may be submerged moraines in the region where
these rocks are reported to exist.

Many other observations are recorded concerning the mountains and the bays
in the vicinity of Yakutat. While of interest to navigation and to geographers,
these have no immediate connection with the region explored during the
recent expedition.

Page 153

UNITED STATES COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY, 1874,18 1880.19
18
Appendix No. 10, Report of the Superintendent of the U. S. Coast Survey for the year 1875:
Washington, 1878, pp. 157–188.

19
Pacific Coast Pilot, Alaska, part 1: Washington, 1883, p. 212.

The surveys carried on in 1874 by the United States Coast Survey on the
shores of Alaska embraced the region about Yakutat bay. They were conducted
by W. H. Dall and Marcus Baker. Besides the survey of the coast-line,
determinations were made of the heights and positions of several mountain
peaks between Glacier bay and Cook inlet. Dall's account of this survey
contains a brief sketch of previous explorations and a summary of the
measurements of the higher peaks of the region. This material has been used
on another page in discussing the height of Mount St. Elias.

Besides the geographic data gathered by the United States Coast Survey, many
observations were made on geology and on the glaciers of the region about
Yakutat bay and Mount St. Elias. Exception must be taken, in the light of more
recent explorations, to some of the conclusions reached in this connection, as
will appear in the chapter devoted to geology and glaciers.

A description of the St. Elias region in the Pacific Coast Pilot supplements the
paper in the coast survey report for 1875. This is an exhaustive compilation
from all available sources of information interesting to navigators. It contains,
besides, a valuable summary of what was known at the time of its publication
concerning the history and physical features of the country to which it relates.
In this publication the true character of the Malaspina glacier was first
recorded and its name proposed. The description is as follows:

"At Point Manby and eastward to the Kwik river the shore was bordered by trees, apparently
willows and alders, with a somewhat denser belt a little farther back. Behind this rises a bluff or
bank of high land, as described by various navigators. About the vicinity of Tebienkoff's Nearer
Point the trees cease, but begin again near the river. The bluff or table-land behind rises higher
than the river valley and completely hides it from the southward, and is in summer bare of
vegetation (except a few rare patches on its face) and apparently is composed of glacial débris,
much of which is of a reddish color. In May, 1874, when observed by the U. S. Coast Survey party
of that year, the extensive flattened top of this table-land or plateau was covered with a smooth

Page 154

and even sheet of pure white snow. In the latter part of June, 1880, however, this snow had
melted, and for the first time the real and most extraordinary character of this plateau was
revealed. Within the beach and extending in a northwesterly direction to the valley behind it, at
the foot of the St. Elias Alps an undetermined distance, this plateau, or a large part of it, is one
great field of buried ice. Almost everywhere nothing is visible but bowlders, dirt and gravel; but at
the time mentioned, back of the bight between Point Manby and Nearer Point, for a space of
several square miles the coverlid of dirt had fallen in, owing to the melting of the ice beneath, and
revealed a surface of broken pinnacles of ice, each crowned by a patch of dirt, standing close to
one another like a forest of prisms, these decreasing in height from the summit of the plateau
gradually in a sort of semicircular sweep toward the beach, near which, however, the dirt and
débris again predominate, forming a sort of terminal moraine to this immense, buried, immovable
glacier, for it is nothing else. Trains of large bowlders were visible here and there, and the general
trend of the glacier seemed to be northwest and southeast.

"Between Disenchantment bay and the foot of Mount St. Elias, on the flanks of the Alps,
seventeen glaciers were counted, of which about ten were behind this plateau, but none are of very
large size, and the sum total of them all seemed far too little to supply the waste of the plateau if it
were to possess motion. The lower ends of these small glaciers come down into the river valley
before mentioned and at right angles in general to the trend of the plateau. To the buried glacier
the U. S. Coast Survey has applied the name of Malaspina, in honor of that distinguished and
unfortunate explorer. No connection could be seen between the small glaciers and the Malaspina
plateau, as the former dip below the level of the summit of the latter. The Malaspina had no névé,
nor was there any high land in the direction of its axis as far as the eye could reach. Everywhere,
except where the pinnacles protruded and in a few spots on the face of the bluff, it was covered
with a thick stratum of soil, gravel and stones, here and there showing small patches of bright
green herbage. The bluff westward from Point Manby may probably prove of the same character."

Mount Cook and Mount Vancouver are named in the Pacific Coast Pilot, and
their elevations and positions are definitely stated. Mount Malaspina was also
named, but its position is not given. During the expedition of last summer it
was found impracticable to decide definitely to which peak the name of the
great navigator was applied. So existing nomenclature was followed as nearly
as possible by attaching Malaspina's name to a peak about eleven miles east of
Mount St. Elias. Its position is indicated on the accompanying map, plate 8
(page 75).

Several charts of the southern coast of Alaska accompany the reports of the
United States Coast Survey for 1875, referred to above. A part of these have
been independently published. These charts were used in mapping the coast-

Page 155

line as it appears on plate 8, and were frequently consulted while writing the
following pages.

NEW YORK TIMES EXPEDITION, 1886.

An expedition sent out by the New York Times, in charge of Lieutenant
Frederick Schwatka, for the purpose of making geographic explorations and
climbing Mount St. Elias, left Sitka on the U. S. S. Pinta, on July 10, 1886,
and reached Yakutat bay two days later. As it was found impracticable to
obtain the necessary assistance from the Indians to continue the voyage to Icy
bay, whence the start inland was planned to be made, Captain N. E. Nichols,
the commander of the Pinta, concluded to take the expedition to its destination
in his vessel. On July 17 a landing was made through the surf at Icy bay, and
exploration at once began.

The party consisted of Lieutenant Schwatka, in charge; Professor William
Libbey, Jr.; and Lieutenant H. W. Seton-Karr. The camp hands were John
Dalton, Joseph Woods, and several Indian packers.20
20
The accounts of this expedition are as follows: Report from Lieutenant Schwatka in the New
York Times, October 17, 1886; Some of the Geographical Features of Southeastern Alaska, by
William Libbey, Jr., in Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., 1886, pp. 279–300; Shores and Alps of Alaska, by
H. W. Seton-Karr, London, 1887, 8°, pp. L–XCV, 142–148; The Alpine Regions of Alaska, by
Lieutenant Seton-Karr, in Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc., vol. IX, 1887, pp. 269–285; The Expedition of
"The New York Times" (1886), by Lieutenant Schwatka, in The Century Magazine, April, 1891,
pp. 865–872.

From Icy bay the expedition proceeded inland, for about sixteen miles, in a
line leading nearly due north, toward the summit of Mount St. Elias. The
highest point reached, 7,200 feet, was on the foot-hills of the main range now
called the Karr hills. The time occupied by the expedition, after leaving Icy
bay, was nine or ten days. So far as known, no systematic surveys were carried
on.

An interesting account of this expedition appeared in Seton-Karr's book, "The
Shores and Alps of Alaska." Many observations on the glaciers and moraines
of the region explored are recorded in this work. The map published with it
has been used in compiling the western portion of the map forming plate 8,

Page 156

where the route of the expedition is indicated. Another account, especially
valuable for its records of scientific observations, by Professor Libbey, was
published by the American Geographic Society. The Guyot, Agassiz and
Tyndall glaciers, the Chaix hills, and Lake Castani received their names during
this expedition.

Lieutenant Schwatka's graphic and entertaining account of this expedition,
published in The Century Magazine for April, 1891, gives many details of the
exploration and illustrates many of the characteristic features of southern
Alaska.

TOPHAM EXPEDITION, 1888.

An expedition conducted by Messrs. W. H. and Edwin Topham, of London,
George Broka, of Brussels, and William Williams, of New York, was made in
1888. Like the Times expedition, it had for its main object the ascent of Mount
St. Elias.

Icy bay was reached, by means of canoes from Yakutat bay, on July 13, and an
inland journey was made northward which covered a large part of the area
traversed by the previous expedition. The highest elevation reached, according
to aneroid barometer and boiling-point measurements, was 11,460 feet. This
was on the southern side of St. Elias.

The only accounts of this expedition which have come to my notice are an
interesting article by William Williams in Scribner's Magazine,21 and a more
detailed report by H. W. Topham, accompanied by a map22 and by a fine
illustration of Mount St. Elias, in the Alpine Journal.23
21
New York, April, 1889, pp. 387–403.

22
Topham's map was used in compiling the western portion of the map forming plate 8, and his
route is there indicated.

23
London, August, 1889, pp. 245–371.

This brief review of explorations carried on in the St. Elias region previous to
the expedition sent out in 1890 by the National Geographic Society is

Page 157

incomplete in many particulars,24 but will indicate the most promising sources
of information concerning the country described in the following pages.
24
Yakutat bay has been visited by vessels of the United States Navy and United States Revenue
Marine and by numerous trading vessels; but reports of observations made during these voyages
have not been found during a somewhat exhaustive search of literature relating to Alaska.

Page 158

Page 159

PART II.

NARRATIVE OF THE ST. ELIAS EXPEDITION OF 1890.

ORGANIZATION.

A long-cherished desire to study the geography, geology, and glaciers of the
region around Mount St. Elias was finally gratified when, in the summer of
1890, the National Geographic Society made it possible for me to undertake
an expedition to that part of Alaska.

The expedition was organized under the joint auspices of the National
Geographic Society and the United States Geological Survey, but was greatly
assisted by individuals who felt an interest in the extension of geographic
knowledge. For the inception of exploration and for securing the necessary
funds, credit is due Mr. Willard D. Johnson.

The names of those who subscribed to the exploration fund of the Society are
as follows:

Boynton Leach. Henry Gannett.
Everett Hayden. Charles J. Bell.
Richardson Clover. J. S. Diller.
C. M. McCarteney. J. W. Powell.
C. A. Williams. J. G. Judd.
Willard D. Johnson. A. Graham Bell.
Israel C. Russell. Gardiner G. Hubbard.
Gilbert Thompson. A. W. Greely.
Harry King. J. W. Dobbins.
Morris Bien. J. W. Hays.
Wm. B. Powell. Edmund Alton.
Z. T. Carpenter. Bailey Willis.
Charles Nordhoff. E. S. Hosmer.
Rogers Birnie, Jr.

Page 160

I was chosen by the Board of Managers of the National Geographic Society
and by the Director of the United States Geological Survey to take charge of
the expedition and to carry on geological and glacial studies. Mr. Mark B.
Kerr, topographer on the Geological Survey, was assigned as an assistant, with
the duty of making a topographical map of the region explored. Mr. E. S.
Hosmer, of Washington, D. C., volunteered his services as general assistant.25
25
Copies of all instructions governing the work of the expedition are given in Appendix A.

Mr. Kerr left Washington on May 24 for San Francisco, where he made
arrangements for his special work, and reported to me at Seattle on June 15. I
left Washington on May 25 and went directly to Seattle, where the necessary
preparations for exploring an unknown and isolated region were made.

From the large number of frontiersmen and sailors who applied for positions
on the expedition, seven men were selected as camp hands. The foreman of
this force was J. H. Christie, of Seattle, who had spent the previous winter in
charge of an expedition in the Olympian mountains, and was well versed in all
that pertains to frontier life. The other camp hands were J. H. Crumback, L. S.
Doney, W. L. Lindsley, William Partridge, Thomas Stamy, and Thomas White.

The individual members of the party will be mentioned frequently during this
narrative; but I wish to state at the beginning that very much of the success of
the enterprise was due to the hard and faithful work of the camp hands, to each
one of whom I feel personally indebted.

Two dogs, "Bud" and "Tweed," belonging to Mr. Christie, also became
members of the expedition.

All camp supplies, including tents, blankets, rations, etc., were purchased at
Seattle. Rations for ten men for one hundred days, on the basis of the
subsistence furnished by the United States Geological Survey, were purchased
and suitably packed for transportation in a humid climate. Twenty-five tin cans
were obtained, each measuring 6 x 12 x 14 inches, and in each a mixed ration
sufficient for one man for fifteen days was packed and hermetically sealed.
These rations, thus secured against moisture and in convenient shape for
carrying on the back (or "packing"), were for use above the timber line, where
cooking was possible only by means of oil stoves. The remainder of the

Page 161

supplies, intended for use where fuel for camp-fires could be obtained, were
secured either in tin cans or in canvas sacks.

For cooking above timber line, two double-wick oil stoves were provided, the
usual cast-iron bases being replaced by smaller reservoirs of tin, in order to
avoid unnecessary weight. Coal oil was carried in five-gallon cans, but a few
rectangular cans holding one gallon each were provided for use while on the
march. Subsequent experience proved that this arrangement was satisfactory.

Four seven-by-seven tents, with ridge ropes, and two pyramidal nine-by-nine
center-pole tents, with flies, were provided, all made of cotton drilling. The
smaller tents were for use in the higher camps, and the larger ones for the base
camps. The tents were as light as seemed practicable, and were found to
answer well the purpose for which they were intended.

Each man was supplied with one double Hudson Bay blanket, a water-proof
coat, a water-proof hat (the most serviceable being the "sou'westers" used by
seamen), and an alpenstock.26 Each man also carried a sheet made of light
duck, seven feet square, to protect his blankets and to be used as a shelter-tent
if required. Each member of the party was also required to have heavy boots
or shoes, and suitable woolen clothing. Each man was furnished with two
pieces of hemp "cod-line," 50 feet in length, to be used in packing blankets
and rations. The lines were doubled many times, so as to distribute the weight
on the shoulders, and were connected with two leather straps for buckling
about the package to be carried. The cod-lines were used instead of ordinary
pack-straps, for the reason that they distribute the weight on the shoulder over
a broader area, and also because they can be made immediately available for
climbing, crossing streams, etc., when required. Several extra lines of the
same material were also taken as a reserve, or to be used in roping the party
together when necessary. Several of the party carried rifles, for each of which
a hundred rounds of fixed ammunition were issued. Two ice-axes for the party
were also provided.
26
Light rubber cloth was ordered from San Francisco for the purpose of allowing each man a
water-proof sheet to place under his blankets, but was not received in time to be used.

A canvas boat was made by the men while en route for the field, but there was
no occasion to use it, except as a cover for a cache left at one of the earlier

Page 162

camps. Subsequent experience showed that snow-shoes and one or two sleds
would have been serviceable; but these were not taken.

Our instruments were furnished by the United States Geological Survey. The
list included one transit, one gradienter, one sextant, two prismatic compasses,
one compass clinometer, four pocket thermometers, two psychrometers, one
field-glass, two mercurial barometers, three aneroids, steel tape-lines, and two
photographic outfits.

FROM SEATTLE TO SITKA.

Preparations having been completed, the expedition sailed from Seattle June
16, on the steamer Queen, belonging to the Pacific Coast Steamship Company,
in command of Captain James Carroll, and reached Sitka on the morning of
June 24. This portion of our voyage was through the justly celebrated "inland
passage" of British Columbia and southeastern Alaska, and was in every way
delightful. We touched at Victoria and Wrangell, and, after threading the
Wrangell narrows, entered Frederick sound, where the first floating ice was
seen. The bergs were from a neighboring glacier, which enters the sea at the
head of a deep inlet, too far away to be seen from the course followed by the
Queen. The route northward led through Stephens passage, and afforded
glimpses of glaciers both on the mainland and on Admiralty island. In Taku
inlet several hours were spent in examining the glaciers, two of which come
down to the sea. One on the western side of the fjord, an ice-stream known as
the Norris glacier, descends through a deep valley and expands into a broad
ice-foot on approaching the water, though it is not washed by the waves,
owing to an accumulation of mud about its extremity. Another ice-stream is
the Taku glacier, situated at the head of the inlet. It comes boldly down to the
water, and ends in a splendid sea-cliff of azure blue, some 250 feet high. The
adjacent waters are covered with icebergs shed by the glacier. Some of the
smaller fragments were hoisted on board the Queen for table use. The bold,
rocky shores of the inlet are nearly bare of vegetation, and indicate by their
polished and striated surfaces that glaciers of far greater magnitude than those
now existing formerly flowed through this channel.

After leaving Taku inlet, a day was spent at Juneau; and then the Queen
steamed up Lynn canal to Pyramid harbor, near its head. For picturesque
beauty, this is probably the finest of the fjords of Alaska. Several glaciers on

Page 163

each side of the inlet come down nearly to the sea, and all the higher
mountains are buried beneath perpetual snow. On returning from Lynn canal,
the Queen visited Glacier bay, and here passengers were allowed a few hours
on shore at the Muir glacier. The day of our visit was unusually fine, and a
splendid view of the great ice-stream with its many tributaries was obtained
from a hill-top about a thousand feet high, on its eastern border. The glacier
discharges into the head of the bay and forms a magnificent line of ice-cliffs
over two hundred feet high and three miles in extent.

This portion of the coast of Alaska has been described by several writers; yet
its bleak shores are still in large part unexplored. To the west of the bay rise
the magnificent peaks of the Fairweather range, from which flow many great
ice-streams. The largest of the glaciers descending from these mountains into
Glacier bay is called the Pacific glacier. Like the Muir glacier, it discharges
vast numbers of icebergs into the sea.

The day after leaving Glacier bay we arrived at Sitka, and as soon as
practicable called on Lieutenant-Commander O. F. Farenholt, of the U. S. S.
Pinta, who had previously received instructions from the Secretary of the
Navy to take us to Yakutak bay. We also paid our respects to the Governor and
other Alaskan officials, and made a few final preparations for the start
westward.

FROM SITKA TO YAKUTAT BAY.

All of our effects having been transferred to the Pinta, we put to sea early on
the morning of June 25.

Honorable Lyman E. Knapp, Governor of Alaska, taking advantage of the
sailing of the Pinta, accompanied us on the voyage. Mr. Henry Boursin,
census enumerator, also joined us for the purpose of obtaining information
concerning the Indians at Yakutak.

The morning we left Sitka was misty, with occasional showers; but even these
unfavorable conditions could not obscure the beauty of the wild, densely
wooded shore along which we steamed. The weather throughout the voyage
was thick and foggy and the sea rough. We anchored in De Monti bay, the first
indentation on the eastern shore of Yakutat bay, late the following afternoon,

Page 164

without having obtained so much as a glimpse of the magnificent scenery of
the rugged Fairweather range.

At Yakutat we found two small Indian villages, one on Khantaak island and
the other on the mainland to the eastward (both shown on plate 8). The village
on Khantaak island is the older of the two, and consists of six houses built
along the water's edge. The houses are made of planks, each hewn from a
single log, after the manner of the Thlinkets generally. They are rectangular,
and have openings in the roofs, with wind guards, for the escape of smoke.
The fires, around which the families gather, are built in the centers of the
spaces below. The houses are entered by means of oval openings, elevated two
feet above the ground on platforms along their fronts. In the interior of each
there is a rectangular space about twenty feet square surrounded by raised
platforms, the outer portions of which are shut off by partitions and divided
into smaller chambers.

The canoes used at Yakutat are each hewn from a single spruce log, and are
good examples of the boats in use throughout southern Alaska. They are of all
sizes, from a small craft scarcely large enough to hold a single Indian to
graceful boats forty or fifty feet in length and capable of carrying a ton of
merchandise with a dozen or more men. They have high, overreaching stems
and sterns, which give them a picturesque, gondola-like appearance.

The village on the mainland is less picturesque, if such a term may be allowed,
than the group of houses already described, but it is of the same type. Near at
hand, along the shore to the southward, there are two log houses, one of which
is used at present as a mission by Reverend Carl J. Hendriksen and his
assistant, the other being occupied as a trading post by Sitka merchants.

The Yakutat Indians are the most westerly branch of the great Thlinket family
which inhabits all of southeastern Alaska and a portion of British Columbia. In
intelligence they are above the average of Indians generally, and are of a much
higher type than the native inhabitants of the older portion of the United
States. They are quick to learn the ways of the white man, and are especially
shrewd in bargaining. They are canoe Indians par excellence, and pass a large
part of their lives on the water in quest of salmon, seals, and sea-otter. During
the summer of our visit, about thirty sea-otter were taken. They are usually
shot in the primitive manner with copper-pointed arrows, although repeating
rifles of the most improved patterns are owned by the natives, in spite of

Page 165

existing laws against selling breech-loading arms to Indians. The fur of the
sea-otter is acknowledged to be the most beautiful, and is the most highly
prized of all pelts. Those taken at Yakutat during our visit were sold at an
average price of about seventy-five dollars. This, together with the sale of less
valuable skins and the money received for baskets, etc., made by the women
for the tourist trade in Sitka, brought a considerable revenue to the village.
Improvident, like nearly all Indians, the Yakutat villagers soon spend at the
trading post the money earned in this way.

The Yakutats belong without question to the Thlinket stock; but visits from
tribes farther westward, who travel in skin boats, are known to have been
made, and it seems probable that some mixture of Thlinket and Innuit blood
may occur in the natives at Yakutat. But if such admixture has occurred, the
Innuit element is so small that it escapes the notice of one not skilled in
ethnology.

We found Mr. Hendriksen most kind and obliging, and are indebted to him for
many favors and great assistance. Arrangements were made with him for
reading a base-barometer three times a day during July and August. He also
assisted us by acting as an interpreter, and in hiring Indians and canoes.

The weather continued thick and stormy after reaching Yakutat bay, and
Captain Farenholt did not think it advisable to take his vessel up the main
inlet, where many dangers were reported to exist. A canoe having been
purchased from the trader and others hired from the Indians, a start was made
from the head of Yakutat bay early on the morning of June 28, in company
with two of the Pinta's boats loaded with supplies, under the command of
Ensign C. W. Jungen.

CANOE TRIP UP YAKUTAT BAY.

Bidding good-bye to our friends on the Pinta, to whom we were indebted for
many favors, we started for our trip up the bay in a pouring rain-storm. Our
way at first led through the narrow, placid water-ways dividing the islands on
the eastern side of the bay. The islands and the shores of the mainland are
densely wooded, and appeared picturesque and inviting even through the veil
of mist and rain that shrouded them. The forests consist principally of spruce
trees, so dense and having such a tangle of underbrush that it is only with the

Page 166

greatest difficulty that one can force a way through them; while the ground
beneath the forest, and even the trunks and branches of the living trees, are
covered and festooned with luxuriant growths of mosses and lichens. Our trip
along these wooded shores, but half revealed through the drifting mist, was
novel and enjoyable in spite of discomforts due to the rain. We rejoiced at the
thought that we were nearing the place where the actual labors of the
expedition would begin; we were approaching the unknown; visions of
unexplored regions filled with new wonders occupied our fancies, and made
us eager to press on.

About noon on the first day we pitched our tents on a strip of shingle skirting
the shore of the mainland to the east of Knight island. The Pinta's boats spread
their white wings and sailed away to the southward before a freshening wind,
and our last connection with civilization was broken. As one of the
frontiersmen of our party remarked, we were "at home once more." It may
appear strange to some that any one could apply such a term to a camp on the
wild shore of an unexplored country; but the Bohemian spirit is so strong in
some breasts, and the restraint of civilization so irksome, that the homing
instinct is reversed and leads irresistibly to the wilderness and to the silent
mountain tops.

The morning after arriving at our first camp, Kerr, Christie, and Hendriksen,
with all the camp hands except two, went on with the canoes, and in a few
hours reached the entrance of Disenchantment bay. They found a camping
place about twelve miles ahead, on a narrow strip of shingle beneath the
precipices of Point Esperanza, and there established our second camp.

My necessary delay at Camp 1 was utilized, so far as possible, in learning
what I could concerning the adjacent country, and in making a beginning in
the study of its geology. Our camp was at the immediate base of the
mountains, and on the northeastern side of the wide plateau bordering the
continent. The plateau stretches southeastward for twenty or thirty miles, and
is low and heavily forested. The eastern shore of the bay near our first camp is
formed of bluffs about 150 feet high, which have been eaten back by the
waves so as to expose fine sections of the strata of sand, gravel and bowlders
of which the plateau is composed. All the lowlands bordering the mountains
have, apparently, a common history, and doubtless owe their origin principally
to the deposition of débris brought from the mountains by former glaciers.
When this material was deposited, or soon afterward, the land was depressed

Page 167

about 150 feet lower than at present, as is shown by a terrace cut along the
base of the mountains at that elevation. The steep mountain face extending
northwestward from Camp 1 to the mouth of Disenchantment bay bears
evidence of being the upheaved side of a fault of quite recent origin. The steep
inclination and shattered condition of the rocks along this line are evidently
due to the crushing which accompanied the displacement.

In the wild gorge above our first camp, a small glacier was found descending
to within 500 feet of the sea-level, and giving rise to a wild, roaring stream of
milky water. Efforts to reach the glacier were frustrated by the density of the
dripping vegetation and by the clouds that obscured the mountains.

A canoe trip was made to a rocky islet between Knight island and the
mainland toward the north. The islet, like the rocks in the adjacent mountain
range, is composed of sandstone, greatly shattered and seamed, and nearly
vertical in attitude. Its surface was densely carpeted with grass and brilliant
flowers. Many sea birds had their homes there. From its summit a fine view
was obtained of the cloud-capped mountains toward the northeast, of the dark
forest covering Knight island, and of the broad plateau toward the southeast.
Some of the most charming effects in the scenery of the forest-clad and mist-
covered shores of Alaska are due to the wreaths of vapor ascending from the
deep forests during the interval in which the warm sunlight shines through the
clouds; and on the day of our visit to the islet, the forests, when not concealed
by mist, sent up smoke-like vapor wreaths of many fantastic shapes to mingle
with the clouds in which the higher mountains disappeared.

At Camp 1 the personnel of the party was unexpectedly reduced. Mr. Hosmer
was ill, and remained with me at camp instead of pushing on with Kerr and
Christie; and the weather continuing stormy, he concluded to abandon the
expedition and return to the mission at Port Mulgrave. Having secured the
services of an Indian who chanced to pass our camp in his canoe, Mr. Hosmer
bade us good-bye, ensconced himself in the frail craft, and started for sunnier
lands. It was subsequently learned that he reached Yakutak without mishap,
and a few days later sailed for Sitka in a small trading schooner. Our force
during the remainder of the season, not including Mr. Hendriksen and the
Indians, whose services were engaged for only a few days, numbered nine
men all told.

Page 168

On the evening of June 30 we had a bright camp-fire blazing on the beach to
welcome the returning party. Near sunset a canoe appeared in the distance, and
a shot was fired as it came round a bend in the shore. We felt sure that our
companions were returning, and piled drift-wood on the roaring camp-fire to
cheer them after their hard day's work on the water. As the canoe approached,
each dip of the paddle sent a flash of light to us, and we could distinguish the
men at their work; but we soon discovered that it was occupied not by our own
party but by Indians returning from a seal hunt in Disenchantment bay. They
brought their canoe high on the beach, and made themselves at home about
our camp-fire. There were seven or eight well-built young men in the party, all
armed with guns. In former times such an arrival would have been regarded
with suspicion; but thanks to the somewhat frequent visits of war vessels to
Yakutat, and also to the labors of missionaries, the wild spirits of the Indians
have been greatly subdued and reduced to semi-civilized condition during the
past quarter of a century.

Just as the long twilight deepened into night, another craft came around the
distant headland, but less swiftly than the former one; and soon our
picturesque canoe, with Christie at the stern steering with a paddle in true
Indian fashion, grated on the shingle beach. Christie has spent many years of
his life with the Indians of the Northwest, and has adopted some of their
habits. On beginning frontier life once more, he discarded the hat of the white
man, and wore a blue cloth tied tightly around his forehead and streaming off
in loose ends behind. The change was welcome, for it added to the picturesque
appearance of the party.

The men, weary with their long row against currents and head-winds, greatly
enjoyed the camp-fire. Our Indian visitors, after lunching lightly on the leaf-
stalks of a plant resembling celery (Archangelica), which grows abundantly
everywhere on the lowlands of southern Alaska, departed toward Yakutat.
Supper was served in one of the large tents, and we all rolled ourselves in our
blankets for the night.

The next day, July 1, we abandoned Camp 1, passed by Camp 2, and late in
the afternoon reached the northwestern side of Yakutat bay, opposite Point
Esperanza. Our trip along the wild shore, against which a heavy surf was
breaking, was full of novelty and interest. The mountains rose sheer from the
water to a height of two or three thousand feet. About their bases, like dark
drapery, following all the folds of the mountain side, ran a band of vegetation;

Page 169

but the spruce forests had mostly disappeared, and only a few trees were seen
here and there in the deeper cañons. The position of the terrace along the base
of the mountain, first noticed at Camp 1, could be plainly traced, although
densely covered with bushes. The mountain peaks above were all sharp and
angular, indicating at a glance that they had never been subjected to glacial
action. The sandstone and shales forming the naked cliffs are fractured and
crushed, and are evidently yielding rapidly to the weather; but the
characteristic red color due to rock decay could not be seen. The prevailing
tone of the mountains, when not buried beneath vegetation or covered with
snow, is a cold gray. Bright, warm, summer skies are needed to reveal the
variety and beauty of that forbidding region.

Our large canoe behaved well, although heavily loaded. Sometimes the wind
was favorable, when an extemporized sail lessened the fatigue of the trip. The
landing on the northwestern shore was effected, through a light surf, on a
sandy beach heavily encumbered with icebergs. As it was hazardous to beach
the large canoe with its load of boxes and bags, the heavy freight was
transferred, a few pieces at a time, to smaller canoes, each manned by a single
Indian, and all was safely landed beyond the reach of the breakers. Camp 3
was established on the sandy beach just above the reach of the tide and near
the mouth of a roaring brook. The drift-wood along the shore furnished
abundant fuel for a blazing camp-fire; our tents were pitched, and once more
we felt at home.

Two canoes were dispatched, in care of Doney, to the camp on the opposite
shore (Camp 2), with instructions to bring over the equipments left there. Kerr
went over also for the purpose of making a topographic station on the bluff
forming Point Esperanza should the morrow's weather permit.

It was curious to note the care which our Indians took of their canoes. Not
only were they drawn high up on the beach, out of the reach of all possible
tides, but each canoe was swathed in wet cloths, especially at the prow and
stern, to prevent them from drying and cracking. The canoes, being fashioned
from a single spruce log, are especially liable to split if allowed to dry
thoroughly.

The day after our arrival, all of our party and all of our camp outfit were
assembled at Camp 3. Mr. Hendriksen and our Indian friends took their
departure, and the work for which we had come so far was actually begun.

Page 170

BASE CAMP ON THE SHORE OF YAKUTAT BAY.

About the tents at Camp 3 the rank grass grew waist-high, sheltering the
strawberries and dwarf raspberries that bloomed beneath. A little way back
from the shore, clumps of alders, interspersed with spruce trees, marked the
beginning of the forest which covered the hills toward the west and southwest.
Toward the north rose rugged mountains, their summits shrouded in mist; in
the steep gorges on their sides the ends of glaciers gleamed white, like
foaming cataracts descending from cloudland.

The day following our arrival dawned bright and beautiful. Every cloud
vanished from the mountains as by magic, revealing their magnificent
summits in clear relief. We found ourselves at the base of a rugged mountain
range extending far southeastward and northwestward, its first rampart so
breached as to allow the waters of the ocean to extend into the very midst of
the great peaks beyond. Through this opening we had a splendid view of the
snow-clad mountains filling the northern sky and stretching away in lessening
perspective toward the east until they blended with the distant clouds.

Topographic work was started, and the preparation of "packs" for the journey
inland was begun at once; and all hands were kept busy. A base-line was
measured by Mr. Kerr, and a beginning was made in the development of a
system of triangulation which was carried on throughout the season.

Our stay at the camp on the shore extended over a week, and enabled us to
become familiar with many of the changes in the rugged scenery surrounding
Yakutat bay. The bay itself was covered with icebergs for most of the time.
Owing to the prevailing winds and the action of shore currents, the ice
accumulated on the coast adjacent to our camp. For many days the beach
toward both the north and the south, as far as the eye could reach, was piled
high with huge masses of blue and white ice. When the bay was rough, the
surf roared angrily among the stranded bergs and, dashing over them, formed
splendid sheets of foam; while on bright, sunny days the bay gleamed and
flashed in the sunlight as the summer winds gently rippled its surface, and the
thousands of icebergs crowding the azure plain seemed a numberless fleet of
fairy boats with crystal hulls and fantastic sails of blue and white. When the
long summer days drew to a close and gave place to the soft northern twilight,
which in summer lasts until the glow of the returning sun is seen in the east,

Page 171

the sea and mountains assumed a soft, mysterious beauty never realized by
dwellers in more southern climes. The hours of twilight were so enchanting,
the varying shades and changing tints on the mighty snow-fields robing the
mountains were so exquisite in their gradations that, even when weary with
many hours of toil, the explorer could not resist the charm, and paced the
sandy shore until the night was far spent. Sometimes in the twilight hours,
long after the sun disappeared, the summits of the majestic peaks toward the
east were transformed by the light of the after-glow into mountains of flame.
As the light faded, the cold shadow of the world crept higher and higher up the
crystal slopes until only the topmost spires and pinnacles were gilded by the
sunset glow. At such times, when our eyes were weary with watching the
gorgeous transformation of the snow-covered mountains and were turned to
the far-reaching seaward view, we would be startled by the sight of a vast city,
with battlements, towers, minarets, and domes of fantastic architecture, rising
where we knew that only the berg-covered waters extended. The appearance
of these phantom cities was a common occurrence during the twilight hours.
Although we knew at once that the ghostly spires were but a trick of the
mirage, yet their ever-changing shapes and remarkable mimicry of human
habitations were so striking that they never lost their novelty; and they were
never the same on two successive evenings. One of the most common
deceptions of the mirage is the transformation of icebergs into the semblance
of fountains gushing from the sea and expanding into graceful, sheaf-like
shapes. The strangest freaks due to the refraction of light on hot deserts, which
are usually supposed to be the home of the mirage, do not excite the traveler's
wonder so much as the phantom cities seen in the uncertain twilight amid the
ice-packs of the north.

When the slowly deepening twilight transformed mountains and seas into a
dreamland picture, the harvest moon, strangely out of place in far northern
skies, spread a sheet of silver behind the dark headlands toward the southeast,
and then slowly appeared, not rising boldly toward the zenith, but tracing a
low arch in the southern heavens, to soon disappear into the sea toward the
southwest. Brief as were her visits, they were always welcome and always
brought the feeling that distant homes were nearer when the same light was
visible to us and to loved ones far away. The soft moonlight dimmed the
twilight, the after-glow faded from the highest peaks, and the short northern
night came on.

Page 172

After returning from the mountains, late in September, we were again
encamped on the northwestern shore of Yakutat bay. A heavy northeast storm
swept down from the mountains and awakened all the pent-up fury of the
waves. The beach was crowded with bergs, among which the surf broke in
great sheets of feathery foam; clouds of spray were dashed far above the icy
ramparts, carrying with them fragments of ice torn from the bergs over which
they swept; while the stranded bergs rocked violently to and fro as the waves
burst over them. Sometimes the raging waters, angered by opposition, lifted
the bergs in their mighty arms and, turning them over and over, dashed them
high on the beach. It seemed as if spirits of the deep, unable to leave the water-
world, were hurling their weapons at unseen enemies on the land. The fearful
grandeur of the raging waters and of the dark storm-swept skies was, perhaps,
enhanced by the fact that the landward-blowing gale, combined with a rising
tide, threatened to sweep away our frail home. Each succeeding wave, as it
rolled shoreward, sent a sheet of foam roaring and rushing up the beach and
creeping nearer and nearer to our shelter until only a few inches intervened
between the highwater line and the crest of the sand bank that protected us.
The limit was reached at last, however, and the water slowly retreated, leaving
a fringe of ice within arm's length of our tents.

The wild scene along the shore was especially grand at night. The stranded
bergs, seen through the gloom, formed strange moving shapes, like vessels in
distress. The white banners of spray seemed signals of disaster. An Armada,
more numerous than ever sailed from the ports of Spain, was being crushed
and ground to pieces by the hoarse wind and raging surf. Sleep was
impossible, even if one cared to rest when sea and air and sky were joined in
fierce conflict. Our tents, spared by the waves, were dashed down by the fierce
north winds, and a lake in the forest toward the west overflowed its banks and
discharged its flooding waters through our encampment. At last, tired and
discomforted, we abandoned our tents and retreated to the neighboring forest
and there took refuge in a cabin built near where a coal seam outcrops, and
remained until the storm had spent its force. But I have anticipated, and must
return to the thread of my narrative.

FIRST DAY'S TRAMP.

The impressions received during the first day spent on shore in a new country
are always long remembered. Of several "first days" in my own calendar, there

Page 173

are none that exceed in interest my first excursions through the forest and over
the hills west of Yakutat bay.

Every one about camp having plenty of work to occupy him through the day, I
started out early on the morning of July 2, with only "Bud" and "Tweed" for
companions. My objects were to reconnoiter the country to the westward, to
learn what I could concerning its geology and glaciers, and to choose a line of
march toward Mount St. Elias.

To the north of our camp, and about a mile distant, rose a densely wooded hill
about 300 feet high, with a curving outline, convex southward. This hill had
excited my curiosity on first catching sight of the shore, and I decided to make
it my first study. Its position at the mouth of a steep gorge in the hills beyond,
down which a small glacier flowed, suggested that it might be an ancient
moraine, deposited at a time when the ice-stream advanced farther than at
present. My surprise therefore was great when, after forcing my way through
the dense thickets, I reached the top of the hill, and found a large kettle-shaped
depression, the sides of which were solid walls of ice fifty feet high. This
showed at once that the supposed hill was really the extremity of a glacier,
long dead and deeply buried beneath forest-covered débris. In the bottom of
the kettle-like depression lay a pond of muddy water, and, as the ice-cliffs
about the lakelet melted in the warm sunlight, miniature avalanches of ice and
stones, mingled with sticks and bushes that had been undermined, frequently
rattled down its sides and splashed into the waters below. Further examination
revealed the fact that scores of such kettles are scattered over the surface of
the buried glacier. This ice-stream is that designated the Galiano glacier on
the accompanying map.

Continuing on my way toward the mouth of the gorge in the mountains above,
I forced my way for nearly a mile through dense thickets, frequently making
wide detours to avoid the kettle holes. At length the vegetation became less
dense, and gave place to broad open fields of rocks and dirt, covering the
glacier from side to side. This débris was clearly of the nature of a moraine, as
the ice could be seen beneath it in numerous crevasses; but no division into
marginal or medial moraines could be distinguished. It is really a thin,
irregular sheet of comminuted rock, together with angular masses of sandstone
and shale, the largest of which are ten or fifteen feet in diameter. When seen
from a little distance the débris completely conceals the ice and forms a
barren, rugged surface, the picture of desolation.

Page 174

After traversing this naked area the clear ice in the center of the gorge was
reached. All about were wild cliffs, stretching up toward the snow-covered
peaks above; several cataracts of ice, formed by tributary glaciers descending
through rugged, highly inclined channels, were in sight; while the snow-fields
far above gleamed brilliantly in the sunlight, and now and then sent down
small avalanches to awaken the echoes of the cliffs and fill the still air with a
Babel of tongues.

Pushing on toward the western border of the glacier, across the barren field of
stones, I came at length to the brink of a precipice of dirty ice more than a
hundred feet high, at the foot of which flowed a swift stream of turbid water. A
few hundred yards below, this stream suddenly disappeared beneath an
archway formed by the end of a glacial tunnel, and its further course was lost
to view. It was a strange sight to see a swift, foaming river burst from beneath
overhanging ice-cliffs, roar along over a bowlder-covered bed, and then
plunge into the mouth of a cavern, leaving no trace of its lower course except
a dull, heavy rumbling far down below the icy surface. A still grander example
of these glacial streams, observed a few days later, is described on another
page.

The bank of the gulf opposite the point at which I first reached it is formed by
a steep mountain-side supporting a dense growth of vegetation. Here and
there, however, streams of water plunge down the slope, making a chain of
foaming cascades, and opening the way through the vegetation. It seemed
practicable to traverse one of these stream beds without great difficulty, and
thus to reach the plateau which I knew, from a more distant view, to exist
above.

Crossing the glacial river above the upper archway, I reached the mountain
side and began to ascend. The task was far more difficult than anticipated. The
bushes, principally of alder and currant, grew dense and extended their
branches down the steep slope in such a manner that at times it was utterly
impossible to force a way through them. Much of the way I crawled on hands
and knees up the steep watercourse beneath the dense tangle of vegetation
overhanging from either bank and interlacing in the center. On nearing the top
I was so fortunate as to strike a bear trail, along which the animal had forced
his way through the bushes, making an opening like a tunnel. Through this I
ascended to the top of the slope, coming out in a wild amphitheatre in the side
of the mountain. The bottom of the amphitheatre was exceedingly rough,

Page 175

owing to confused moraine-heaps, and held a number of small lakes. On
account of its elevation, it was not densely covered with bushes, and no trees
were in sight except along its southern margin. About its northern border ran a
broad terrace, marking the height of the great glacier which formerly occupied
the site of Yakutat bay. The terrace formed a convenient pathway leading
westward to a sharp ridge running out from the mountains and connecting
with an outstanding butte, which promised to afford an unobstructed view to
the westward.

Pressing on, I found that the terrace on which I was traveling at length became
a free ridge, some three hundred feet high, with steep slopes on either side,
like a huge railroad embankment. This ridge swept across the valley in a
graceful curve, and shut off a portion of the western part of the amphitheatre
from the general drainage. In the portion thus isolated there was a lake without
an outlet, still frozen. The snow banks bordering the frozen lake were traced in
every direction by the trails of bears. Continuing my tramp, I crossed broad
snow-fields, climbed the ridge to the westward, and obtained a far-reaching,
unobstructed view of the surrounding country. The elevation reached was only
about 1,500 feet above sea-level, but was above the timber line. The mountain
slopes toward the north were bare of vegetation and generally covered with
snow.

The first object to claim attention was the huge pyramid forming the summit
of Mount St. Elias, which stood out clear and sharp against the northwestern
sky. Although thirty-six miles distant, it dominated all other peaks in view and
rose far above the rugged crests of nearer ranges, many of which would have
been counted magnificent mountains in a less rugged land. This was the first
view of the great peak obtained by any of our party. Not a cloud obscured the
defination of the mountain; and the wonderful transparency of the atmosphere,
after so many days of mist and rain, was something seldom if ever equalled in
less humid lands.

Much nearer than St. Elias, and a little west of north of my station, rose Mount
Cook, one of the most beautiful peaks in the region. Its summit, unlike the
isolated pyramid in which St. Elias terminates, is formed of three white
domes, with here and there subordinate pinnacles of pure white, shooting up
from the snow-fields like great crystals. On the southern side of Mount Cook
there are several rugged and angular ridges, which sweep away for many miles
and project like headlands into the sea of ice, known as the Malaspina glacier,

Page 176

bordering the ocean toward the southwest. Between the main ridges there are
huge trunk glaciers, each contributing its flood of ice to the great glacier
below; and each secondary valley and each amphitheatre among the peaks, no
matter how small, has its individual glacier, and the majority of these are
tributary to the larger ice-streams. All the mountains in sight exceeding 2,000
feet in elevation were white with snow, except the sharpest ridges and boldest
precipices. The attention of the geologist is attracted by the fact that all the
foot-hills of Mount Cook are composed of gray sandstone and black shale; and
he also observes that the angular mountain crest so sharply drawn against the
sky furnishes abundant evidence that the mountains were never subjected to
the abrasion of a continuous ice-sheet.

As I stood on the steep-sloped ridge, the Atrevida and Lucia glaciers, their
surfaces covered from side to side with angular masses of sandstone and shale,
lay at my feet; while farther up the valley the débris on the surface of the ice
disappeared, and all above was a winter landscape. The brown, desolate
débris-fields on the glacier at my feet extended far southward, and covered the
expanded ice-foot in which the glacier terminates. Most curious of all was the
fact that the moraines on the lower border of the glacier were concealed from
view by a dense covering of vegetation, and in places were clothed with
forests of spruce trees.

To the southward, beyond the end of the Lucia glacier, and separated from it
by a torrent-swept bowlder-bed, lay a vast plateau of ice which stretched
toward the south and west farther than the eye could reach. This is the
Malaspina glacier, shown on plate 8. Its borders, like the expanded extremity
of the Lucia glacier, are covered with débris, on the outer margins of which
dense vegetation has taken root. All the central portion of the ice-sheet is clear
of moraines, and shone in the sunlight like a vast snow-field. The heights
formerly reached by the nearer glaciers were plainly marked along the
mountain sides by well-defined terraces, sloping with the present drainage.
When the Lucia glacier was at its flood the ridge on which I stood was only
200 or 300 feet above its surface; now it approaches 1,000 feet.

Turning toward the southeast, I could look down upon the waters of Yakutat
bay, with its thousands of floating icebergs, and could distinguish the white
breakers as they rolled in on Ocean cape. Beyond Yakutat stretches a forest-
covered plateau between the mountains and the sea, and the eye could range
far over the mountains bordering this plateau on the northeast. In the distance,

Page 177

fully a hundred miles away, stood Mount Fairweather, its position rendered
conspicuous by a bank of shining clouds floating serenely above its cold
summit.

The mountains directly east of Yakutat bay rise to a general height of about
8,000 feet, but are without especially prominent peaks. In a general way they
form a rugged plateau, which has been dissected in various channels to depth
of 2,000 or 3,000 feet. Nearly all of the plateau, including mountains and
valleys, is covered with snow-fields and glaciers; but none of the ice-streams,
so far as can be seen from a distance, descend below an elevation of about
4,000 or 5,000 feet. This region is as yet untraversed; and when the explorer
enters it, it is quite possible that deep drainage lines will be found through
which glaciers may descend nearly or quite to sea-level.

After drinking in the effect of the magnificent landscape and endeavoring to
impress every detail in the rugged topography upon my memory, and having
finished writing my notes, it was time to return; for the sun was already
declining toward the west. Wishing to see more of the wonderful land about
me, I concluded to descend the western slope of the ridge upon which I stood,
and to return to camp by following a stream which issues from the Atrevida
glacier directly below my station and empties into Yakutat bay a mile or two
south of our third camp.

The quickest and easiest way down was to slide on the snow. Using my
alpenstock as a brake, I descended swiftly several hundred feet without
difficulty, the dogs bounding along beside me, when on looking up I was
startled to see two huge brown bears on the same snow surface, a little to the
left and not more than a hundred and fifty yards away. Had my slide been
continued a few seconds more I should have been in exceedingly unwelcome
company. I was unarmed, and entirely unprepared for a fight with two of the
most savage animals found in this country. The bears had long yellowish-
brown hair, and were of the size and character of the "grizzly," with which
they are thought by hunters, if not by naturalists, to be specifically identical.
They were not at all disturbed by my presence, and in spite of my shouts,
which I thought would make them travel off, one of them came leisurely
toward me. His strides over the snow revealed a strength and activity
commanding admiration despite the decidedly uncomfortable feeling
awakened by his proximity and evident curiosity. Later in the season I
measured the tracks of an animal of the same species, made while walking

Page 178

over a soft, level surface, and found each impression to measure 9 by 17
inches, and the stride to reach 64 inches. So far as I have been able to learn,
this is the largest bear track that has been reported. Realizing my danger, I
continued my snow slide, but in a different direction and with accelerated
speed. The upper limit of the dense thicket clothing the slope of the mountain
was soon reached, and my unwelcome companions were lost to sight.

Following the bed of a torrent fed by the snow-fields above, I soon came to
the creek chosen for my route back to camp; the waters, brown and turbid with
sediment, welled out of a cavern at the foot of an ice precipice 200 feet high,
and formed a roaring stream too deep and too swift for fording. The roaring of
the brown waters and the startling noises made by stones rattling down the ice-
cliff, together with the dark shadows of the deep gorge, walled in by a steep
mountain slope on one side and a glacier on the other, made the route seem
uncanny. On the sands filling the spaces between the bowlders there were
many fresh bear tracks, which at least suggested that the belated traveler
should be careful in his movements.

This locality was afterward occupied as a camping place, and is shown in the
picture forming plate 10. The dark-colored ice, mixed with stones and earth,
might easily be mistaken for stratified rock; but the dirt discoloring the ice is
almost entirely superficial. The crest of the cliff is formed of débris, and is the
edge of the sheet of stones and earth covering the general surface of the
glacier. Owing to the constant melting, stones and bowlders are continually
loosened to rattle down the steep slope and plunge into the water beneath.

I followed down the bank of the stream, by springing from bowlder to
bowlder, for about a mile, and then came to a steep bluff, the western side of
which was swept by the roaring flood. The banks above were clothed with
spruce trees and dense underbrush; but, there being no alternative, I entered
the forest and slowly worked my way in the direction of camp. To traverse the
unbroken forests of southern Alaska is always difficult, even when one is
fresh; and, weary as I was with many hours of laborious climbing, my
progress was slow indeed. One of the principal obstacles encountered in
threading these Arctic jungles is the plant known as the "Devil's club" (Panax
horridum), which grows to a height of ten or fifteen feet, and has broad,
palmate leaves that are especially conspicuous in autumn, owing to their
bright yellow color. The stems of this plant run on the earth for several feet
and then curve upward. Every portion of its surface, even to the ribs of the

Page 179

leaves, is thickly set with spines, which inflict painful wounds, and, breaking
off in the flesh, cause festering sores. In forcing a way through the brush one
frequently treads on the prostrate portion of these thorny plants, and not
infrequently is made aware of the fact by a blow on the head or in the face
from the over-arching stems.

I struggled on through the tangled vegetation until the sun went down and the
woods became dark and somber. Thick moss, into which the foot sank as in a
bed of sponge, covered the ground everywhere to the depth of two or three
feet; each fallen trunk was a rounded mound of green and brown, decked with
graceful equiseta and ferns, or brilliant with flowers, but most treacherous and
annoying to the belated traveler. In the gloom of the dim-lit woods, the trees,
bearded with moss, assumed strange, fantastic shapes, which every unfamiliar
sound seemed to start into life; while the numerous trails made by the bears in
forcing their way through the thick tangle were positive evidence that not all
the inhabitants of the forest were creatures of the imagination. My faithful
companions, "Bud" and "Tweed" showed signs of weariness, and offered no
objection when I started a fire and expressed my intention of spending the
night beneath the wide-spreading branches of a moss-covered evergreen.
Having a few pieces of bread in my pocket, I shared them with the dogs, and
stretching myself on a luxuriant bank of lichens tried to sleep, only to find the
mosquitoes so energetic that there was no hope of passing the night in
comfort.

After resting I felt refreshed, and concluded to press on through the gathering
darkness, and after another hour of hard work I came out of the forest and
upon a field of torrent-swept bowlders, deposited by the stream which I had
left farther up. I was surprised to find that the twilight was not so far spent as I
had fancied. The way ahead being free of vegetation, I hastened on, and after
traveling about two miles was rejoiced by the sight of a camp-fire blazing in
the distance. The warm fire and a hearty supper soon made me forget the
fatigues of the day.

This, my first day's exploration, must stand as an example of many similar
days spent on the hills and in the forests northwest of Yakutat bay, of which it
is not necessary to give detailed descriptions.

CANOE TRIP IN DISENCHANTMENT BAY.

Page 180

On July 3, I continued my examination of the region about the head of Yakutat
bay by making a canoe trip up Disenchantment bay to Haenke island. With the
assistance of Christie and Crumback, our canoe was launched through the surf
without difficulty, and we slowly worked our way through the fields of
floating ice which covered all the upper portion of the inlet. The men plied the
oars with which the canoe was fortunately provided, while I directed its course
with a paddle. A heavy swell rolling in from the ocean rendered the task of
choosing a route through the grinding ice-pack somewhat difficult. After four
or five hours of hard work, during which time several vain attempts were
made to traverse leads in the ice which had only one opening, we succeeded in
reaching the southern end of the island.

The shores of Haenke island are steep and rocky, and, so far as I am aware,
afford only one cove in which a boat can take refuge. This is at the extreme
southern point, and is not visible until its entrance is reached. A break or
fissure in the rocks there admits of the accumulation of stone and sand, and
this has been extended by the action of the waves and tides until a beach a
hundred feet in length has been deposited. The dashing of the bowlders and
sand against the cliffs at the head of the cove by the incoming waves has
increased its extension in that direction so as to form a well-sheltered refuge.
The absence of beaches on other portions of the island is due to the fact that its
bordering precipices descend abruptly into deep water, and do not admit of the
accumulation of débris about their bases. Without stones and sand with which
the waves can work, the excavation of terraces is an exceedingly slow
operation. The precipitous nature of the borders of the island is due, to some
extent at least, to the abrasion of the rocks by the glacial ice which once
encircled it.

Pulling our canoe far up on the beach, we began the ascent of the cliffs.
Hundreds of sea birds, startled from their nests by our intrusion, circled
fearlessly about our heads and filled the air with their wild cries. The more
exposed portions of the slopes were bare of vegetation, but in the shelter of
every depression dense thickets obstructed the way. Many of the little basins
between the rounded knolls hold tarns of fresh water, and were occupied at the
time of our visit by flocks of gray geese. It is evident that the island was
intensely glaciated at no distant day. The surfaces of its rounded domes are so
smoothly polished that they glitter like mirrors in the sunlight. On the polished
surfaces there are deep grooves and fine, hair-like lines, made by the stones set
in the bottom of the glacier which once flowed over the island and removed all

Page 181

of the rocks that were not firm and hard. On many of the domes of sandstone
there rest bowlders of a different character, which have evidently been brought
from the mountains toward the northeast.

The summit of the island is about 800 feet above the level of the sea, and, like
its sides, is polished and striated. The terraces on the mountains of the
mainland show that the glacier which formerly flowed out from
Disenchantment bay must have been fully 2,000 feet deep. The bed it occupied
toward the south is now flooded by the waters of Yakutat bay.

At the time of Malaspina's visit, 100 years ago, the glaciers from the north
reached Haenke island, and surrounded it on three sides.27 At the rate of retreat
indicated by comparing Malaspina's records with the present condition, the
glaciers must have reached Point Esperanza, at the mouth of Disenchantment
bay, about 200 years ago; and an allowance of between 500 and 1,000 years
would seem ample for the retreat of the glaciers since they were at their flood.
27
The map accompanying Malaspina's report and indicating these conditions has already been
mentioned, and is reproduced on plate 7, page 67.

Reaching the topmost dome of Haenke island, a wonderful panorama of snow-
covered mountains, glaciers, and icebergs lay before us. The island occupies
the position of the stage in a vast amphitheatre; the spectators are hoary
mountain peaks, each a monarch robed in ermine and bidding defiance to the
ceaseless war of the elements. How insignificant the wanderer who confronts
such an audience, and how weak his efforts to describe such a scene!

From a wild cliff-enclosed valley toward the north, guarded by towering
pinnacles and massive cliffs, flows a great glacier, the fountains of which are
far back in the heart of the mountains beyond the reach of vision. Having
vainly sought an Indian name for this ice-stream, I concluded to christen it the
Dalton glacier, in honor of John Dalton, a miner and frontiersman now living
at Yakutat, who is justly considered the pioneer explorer of the region. The
glacier is greatly shattered and pinnacled in descending its steep channel, and
on reaching the sea it expands into a broad ice-foot. The last steep descent is
made just before gaining the water, and is marked by crevasses and pinnacles
of magnificent proportion and beautiful color. This is one of the few glaciers
in the St. Elias region that has well-defined medial and lateral moraines. At the
bases of the cliffs on the western side there is a broad, lateral moraine, and in

Page 182

the center, looking like a winding road leading up the glacier, runs a triple-
banded ribbon of débris, forming a typical medial moraine. The morainal
material carried by the glacier is at last deposited at its foot, or floated away
by icebergs, and scattered far and wide over the bottom of Yakutat bay.

The glacier expands on entering the water, as is the habit of all glaciers when
unconfined, and ends in magnificent ice-cliffs some two miles in length. The
water dashing against the bases of the cliffs dissolves them away, and the tides
tend to raise and lower the expanded ice-foot. The result is that huge masses,
sometimes reaching from summit to base of the cliffs, are undermined, and
topple over into the sea with a tremendous crash. Owing to the distance of the
glacier from Haenke island, we could see the fall long before the roar reached
our ears; the cliffs separated, and huge masses seemed to sink without a sound;
the spray thrown up as the blue pinnacles disappeared ascended like gleaming
rockets, sometimes as high as the tops of the cliffs, and then fell back in silent
cataracts of foam. Then a noise as of a cannonade came rolling across the
waters and echoing from cliff to cliff. The roar of the glacier continues all day
when the air is warm and the sun bright, and is most active when the summer
days are finest. Sometimes, roar succeeded roar, like artillery fire, and the
salutes were answered, gun for gun, by the great Hubbard glacier, which pours
its flood of ice into the fjord a few miles further northeastward. This ice-
stream, most magnificent of the tide-water glaciers of Alaska yet discovered,
and a towering mountain peak from which the glacier receives a large part of
its drainage, were named in honor of Gardiner G. Hubbard, president of the
National Geographic Society.

Page 183

Looking across the waters of the bay, whitened by thousands of floating bergs,
we could see three miles of the ice-cliffs formed where the Hubbard glacier
enters the sea. A dark headland on the shore of the mainland to the right shut
off the full view of the glacier but formed a strongly drawn foreground, which
enhanced the picturesque effect of the scenery. The Hubbard glacier flows
majestically through a deep valley leading back into the mountains, and has
two main branches, with a smaller and steeper tributary between. These
branches unite to form a single ice-foot extending into the bay. The western
branch has a dark medial moraine down its center, which makes a bold,
sweeping curve before joining the main stream. There is also a broad lateral
débris-belt along the bases of the cliffs forming its right bank. The whole
surface of the united glacier, and all of the white tongues running back into the
mountains beyond the reach of vision, are broken and shattered, owing to the
steepness and roughness of the bed over which they flow. The surface, where
not concealed by morainal material, is snow-white; but in the multitude of
crevasses the blue ice is exposed, and gives a greenish-blue tint to the entire
stream. Where the subglacial slopes are steep, the ice is broken into pinnacles
and towers of the grandest description.

Page 184

On the steep mountain sides sloping toward the Hubbard glacier there are
more than a dozen secondary ice-streams which are tributary to it. The
amphitheatres in which the glacier has its beginnings have never been seen;
but our general knowledge of the fountains from which glaciers flow assures
us that not only scores but hundreds of other secondary and tertiary glaciers
far back into the mountains contribute their floods to the same great stream.

After being received on board the Corwin, late in September, we had an
opportunity to view the great sea-cliffs of the Hubbard glacier near at hand.
Captain Hooper, attracted by the magnificent scenery, took his vessel up
Disenchantment bay to a point beyond Haenke island, whence a view could be
had of the eastern extension of the inlet. So far as is known, the Corwin was
the first vessel to navigate those waters. Soundings made between the island
and the ice-foot gave forty to sixty fathoms. At the elbow, where the
southeastern shore of the bay turns abruptly eastward, there is a low islet not
represented on any map previous to the one made by the recent expedition,
which commands even a wider prospect than can be obtained from Haenke
island. Future visitors to this remote coast should endeavor to reach this islet,
after having beheld the grand panorama obtainable from the summit of
Haenke island. The portion of Disenchantment bay stretching eastward from
the foot of Hubbard glacier is enclosed on all sides by bold mountains, the
lower slopes of which have the subdued and flowing outlines characteristic of
glaciated regions. Several glaciers occur in the high-grade lateral valleys
opening from the bay; but these have recently retreated, and none of them
have sufficient volume at present to reach the water. The general recession, in
which all the glaciers of Alaska are participating, is manifested here by the
broad débris fields, which cover all the lower ice-streams not ending in the
sea. The absence of vegetation on the smooth rocks recently abandoned by the
ice also tells of recent climatic changes.

A débris-covered glacier, so completely concealed by continuous sheets of
stones and earth that its true character can scarcely be recognized, descends
from the mountains just east of Hubbard glacier. It is formed by the union of
two principal tributaries, and, on reaching comparatively level ground,
expands into a broad ice-foot, but does not have sufficient volume to reach the
sea. Another glacier, of smaller size but of the same general character, lies
between the Hubbard and Dalton glaciers.

Page 185

In a rugged defile in the mountains just west of Haenke island there is another
small dirt-covered glacier, which creeps down from the precipices above and
reaches within a mile of the water. At its end there is a cliff of black, dirty ice,
scarcely to be distinguished from rock at a little distance, from the base of
which flows a turbid stream. This glacier is covered so completely with earth
and stones that not a vestige of the ice can be seen unless we actually traverse
its surface. Its appearance suggests the name of Black glacier, by which it is
designated on the accompanying map.

The visitor to Haenke island has examples of at least two well-marked types of
glaciers in view: The small débris-covered ice-streams, too small to reach the
water, are typical of a large class of glaciers in southern Alaska, which are
slowly wasting away and have become buried beneath débris concentrated at
the surface by reason of their own melting. The Galiano glacier is a good
example of this class. The Hubbard and Dalton glaciers are fine examples of
another class of ice-streams which flow into the sea and end in ice-cliffs, and
which for convenience we call tide-water glaciers. Nowhere can finer or more
beautiful examples of this type be found than those in view from Haenke
island.

The formation of icebergs from the undermining and breaking down of the
ice-cliffs of the tide-water glaciers has already been mentioned. But there is
another method by which bergs are formed—a process even more remarkable
than the avalanches that occur when portions of the ice-cliffs topple over into
the sea. The ice-cliffs at the foot of the tide-water glaciers are really sea-cliffs
formed by the waves cutting back a terrace in the ice. The submerged terrace
is composed of ice, and may extend out a thousand feet or more in front of the
visible part of the ice-cliffs. These conditions are represented in the
accompanying diagram (figure 1), which exhibits a longitudinal section of the
lower end of a tide-water glacier where it pushes out into the sea.

Page 186

FIGURE 1—Diagram illustrating the Formation of Icebergs

As the sea-cliff of ice recedes and the submerged terrace increases in breadth
there comes a time when the buoyancy of the ice at the bottom exceeds its
strength, and pieces break off and rise to the surface. The water about the ends
of the glaciers is so intensely muddy that the submerged ice-foot is hidden
from view, and its presence would not be suspected were it not for the
fragments occasionally rising from it. The sudden appearance of these masses
of bottom ice at the surface is always startling. While watching the ice-cliffs
and admiring the play of colors in the deep crevasses which penetrate them in
every direction, or tracing in fancy the strange history of the silent river and
wondering in what age the snows fell on the mountains, which are now
returning to their parent, the sea, one is frequently awakened by a commotion
in the waters below, perhaps several hundred feet in front of the ice-cliffs. At
first it seems as if some huge sea-monster had risen from the deep and was
lashing the waters into foam; but soon the waters part, and a blue island rises
to the surface, carrying hundreds of tons of water, which flows down its sides
in cataracts of foam. Some of the bergs turn completely over on emerging, and
thus add to the tumult and confusion that attends their birth. The waves roll
away in widening circles, to break in surf on the adjacent shores, and an island
of ice of the most lovely blue floats serenely away to join the thousands of
similar islands that have preceded it. The fragments of the glacier rising from
the bottom in this manner are usually larger than those broken from the faces
of the ice-cliffs, sometimes measuring 200 or 300 feet in diameter. Their size
and the suddenness with which they rise would insure certain destruction of a
vessel venturing too near the treacherous ice-walls.

At the time of our visit to Haenke island, the entire surface of Disenchantment
bay and all of Yakutat bay as far southward as we could see formed one vast
field of floating ice. Most of the bergs were small, but here and there rose
masses which measured 150 by 200 feet on their sides and stood 40 or 50 feet
out of the water. The bergs are divided, in reference to color, into three classes
—the white, the blue, and the black. The white ones are those that have fallen
from the face of the ice-walls or those that have been sufficiently exposed to
the atmosphere to become melted at the surface and filled with air cavities.
The blue bergs are of many shades and tints, finding their nearest match in
color in Antwerp blue. These are the ones that have recently risen from the
submerged ice-foot, or have turned over owing to a change of position in the

Page 187

center of gravity. Rapid as is the melting of the ice when exposed to the air, it
seems to liquefy even more quickly when submerged. The changes thus
produced finally cause the bergs to reverse their positions in the water. This is
done without the slightest warning, and is one of the greatest dangers to be
guarded against while canoeing among them. The white color presented by the
majority of the bergs is changed to blue when they become stranded, and the
surf breaks over them and dissolves away their porous surfaces. A few of the
bergs are black in color, owing to the dirt and stones that they carry on their
surfaces or frozen in their mass. Quantities of débris are thus floated away
from the tide-water glaciers and strewn over the bottoms of the adjacent inlets.

This digression may be wearisome, but one cannot stand on Haenke island
without wishing to know all the secrets of the great ice-streams that flow
silently before him.

Returning from our commanding station at the summit of the island to where
we left our canoe, we were surprised and not a little startled to find that the
tide had run out and left the strand between our canoe and the water
completely blocked with huge fragments of ice. There was no way left for us
to launch our canoe except by cutting away and leveling off the ice with our
axe, so as to form a trail over which we could drag it to the water. This we did,
and then, poising the canoe on a low flat berg, half of which extended beneath
the water, I took my place in it with paddle in hand, while Christie and
Crumback, waiting for the moment when a large wave rolled in, launched the
canoe far out in the surf. By the vigorous use of my paddle I succeeded in
reaching smooth water and brought the canoe close under the cliff forming the
southern side of the cove, where the men were able to drop in as a wave rolled
under us.

We slowly worked our way down the bay through blue lanes in the ice-pack,
against an incoming tide, and reached our tents near sunset. Thus ended one of
the most enjoyable and most instructive days at Yakutat bay.

FROM YAKUTAT BAY TO BLOSSOM ISLAND.

Our camp on the shore of Yakutat bay was held for several days after returning
from Haenke island, but in the meantime an advance-camp was established on

Page 188

the side of the Lucia glacier, from which Mr. Kerr and myself made
explorations ahead.

Page 189

Before leaving the base-camp I visited Black glacier for the purpose of taking
photographs and studying the appearance of an old glacier far spent and fast
passing away. This, like the Galiano glacier, is a good example of a great
number of ice-streams in the same region which are covered from side to side
with débris. The cañon walls on either side rise precipitously, and their lower
slopes, for the height of 200 or 300 feet, are bare of vegetation. The surface of
the glacier has evidently sunken to this extent within a period too short to
allow of the accumulation of soil and the rooting of plants on the slopes. The
banks referred to are in part below the upper limit of timber growth, and the
adjacent surfaces are covered with bushes, grasses, and flowers. Under the
climatic conditions there prevailing, it is evident that the formation of soil and
the spreading of plants over areas abandoned by ice is a matter of
comparatively few years. It is for this reason that a very recent retreat of Black
glacier is inferred. Many of the glaciers in southern Alaska give similar
evidence of recent contraction, and it is evident that a climatic change is in
progress which is either decreasing the winter's snow or increasing the
summer's heat. The most sensitive indicators of these changes, responding
even more quickly than does the vegetation, are the glaciers.

The fourth of July was spent by us in cutting a trail up the steep mountain
slope to the amphitheatre visited during my first tramp. No one can appreciate
the density and luxuriance of the vegetation on the lower mountain in that
region until he has cut a passage through it. Seven men, working continuously
for six or seven hours with axes and knives, were able to open a comparatively
good trail about a mile in length. The remainder of the way was along stream
courses and up bowlder-washes, which were free from vegetation. In the
afternoon, having finished our task, a half-holiday was spent in an exciting
search for two huge brown bears discovered by one of the party, but they
vanished before the guns could be brought out.

The next day an advance-camp was made in the amphitheatre above timber
line, and there Mr. Kerr and myself passed the night, molested only by swarms
of mosquitoes, and the day following occupied an outstanding butte as a
topographical station. In the afternoon of the same day the advance-camp was
moved to the border of the Atrevida glacier at a point already described, where
a muddy stream gushes out from under the ice.

Page 190

Our next advance-camp, established a few days later, was at Terrace point, as
we called the extreme end of the mountain spur separating the Lucia and
Atrevida glaciers. These ice-streams were formerly much higher than now, and
when at their flood formed terraces along the mountain side, which remain
distinctly visible to the present day. The space between the two glaciers at the
southern end of the mountain spur became filled with bowlders and stones
carried down on the side of the ice-streams, and, as the glaciers contracted,
added a tapering point to the mountain. Between the present surface of the ice
and the highest terrace left at some former time there are many ridges, sloping
down stream, which record minor changes in the fluctuation of the ice. A
portion of one of these terraces is seen to the left in plate 10.

Terrace point, like all the lower portions of the mountain spurs extending
southward from the main range, is densely clothed with vegetation, and during
the short summers is a paradise of flowers. Our tent was pitched on a low
terrace just beyond the border of the ice. The steep bluff rising to an elevation

Page 191

of some 200 feet on the east of our camp was formed by glacial ice buried
beneath an absolutely barren covering of stones and dirt. On the west the
ascent was still more precipitous, but the slope from base to summit was one
mass of gorgeous flowers.

Kerr and myself made several excursions from the camp at Terrace point, and
explored the country ahead to the next mountain spur for the purpose of
selecting a site for another advance-camp. In the meantime the men were busy
in bringing up supplies.

Our reconnoissance westward took us across the Lucia glacier to the mouth of
a deep, transverse gorge in the next mountain spur. The congeries of low peaks
and knobs south of this pass we named the Floral hills, on account of the
luxuriance of the vegetation covering them; and the saddle separating them
from the mountains to the north was called Floral pass.

In crossing the Lucia glacier we experienced the usual difficulties met with on
the débris-covered ice-field of Alaska. The way was exceedingly rough, on

Page 192

account of the ridges and valleys on the ice, and on account of the angular
condition of the débris resting upon it. Many of the ridges could not
conveniently be climbed, owing to the uncertain footing afforded by the
angular stones resting on the slippery slope beneath. Fortunately, the crevasses
were mostly filled with stones fallen from the sides, so that the danger from
open fissures, which has usually to be guarded against in glacial excursions,
was obviated; yet, as is usually the case when crevasses become filled with
débris, the melting of the adjacent surfaces had caused them to stand in relief
and form ridges of loose stones, which were exceedingly troublesome to the
traveler.

Near the western side of the Lucia glacier, between Terrace point and Floral
pass, there is a huge rounded dome of sandstone rising boldly out of the ice.
This corresponds to the "nunataks" of the Greenland ice-fields, and was
covered by ice when the glaciation was more intense than at present. On the

Page 193

northern side of the island the ice is forced high up on its flanks, and is deeply
covered with moraines; but on the southwestern side its base is low and skirted
by a sand plain deposited in a valley formerly occupied by a lake. The melting
of the glacier has, in fact, progressed so far that the dome of rock is free from
ice on its southern side, and is connected with the border of the valley toward
the west by the sand plain. This plain is composed of gravel and sand
deposited by streams which at times became dammed lower down and
expanded into a lake. Sunken areas and holes over portions of the lake bottom
show that it rests, in part at least, upon a bed of ice.

The most novel and interesting feature in the Lucia glacier is a glacial river
which bursts from beneath a high archway of ice just at the eastern base of the
nunatak mentioned above, and flows for about a mile and a half through a
channel excavated in the ice, to then enter the mouth of another tunnel and
become lost to view. An illustration of this strange river and of the mouth of
the tunnel in the débris-covered ice into which it rolls, reproduced from a
photograph by a mechanical process, is given on plate 14, and another view of

Page 194

the mouth of the same tunnel is presented in the succeeding plate. This is the
finest example of a glacial river that it has ever been my good fortune to
examine.

The stream is swift, and its waters are brown and heavy with sediment. Its
breadth is about 150 feet. For the greater part of its way, where open to
sunlight, it flows between banks of ice and over an icy floor. Fragments of its
banks, and portions of the sides and roof of the tunnel from which it emerges,
are swept along by the swift current, or stranded here and there in midstream.
The sand plain already mentioned borders the river for a portion of its course,
and is flooded when the lower tunnel is obstructed.

Page 195

The archway under which the stream disappears is about fifty feet high, and
the tunnel retains its dimensions as far as one can see by looking in at its
mouth. Where the stream emerges is unknown; but the emergence could no
doubt be discovered by examining the border of the glacier some miles
southward. No explorer has yet been bold enough to enter the tunnel and drift
through with the stream, although this could possibly be done without great
danger. The greatest risk in such an undertaking would be from falling blocks
of ice. While I stood near the mouth of the tunnel there came a roar from the
dark cavern within, reverberating like the explosion of a heavy blast in the
chambers of a mine, that undoubtedly marked the fall of an ice mass from the
arched roof. The course of the stream below the mouth of the tunnel may be
traced for some distance by scarps in the ice above, formed by the settling of
the roof. Some of these may be traced in the illustrations. When the roof of the
tunnel collapses so completely as to obstruct the passage, a lake is formed
above the tunnel, and when the obstruction is removed the streams draining
the glacier are flooded.

Page 196

At the mouth of the tunnel there are always confused noises and rhythmic
vibrations to be heard in the dark recesses within. The air is filled with
pulsations like deep organ notes. It takes but little imagination to transform
these strange sounds into the voices and songs of the mythical inhabitants of
the nether regions.

Toward the right of the tunnel, as shown on plate 14, there appears a portion of
the former river bed, now abandoned, owing to the cutting across of a bend in
the stream. The floor of this old channel is mostly of clear, white ice, and has a
peculiar, hummocky appearance, which indicates the direction of the current
that once flowed over it. A portion of the bed is covered with sand and gravel,
and along its border are gravel terraces resting on ice. These occurrences
illustrate the fact that rivers flowing through channels of ice are governed by
the same general laws as the more familiar surface streams.

After examining this glacial river, during our first excursion on the Lucia
glacier, we reached its western banks by crossing above the upper archway.
Traversing the sand plain to the westward, we came to another stream of
nearly equal interest, flowing along the western margin of the glacier, past the
end of the deep gorge called Floral pass. A small creek, flowing down the
pass, joins the stream and skirts the glacier just below the mouth of a wild
gorge on the side of the main valley. This stream once flowed along the border
of the Lucia glacier when it was much higher than now, and began the
excavation of a channel in the rock, which was retained after the surface of the
glacier was lowered by melting. It still flows in a rock-cut channel for about a
mile before descending to the border of the glacier as it exists at present. The
geologist will see at once that this is a peculiar example of superimposed
drainage. The gorge cut by the stream is a deep narrow trench with rough
angular cliffs on either side, and is a good example of a water-cut cañon.
When the Lucia glacier melts away and leaves the broad-bottomed valley clear
of ice, the deep narrow gorge on its western side, running parallel with its
longer axes, but a thousand feet or more above its bottom, will remain as one
of the evidences of a former ice invasion.

During our reconnoissance we turned back at the margin of the second river,
but a day or two later reached the same point with the camp hands and
camping outfit, and, placing a rope from bank to bank, effected a crossing.
Our next camp was in Floral pass. From there we occupied a topographical

Page 197

station on the summit of the Floral hills, and made another reconnoissance
ahead, across the Hayden glacier,28 to the next mountain spur.
28
Named in honor of the late Dr. Ferdinand V. Hayden, founder of the United States Geological
Survey of the Territories.

Floral pass, like so many of the topographical features examined during the
recent expedition, has a peculiar history. It is a comparatively low-grade gorge
leading directly across the end of an angular mountain range forming one of
the spurs of Mount Cook. The position of the pass was determined by an east-
and-west fault and by the erosion of soft shales turned up on edge along the
line of displacement. At its head it is shut in by the Hayden glacier, which
flows past it and forms a wall of ice about two hundred feet high. The water
flowing out from beneath the side of the glacier forms a muddy creek, which
finds its way over a bowlder-covered bed in the bottom of the gorge to the
border of Lucia glacier. Along the sides of the gorge there are many terraces,
which record a complicated history. Evenly stratified clays near its lower end,
adjacent to the Lucia glacier, show that it was at one time occupied in part by
a lake. Above the lacustral beds there are water-worn deposits, indicating that
at a later date the gorge was filled from side to side by moraines and coarse
stream deposits several hundred feet thick. These were excavated, and portions
were left clinging to the hill-sides, forming the terraces of to-day. Diverse
slopes in the terraces suggest that the drainage may at times have been
reversed, according as the Lucia or the Hayden glacier was the higher.

The routes between our various camps, scattered along between Yakutat bay
and Blossom island, were traversed several times by every member of the
party. To traverse the same trail several times with heavy loads, and perhaps in
rain and mist, is disheartening work which I will spare the reader the effort of
following even in fancy.

From our camp in Floral pass another reconnoissance ahead was made by Mr.
Kerr and myself, as already mentioned. These advances, each one of which
told us something new, were the most interesting portions of our journey. The
little adventures and experiences of each advance were reported and talked
over when we rejoined our companions around the camp-fire at night, and
were received with gratifying interest by the men.

Page 198

A view of the Hayden glacier from the Floral hills showed us that it differed
from any of the glaciers previously traversed. Its surface, where we planned to
cross it, was free of débris except along the margins and also near the center,
where we could distinguish a light medial moraine. Farther southward, near
the terminus of the glacier, its surface from side to side was buried beneath a
sheet of stones and dirt. As in many other instances, the débris on the lower
portion of the glacier has been concentrated at the surface, owing to the
melting of the ice, so as to form a continuous sheet.

Early one morning, while traveling over the torrent-swept bowlders in the
stream-bed on our way up Floral pass, we were a little startled at seeing the
head of a bear just visible through the flowers fringing the bank. Before a shot
could be fired, he vanished, and remained perfectly quiet among the bushes
for several minutes. But a trembling of the branches at length betrayed his
presence, and a few minutes later he came out in full view, his yellow-brown
coat giving him the appearance of a huge dog. Standing on a rounded mound
he looked inquiringly down the valley, with his shaggy side in full view. I
fired—but missed my aim. The unsuccessful hunter always has an excuse for
his failure; I had never before used the rifle I carried, and the hair-trigger with
which it was provided deceived me. Fortunately for the bear, and probably still
more fortunately for me, the bullet went far above the mark. The huge beast
vanished again, although the vegetation was not dense, and left us wondering
how such a large animal could disappear so quickly and so completely in such
an open region. On searching for his tracks, we found that he had traversed for
a few rods the plant-covered terrace on which he was first discovered, and
then escaped up a lateral gorge to a broader terrace above.

Reaching the head of the Floral pass and climbing the hill of débris bordering
the Hayden glacier, we came out upon the clear, white ice of the central
portion of the ice-stream. The ice was greatly crevassed, but nearly all the
gaps in its surface could be crossed by jumping or else by ice-bridges. The
most interesting feature presented by the glacier was the way in which it yields
itself to the inequality of the rocks over which it flows. Starting on the eastern
side, below the entrance to Floral pass, and extending northwestward
diagonally across the stream, there is a line of steep descent in the rocks
beneath, which causes the ice to be greatly broken. This is not properly an ice-
fall, except near the confining walls of the cañon; but it might be called an ice-
rapid. The ice bends down over the subglacial scarp with many long breaks,
but does not form pinnacles, as in many similar instances where the descent is

Page 199

greater, and true ice cascades occur. The most practicable way for crossing the
glacier was to ascend the stream above the line of rapids for some distance,
and then follow diagonally down its center, finally veering westward to the
opposite bank. By following this course, and making a double curve like the
letter S, we could cross the steep descent in the center, where it was least
crevassed.

The marginal moraines on the Hayden glacier are formed of fragments of
brown and gray sandstone and black shale of all sizes and shapes. It is clear
that this débris was gathered by the cliffs bordering the glacier on either side.
The medial moraine which first appears at the surface just above the rapids is
of a different character, and tells that the higher peaks of Mount Cook are
composed, in part at least, of a different material from the spurs projecting
from it. The medial moraine looks black from a distance, but, on traversing it,
it was found to be composed mainly of dark-green gabbro and serpentine. The
débris is scattered over the surface in a belt several rods wide; but it is not
deep, as the ice can almost everywhere be seen between the stones. Where the
fragments of rock are most widely separated, there are fine illustrations of the
manner in which small, dark stones absorb the heat of the sun and melt the ice
beneath more rapidly than the surrounding surface, sinking into the ice so as to
form little wells, several inches deep, filled with clear water. Larger stones,
which are not warmed through during a day's sunshine, protect the ice beneath
while the adjacent surface is melted, and consequently become elevated on
pillars or pedestals of ice. The stones thus elevated are frequently large, and
form tables which are nearly always inclined southward. In other instances the
ice over large areas, especially along the center of the medial moraine, was
covered with cones of fine, angular fragments from a few inches to three or
four feet in height. These were not really piles of gravel, as they seemed, but
consisted of cones of ice, sheeted over with thin layers of small stones. The
secret of their formation, long since discovered on the glaciers of Switzerland,
is that the gravel is first concentrated in a hole in the ice and, as the general
surface melts away, acts like a large stone and protects the ice beneath. It is
raised on a pedestal, but the gravel at the borders continually rolls down the
sides and a conical form is the result.

Where we crossed the Hayden glacier it is only about a mile broad in a direct
line; but to traverse it by the circuitous route rendered necessary by the
character of its surface required about three hours of hard tramping, even

Page 200

when unincumbered with packs. From the center of the glacier a magnificent
view may be obtained of the snow-covered domes of Mount Cook, from
which rugged mountain ridges stretch southward like great arms and enclose
the white snow-field from which the glacier flows. At an elevation of 2,500
feet the icy portion disappears beneath the névé on which not a trace of débris
is visible. All the higher portions of the mountains are white as snow can make
them, except where the pinnacles and precipices are too steep to retain a
covering.

On reaching the western side of the glacier we found a bare space on the
bordering cliffs, about a hundred feet high, which has been abandoned by the
ice so recently that it is not yet grassed over. Above this came the luxuriant
and beautiful vegetation covering all the lower mountain slopes.

The mountain spur just west of the glacier, like several of the ridges stretching
southward from the higher mountains, ends in a group of hills somewhat
separate from the main ridge. The hills are covered with a rank vegetation, and
in places support a dense growth of spruce trees. Reaching the grassy summit,
we had a fine, far-reaching view of the unexplored region toward the west, and
of the vast plateau of ice stretching southward beyond the reach of the vision.
West of our station, another great ice-stream, named the Marvine glacier, in
honor of the late A. R. Marvine, flows southward with a breadth exceeding
that of any of the icy streams yet crossed. Beyond the Marvine glacier, and
forming its western border, there is an exceedingly rugged mountain range
trending northeast and southwest. Although this is, topographically, a portion
of the mountain mass forming Mount Cook, its prominence and its peculiar
geological structure render it important that it should have an independent
name. In acknowledgment of the services to science rendered by the first state
geologist of Massachusetts, it is designated the Hitchcock range on our maps.
Rising above the angular crest line of this mountain mass towers the
pyramidal summit of Mount St. Elias, seemingly as distant as when we first
beheld it from near Yakutat bay.

About a mile west of the hill on which we stood, and beyond the bed of a lake
now drained of its waters by a tunnel leading southward through the ice, rose a
steep, rocky island out of the glaciers, its summit overgrown with vegetation
and dark with spruce trees. This oasis in a sea of ice, subsequently named
Blossom island, we chose as the most favorable site for our next advance-
camp.

Page 201

We then returned to our camp in Floral pass, and a day or two later Kerr and
Christie started on a side trip up the Hayden glacier, to be absent five days.
During this trip the weather was stormy, and only allowed half an hour for
topographical work when a somewhat favorable station was reached. This was
of great service, however, in mapping the country, as it gave a station of
considerable elevation on the side of Mount Cook. The trip was nearly all
above the snow-line, and was relieved by many novel experiences.

While Kerr and Christie were away, I assisted the camp hands in advancing to
Blossom island. Our first day's work consisted in packing loads across the
Hayden glacier to the wooded hills on its western border, reached during the
reconnoissance described above. The weather was stormy, and a dense fog
rolled in from the ocean, obscuring the mountains, and compelling us to find
our way across the glacier as best we could without landmarks. Patiently
threading our way among crevasses, we at length came in sight of the forests
on the extremity of the mountain spur toward the west, and concluded to camp
there until the weather was more favorable. We climbed the bare slope
bordering the glacier, and forced our way through the dripping vegetation to
an open space beside a little stream and near some aged spruce trees that
would furnish good fuel for a camp-fire. We were glad of a refuge, but did not
fully appreciate the fact that our tents were in a paradise of flowers until the
next morning, when the sun shone clear and bright for a few hours. We hailed
with delight the world of summer beauty with which we were surrounded. Our
camp was in a little valley amid irregular hills of débris left by the former ice
invasion, each of which was a rounded dome of flowers. The desolate ice-
fields were completely shut out from view by the rank vegetation. On the
slope above us, dark spruce trees loaded with streamers of moss, and
seemingly many centuries old, formed a background for the floral decoration
with which the ground was everywhere covered. Flowering plants and ferns
were massed in such dense luxuriance that the streams were lost in gorgeous
banks of bloom.

Reluctantly we returned to Floral pass for another load of camp supplies, and
late in the afternoon pressed on to Blossom island, where we again pitched our
tents in rain and mist, and again, when the storm cleared away, found
ourselves in an untrodden paradise. Kerr and Christie rejoined us at Blossom
island on July 31, and we were once more ready for an advance.

Page 202

BLOSSOM ISLAND.

Our camp on Blossom island was near a small pond of water and close beside
a thick grove of spruce trees on the western side of the land-mass. The tents
were so placed as to secure an unobstructed view to the westward; and they
were visible, in turn, to parties descending from the mountains toward the
northwest, whither our work soon led us.

The sides of Blossom island are rough and precipitous. The glaciers flowing
past it cut away the rocks and, as the surface of the ice-fields was lowered, left
them in many places in rugged cliffs bare of vegetation. The top of the island
was also formerly glaciated and in part covered with débris; but the ice
retreated so long ago that the once desolate surface has become clothed in
verdure. Everywhere there are dense growths of flowers, ferns and berry
bushes. On the rocky spurs, thrifty spruce trees, festooned with drooping
streamers, shelter luxuriant banks of mosses, lichens and ferns. There was no
evidence that human hand had ever plucked a flower in that luxuriant garden;
not a trace could be found of man's previous invasion. The only trails were
those left by the bears in forcing their way through the dense vegetation in
quest of succulent roots. Later in the season, when the berries ripened, there
was a feast spread invitingly for all who chose to partake. On the warm
summer days the air was filled with the perfume of the flowers, birds flitted in
and out of the shady grove, and insects hummed in the glad sunlight; the
freshness and beauty on every hand made this island seem a little Eden,
preserved with all its freshness and fragrance from the destroying hand of
man.

This oasis in a desert of ice is so beautiful and displays so many instructive
and attractive features that I wish the reader to come with me up the flowery
slopes and study the interesting pictures to be seen from its summit.

The narrow ravine back of our camp is festooned and overhung with tall ferns,
shooting out from the thickets on either hand like bending plumes. You will
notice at a glance, if perchance your youthful excursions happened to be in the
northeastern states, as were mine, that many of the plants about us are old
friends, or at least former acquaintances. The tall fern nodding so gracefully as
we pass is an Asplenium, but of ranker growth than in most southern regions.
These tall white flowers with aspiring, flat-topped umbels, looking like rank
caraway plants, but larger and more showy, belong to the genus Archangelica,

Page 203

and are at home in the Cascade range and the Rocky Mountains as well as
here. The lily-like plant growing so profusely, especially in the moist dells,
with tall, slim spikes of greenish flowers and long parallel veined leaves, is
Veratrum viride. These brilliant yellow monkey-flowers, bending so gracefully
over the banks of the pond, are closely related to the little Mimulus which nods
to its own golden reflection in many of the brooks of New England. That
purple Epilobrum, with now and then a pure white variety, so common
everywhere on these hills, is the same wanderer that we have seen over many
square miles beneath the burnt woods of Maine. These bushes with obscure
white flowers, looking like little waxen bells, we recognize at once as
huckleberries; in a short time they will be loaded with luscious fruit. Inviting
couches of moss beneath the spruce trees are festooned and decorated with
fairy shapes of brown and green, that recall many a long ramble among the
Adirondack hills and in the Canadian woods. The licapods, equiseta and ferns
are many of them identical with the tracery on mossy mounds covering fallen
hemlocks in the Otsego woods in New York, but display greater luxuriance
and fresher and more brilliant colors. That graceful little beach-fern, here and
there faded to a rich brown, foretelling of future changes, is identical with the
little fairy form we used to gather long ago along the borders of the Great
Lakes. Asters and gentians, delicate orchids and purple lupines, besides many
less familiar plants, crowd the hillsides and deck the unkept meadows with a
brilliant mass of varied light. In the full sunshine, the hill-slopes appear as if
the fields of petals clothing them had the prism's power, and were spreading a
web of rainbow tints over the lush leaves and grasses below.

On our return to Blossom island, late in September, we found many of the
flowers faded, but in their places there was a profusion of berries nearly as
brilliant in color as the petals that heralded their coming. Many of the thickets,
inconspicuous before, had then a deep, rich yellow tint, due to an abundance
of luscious salmon berries, larger than our largest blackberries. The
huckleberries were also ripe, and in wonderful profusion. These additions to
our table were especially appreciated after living for more than a month in the
snow. The ash trees were holding aloft great bunches of scarlet berries, even
deeper and richer in color than the ripe leaves on the same brilliant branches.
The deep woods were brilliant with the broad yellow leaves of the Devil's
club, above which rose spikes of crimson berries. The dense thickets of currant
bushes, so luxuriant that it was difficult to force one's way through them, had

Page 204

received a dusky, smoke-like tint, due to abundant blue-black strings of fruit
suspended all along the under sides of the branches.

Let us not look too far ahead, however. Wandering on over the sunny slopes,
where the gardener has forgotten to separate the colors or to divide the flower
banks, we gain the top of the island; but so dense are the plants about us, and
so eager is each painted cup to expand freely in the sunlight at the expense of
its neighbors, that we have to beat them down with our alpenstocks—much as
we dislike to mar the beauty of the place—before we can recline on the thick
turf beneath and study the strange landscape before us.

The foreground of every view is a bank of flowers nodding and swaying in the
wind, but all beyond is a frozen desert. The ice-fields before us, with their
dark bands of débris, are a picture of desolation. The creative breath has
touched only the garden which we, the first of wanderers, have invaded. The
land before us is entirely without human associations. No battles have there
been fought, no kings have ruled, no poets have sung of its ruggedness, and no
philosopher has explained its secrets. Yet it has its history, its poetry, and its
philosophy!

The mountains toward the north are too near at hand to reveal their grandeur;
only the borders of the vast snow-fields covering all of these upper slopes are
in view. In the deep cañon with perpendicular walls, just north of our station,
but curving westward so that its upper course is concealed from view, there
flows a secondary glacier which forces its terminal moraine high up on the
northern slope of Blossom island, but does not now join the ice-field on the
south. Streams of turbid water flow from this glacier on each side of the oasis
on which we stand and unite at the mouth of a dark tunnel in the ice toward
the south.

The barren gravel plain just east of our station, and at the foot of the glacier
from the north, is the bed of a glacial lake which has been drained through the
tunnel in the ice. On our way to Blossom island we crossed this area and
found that it had but recently lost its waters. Miniature terraces on the gravel
banks forming the sides of the basin marked the height to which the waters
last rose, and all the slopes formerly submerged were covered with a thin layer
of sediment. On the sides of the basin where this fresh lining rests on steep

Page 205

slopes there are beautiful frettings made by rills in the soft sediment. The
stream from the glacier now meanders across this sand plain, dividing as it
goes into many branches, which unite on approaching the dark archway below.
The lake is extremely irregular in its behavior, and may be filled and emptied
several times in a season. The waters are either restrained or flow freely,
according as the tunnel through which they discharge is obstructed or open.
The lake is typical of a class. Similar basins may be found about many of the
spurs projecting into the Malaspina glacier.

A little west of the glacier to which I have directed your attention there is a
narrow mountain gorge occupied by another glacier, of small size but having
all the principal characteristics of even the largest Alpine glaciers of the
region. It is less than half a mile in length, has a high grade, and is fed by
several lateral branches. Its surface is divided into an ice region below and a
névé region above. It has lateral and medial moraines, ice pinnacles, crevasses,
and many other details peculiar to glaciers. From its extremity, which is dark
with dirt and stones, there flows a stream of turbid water. It is, in fact, a
miniature similitude of the ice-streams on the neighboring mountain, some of
which are forty or fifty miles in length and many times wider in their
narrowest part than the little glacier before us is long. The more thoroughly we
become acquainted with the mountains of southern Alaska the more
interesting and more numerous do the Alpine glaciers of the third order
become. Already, thousands could be enumerated.

I will not detain my imaginary companion longer with local details, but turn at
once to the objects which will ever be the center of attraction to visitors who
may chance to reach this remote island in the ice. Looking far up the Marvine
glacier, beyond the tapering pinnacles and rugged peaks about its head, you
will see spires and cathedral-like forms of the purest white projected against
the northern sky. They recall at once the ecclesiastic architecture of the Old
World; but instead of being dim and faded by time they seem built of
immaculate marble. They have a grandeur and repose seen only in mountains
of the first magnitude. The cathedral to the right, with the long roof-like crest
and a tapering spire at its eastern terminus, is Mount Augusta; its elevation is
over 13,000 feet. A little to the west, and equally beautiful but slightly less in
elevation, is Mount Malaspina—a worthy monument to the unfortunate
navigator whose name it bears. These peaks are on the main St. Elias range,
but from our present point of view they form only the background of a
magnificent picture. Later in the season our tents were pitched at their very

Page 206

bases, and they then revealed their full grandeur and fulfilled every promise
given by distant views.

The rugged Hitchcock range bordering the distant margin of the Marvine
glacier, like the mountains near at hand and the rocky island on which we
stand, is composed of sandstone and shale, but presents one interesting
feature, to which I shall direct your attention. The trend of the range is
northeast and southwest, but the strata of which it is composed run east and
west and are inclined northward. As the range is some eight miles long, these
conditions would seem to indicate a thickness of many thousands of feet for
the rocks of which it is composed; yet the beds were deposited in horizontal
sheets of sand and mud of very late date, as will be shown farther on. But the
great apparent thickness of the strata is deceptive: a nearer examination would
reveal the fact that the rocks have been so greatly crushed that even a hand
specimen can scarcely be broken off with fresh surfaces. More than this, the
black shale, exhibiting the greatest amount of crushing, is usually in wedge-
shaped masses, which, in some cases at least, are bordered by what are known
as thrust planes, nearly coinciding with the bedding planes of the strata. The
rocks have been fractured and crushed together in such a way as to pile
fragments of the same layer on top of each other, and thus to increase greatly
their apparent thickness. In the elevations before us the thrust planes are tipped
northeastwardly, and it would seem that the force that produced them acted
from that direction. The apparent thickness of the beds has thus been increased
many times. What their original thickness was, it is not now possible to say.
Similar indications of a lateral crushing in the rocks may be found in several
of the mountain spurs between the Hitchcock range and Yakutat bay; but space
will not permit me to follow this subject further.

Turning from the mountains, we direct our eyes seaward; but it is a sea of ice
that meets our view and not the blue Pacific. Far as the eye can reach toward
the west, toward the south, and toward the southeast there is nothing in view
but a vast plateau of ice or barren débris fields resting on ice and concealing it
from view. This is the Malaspina glacier.

On the border of the ice, just below the cliffs on which we stand, there is a belt
of débris perhaps five miles in breadth, which almost completely conceals the
ice beneath. Portions of this moraine are covered by vegetation, and in places
it is brilliant with flowers. The vegetation is most abundant on the nearer
border and fades away toward the center of the glacier. Its distant border,

Page 207

adjacent to the white ice-field beyond, is absolutely bare and desolate. An
attempt has been made to reproduce this scene in the picture forming plate 16.
The drawing is from a photograph and shows the barren débris field stretching
away towards the southwest. The extreme southern end of the Hitchcock range
appears at the right. In the distance is the white ice of the central part of the
Malaspina glacier. Far beyond, faintly outlined against the sky, are the snow-
covered hills west of Icy bay. The flowers in the foreground are growing on
the crest of the steep bluff bordering Blossom island on the south.

On the moraine-covered portion, especially where plants have taken root,
there are hundreds, perhaps thousands, of lakelets occupying kettle-shaped
depressions. A view of one of these interesting reservoirs in the ice is given in
figure 2. If we should go down to the glacier and examine such a lakelet near
at hand, we should find that the cliffs of ice surrounding them are usually

Page 208

unsymmetrical, being especially steep and rugged on one side and low or
perhaps wanting entirely on the other. But there is no regularity in this respect;
the steep slopes may face in any direction. On bright days the encircling walls
are always dripping with water produced by the melting of the ice; little rills
are constantly flowing down their sides and plunging in miniature cataracts
into the lake below; the stones at the top of the ice-cliffs, belonging to the
general sheet of débris covering the glacier, are continually being undermined
and precipitated into the water. A curious fact in reference to the walls of the
lakelets is that the melting of the ice below the surface is more rapid than
above, where it is exposed to the direct rays of the sun. As a result the
depressions have the form of an hour-glass, as indicated in the accompanying
section.

Page 209

FIGURE 2—View of a glacial Lakelet (drawn from a Photograph).

Page 210

FIGURE 3—Section of a glacial lakelet.

Beyond the bordering moraines at our feet, we can look far out over the ice-
plateau and view hundreds of square miles of its frozen surface. At the same
time we obtain glimpses of other vast ice-fields toward the west, beyond Icy
bay; but their limits in that direction are unknown.

Later in the season I made an excursion far out on the Malaspina glacier from
the extreme southern end of the Hitchcock range, and became acquainted with
many of its peculiarities. Its surface, instead of being a smooth snow-field, as
it appears from a distance, is roughened by thousands of crevasses, many of
which are filled with clear, blue water. Over hundreds of square miles the
surface appears as if a giant plow had passed over it, leaving the ice furrowed
with crevasses. The crevasses are not broad; usually one can cross them at a
bound. They appear to be the scars left by rents in the tributary ice-streams.

The stillness far out on the great ice-field is immediately noticed by one who
has recently traversed the sloping surfaces of the tributary glaciers. It is always
silent on that vast frozen plateau. There are no surface streams and no lakes;
not a rill murmurs along its channel of ice; no cascades are formed by streams
plunging into moulins and crevasses. The water produced by the melting of
the ice finds its way down into the glacier and perhaps to its bottom, and must
there form rivers of large size; but no indications of their existence can be
obtained at the surface. The icy surface is undulating, and resembles in some
respects the great rolling prairies of the west; it is a prairie of ice. In the central

Page 211

portion not a shoot of vegetation casts its shadow, and scarcely a fragment of
rock can be found. The boundaries of the vast plateau have never been
surveyed, but its area cannot be less than five hundred square miles. The clear
ice of the center greatly exceeds the extent of the moraine-covered borders. It
has a general elevation of fifteen or sixteen hundred feet, being highest near
the end of the Hitchcock range, where the Seward glacier comes in, and
decreasing from there in all directions. From the summit of Blossom island
and other commanding stations it is evident that the dark moraine belts about
its borders are compound and record a varied history. Far away toward the
southeast the individual elements may be distinguished. The dark bands of
débris sweep around in great curves and concentric, swirl-like figures, which
indicate that there are complicated currents in the seemingly motionless
plateau.

The Malaspina glacier belongs to a class of ice bodies not previously
recognized, which are formed at the bases of mountains by the union of
several glaciers from above. Their position suggests the name of Piedmont
glaciers for the type. They differ from continental glaciers in the fact that they
are formed by the union of ice-streams and are not the sources from which ice-
streams flow. The supply from the tributary glacier is counterbalanced by
melting and evaporation.

If the reader has become interested in the vast ice-fields about Blossom island,
he may wish to continue our acquaintance and go with me into the great snow-
fields on the higher mountains, where the ice-rivers feeding the Malaspina
glacier have their sources.

LIFE ABOVE THE SNOW-LINE.

Early on the morning of August 2, all necessary preparations having been
made the day previous, we started in the direction of the great snow peak to be
seen at the head of the Marvine glacier, where we hoped to find a pass leading
through the mountains which would enable us to reach the foot of Mount St.
Elias or to discover a practicable way across the main range into the unknown
country toward the north.

Page 212

All of the camp hands were with us at the start, except Stamy and White, who
had been despatched to Port Mulgrave to purchase shoes. All but Crumback
and Lindsley were to return to Blossom island, however, after leaving their
loads at a rendezvous as far from Blossom island as could be reached in a day
and allow sufficient time to return to the base-camp. Kerr and myself, with the
two camp hands mentioned, were to press on to the snow-fields above. We
took with us a tent, blankets, rations, an oil-stove, and a supply of coal oil, and
felt equal to any emergency that might arise.

The morning of our departure was thick and foggy, with occasional showers,
and the weather grew worse instead of better as we advanced. All the
mountains were soon shut out from view by the vast vapor banks that settled
down from above, and we had little except the general character of the glacier
to guide us.

Our way at first led up the eastern border of the Marvine glacier, over
seemingly interminable fields of angular débris. Traveling on the rugged
moraine, some idea of which may be obtained from plate 17, was not only
tiresome in the extreme, but ruinous to boots and shoes. On passing the mouth
of the first lateral gorge (about a mile from Blossom island), from which flows
a secondary glacier, we could look up the bed of the steep ravine to the white
precipices beyond, which seemed to descend out of the clouds, and were
scarred by avalanches; but all of the higher peaks were shrouded from view.
At noon we passed the mouth of a second and larger gorge, which discharges
an important tributary. We then left the border of the glacier and traveled up its
center, the crevasses at the embouchures of the tributary stream being too
numerous and too wide to be crossed without great difficulty.

Page 213

In the center of the Marvine glacier there is a dark medial moraine, composed
mainly of débris of gabbro and serpentine, of the same character as the medial
moraine on the Hayden glacier, already briefly mentioned. Here, too, we
found broad areas covered with sand cones and glacial tables. There are also
rushing streams, flowing in channels of ice, which finally plunge into
crevasses or in well-like moulins and send back a deep roar from the caverns
beneath. The murmurs of running waters, heard on every hand, seem to
indicate that the whole glacier is doomed to melt away in a single season.

Early in the afternoon we reached the junction of the two main branches of the
Marvine glacier, and chose the most westerly. We were still traveling over
hard blue ice in which the blue and white vein-structure characteristic of
glaciers could be plainly distinguished. The borders of the ice-streams were
dark with lateral moraines; but after passing the last great tributary coming in
from the northeast we reached the upper limit of the glacier proper and came
to the lower border of the névé fields, above which there is little surface

Page 214

débris. The glacier there flows over a rugged descent, and is greatly broken by
its fall. At first we endeavored to find a passage up the center of the crevassed
and pinnacled ice, but soon came to an impassable gulf. Turning toward the
right, we traversed a ridge of ice between profound gorges and reached the
base of the mountain slope bordering the glacier on the east. Our party was
now divided; Christie and his companion were left searching for a convenient
place to leave the cans of rations they carried, while we, who were to explore
the regions above, were endeavoring to find a way up the ice-fall. A shout
from our companions below called our attention to the fact that they were
unable to reach the border of the glacier, where they had been directed to leave
their packs, and that they had left them on the open ice. They waved us "good-
bye" and started back toward Blossom island, leaving our little band of four to
make the advance.

Descending into a deep black gorge at the border of the ice, formed by its
melting back from the bordering cliffs, we clambered upward beneath
overhanging ice-walls, from which stones and fragments of ice were
occasionally dropping, and finally reached a great snow-bank on the border of
the glacier. As the storm still continued, and was even increasing in force, we
concluded to find a camping ground soon as possible and make ourselves
comfortable as the circumstances would permit.

FIRST CAMP IN THE SNOW.

We had now reached the lower limit of perpetual snow. There were no more
moraines on the surface of the glacier, and no bare rock surfaces large enough
to hold a tent. The entire region was snow-mantled as far as the eye could see,
except where pinnacles and cliffs too steep and rugged for the snow to
accumulate rose above the general surface. A little to one side of the mouth of
a steep lateral gorge we found a spot in which a mass of partly disintegrated
shale had fallen down from the cliff. We scraped the fragments aside,
smoothed the snow beneath, and built a wall of rock along the lower margin.
The space above was filled in with fragments of shale, so as to form a shelf on
which to pitch our tent. Soon our blankets were spread, with our water-proof
coats for a substratum, and supper was prepared over the oil-stove.

Darkness settled down over the mountains, and the storm increased as the
night came on. What is unusual in Alaska, the rain fell in torrents, as in the

Page 215

tropics. Our little tent of light cotton cloth afforded great protection, but the
rain-drops beat on it with such force that the spray was driven through and
made a fine rain within. Weary with many hours of hard traveling over
moraines and across crevassed ice, and in an atmosphere saturated with
moisture, we rolled ourselves in our blankets, determined to rest in spite of the
storm that raged about.

As the rain became heavier, the avalanches, already alarmingly numerous,
became more and more frequent: A crash like thunder, followed by the clatter
of falling stones, told that many tons of ice and rocks on the mountains to the
westward had slid down upon the borders of the glacier; another roar near at
hand, caused by an avalanche on our own side of the glacier, was followed by
another, another, and still another out in the darkness, no one could tell where.
The wilder the storm, the louder and more frequent became the thunder of the
avalanches. It seemed as if pandemonium reigned on the mountains. One
might fancy that the evil spirits of the hills had prepared for us a reception of
their own liking—but decidedly not to the taste of their visitors. Soon there
was a clatter and whiz of stones at our door. Looking out I saw rocks as large
as one's head bounding past within a few feet of our tent. The stones on the
mountain side above had been loosened by the rain, and it was evident that our
perch was no longer tenable. Before we could remove our frail shelter to a
place of greater safety, a falling rock struck the alpenstock to which the ridge-
rope of our tent was fastened and carried it away. Our tent "went by the
board," as a sailor would say, and we were left exposed to the pouring rain.
Before we could gather up our blankets they were not only soaked, but a
bushel or more of mud and stones from the bank above, previously held back
by the tent, flowed in upon them. Rolling up our blankets and "caching" the
rations, instruments, etc., under a rubber cloth held down by rocks, we hastily
dragged our tent-cloth down to the border of the glacier, at the extremity of a
tapering ridge, along which it seemed impossible for stones from above to
travel. We there pitched our tent on the hard snow, without the luxury of even
a few handfuls of shale beneath our blankets. Wet and cold, we sought to wear
the night away as best we could, sleep being impossible. Crumback, who had
been especially energetic in removing the tent, regardless of his own exposure,
was wet and became cold and silent. The oil-stove and a few rations were
brought from the cache at the abandoned camp, and soon a dish of coffee was
steaming and filling the tent with its delicious odor. Our shelter became
comfortably warm and the hot coffee, acting as a stimulant, restored our

Page 216

sluggish circulation. We passed an uncomfortable night and watched anxiously
for the dawn. Toward morning a cold wind swept down the glacier and the
rain ceased. With the dawn there came indications that the storm had passed,
although we were still enveloped in dense clouds and could not decide
whether or not a favorable change in the weather had occurred. We were still
cold and wet and the desire to return to Blossom island, where all was
sunshine and summer, was great. Uncertain as to what would be the wisest
course, we packed our blankets and started slowly down the mountain, looking
anxiously for signs that the storm had really passed.

An hour after sunrise a rift in the mist above us revealed the wonderful blue of
the heavens, and allowed a flood of sunlight to pour down upon the white
fields beneath. Never was the August sun more welcome. The mists vanished
before its magic touch, leaving here and there fleecy vapor-wreaths festooned
along the mountain side; as the clouds disappeared, peak after peak came into
view, and snow-domes and glaciers, never seen before, one by one revealed
themselves to our astonished eyes. When the curtain was lifted we found
ourselves in a new world, more wild and rugged than any we had yet beheld.
There was not a tree in sight, and nothing to suggest green fields or flowery
hill-sides, except on a few of the lower mountain spurs, where brilliant Alpine
blossoms added a touch of color to the pale landscape. All else was stern,
silent, motionless winter.

The glacier, clear and white, without a rock on its broken surface, looked from
a little distance like a vast snow-covered meadow. We were about a mile
above the lower limit of the snow-fields, where the blue ice of the glacier
comes out from beneath the névé. The blue ice was deeply buried, and could
only be seen in the deepest crevasses. Across the glacier rose the angular cliffs
and tapering spires of the Hitchcock range. Every ravine and gulch in its
rugged sides was occupied by glaciers, many of which were so broken and
crevassed that they looked like frozen cataracts.

Cheered by the bright skies and sun-warmed air, we pushed on up the glacier,
taking the center of the stream in order to avoid the crevasses, which were
most numerous along its borders. Two or three miles above our first camp we
found a place where a thin layer of broken shale covered the snow, at a
sufficient distance from the steep slopes above to be out of the reach of
avalanches. We there established our second camp after leaving Blossom

Page 217

island, dried our blankets, and spent the remainder of the day basking in the
sunlight and gathering energy for coming emergencies.

We found the névé of the Marvine glacier differing greatly from the lower or
icy portion previously traversed. Instead of ice with blue and white bands, as
is common lower down, the entire surface, and as far down in the crevasses as
the eye could distinguish, was composed of compact snow, or snow changed
to icy particles resembling hail and having in reality but few of the properties
of ordinary snow: it might properly be called névé ice. Usually the thickness
of the layers varied from ten to fifteen feet. Separating them were dark lines
formed by dust blown over the surface of the glacier and buried by subsequent
snow-storms, or by thin blue lines formed by the edges of sheets of ice and
showing that the snow surface had been melted during bright sunny days and
frozen again at night. The horizontal stratification so plainly marked in all the
crevasses in the névé was almost entirely wanting, or at least was not
conspicuous, in the lower portion of the glacier, where, instead, we found
those narrow blue and white bands already mentioned, the origin of which has
been so well described and explained by Tyndall.

The center of the Marvine glacier, as in most similar ice-streams, is higher and
less broken by crevasses than its borders. The crevasses at the side trend up
stream, as is the case with marginal crevasses generally. In the present instance
the courses of these rents could be plainly distinguished on each border of the
glacier, when looking down upon it from neighboring slopes. The crevasses
occur at quite regular intervals of approximately fifty feet, and diverge from
the bank at angles of about 40°. In the banks of snow bordering the glacier
similar crevasses diverge from the margin of the flowing glacier and trend
down along its banks. The marginal crevasses and the crevasses in the
bordering snow-fields, to which no special name has been given, fall nearly in
line; but between the two there is a series of irregular cracks and broken snow,
sharply defining the border of the moving névé.

The origin of the marginal crevasses trending up stream was explained during
the study of the glaciers of Switzerland. The following diagram and
explanation illustrating their development are copied from Tyndall:

"Let A C be one side of the glacier and B D the other; and let the direction of motion be that
indicated by the arrow. Let S T be a transverse slice of the glacier, taken straight across it, say to-
day. A few days or weeks hence the slice will have been carried down, and because the center

Page 218

moves more quickly than the sides it will not remain straight, but will bend into the form S' T'.
Supposing T i to be a small square of the original slice near the side of the glacier; in the new
position the square will be distorted to the lozenge-shaped figure T' i'. Fix your attention upon the
diagonal T i of the square; in the lower position this diagonal, if the ice could stretch, would be
lengthened to T' i'. But the ice does not stretch; it breaks, and we have a crevasse formed at right
angles to T' i'. The mere inspection of the diagram will assure you that the crevasse will point
obliquely upward."29

FIGURE 4—Diagram illustrating the Formation of marginal Crevasses.

29
The Forms of Water: International Scientific Series, New York, 1875, pp. 107–108.

The explanation given above applies especially to the lower or icy portion of a
glacier; above the snow-line other facts appear. When a glacier flows through
fields of snow on a level with its surface, crevasses are formed in the adjacent
banks. These trend down stream for the same reason that the crevasses in the
glacier proper trend up stream—that is, the friction of the moving stream
against its banks tends to carry them along, while the portions at a distance are
stationary. Fissures are thus opened which trend in the direction in which the
glacier moves. The angle made by these crevasses with the axis of the glacier
is about the same as those of the marginal crevasses, but in an opposite
direction. They are widest near the margin of the glacier and taper to a sharp
end towards the stationary snow-banks above. The crevasses in the two series
thus fall nearly in line, but are separated by a narrow band of irregularly
broken snow, marking the actual border of the glacier.29
30
Crevasses in snow-fields through which ice-streams flow will be mentioned again in describing
the Seward glacier.

Page 219

After leaving Blossom island the party was divided, and we began a new
series of numbers for our camp above the snow-line, although in this narrative
and on the accompanying map a single series of numbers for all the camps
will be used. While in the field the camps in the snow were usually termed,
facetiously, "sardine camps," in allusion to the uncomfortable manner in which
we were packed in our tent at night.

ACROSS PINNACLE PASS.

The morning after reaching Camp 12 dawned gloriously bright. The night had
been cold, and a heavy frost had silenced every rill from the snow-slopes
above. The clear, bracing air gave us renewed energy and a firmer desire to
press on. Mr. Kerr and myself made an excursion ahead, while Lindsley and
Crumback brought up a load of supplies from the cache left on the glacier
below Camp 11.

On gaining the center of the Marvine glacier we had a magnificent view down
the broad ice-stream, bordered on either hand by towering, snow-laden
precipices, and changing, as the eye followed the downward slope, from pure
white to brown and black in the distance. Far below we could barely discern
the wooded summit of Blossom island, beyond which stretched the seemingly
limitless ice-fields of the Malaspina glacier. All about us the white slope
reflected the sunlight with painful brilliancy, while the black moraines and
forests below and the mists over the distant ocean, made it seem as if one was
looking down into a lower and darker world.

As we advanced toward the head of the glacier we found, as on several
subsequent occasions, that the nearer we approached the sources of an ice-
stream the easier our progress became. Following up the center of the glacier,
we learned that it curved toward the east; and after an hour or two of weary
tramping we reached the great amphitheatre in which it has its source. All
about us were rugged mountain slopes, heavily loaded with snow, and forming
clear white cliffs from which avalanches had descended. To the westward the
wall of the amphitheatre was broken, and it was apparent that we could cross
its rim in that direction. Pressing onward up the gently ascending slope, we
came at length to a gap in the mountains bordered on the north by a towering
cliff fully a thousand feet high, and were rejoiced to find that the snow surface
on the opposite side of the divide inclined westward with a grade as gentle as

Page 220

the one we had ascended. Looking far down the western snow-slope, we could
see where it joined a large glacier flowing southward past the end of the great
cliffs which extended westward from the divide. The glacier we saw in the
valley below is designated on our map as the Seward glacier, in honor of
William H. Seward, the former Secretary of State, who negotiated the
purchase of Alaska for the United States.

The pass we named Pinnacle pass, on account of the many towering pinnacles
overshadowing it. Its elevation is about four thousand feet, and at the summit
it has a breadth of only two or three hundred feet. The snow on the divide is
greatly crevassed, but a convenient snow-bridge enabled us to cross without
difficulty. The crevasses increased in breadth with the advance of the season,
and on returning from our mountain trip in September we had to climb up on
the bordering cliff in order to pass the main crevasse at the summit. Some idea
of the crevasses of this region may be obtained from the following figure,
drawn from a photograph taken on the western side of Pinnacle pass, not far
from the summit.

Page 221

FIGURE 5—Crevasses on Pinnacle Pass; from a Photograph.

The cliff on the north of Pinnacle pass is really a huge fault-scarp of recent
date, intersecting stratified shale, limestone, and conglomerate, with a few thin
coal-seams. The strata dip toward the north at a high angle, and present their
broken edges in the great cliff rising above the pass. The cliffs extend
westward from the pass, and retain a nearly horizontal crest line, but increase
in height and grandeur, owing to the downward grade of the glacier along their
base. A mile to the westward their elevation is fully two thousand feet. The
cliffs throughout are almost everywhere bare of snow and too steep and
rugged to be scaled. They form a strongly drawn boundary line in the geology
of the region, and furnish the key to the structure and geological character of
an extended area. All the rocks to the southward are sandstone and shale
belonging to a well-defined series, and differ materially from the rocks in the
fault-scarp. I have called the rocks toward the south, the Yakutat system, and
those exposed in the faces of the fault-scarp the Pinnacle system. Directly
north of Pinnacle pass, and at the base of Mount Owen, the rocks of the
Yakutat system are exposed, and from their position and association it is
evident that they are younger than the Pinnacle system and belong above it. If
these conclusions are sustained by future investigation, they will carry with
them certain deductions which are among the most remarkable in geological
history. On the crest of the Pinnacle pass cliffs I afterwards found strata
containing fossil shells and leaves belonging to species still living. These
records of animal and plant life show that not only were the rocks of the
Pinnacle system deposited since living species of mollusks and plants came
into existence, but that the Yakutat system is still more recent. More than this,
the upheaval of the mountains, the formation of numerous fault-scarps, and the
origin of the glaciers, have all occurred since Pliocene times.

The discovery of Pinnacle pass left no question as to the route to be traversed
in order to reach the mountains to the westward. We returned to Camp 12, and
the following day, with Crumback and Lindsley to assist us, advanced our
camp across Pinnacle pass and far down the western snow-slope.

The day we crossed the pass was bright and clear in the morning, but clouds
gathered around all the higher peaks about midday, vanishing again at
nightfall. As it was desirable to occupy, for topographic and other purposes, a
station on the top of the cliffs overlooking Pinnacle pass, we made an effort to

Page 222

reach the crest of the ridge by climbing up the steep scarp just at the divide,
where the cliffs are lowest. While Crumback returned to Camp 12 for an
additional load and Lindsley went ahead to discover a new camping place,
Kerr and myself, taking the necessary instruments, began the ascent; but we
found it exceedingly difficult. The outcrops of shale in the lower portion of the
cliff furnished but poor foothold, and crumbled and broke away at every step.
Once my companion, losing his support, slid slowly down the slope in spite of
vigorous efforts to hold on, and a rapid descent in the yawning chasm below
seemed inevitable, when, coming to a slightly rougher surface, he was able to
control his movements and to regain what had been lost. Climbing on, we
came to the base of a vertical wall of shale several hundred feet high, and
made a detour to the left where a cascade plunged down a narrow channel. We
ascended the bed of the stream, which was sometimes so steep that the spray
dashed over us, and reached the base of an overhanging cliff of conglomerate
composed of well-worn pebbles. Above this rose a cliff of snow fifty feet or
more in height, which threatened to crash down in avalanches at any moment.
One small avalanche did occur during the ascent, and scattered its spray in our
faces. Had a heavy avalanche formed, our position would have been
exceedingly dangerous; but by taking advantage of every overhanging ledge,
and watching for the least sign of movement in the snow above, we reached
without accident a sheltered perch underneath an overhanging cliff near the
base of the snow. We then discovered that clouds were forming on all the high
mountains, and shreds of vapor blown over the crest of the cliff above told us
that further efforts would be useless. Seeking a perch protected from
avalanches by an overhanging cliff, we had a splendid view far out over the
sloping snow-plain toward the west and of the mountains bordering Pinnacle
pass on the south. My notes written in this commanding station read as
follows:

"Looking down from my perch I can plainly distinguish the undulations
and crevasses in the broad snow-fields stretching westward from Pinnacle
pass. Each inequality in the rock beneath the glacier is reproduced in
flowing and subdued outlines in the white surface above. The positions of
bosses and cliffs in the rock beneath are indicated by rounded domes and
steep descents in the snow surface. About the lower sides of these
inequalities there are in some cases concentric blue lines and in others
radiating fissures, marking where the snow has broken in making the
descent. The side light shining from the eastward down the long westerly

Page 223

slope reveals by its delicate shading the presence of broad, terrace-like,
transverse steps into which the stream is divided. Were the snow removed
and the rock beneath exposed, we should find broad terraces separated by
scarps sweeping across the bed of the glacier from side to side. Similar
terraces occur in glaciated cañons in the Rocky Mountains and the Sierra
Nevada, but their origin has never been explained. The glacier is here at
work sculpturing similar forms; but still it is impossible to understand
how the process is initiated.

"Right in front of us, and only a mile or two away, rise the cliffs, spires,
and pinnacles of the Hitchcock range. Every ravine and amphitheatre in
the great mountain mass is deeply filled with snow, and the sharp angular
crests look as if they had been thrust up through the general covering of
white. The northern end of the range is clearly defined by the east-and-
west fault to which Pinnacle pass owes its origin. The trend of the mighty
cliffs on the southern face, on which we have found a perch, is at right
angles to the longer axis of the Hitchcock range, and marks its northern
terminus both topographically and geologically.

"There is not even a suggestion of vegetation in sight. The eye fails to
detect a single dash of green or the glow of a single Alpine flower
anywhere on the rugged slopes. A small avalanche from the snow-cliffs
above, cascading over the cliff which shelters me and only a few yards
away, tells why the precipices are so bare and desolate: they have been
swept clean by avalanches.

"Far down the western snow-slope I can distinguish crevasses and dirt
bands in the Seward glacier, which flows southward past the range on
which we sit. The marginal crevasses along the border of the glacier can
clearly be distinguished. As usual, they trend up-stream and, meeting
medial crevasses, break the surface of the glacier into thousands of
pinnacles and tables. Along the center of the stream there are V-shaped
dirt bands, separated by crevasses, which point down-stream and give the
appearance of a rapid flow to the central portion of the glacier. From this
distance its center has the appearance of 'watered' ribbon.

"A little toward the south of where the medial crevasses are most
numerous, and at a locality where two opposite mountain spurs force the
ice-stream through the comparatively narrow gorge, there is evidently an

Page 224

ice-fall, as the whole glacier from side to side disappears from view. The
appearance of Niagara when seen from the banks of the river above the
Horseshoe falls is suggested. Beyond this silent cataract, the eye ranges
far out over the broad, level surface of the Malaspina glacier, and traces
the dark morainal ribbons streaming away for miles from the mountain
spurs among which they originate. From the extreme southern cape of the
Samovar hills there is a highly compound moraine-belt stretching away
toward the south, and then dividing and curving both east and west. The
central band of débris must be a mile broad. Along its eastern margin I
can count five lesser bands separated by narrow intervals of ice, and on
the farther side similar secondary bands are suggested, but the height of
the central range almost completely conceals them from view. In the
distant tattered ends, however, their various divisions can be clearly
traced. Great swirls in the ice are there indicated by concentric curves of
débris on its surface.

"Still farther westward there are hills rising to the height of impressive
mountains, in which northward dipping rocks, apparently of sandstone
and shale, similar to those forming the Hitchcock range, are plainly
distinguishable. All the northern slopes of these hills are deeply buried
beneath a universal covering of snow evidently hundreds of feet thick,
which is molded upon them so as to reveal every swelling dome and
ravine in their rugged sides. Farther westward still, beyond a dark
headland apparently washed by the sea, there are other broad ice-fields of
the same general character as the Malaspina glacier, which stretch away
for miles and miles and blend in the dim distance with the haze of the
horizon.

"Just west of the Seward glacier, and in part forming its western shore,
there are dark, rocky crests projecting through the universal ice mantle,
suggesting the lost mountains of Utah and Nevada which have become
deeply buried by the dusts of the desert. The character of the sharp crests
beyond the Seward glacier indicate that they are the upturned edges of
fault-blocks similar to the one on which we are seated. Interesting
geological records are there waiting an interpreter. The vastness of the
mountains and the snow-fields to be seen at a single glance from this
point of view can scarcely be realized. There are no familiar objects in
sight with which to make eye-measurements; the picture is on so grand a
scale that it defies imagination's grasp."

Page 225

Searching the snow-sheet below with a field-glass, I discover a minute spot on
the white surface. Its movement, slow but unmistakable, assures me that it is
Lindsley returning from the site chosen for our camp to-night. Although
apparently near at hand, he forms but an inconspicuous speck on the vast
snow-field.

Having learned all that I could of the geology of the cliff, and the gathering
clouds rendering it unnecessary to climb the summits above, we descended
with even more difficulty than we had encountered on our way up, and met
Lindsley as he reached the pass. Resuming our packs, we started on, knowing
that Crumback would follow our trail; and after two hours' hard tramping over
a snow surface rendered somewhat soft by the heat of the day, but fortunately
little crevassed, we reached the place chosen for our camp. Crumback soon
joined us, and we pitched our tent for the night. The place chosen was on a
little island of débris, the farthest out we could discover from the base of the
great cliff on the north. We judged that we should there be safe from
avalanches, although the screech and hiss of stones falling from the cliff were
heard many times during the night.

Lindsley and Crumback, on revisiting the site of our camp two days later,
found that a tremendous avalanche of snow and rocks had in the mean time
fallen from the cliffs and ploughed its way out upon the glacier to within
fifteen or twenty feet of where we had passed the night. They remarked that if
the avalanche had occurred while we were in camp, our tent would not have
been reached, but that we should probably have been scared to death by the
roar.

FIRST FULL VIEW OF ST. ELIAS.

Leaving Crumback and Lindsley to make our camp as comfortable as
possible, Kerr and I pressed on with the object of seeing all we could of the
country ahead before the afternoon sunlight faded into twilight. Mount St.
Elias had been shut out from view, either by clouds or by intervening
mountains, for several days; but it was evident that on approaching the end of
the Pinnacle pass fault-scarp we should behold it again, and comparatively
near at hand.

Page 226

Continuing down the even snow-slope, in which there were but few crevasses,
the view became broader and broader as we advanced, and at length the great
pyramid forming the culminating summit of all the region burst into full view.
What a glorious sight! The great mountain seemed higher and grander and
more regularly proportioned than any peak I had ever beheld before. The
white plain formed by the Seward glacier gave an even foreground, broken by
crevasses which, lessening in perspective, gave distance to the foot-hills
forming the western margin of the glacier. Far above the angular crest of the
Samovar hills in the middle distance towered St. Elias, sharp and clear against
the evening sky. Midway up the final slope a thin, horizontal bar of gray
clouds was delicately penciled. Through the meshes of the fairy scarf shone
the yellow sunset sky. The strong outlines of the rugged mountain, which had
withstood centuries of storms and earthquakes, were softened and glorified by
the breath of the summer winds, chilled as they kissed its crystal slopes.

Could I give to the reader a tithe of the impressions that such a view suggests,
they would declare that painters had never shown them mountains, but only
hills. So majestic was St. Elias, with the halo of the sunset about his brow, that
other magnificent peaks now seen for the first time or more fully revealed than
ever before, although worthy the respect and homage of the most experienced
mountain-climber, scarcely received a second glance.

Returning to camp, we passed the night, and the following day, August 6,
advanced our camp to the eastern border of the Seward glacier at the extreme
western end of the upturned crest forming the northern wall of Pinnacle pass.

The western end of the Pinnacle pass cliff is turned abruptly northward, and
the rocks dip eastward at a high angle, showing, together with other
conditions, that the end of the ridge is determined by a cross-fault running
northeast and southwest. West of the Seward glacier there is a continuation of
the Pinnacle-pass cliff, but it is greatly out of line. The position of the Seward
glacier, in this portion of its course, was determined by the fault which broke
the alignment of the main displacement.

Many facts of similar nature show that the glaciers of the St. Elias region have
had their courses determined, to a large extent, by the faults which have given
the region its characteristic structure: the ice drainage is consequent to the
structure of the underlying rocks; the glaciers not only did not originate the
channels in which they flow, but have failed to greatly modify them.

Page 227

Camp 14 was on a sharp crest of limestone, conglomerate, and shale
belonging to the Pinnacle system, which was not over ten feet broad where our
tent was pitched. East of our tent there was a broad, upward sloping snow-
plain banked against the precipitous base of a hill about a thousand feet high.
At the edge of the snow, within three feet of our tent, there was a pond of clear
water, seemingly placed there for our special use. The western edge of our tent
was at the margin of a cliff about a hundred feet high, overlooking the Seward
glacier. We held this camp for several days and reöccupied it on our return
from St. Elias.

SUMMIT OF PINNACLE PASS CLIFFS.

From Camp 14 Crumback returned to Blossom island, and Stamy took his
place. Word from Christie assured me that supplies would be advanced to
Blossom island, and that our cache on the Marvine glacier would be renewed.
Stamy's arrival was especially welcome for the reason that he brought letters
from dear ones far away, which had been forwarded from Sitka by a trading
schooner that chanced to visit Yakutat bay.

While the camp hands were busy in bringing up fresh supplies, Kerr and I
occupied two stations on the summit of the Pinnacle pass cliffs. One of these
was on a butte at the western end of the ridge and just above our camp; the
other was on the crest of the main line of cliffs almost directly above Pinnacle
pass, at an elevation of 5,000 feet. Each of the stations embraced magnificent
views, extending from the outer margin of the Malaspina glacier to the crest of
the St. Elias range. The station on the butte near camp was occupied several
times, and proved to be a most convenient and commanding point for study of
the geography, geology, and distribution of glacier over a wide area. On
account of the splendid view obtained from the top we named it Point
Glorious. Its elevation is 3,500 feet.

One of the days on which we occupied Point Glorious was especially
remarkable on account of the clearness and freshness of the air and the
sharpness with which each peak and snow-crest stood out against the deep-
blue heavens. We left our camp early in the morning, and spent several hours
on the summit. On our way up we found several large patches of Alpine
flowers and, under a tussock of moss, a soft, warm nest just abandoned by a
mother ptarmigan with her brood of little ones. One hundred feet higher we

Page 228

came to the borders of the snow-field which covered all of the upper slopes
except a narrow crest of sandstone at the top.

The Seward glacier, sweeping down from the northeast, curves about the base
of Point Glorious and flows on southward. Its surface has the appearance of a
wide frozen river. Toward the east of our station there was a broad, level-
floored amphitheatre, bounded on the south by the cliffs of Pinnacle pass and
on the east by long snow-slopes which stretch up the gorges in the side of
Mount Cook. The amphitheatre opens toward the northwest, and discharges its
accumulated snows into the Seward glacier. Beyond this, on the north, stood
the great curtain-wall named the Corwin cliffs, west of which rose Mount
Eaton, Mount Augusta, Mount Malaspina, and other giant summits of the main
St. Elias range. Toward the west the view culminated in St. Elias itself,
ruggedly outlined against the sky. As the reader will become more and more
familiar with the magnificent scenery of the St. Elias region as we advance, it
need not be described in detail at this time.

All day the skies were clear and bright, giving abundant opportunity for
making a detailed survey of the principal features in view, and for reading the
history written in cliffs and glaciers. When the long summer day drew to a
close, we returned to our tent and watched the great peaks become dim and
generalized in outline as the twilight deepened. The fading light caused the
mountains to recede farther and farther, until at last they seemed ghostly
giants, too far away to be definitely recognized. With the twilight came soft,
gray, uncertain clouds drawn slowly and silently about the rugged precipices
by the summer winds from the sea. St. Elias became enveloped in luminous
clouds, with the exception of a few hundred feet of the shining summit; and a
glory in the sky, to the left of the veiled Saint, marked the place where the sun
went down. The shadows crept across the snow-fields and changed them from
dazzling white to a soft gray-blue. Night came on silently, and with but little
change. There was no folding of wings; no twittering of birds in leafy
branches; no sighing of winds among rustling leaves. All was stern and wild
and still; there was not a touch of life to relieve the desolation. A midwinter
night in inhabited lands was never more solemn. Man had never rested there
before.

The air grew chill when the shadows crossed our tent, and delicate ice crystals
began to shoot on the still surface of our little pond. We bade good night to the
stern peaks, about which there were signs of a coming storm, and sought the

Page 229

shelter of our tent. Small and comfortless as was that shelter, it shut out the
wintry scene and afforded a welcome retreat. Sound, refreshing sleep, with
dreams of loved ones far away, renewed our strength for another advance.

The next day, August 8, a topographic station was occupied on the summit of
the Pinnacle pass cliffs. We were astir before sunrise, and had breakfast over
before four o'clock. The morning was cold, and a cutting wind swept down the
Seward glacier from the northeast. All of the mountains were lost to view in
dense clouds. A few rays of sunshine breaking through the vapor banks above
Point Glorious gave promise of better weather during the day. Lindsley and
Stamy had not yet returned from the lower camp, where they were to obtain
additional rations; and Kerr and I concluded to try to reach the crest of the
Pinnacle pass cliffs and take the chances of the weather being favorable for
our work.

Leaving camp in the early morning light, we chose to climb over the summit
of Point Glorious rather than thread the crevasses at its northern base.
Reaching the top of the point, we were still beneath the low canopy of clouds,
and could see far up the great amphitheatre to the base of Mount Owen.31
Descending the eastern slope, we soon reached the floor of the amphitheatre,
and found the snow smooth and hard and not greatly crevassed. Cheered by
faint promise of blue skies, we pressed on rapidly, the snow creaking beneath
our tread as on a winter morning. Two or three hours of rapid walking brought
us to the southern wall of the amphitheatre, nearly beneath the point we
wished to occupy. As we ascended the slope the way became more difficult,
owing not only to its steepness but also to the fact that the snow was softening,
and also because great crevasses crossed our path. Looking back over the
snow we had crossed, two well-characterized features on its surface could be
distinguished: these were large areas with a gray tint, caused by a covering of
dust. This dust comes from the southern faces of the Pinnacle pass cliffs, and
is blown over the crest of the ridge and scattered far and wide over the snow-
fields toward the north. Should the dust-covered areas become buried beneath
fresh snow, it is evident that the strata of snow would be separated by thin
layers of darker color. This is what has happened many times, as we could see
by looking down into the crevasses. In one deep gulf I counted five distinct
strata of clear white snow, separated by narrow dust-bands. In other instances
there are twenty or more such strata visible. Each layer is evidently the record
of a snow-storm, while the dust-bands indicate intervals of fine weather. The
strata of snow exposed to view in the crevasses, after being greatly

Page 230

compressed, are usually from ten to fifteen feet thick, but in one instance
exceeded fifty feet. If we assume that each layer represents a winter's snow,
and that compression has reduced each stratum to a third of its original
thickness (and probably the compression has been greater than this), it is
evident that the fresh snows must sometimes reach the depth of from 50 to 150
feet.
31
Named for David Dale Owen, United States geologist.

Toiling on up the snow-slope, we had to wind in and out among deep
crevasses, sometimes crossing them by narrow snow-bridges, and again
jumping them and plunging our alpenstocks deep in the snow when we
reached the farther side. After many windings we reached the summit of the
Pinnacle-pass cliffs. The crest-line is formed of an outcrop of conglomerate
composed of sand and pebbles, in one layer of which I found large quantities
of mussel shells standing in the position in which the creatures lived. The
present elevation of this ancient sea-bottom is 5,000 feet. The strata incline
northward at angles of 30° to 40°. All of the northern slope of the ridge is
deeply covered with snow, and the rock only appears along the immediate
crest. There are, in fact, two crests, as is common with many mountain ridges
in this region, one of rock and the second of snow; the snow crest, which is
usually the higher, is parallel to the rock crest and a few rods north of it. In the
valley between the two ridges we found secure footing, and ascended with
ease to the highest point on the cliffs. Looking over the southern or rocky
crest, we found a sheer descent of about 1,500 feet to the snow-fields below.

The clouds diminished in density and gradually broke away, so that the entire
extent of the St. Elias range was in view, with the exception of the crowning
peak of all, which was still veiled from base to summit. A spur of St. Elias,
extending southward from the main peak, and named The Chariot, gleamed
brightly in the sunlight. It was the first point on which we made observations.
Stretching eastward from St. Elias is the sharp crest of the main range, on
which stand Mounts Newton, Jeannette, Malaspina, Augusta, Logan, and
several other splendid peaks not yet named. Just to the right of Mount
Augusta, on the immediate border of the Seward glacier, rise the Corwin cliffs,
marking an immense fault-scarp of the same general character as the one on
which we stood.

Page 231

Mr. Kerr endeavored at first to occupy a station on the crest of the rocky ridge,
but as the steepness of the slope and the shattered condition of the rock
rendered the station hazardous, the snow-ridge, which was covered with dust
and sand and nearly as firm as rock, was occupied instead. The clouds parting
toward the northeast revealed several giant peaks not before seen, some of
which seem to rival in height St. Elias itself. One stranger, rising in three
white domes far above the clouds, was especially magnificent. As this was
probably the first time its summit was ever seen, we took the liberty of giving
it a name. It will appear on our maps as Mount Logan, in honor of Sir William
E. Logan, founder and long director of the Geological Survey of Canada.

The clouds grew denser in the east, and shut off all hope of extending the map-
work in that direction. While Kerr was making topographic sketches I tried to
decipher some of the geological history of the region around me and make
myself more familiar with its glaciers and snow-fields.

Even more remarkable than the mighty peaks toward the north, beheld that
day for the first time, was the vast plateau of ice stretching seaward from the
foot of the mountains. From my station what seemed to be the ocean's shore
near Icy bay could just be distinguished. Beyond the bay there is a group of
hills which come boldly down to the sea, and apparently form a sea-cliff at the
water's edge. Beyond this headland there is another vast glacier extending
westward to the limits of vision. The view from this point is essentially the
same as that obtained from the cliffs at Pinnacle pass a few days earlier, except
that it is far more extended. It need not be described in detail.

The clouds becoming thicker and settling in dark masses about the mountains,
we gave up all hope of further work and started for our camp. On the way
down the ridge between the crest of snow and the crest of rock we found a
stratum of sandstone filled with fossil leaves, and near at hand another layer
charged with very recent sea-shells. Collecting all of these that we could carry,
we trudged on, finding the snow soft and some of the bridges which we had
easily crossed in the morning now weak, trembling, and insecure. We crossed
them safely, however, and, reaching the level floor of the amphitheatre,
marched wearily on toward Point Glorious. This time we passed along the
northern base of the butte at an elevation of two or three hundred feet above
the glacier, and, taking a convenient slide down the snow-slope, reached our
tent.

Page 232

Soon a delicious cup of coffee was prepared, bacon was fried, and these were
put in a warm place while some griddle cakes were being baked. A warm
supper, followed by a restful pipe, ended the day. Kerr and I were our own
cooks and our own housekeepers during much of the time we lived above the
snow-line. We cleared away the remains of the supper, and prepared our
blankets for the night. One of the huge ice pinnacles on the glacier fell with a
great crash just as we were turning in. Rain began to fall, and the night was
cold and disagreeable; how it passed I do not know, as I slept soundly.
Scarcely anything less serious than the blowing away of our tent could have
awakened me.

ACROSS SEWARD GLACIER TO DOME PASS.

Stormy weather and the necessity of bringing additional supplies from
Blossom island detained us at Camp 14 until August 13. We rose at three
o'clock on the morning of that day, and, after a hasty breakfast, prepared to
cross the Seward glacier. The morning was cold but clear, and the air was
bracing. Each peak and mountain crest in the rugged landscape stood out
boldly in the early light, although the sun had not risen. Soon the summit of
St. Elias became tipped with gold, and then peak after peak, in order of their
rank, caught the radiance, and in a short time the vast snow-fields were of
dazzling splendor.

The frost of the night before had hardened the snow, which made walking a
pleasure. We crossed a rocky spur projecting northward from Point Glorious
into the Seward glacier, and had to lower our packs down the side of the
precipice with the aid of ropes. Our course led at first up the border of the
great glacier to a point above the head of the rapids already referred to, then
curved to the westward, and for a mile or two coincided with the general trend
of the crevasses. We made good progress, but at length we came to where the
Augusta glacier pours its flood of ice into the main stream and, owing to its
high grade, is greatly broken. Skirting this difficult area, we passed a number
of small blue lakelets and reached the western border of the Seward glacier.
We found a gently rising snow-slope leading westward through a gap that
could be seen in hills a few miles in advance. But little difficulty was now
experienced, except that the snow had become soft under the summer's sun,
and walking over it with heavy loads was wearisome in the extreme. We could
see, however, that the way ahead was clear, and that encouraged us to push on.

Page 233

Toward night we found a camping place on a steep ridge of shale and
sandstone projecting eastward from a spur of Mount Malaspina. This ridge
rises about five hundred feet above the surrounding glacier, and has steep
roof-like slopes. The summer sun had melted nearly all the snow from its
southern face, but the northern slope was still heavily loaded. The snow on the
northern side stood some thirty or forty feet higher than the rocky crest of the
ridge itself, and between the rock crest and the snow crest there was a little
valley which afforded ample shelter for our tent and was quite safe from
avalanches. The melting of the snow-bank during the warm days supplied us
with water.

The formation of crests of snow standing high above the rocky ridges on
which they rest is a peculiar and interesting feature of the mountains of the St.
Elias region. A north-and-south section through the ridge on which Camp 15
was situated, exhibiting the double crests, one of rock and the other of snow, is
shown at a in figure 6. b is a section through a similar ridge with a still higher
snow crest. The remaining figures in the illustration are sketches of mountain
peaks, as seen from the south, which have been increased in height by a heavy
accumulation of snow on their northern slopes. These sketches are of peaks
among the foothills of Mount Malaspina, and show snow pinnacles from fifty
to more than a hundred feet high. In some instances, domes and crests of snow
were seen along the western sides of the ridges and peaks, but as a rule these
snow-tips on the mountains are confined to their northern slopes. The edges
and summits of the snow-ridges are sharply defined and clearly cut. The
southern slope exposed above the crest of rock is often concave, while the
northern slopes are usually convex.

FIGURE 6—Snow Crests on Ridges and Peaks; from Field Sketches.

In climbing steep ridges the double crests are frequently of great assistance.
Safe footing may frequently be found in the channels between the crests of
rock and snow, by the aid of which very precipitous peaks may be climbed
with ease. In case the ascent between the two crests is not practicable, the even
snow-slope itself affords a sure footing for one used to mountain climbing.

Page 234

After establishing Camp 15, Lindsley and Stamy returned to one of the lower
camps for additional supplies, while Kerr and I explored a way for farther
advance.

Our camp occupied a commanding situation. From the end of the ridge on
which it was located there was a splendid view of glaciers and mountains to
the eastward. The illustration forming plate 18 is from a photograph taken
from that station. Toward the north, and only a few miles away, rose the bare,
rugged slope of Mount Malaspina. In a wild, high-grade gorge on its western
side, a glacier, all pinnacles and crevasses, tumbles down into the broad white
plain below. On account of its splendid ice-fall this was named the Cascade
glacier. Beyond the white plain, stretching eastward for fifteen or twenty
miles, there rise the foothills of Mount Cook. Farther south, the rugged,
angular summits of the Hitchcock range are in full view, and toward the north
stands Mount Irving,32 which rivals even Mount Cook in the symmetrical
proportions of its snow-covered slopes.

Page 235

32
Named in honor of Professor Roland Duer Irving, U. S. geologist.

The surface of the vast snow-plain near at hand is gashed by many gaping
fissures, but the distance is so great that these minor details disappear in a
general view. Looking down over the snow, one may see the crevasses as in a
diagram. They look as if the white surface had been gashed with a sharp knife,
and then stretched in such a way as to open the cuts. That the snow of the
névés may be stretched, at least to a limited extent, is shown by the character
of these fissures. The crevasses are widest in the center and come to a point at
their curving extremities. Two crevasses frequently overlap at their ends and
leave a sliver of ice stretching across diagonally between them. It is by means
of these diagonal bridges that one is enabled to thread his way through the
crevasses.

On returning to camp in the evening, weary with a hard day's climb, a never-
failing source of delight was found in the matchless winter landscape to the
eastward. The evenings following days of uninterrupted sunshine were
especially delightful. The blue shadows of the western peaks creeping across
the shining surface were nearly as sharp in outline as the peaks that cast them.
When the chill of evening made itself felt, and the dropping water and the
indefinite murmurs from the glacier below were stilled, the silence became
oppressive. The stillness was so profound that it seemed as though the
footsteps of the advancing shadows should be audible.

On warm sunny days, however, there are noises enough amid the mountains.
The snow, partially melted and softened by the heat, falls from the cliffs in
avalanches that make the mountains tremble and, with a roar like thunder,
awaken the echoes far and near. During our stay at Camp 15 the avalanches
were sometimes so frequent on the steep mountain faces toward the north that
the roar of one falling mass of snow and rocks was scarcely hushed before it
was succeeded by another.

On the southward-facing cliffs of Mount Augusta, composed of schist which
disintegrates rapidly, there are frequent rock avalanches. A rock or a mass of
comminuted schist sometimes breaks away even in midday, although these
avalanches occur most frequently when the moisture in the rocks freezes. The
midday avalanches, I fancy, may be started by the expansion of the rocks
owing to the sun's heat. A few stones dislodged high up on the cliffs fall, and,
loosening others in their descent, soon set in motion a train of dirt and stones,

Page 236

which flows down the steep ravines with a long rumbling roar, at the same
time sending clouds of dust into the air. If the wind is blowing up the cliffs, as
frequently happens on warm days, the dust is carried far above the mountains,
and hangs in the air like clouds of smoke.

It has been frequently stated that St. Elias is a volcano, and sea captains sailing
on the Pacific have seen what they supposed to be smoke issuing from its
summit. As its southern face is composed of the same kind of rocks and is of
the same precipitous nature as the southern slope of Mount Augusta, it appears
probable that what was supposed to be volcanic smoke was in reality
avalanche dust blown upward by ascending air currents.

The disintegration of the mountain summits all through the St. Elias region is
so great that one constantly wonders that anything is left; yet, except late in
the fall, the snow surfaces at the bases of even the steepest cliffs are mostly
bare of débris. The absence of earth and stones on the surfaces of the névé
fields is mainly due, of course, to the fact that these are regions of
accumulation where the winter's snow exceeds the summer's melting. Thus
each year the surface is renewed and made fresh and clean, and any débris that
may have previously accumulated is concealed.

There is another reason, however, why but little débris is found at the bases of
the steep precipices. The snows of winter are banked high against these walls,
but when the rocks are warmed by the return of the summer's sun the snow
near their dark surfaces is melted, and leaves a deep gulf between the upward-
sloping banks of snow and the sides of the cliffs. These black chasms are
frequently 150 or 200 feet deep, and receive all the débris that falls from
above. In this way very large quantities of earth and stones are injected, as it
were, into the glacier, and only come to light again far down toward the ends
of the ice-streams, where the summer's melting exceeds the winter's supply.

Page 237

On August 14, Kerr and I made an excursion ahead to the border of the
Agassiz glacier. The snow-slope south of our camp led westward up a gentle
grade to a gap in the hills between two bold, snow-covered domes. The gap
through which the snow extended, uniting with a broad snow-field sloping
westward, was only a few hundred feet wide, and formed a typical mountain
pass, designated on our map as Dome pass. Its elevation is 4,300 feet. When
near the summit of the pass a few steps carried us past the divide of snow, and
revealed to our eager eyes the wonderland beyond. St. Elias rose majestically
before us, unobstructed by intervening hills, and bare of clouds from base to
summit. We were greatly encouraged by the prospect ahead, as there were
evidently no obstacles between us and the actual base of the mountain. A
photograph of the magnificent peak was taken, from which the illustration
forming plate 19 has been drawn. To the right of the main mountain mass, as
shown in the illustration, rises Mount Newton,33 one of the many separate
mountain peaks crowning the crest of the St. Elias range. Our way led down
the snow-slope in the foreground to the border of the Agassiz glacier, which

Page 238

comes in view between the foot-hills in the middle distance and the sculptured
base on which the crowning pyramid of St. Elias stands. After reaching the
Agassiz glacier we turned to the right, and made our way to the amphitheatre
lying between Mount St. Elias and Mount Newton. On the day we discovered
Dome pass, we pressed on down the western snow-slope and reached the side
of the Agassiz glacier, which we found greatly crevassed; selecting a camping
place on a rocky spur, we returned to Camp 15, and two days later established
camp at the place chosen.
33
Named for Henry Newton, formerly of the School of Mines of Columbia college and author of a
report on the geology of the Black hills of Dakota.

Camp 16 was similar in many ways to Camp 14. It had about the same
altitude; it was at the western end of a rugged mountain spur, and on the
immediate border of a large southward-flowing glacier. On the lower portions
of the cliffs, near at hand, there were velvety patches of brilliant Alpine
flowers mingled with thick bunches of wiry grass and clumps of delicate ferns.
Most conspicuous of all the showy plants, so bright and lovely in the vast
wilderness of snow, were the purple lupines. Already the flowers on the lower
portions of their spikes had matured, and pods covered with a thick coating of
wooly hairs were beginning to be conspicuous. There are no bees and
butterflies in these isolated gardens, but brown flies with long-pointed wings
were abundant. A gray bird, a little larger than a sparrow, was seen flitting in
and out of crevasses near the border of the ice, apparently in quest of insects.
Once, while stretched at full length on the flowery carpet enjoying the warm
sunlight, a humming bird flashed past me. Occasionally the hoarse cries of
ravens were heard among the cliffs, but they seldom ventured near enough to
be seen. These few suggestions were all there was to remind us of the summer
fields and shady forests in far-away lands.

UP THE AGASSIZ GLACIER.

From Camp 16 Kerr and I made an excursion across the Agassiz glacier, while
Stamy and Lindsley returned to a lower camp for additional supplies. We
found the glacier greatly crevassed and the way across more difficult than on
any of the ice-fields we had previously traversed; but by dint of perseverance,
and after many changes in our course, we succeeded at last in reaching the
western bank, and saw that by climbing a precipice bordering an ice-cascade

Page 239

we could gain a plateau above, which we knew from previous observations to
be comparatively little broken. We returned to camp, and on August 18 began
the ascent of the glacier in earnest. We were favored in the task by brilliant
weather.

After reaching the western bank of the glacier, we made our way to the base of
the precipice up which we had previously wished to climb. In order to reach it,
however, we had to throw our packs across a crevasse over which there was
no bridge, and followed them by jumping. The side of the crevasse from
which we sprang was higher than its opposite lip, and left us very uncertain as
to how we were to return; but that was a matter for the future; our aim at the
time was to ascend the glacier, and the return was of no immediate concern.

Reaching the base of the cliff at the side of the glacier, we ascended it without
great difficulty, and came out upon the broad plateau of snow above. Thinking
that the way onward would be easier along the steep snow-slope bordering the
glacier, we made an effort to ascend in that direction, and spent two or three
precious hours in trying to find a practicable route. Although the crevasses
were fewer than on the glacier proper, yet they were of larger size and had but
few bridges. At last we came to a wide gulf on the opposite side of which there
was a perpendicular wall of snow a hundred feet high, and all further advance
in that direction was stopped. Although obliged to turn back, our elevated
position commanded a good view of the glacier below and enabled us to
choose a way through the maze of crevasses crossing it. Descending, we
plodded wearily on in an irregular zigzag course; but the crevasses became
broader and deeper as we advanced, and at length we found ourselves
traversing flat table-like blocks of snow, bounded on all sides by crevasses so
deep that their bottoms were lost to view. We made our way from one snow-
table to another by jumping the crevasses where they were narrowest, or by
frail snow-bridges spanning the profound gulfs. Night came on while we were
yet in this wild, broken region, and no choice was left us but to pitch our tent
in the snow and wait until morning. The night was clear and cold, and a firm
crust formed on the snow before morning. Although the temperature was
uncomfortable, we were cheered by the prospects of a firm snow surface on
the morrow.

We continued our march at sunrise and found the walking easy; but the sun
soon came out with unusual brilliancy and softened the snow so much that
even the slowest movements were fatiguing. We endeavored to force our way

Page 240

up the center of the glacier through the crevasses and pinnacles of a second
ice-fall; but after several hours of exhausting experience we were obliged to
change our plan, and endeavored to reach a mountain spur projecting from the
western border of the glacier. The sunlight reflected from the snow was
extremely brilliant, and the glare from every surface about us was painful to
our eyes, already weakened by many days' travel over the white snow. Each
member of the party was provided with colored glasses, but in traversing
snow-bridges and jumping crevasses these had to be dispensed with. The
result was that all of us were suffering more or less from snow-blindness.

About noon we reached the base of the mountain spur toward which our
course was bent. It projects into the western border of Agassiz glacier. It is the
extension of this cliff underneath the glacier that caused the ice-fall which
blocked our way. To go round the end of the cliff with our packs was
impracticable, but there seemed a way up the face of the cliff itself, which one
could scale by taking advantage of the joints in the rocks. I ascended the
snow-slope to the base of the precipice, but found the way upward more
difficult than anticipated; and, as the light was very painful to my eyes when
not protected by colored glasses, I decided to postpone making the climb until
I was in better condition, and in the meantime to see if some other route could
not be found. We decided to camp on a small patch of débris near the base of
the cliff, and there left our loads. Kerr and Lindsley, taking a rope and
alpenstocks, went around the end of the rocky spur and worked their way
upward with great difficulty to the top of the cliff immediately above where I
had essayed to climb it. A rope was made fast at the top, and our way onward
was secured. This place was afterward called Rope cliff. The remainder of the
afternoon I rested in the tent, with my eyes bound up with tea-leaves, and
when evening came found the pain in my head much relieved.

Our tent that night was so near the brink of a crevasse that in order to stay the
tent one end of the ridge-rope was made fast to a large stone, which was
lowered into the gulf to serve as a stake. Above us rose a precipice nearly a
thousand feet high, from which stones were constantly falling; but a deep
black gulf intervened between the position we had chosen and the base of the
cliffs, and into this the stones were precipitated. Not one of the falling
fragments reached the edge of the snow slope on which we were camped, but
many times during the night we heard the whiz and hum of the rocks as they
shot down from the cliffs. The noise made by each fragment in its passage
through the air increased rapidly in pitch, thus indicating that they were

Page 241

approaching us; but they always fell short of our camp. The bombardment
from above was most active just after the shadows fell on the cliffs, showing
that the stones were loosened by the freezing of the water in the interstices of
the rock.

The next day, August 20, Stamy and Lindsley went back to Camp 16 for more
rations, while Kerr and I remained at Camp 18 nursing our eyes and resting.
The day passed without anything worthy of note, except the almost constant
thunder of avalanches on the mountains. About sunset a dense fog spread over
the wintry landscape and threatened to delay the return of the men. When the
sun went down, however, the temperature fell several degrees, the mist
vanished, and a few stars came out clear and bright. Just as we were about to
despair of seeing the men that night we heard a distant shout announcing their
return. We had a cup of hot coffee for them when they reached the tent, which
they drank with eagerness; but they were too tired to partake of food. Rolling
themselves in their blankets, they were asleep in a few minutes.

CAMP ON THE NEWTON GLACIER.

On August 21 we climbed the cliff above Camp 18 by means of the rope
already placed there, and found the snow above greatly crevassed. We traveled
upward along the steep slope bordering the glacier, but soon came to a deep
crevasse which forbade further progress in that direction. Returning to a lower
level, we undertook to smooth off an extremely narrow snow-bridge so as to
make it wide enough to cross, but found the undertaking so hazardous that we
abandoned it. By this time it was midday, and we prepared a cup of hot coffee
before renewing our attack on the cliffs. After luncheon and a short rest,
feeling very much refreshed, we began to cut a series of steps in a bluff of
snow about fifty feet high, and made rapid progress in the undertaking. After
an hour's hard work one of us reached the top and, planting an alpenstock deep
in the snow, lowered a rope to those below. The packs were drawn up one at a
time and we were soon ready to advance again.

We found ourselves in a vast amphitheatre bounded on all sides excepting that
from which we had come with rugged, snow-covered precipices. The plain
was crossed by huge crevasses, some of which were fully a mile in length; but
by traveling around their ends or crossing snow-bridges we slowly worked our
way onward toward St. Elias. Threading our way through the labyrinth of

Page 242

yawning gulfs, we at last, after the sun had gone down behind the great
pyramid toward the west, found a convenient place on the snow, near a blue
pond of water, on which to pass the night. Everything was snow-covered in
the vast landscape except the most precipitous cliffs, and these were dangerous
to approach, owing to the avalanches that frequently fell from them. The
weather continued fine. The night was clear and the stars were unusually
brilliant. Everything seemed favorable for pushing on. The way ahead
presented such even snow-slopes and seemed so free from crevasses that we
decided to leave our tent and blankets in the morning and, taking with us as
little as possible of impedimenta, endeavor to reach the summit of St. Elias.

HIGHEST POINT REACHED.

Rising at three o'clock on the morning of August 22, we started for the summit
of St. Elias, taking with us only our water-proof coats, some food, and the
necessary instruments. The higher mountain summits were no longer clearly
defined, but in the early light it was impossible to tell whether or not the day
was to be fair. From the highest and sharpest peaks, cloud banners were
streaming off towards the southeast, showing that the higher air currents were
in rapid movement. Vapor banks in the east were flushed with long streamers
of light as the sun rose, but soon faded to a dull ashen gray, while the cloud
banners between us and the sun became brilliant like the halo seen around the
moon when the sky is covered with fleecy clouds. This was the first time in
my experience that I had seen colored banners waving from the mountain tops.

We found the snow-surface hard, and made rapid headway up the glacier. Our
only difficulty was the uncertainty of the early light, which rendered it
impossible to tell the slope of the uneven snow-surfaces. The light was so
evenly diffused that there were no shadows. The rare beauty of that silent,
wintry landscape, so delicate in its pearly half tones and so softly lighted, was
unreal and fairy-like. The winds were still; but strange forebodings of coming
changes filled the air. Long, waving threads of vapor were woven in lace-work
across the sky; the white-robed mountains were partially concealed by cloud-
masses drifting like spirits along their mighty battlements; and far, far above,
from the topmost pinnacles, irised banners were signaling the coming of a
storm.

Page 243

We made rapid progress, but early in the day came to the base of a heavy
cloud bank which enshrouded all the upper part of St. Elias. Then snow began
to fall, and it was evident that to proceed farther would be rash and without
promise of success. After twenty days of fatigue and hardship since leaving
Blossom island, with our goal almost reached, we were obliged to turn back.
Hoping to be able to renew the attempt after the storm had passed, Mr. Kerr
left his instruments on the snow between two huge crevasses and we returned
to our tent, where we passed the remainder of the day and the night following.
The snow continued to fall throughout the day, and the storm increased in
force as night came on. When we awoke in the morning the tempest was still
raging. We were in the midst of the storm-cloud; the dense vapor and the fine
drifting snow-crystals swept along by the wind obscured everything from
view; the white snow surface could not be distinguished from the vapor-filled
air; there was no earth and no sky; we seemed to be suspended in a white,
translucent medium which surrounded us like a shroud. The snow was already
more than three feet deep about our tent, and to remain longer with the short
supply of provisions on hand was exceedingly hazardous, as there seemed no
limit to the duration of the storm. A can of rations had been left at Rope cliff,
and we decided to return to that place if possible. Resuming our packs, we
roped ourselves together and began to descend through the blinding mist and
snow which rendered the atmosphere so dense that a man could not be
distinguished at a distance of a hundred feet. With only an occasional glimpse
of the white cliff around to guide us, we worked our way downward over
snow-bridges and between the crevasses. Our ascent through this dangerous
region had been slow and difficult, but our descent was still more tedious. All
day long we continued to creep slowly along through the blinding storm, and
as night approached believed ourselves near the steps cut in a snow-cliff
during the ascent, but darkness came before we reached them. Shoveling the
snow away as best we could with our hands and basins, we cleared a place
down to the old snow large enough for our tent and went into camp.

In the morning, August 24, the storm had spent its force and left the mountains
with an immaculate covering, but still partially veiled by shreds of storm-
clouds. We found ourselves on one of the many tables of snow, bounded on all
sides by crevasses of great depth, but not far from the snow-cliff where we had
cut steps. The steps were obliterated by the new snow, but by means of a rope
and alpenstocks we made the descent without much difficulty. The last man to
go down, not having the help of the rope, used two alpenstocks, and

Page 244

descended by first planting one firmly in the snow and lowering himself as far
as he could, still retaining a firm hold, and then planting the other in the snow
at a lower level and removing the higher one. By slowly and carefully
repeating this operation he descended the cliff safely and rejoined his
companions. Passing on beneath the cliffs, dangerous on account of
avalanches, we reached in safety the precipice where we had left our rope. A
heavy avalanche had swept down from the heights above during our absence
and sent its spray over the precipice we had to descend. The cliff of ice
towering above the place where our rope was fastened had become greatly
melted and honey-combed, and threatened every moment to crash down and
destroy any one who chanced to be beneath. To stand above the precipice in
the shadow of the treacherous snow-cliffs while the men were descending the
rope was exceedingly trying to one's nerves; but the avalanches did not come,
and the previous camping place below Rope cliff was reached with safety.

The following day, August 25, after some consultation, it was decided to once
more attempt to reach the top of Mount St. Elias. Lindsley and Stamy, who
had shared without complaint our privations in the snow, volunteered to
descend to a lower camp for additional rations, while Kerr and myself returned
to the higher camp in the hope that we might be able to ascend the peak before
the men returned, and, if not, to have sufficient rations when they did rejoin us
to continue the attack. The men departed on their difficult errand, while Kerr
and I, with blankets, tents, oil-stoves, and what rations remained, once more
scaled the cliff where we had placed a rope, and returned on the trail made the
day previously. About noon we reached the excavation in the snow where we
had bivouacked in the storm, and there prepared a lunch. It was then
discovered that we had been mistaken as to the quantity of oil in our cans; we
found scarcely enough to cook a single meal. To attempt to remain several
days in the snow with this small supply of fuel seemed hazardous, and Mr.
Kerr volunteered to descend and overtake the men at the lower camp, procure
some oil, and return the following day. We then separated, Mr. Kerr starting
down the mountain, leaving me with a double load, weighing between sixty
and seventy pounds, to carry through the deep snow to the high camp
previously occupied.

ALONE IN THE HIGHEST CAMP.

Page 245

Trudging wearily on, I reached the high camp at sunset, and pitched my tent in
the excavation previously occupied. An alpenstock was used for one tent-pole,
and snow saturated with water, piled up in a column, for the other; the snow
froze in a few minutes, and held the tent securely. The ends of the ridge-rope
were then stamped into the snow, and water was poured over them; the edges
of the tent were treated in a similar manner, and my shelter was ready for
occupation. After cooking some supper over the oil-stove, I rolled myself in a
blanket and slept the sleep of the weary. I was awakened in the morning by
snow drifting into my tent, and on looking out discovered that I was again
caught in a blinding storm or mist of snow. The storm raged all day and all
night, and continued without interruption until the evening of the second day.
The coal oil becoming exhausted, a can was filled with bacon grease, in which
a cotton rag was placed for a wick; and over this "witch lamp" I did my
cooking during the remainder of my stay. The snow, falling steadily, soon
buried my tent, already surrounded on three sides by an icy wall higher than
my head, and it was only by almost constant exertion that it was kept from
being crushed in. With a pint basin for a shovel I cleared the tent as best I
could, and several times during the day re-excavated the hole leading down to
the pond, which had long since disappeared beneath the level plain of white.
The excavation of a tunnel in the snow was also begun in the expectation that
the tent would become uninhabitable. The following night it became
impossible to keep the tent clear in spite of energetic efforts, and early in the
morning it was crushed in by a great weight of snow, leaving me no alternative
but to finish my snow-house and move in. A tunnel some four or five feet in
length was excavated in the snow, and a chamber about six feet long by four
feet wide and three feet high was made at right angles to the tunnel. In this
chamber I placed my blankets and other belongings, and, hanging a rubber
coat on an alpenstock at the entrance, found myself well sheltered from the
tempest. There I passed the day and the night following. At night the darkness
and silence in my narrow tomb-like cell was oppressive; not a sound broke the
stillness except the distant, muffled roar of an occasional avalanche. I slept
soundly, however, and in the morning was awakened by the croaking of a
raven on the snow immediately above my head. The grotto was filled with a
soft blue light, but a pink radiance at the entrance told that the day had dawned
bright and clear.

What a glorious sight awaited me! The heavens were without a cloud, and the
sun shone with dazzling splendor on the white peaks around. The broad

Page 246

unbroken snow-plain seemed to burn with light reflected from millions of
shining crystals. The great mountain peaks were draped from base to summit
in the purest white, as yet unscarred by avalanches. On the steep cliffs the
snow hung in folds like drapery, tier above tier, while the angular peaks above
stood out like crystals against the sky. St. Elias was one vast pyramid of
alabaster. The winds were still; not a sound broke the solitude; not an object
moved. Even the raven had gone, leaving me alone with the mountains.

As the sun rose higher and higher and made its warmth felt, the snow was
loosened on the steep slopes and here and there broke away. Gathering force
as it fell, it rushed down in avalanches that made the mountains tremble and
awakened thunderous echoes. From a small beginning high up on the steep
slopes, the new snow would slip downward, silently at first, and cascade over
precipices hundreds of feet high, looking like a fall of foaming water; then
came the roar, increasing in volume as the flowing snow involved new fields
in its path of destruction, until the great mass became irresistible and ploughed
its way downward through clouds of snow-spray, which hung in the air long
after the snow had ceased to move and the roar of the avalanche had ceased.
All day long, until the shadow of evening fell on the steep slopes, this
mountain thunder continued. The echoes of one avalanche scarcely died away
before they were awakened by another roar. To witness such a scene under the
most favorable conditions was worth all the privations and anxiety it cost.

Besides the streams of new snow, there were occasional avalanches of a
different character, caused by the breaking away of portions of the cliffs of old
snow, accumulated, perhaps, during several winters. These start from the
summits of precipices, and are caused by the slow downward creep of the
snow-fields above. The snow-cliffs are always crevassed and broken in much
the same manner as are the ends of glaciers which enter the sea, and
occasionally large masses, containing thousands of cubic yards, break away
and are precipitated down the slopes with a suddenness that is always startling.
Usually the first announcement of these avalanches is a report like that of a
cannon, followed by a rumbling roar as the descending mass ploughs its way
along. The avalanches formed by old snow are quite different from those
caused by the descent of the new surface snow, but are frequently
accompanied by surface streams in case there has been a recent storm. The
paths ploughed out by the avalanches are frequently sheathed with glassy ice,
formed by the freezing of water produced by the melting of snow on account

Page 247

of the heat produced by the friction of the moving mass. A third variety of
avalanches, due to falling stones, has already been noticed.

The floor of my snow-chamber was the surface of the old snow on which we
had pitched our tents at the time we first reached that camping place. On this
hard surface, and forming the walls of the cell, there were thirty inches of
clear white snow, the upper limit of which was marked by a blue layer of ice
about a quarter of an inch thick. This indicated the thickness of snow that fell
during the first storm. Its surface had been melted and softened during the
days of sunshine that followed its fall, and had frozen into clear ice. Above the
blue band which encircled the upper portion of my chamber was the soft, pure
white snow of the second storm. The stratification of snow which I had seen
fall rendered it evident that my interpretation of the stratification observed in
the sides of crevasses was correct. The snow when it fell was soft and white,
and composed of very fine crystals; but under the influence of the air and
sunshine it changed its texture and became icy and granular, and then
resembled the névé snow so common in high mountains.

The day following the storm was bright and beautiful; the sunlight was warm
and pleasant, but the temperature in the shadows was always below freezing.
The surface of the snow did not melt sufficiently during the day to freeze and
form a crust during the night. It thus became more and more apparent that the
season was too far advanced to allow the snow to harden sufficiently for us to
be able to climb the mountain. The snow settled somewhat and changed its
character, but even at midday the crystals on the surface glittered as brilliantly
in the sunlight as they did in the early morning. Although the snow did not
melt, its surface was lowered slightly by evaporation. The tracks of the raven,
at first sunken a quarter of an inch in the soft surface, after the first day of
sunshine stood slightly in relief, but were still clearly defined.

Page 248

On the sixth day after separating from my companions, judging that they must
have returned at least to the camping place where we had separated, I packed
my blankets and what food remained, abandoned the tent and oil-stove, and
started to descend the mountain. The snow had settled somewhat, but was still
soft and yielding and over six feet deep. Tramping wearily on through the
chaff-like substance, I slowly worked my way downward, and again threaded
the maze of crevasses, now partially concealed by the layer of new snow, with
which we had struggled several times before. Midway to the next camping
place I met my companions coming up to search for me. Instead of meeting
three men, as I expected, I saw five tramping along in single file through the
deep snow. The sight of human beings in that vast solitude was so strange that
I watched them for some time before shouting. Glad as I was to meet my
companions once more, I could not help noticing their rough and picturesque
appearance. Each man wore colored glasses and carried a long alpenstock, and
two or three had packs strapped on their backs. Several weeks of hard
tramping over moraines and snow-fields had made many rents in their clothes,
which had been mended with cloth of any color that chanced to be available.
Not a few rags were visible fluttering in the wind. To a stranger they would
have appeared like a dangerous band of brigands.

The reason for the presence of five men instead of three was this: Lindsley and
Stamy, when they left us at Rope cliff to return for additional rations, were
obliged to go back to Camp 12 in order to get a tent and an oil-stove. On
reaching that place the temptation to return to Blossom island was so great that
Lindsley could not resist it and went back to the base-camp, where he reported
that Kerr and I were storm-bound in the mountains and in need of assistance.
Three men, Partridge, Doney, and White, started at once, and found Stamy,
who had waited for their arrival at Camp 12. A day was thus lost, which
increased Mr. Kerr's hardship and might have proved disastrous. The party
then returned to Rope cliff and joined Kerr on the evening of August 29. On
this occasion, as on several others, I found myself indebted to Stamy for
willing assistance when others hesitated.

During my imprisonment at the highest camp, Mr. Kerr was detained under
similar circumstances at the camp below Rope cliff. On endeavoring to rejoin
me with the supply of coal oil, so very valuable under the circumstances, he
was caught in the storm and was unable to reach the rendezvous appointed. He

Page 249

reached Rope cliff late in the afternoon of the first day of the storm, climbed
the precipice, and found his way through the gathering darkness, along the
nearly obliterated trail beneath the avalanche cliffs, and up the steps cut in the
snow-cliff, to the site of our bivouac camp. Finding nothing there, and being
unable to proceed farther through the blinding storm, he abandoned the
attempt and returned to the camp below Rope cliff. In descending the rope, he
found that its lower end had become fast in the snow. The taut line, sheathed
with ice, was an uncertain help in the darkness. Midway in the descent his
hands slipped and he slid to the bottom; but the cushion of new snow broke
the fall and prevented serious injury. Alone, without fire, without blankets,
having only a canvas cover and a rubber cloth for shelter, and with but little
food, he passed three anxious days and nights before the arrival of the camp
hands.

THE RETURN.

Deciding that the ascent of Mount St. Elias could not be accomplished through
the new snow, which refused to harden, it was decided to abandon the attempt
and return to Blossom island. Our retreat was none too soon. Storm succeeded
storm throughout September. Each time the clouds lifted, the mantle of new
snow was seen to have descended lower and lower. Our last view showed the
wintry covering nearly down to timber-line.

On the night of August 31 we slept at the camp beneath Rope cliff, but had a
most uncomfortable night. Six men sleeping in a tent measuring seven by
seven feet, with but little protection from the ice beneath, certainly does not
seem inviting to one surrounded by the comforts of civilization. A large part of
the night was occupied by Doney in preparing breakfast over our oil-stove. An
early start was welcome to all; we were disappointed at not being able to reach
the top of St. Elias, and were anxious to return to more comfortable quarters.
Kerr concluded to return at once to Blossom island to recuperate, while I made
an excursion up the Seward glacier, with the hope of gaining the upper ice-fall
and seeing the amphitheatre beyond.

We left Rope cliff about six in the morning, and found the snow hard and
traveling easy for several hours. After descending the lower ice-fall, however,
the snow became soft, and a change in the atmosphere indicated the approach
of another storm. Kerr and Doney pressed on and were soon lost to sight,

Page 250

while the rest of the party were delayed, owing to Partridge having become
snow-blind and almost helpless. As the crevasses were exceedingly numerous
and the snow-bridges soft and uncertain, the task of conducting a blind man to
a place of safety was by no means light. Partridge bore up bravely under his
affliction, however, and did not hesitate in crawling across the treacherous
snow-bridges with a rope fastened about his body and a man before and
behind to assist his movements. Late in the day we reached our camping place
at the eastern border of the Agassiz glacier, while Kerr and Doney crossed
Dome pass and spent the night in a tent that had been left standing at the first
camping east of the pass. We pitched a tent on our old camping place at Camp
16, and had the luxury of a rocky bed to sleep on that night. As Partridge's
blindness still continued, White was sent ahead to tell Kerr and Doney to wait
for us in the morning, so that Partridge could accompany them to Blossom
island. Rain continued all that night and all the next day. As Partridge's eyes
were still unserviceable in the morning, I concluded to wait a day before
allowing him to start for Blossom island.

Toward evening on September 2 we moved our camp across Dome pass, and
pitched our tent on the high ridge beside the one occupied by Kerr and Doney.
In the morning, although the storm still continued, our party divided, Kerr,
Doney, and Partridge starting early for Blossom island, while Stamy, White,
and myself, after following their tracks for a few miles, turned to the left and
worked our way northeastward among the crevasses of the Seward glacier.
Toward evening we reached the northwestern spur of Mount Owen, but found
the cliffs rising abruptly from the glacier and too favorable for avalanches to
admit of our camping near them. Again we were forced to go into camp on the
open glacier, and were less comfortable than previously on similar occasions,
owing to the fact that we had been exposed to the rains for three successive
days and our blankets and clothes were wet. Rain continued all night and all
the next day, and on the following night changed to snow.

On the morning of September 4 we awoke to find the skies clear, but the
mountains all about us were white with snow. Before the sun rose, White and I
started for the top of the high ridge above us, determined to have at least a
distant view of the amphitheatre which we wished to explore. The snow about
our camp was only six or eight inches deep, but as we ascended the mountain
it grew more and more troublesome, and at a height of a thousand feet above
camp was thirty inches deep. On gaining the summit of the ridge a
magnificent view was obtained of the upper portion of the Seward glacier and

Page 251

of Mount Irving and Mount Logan, and many bold, tapering mountains farther
northeastward. The whole landscape was snow-covered, and as the sun rose
clear in the east became of the most dazzling brilliancy. An icy wind swept
down from the northeast and rendered it exceedingly difficult to take
photographs or to make measurements. On endeavoring to use my prismatic
compass, I found that, having been soaked with moisture during the previous
days of storm, it froze solid and refused to move, on being exposed to the air.
Making what observations I could, we started back to camp with the intention
of abandoning all further attempts to work in the high mountains.

On the steep slope now exposed to the full sunshine several avalanches had
gone down, and there was great danger of others. Selecting a point where an
avalanche had already swept away the new snow, we worked our way
downward in a zigzag course and reached the bottom safely, although an
avalanche starting near at hand swept by within a few yards. When nearly at
the bottom my attention was attracted by a noise above, and on looking up I
saw two rocks bounding down the slope and coming straight for me. To dodge
them on the steep slippery slope was difficult and dangerous. Allowing one to
pass over my right shoulder, I instantly moved in that direction and allowed
the other to pass over my left shoulder. They shot by me like fragments of
shells, but did no injury. Reaching camp, we found that Stamy had dried our
blankets and clothes.

Resuming our packs, we slowly threaded our way downward to Camp 14, at
the western end of the Pinnacle pass cliffs. We there found cans of rations left
several days before and, pitching our tent, passed the night. We knew by the
signs found there that Kerr and his companions, after taking lunch, had
renewed their journey toward Blossom island. Our camp was just at the lower
limit of the new snow. To the northward all was of the purest white, but
southward, down the glacier, the snow-fields were yellow and much
discolored. Many changes had taken place in the Seward glacier since we first
saw it; the pinnacles, snow-tables, and crevasses in the rapids were less
striking than formerly, and had evidently suffered greatly from the summer's
heat. About the bases of the cliffs there were dark, irregular patches of débris,
where a month previously all was white. As nearly as could be judged, the
surface of the glacier had been lowered by melting and settling during our
absence about fifty feet.

Page 252

The following morning, September 5, we started for Blossom island, the
weather still continuing thick and stormy. On crossing Pinnacle pass we found
over a foot of new snow which had fallen since our companions passed that
way. Toward nightfall the lower limit of snow on the Marvine glacier was
reached, and at night we camped on the first moraines which appeared below
the névé. The day following, September 6, we reached Blossom island about
noon, and found that Kerr and his party had arrived there safely, and that
Partridge had recovered from his snow-blindness.

Our stay above the snow-line had lasted thirty-five days, and we were
extremely glad to see the light of a camp-fire and have the trees and flowers
about us once more. The vegetation indicated that the season was already far
advanced. Most of the flowers had faded, and autumn tints gave brilliancy to
the lower mountain slopes; salmon berries and huckleberries were in
profusion, and furnished an exceedingly agreeable change in our diet. After a
bath in one of the small lakelets on the island and a good night's rest on a
luxuriant bed of spruce boughs, we felt fully restored and ready for another
campaign.

As Kerr was anxious to get back to Port Mulgrave, it was arranged that
Lindsley and Partridge should go with him, and that the rest of the men should
remain. Kerr took his departure on the morning of September 7, and on the
following day Christie, Doney, and myself crossed the Marvine glacier to the
southern end of the Hitchcock range, and the following day made an excursion
out upon the Malaspina glacier. The day of our excursion was bright and
beautiful, and the mountains to the northward revealed their full magnificence.
The level plateau of ice formed a horizontal plain, from which the mountain
rose precipitously and appeared grander and more majestic than from any
other point of view. St. Elias rose clear and sharp, without a cloud to obscure
its dizzy height, and appeared to be one sheer precipice. It is doubtful if a
more impressive mountain face exists anywhere else in the world. After
learning all we could concerning the Malaspina glacier we returned to our
camp at the end of the Hitchcock range, and the following day tramped across
the extremely rough moraine-covered surface back to Blossom island.

The following morning, September 12, we started on our return trip to Yakutat
bay. Two small tents and many articles for which we had no further use were

Page 253

abandoned, so as to make our packs light as possible. We crossed the Hayden
glacier, and at night camped at the foot of Floral pass. After making two
intermediate camps, traveling each day in the rain, we reached the shore of
Yakutat bay on September 15.

Doney and I halted at Dalton's cabin for the purpose of seeing what we could
of the openings there made for coal, while the rest of the party pressed on to
our old camping place on the shore. There they found Kerr and his party still
encamped, but ready to leave for Port Mulgrave early the next morning.

September 18 was occupied by us in catching salmon and trout. We were
abundantly successful, as every man returned to camp with all that he could
carry. These were spread out on a rack over our camp-fire and smoked for
further use, as we did not know how long our stay would be extended. On the
next day Stamy and Lindsley returned from Port Mulgrave, where they had
left Kerr, quite recovered from his exposure on the mountain. Stormy weather
continued, and a gale from the northeast piled the ice high on the beach and
threatened to sweep away our tents, as has already been briefly described in
earlier pages.

On September 20, our tents having been beaten in by a violent storm and our
camping place overflowed by the waters from a lake above us, we removed
our goods to a place of safety and went to Dalton's cabin, where we awaited
better weather. The morning of September 23 dawned clear and bright, and
after drying our clothes around a blazing camp-fire, we started back to our
camping place on the shore. Before reaching there, however, we were rejoiced
to see the Corwin coming up the bay. It took us but a short time to get on
board, where Captain C. L. Hooper, her commander, did everything in his
power to make us welcome and comfortable. To him we are indebted for a
delightful voyage back to civilization.

After steaming up Disenchantment bay nearly to the ice-cliffs of the Hubbard
glacier, and obtaining a fine view of the glaciers about Disenchantment bay,
the Corwin returned to Port Mulgrave and, on September 25, put to sea. After
a splendid ocean passage, we arrived at Port Townsend on October 2.

Page 254

During our stay in Alaska not a man was seriously sick and not an accident
happened. The work planned at the start was carried out almost to the letter,
with the exception that snow-storms and the lateness of the season did not
permit us to reach the summit of Mount St. Elias.

SUGGESTIONS.

Should another attempt be made to climb Mount St. Elias, the shortest and
most practicable route from the coast would be to land at Icy bay and ascend
the Agassiz glacier. The course taken by us in 1890 could be intersected just
north of where the tributary glacier from Dome pass joins the main ice-stream;
and from there the route followed last summer would be the most practicable.
A camp should be established on the divide between Mount St. Elias and
Mount Newton, from which excursions to either of these peaks could be made
in a single day.

In the preceding narrative many details have been omitted. One of these is that
tents, together with blankets, rations, etc., were left at two convenient points
between Blossom island and the Agassiz glacier, and were used by the men in
bringing up supplies. In attempting to ascend Mount St. Elias from Icy bay by
the route suggested, at least three such relay stations should be established
between the Chaix hills, where wood for camp-fires can be obtained (as is
known from the reports of the New York Times and Topham expeditions), and
the high camp on the divide. The relay camps suggested should be one day's
march apart, and would serve not only for stopping places while carrying
rations during the advance, but would furnish a line of retreat. A party making
this journey should be provided with snow-shoes, which unfortunately we did
not take with us.

All rations intended for use above the snow-line should be packed in tin cans,
each of sufficient size to hold between fifty and sixty pounds, and each should
be securely soldered. All articles packed in this way should be thoroughly dry
and should be packed in a dry, warm room. When secured in this manner they
are about as easy to carry as if packed in bags, and can be "cached" anywhere
out of the reach of floods and avalanches, with the certainty of being
serviceable when wanted. The more perishable articles to be used where
camp-fires are possible should also be secured in tin cans. Sacks of flour,
corn-meal, etc., should be protected by an outer covering of strong canvas.

Page 255

The experience of last summer showed that the cans of rations intended for
use above the snow-line should each contain about the following ration, which
may be varied to suit individual taste:

Bacon, smoked 10 lbs.
Corned beef, in can 6 "
Flour and corn-meal, with necessary 15 "
quantity of baking powder
Coffee 2 "
Rolled oats 5 "
Sugar 5 "
Chocolate, sweet 2 "
Salt ¼ "
Extract of beef ¼ "
Tobacco ½ "
Condensed milk (small cans) 2
Matches (wax) 1 box.

Our experience with oil-stoves showed that they are serviceable. While on the
march they can be carried as hand packs in gunny-sacks. Rectangular cans
holding about a gallon each, with small screw-tops, were found convenient for
carrying coal oil. The experience of Arctic explorers indicates that alcohol
would perhaps be better than coal oil to use in snow-camps.

Among the most important articles to be provided are strong shoes or boots; of
these each man should have at least two pairs. Strong hip-boots, with lacings
over the instep, are exceedingly serviceable. When sleeping on the ice the
boot-legs may be spread beneath one's blankets and the feet used as a pillow.
The long legs are serviceable alike in the thick brush on the shore and in the
deep snow on the high mountains. With their protection, many streams can be
waded without getting wet. Leather, waxed ends, awls, etc., for repairing
boots, and tallow mixed with bees-wax for greasing them, should be taken and
distributed in part through the cans of rations. Heavy woolen socks are
indispensable, and an effort should be made to have a dry pair always at hand.
This may be arranged, even under the most unfavorable conditions, by drying

Page 256

a pair as thoroughly as is convenient and carrying them in the bosom of one's
shirt.

Long alpenstocks are always necessary. My own choice is a stiff one of
hickory, about six feet long and an inch and a quarter in diameter, provided
with a spike and hook at one end and a chisel about two inches broad at the
other. Ice axes are desirable while climbing in the high mountains, but even
more serviceable are light axes of the usual pattern, but with handles about
fourteen inches long; these supplement the alpenstock, and when not actually
in use are carried in the packs.

Each man should be provided with a water-tight match-box, and should have,
besides, a bundle of wax matches wrapped in oil-cloth and sewed in the collar
of his shirt, to be held as a last reserve. Each man should also have a small
water-tight bag in which to carry salt enough to last a week or ten days, in case
he has to live by hunting or fishing. A heavy hunting knife is very convenient,
and can be used not only in cutting trails through thick brush, but in cases of
necessity is serviceable in making steps in ice. Heavy woolen clothing is
preferable to furs. Sleeping bags were not used during our expedition, but are
highly recommended by others. For protection at night, a thick woolen blanket
with a light canvas cover and a sheet of light rubber cloth to protect it are all
that is necessary. Our tents were of cotton drilling, seven feet square and about
six feet high, and provided with ridge-ropes. Alpenstocks were used for tent
poles. "Sou'westers" and strong water-proof coats are indispensable in a
climate like that of Alaska, and at night may be used as a substratum on which
to sleep. While traveling over the snow-line we used colored glasses to protect
the eyes, and also found that a strip of dark mosquito netting tied across the
face below the eyes afforded great protection. Some of the party found relief
from the glare of the snow by blacking their faces with grease and burnt cork,
but one experiment with that method is usually enough. While camping below
timber-line during the months of June to September fine mosquito netting is
indispensable. In carrying packs, hemp "cod-line" of the largest size was
found to answer every requirement, and is preferred by expert packers to pack-
straps.

It has been suggested that experienced Swiss guides are necessary to ensure
success in climbing Mount St. Elias. Having never followed a guide in the
mountains, I am not able to judge of their efficiency, but it must be
remembered that no one can guide in a region that has never been traversed.

Page 257

The "guide" as understood in Europe is unknown in America. In the
exploration of this country by engineers, geologists, etc., the camp hands have
followed their leaders and have not shown them the way. In every frontier
town there are hunters, trappers, miners, prospectors, cow-boys, voyageurs,
etc.—men who have passed their lives on the plains or among "the hills" and
are enured to hardship and danger. This is the best material in the world from
which to recruit an exploring party. A foreigner engaging the services of such
men must take into account the independent spirit that animates them and is
the secret of their usefulness. They are not servants, but retainers; that too in
regions far beyond the reach of civil law. They will follow their leader
anywhere, support him in all dangers, and do their work faithfully so long as
their rights as men are respected.

By taking proper precautions while traveling across crevassed snow and ice,
and guarding against avalanches and snow-blindness, an excursion can be
made above the snow-line with as little danger as in better known and more
frequented regions.

PART III.

SKETCH OF THE GEOLOGY OF THE ST. ELIAS REGION.

GENERAL FEATURES.

In the preceding narrative, many references have been made to the character of
the rocks and to the geological structure of the region explored. It was not
practicable during the journey to carry on detailed geological studies, but such
facts as were noted are of interest, for this reason, if for no other: they relate to
a country previously unknown.

My reconnoissance enabled me to determine that there are three well-defined
formations in the St. Elias region. These are—

Page 258

1. The sandstones and shales about Yakutat bay and westward along the
foot of the mountain to Icy bay, named the Yakutat system.

2. A system of probably later date, composed of shale, conglomerate,
limestone, sandstone, etc., best exposed in the cliffs of Pinnacle pass and
along the northern and western borders of the Samovar hills, and named
the Pinnacle system.

3. The metamorphic rocks of the main St. Elias range, called the St. Elias
schist.

YAKUTAT SYSTEM.

The rocks of this system are of gray and brown sandstones and nearly black
shales. They are uniform in lithological character over a large area, and are
usually greatly crushed and seamed. So great has been the crushing to which
they have been subjected that it is difficult to work out a hand specimen with
fresh surfaces. Fragments broken out with a hammer are almost invariably
bounded by plains of previous crushing, and are usually somewhat weathered.

These rocks form the bold shores of Yakutat and Disenchantment bays, and
were the only rocks seen along our route from Yakutat bay to Pinnacle pass.
The whole of the Hitchcock range is composed of rocks of this series, as are
also the Chaix hills and the hills west of Icy bay and the southern portion of
the Samovar hills. North of Pinnacle pass there are rocks undistinguishable
lithogically from those about Yakutat bay. These are exposed in Mount Owen
and on each side of Dome pass; they also form the bold spurs about the
immediate bases of Mount Augusta, Mount Malaspina, and Mount St. Elias. In
the three instances last named these rocks dip beneath the schist forming the
crest of the St. Elias range, and it is probable that a great overthrust there took
place before the formation of the faults to which the present relief of the
mountains is due.

All the mountain spurs of Mount Cook, so far as is known, are composed of
sandstones and shales of the Yakutat series, with the exception of the Pinnacle
pass cliffs. Nearly all the débris on the glaciers from Disenchantment bay to
the Seward glacier, and probably beyond, is derived from the rocks of this
system. The distribution of the rocks from which the débris was derived may

Page 259

be ascertained in a general way by tracing out the sources of the glaciers.
Medial moraines on the Hayden and Marvine glaciers, however, have their
sources on the northern slope of Mount Cook, and are composed of gabbro
and serpentine. These rocks were not seen in place, and their relation to the
Yakutat series can only be conjectured.

Although the rocks of this system are stratified, it is impossible to determine
their thickness, for the reason that they have been greatly crushed and
overthrust. This is well illustrated in the Hitchcock range, which, as already
explained, trends about northeast and southwest, and is composed of strata of
shale and sandstone, having a nearly east-and-west strike and a uniform dip
toward the northeast. Were the rocks in normal position their thickness would
be incredible. In addition to this negative evidence, there is the crushed
condition of the strata to show that movement has taken place all through their
mass; and in a few instances thrust faults were distinguished, dipping
northeastward at about the same angle as the lines of bedding. In the crushing
to which the rocks have been subjected the shales have suffered more than the
sandstones, and have been drawn out into wedge-shaped masses, the sharp
edges of which usually point toward the northeast, which is presumably the
direction from which the crushing force acted.

The hypothesis that the rocks in the St. Elias region have been crushed and
overthrust explains many otherwise inharmonious facts, and accounts for the
superposition of the St. Elias schist upon rocks of the Yakutat system.

Coal has been discovered in the rocks of the Yakutat system about two miles
west of the southern end of Disenchantment bay, and is reported to be of
workable thickness. I saw thin lignite seams at the surface at this locality, but
as the shafts were filled with water I was unable to examine the coal in the
openings, and cannot vouch for its thickness. Samples obtained from the mine
show it to be a black lignite which would apparently be of value for fuel.
Fossil leaves are reported to occur in connection with the lignite, but these
have never been seen by any one who could identify them.

The rocks of the Yakutat system, wherever seen, dip northeastward, except
when greatly disturbed near fault-lines. East of Disenchantment bay the
inclination of the beds is from 15° to 20°; farther westward the dip increases
gradually all the way to the Hitchcock range, where the prevailing inclination
is from 30° to 40°, and frequently still greater. Beneath Mount Malaspina and

Page 260

Mount St. Elias the Yakutat sandstones dip northeastward at an angle of about
15°, and in the hills west of Icy bay the dip is about the same. Exceptions to
the prevailing dips occur along the immediate shore of Yakutat bay, northwest
of Knight island, and at the southern extremity of each of the mountain spurs
between Yakutat bay and Blossom island. At these localities the rocks are
frequently vertical or nearly so, owing their high dip to the proximity of lines
of displacement. The faults indicated by these unusual dips also mark the
boundary between the mountains and the seaward-stretching plateau of
alluvium and ice.

The crushing, overthrusting and faulting that has affected the rocks of this
system render it doubtful whether the coal seams which occur in it, even if of
requisite thickness, can be worked to advantage. Some of the samples of coal
obtained at the openings made near Yakutat bay were slickensided, showing
that movements in the coal seam had there taken place.

As already stated, the rocks of the Yakutat series are remarkably uniform in
character throughout the extent now known, and offer but little variety. The
sandstones are intersected in every direction by thin quartz seams, which stand
in relief on the weathered surfaces, giving the rocks a peculiar and
characteristic appearance. The first important change in the geology along the
route traversed by us was met on reaching Pinnacle pass.

PINNACLE SYSTEM.

The rocks of this system, as already stated, are best exposed in the great fault-
scarp forming the northern wall of Pinnacle pass. They are more varied in
composition and have preserved a better record of the conditions under which
they were deposited than the sandstones and shales of the Yakutat system.

Only an approximate section of the rocks exposed in the Pinnacle-pass cliff
was obtained.

Sandstone and conglomerate weathering into spires 500 feet.
Evenly bedded, sandy shale in thin layers 600 "
Coarse conglomerate; bowlders of crystalline rock 50 "
Thinly bedded, dark-colored sandstone and shale 500 "

Page 261

Reddish conglomerate 10 "
Light-gray sandstone, with thin, irregular coal seams 40 "
Total 1,800 "

There is also a compact, crystalline, gray limestone near the upper portion of
the series, which escaped notice in the cliffs. At the end of the Pinnacle-pass
cliffs, however, where the rocks are turned northward by the great fault which
decides the course of the Seward glacier, and dip eastward at a high angle, the
limestone is well exposed, and has a thickness of about 50 feet. In many
places the surfaces of the layers are covered with fragments of large Pecten
shells. Associated with the limestone there are reddish shales, much crushed
and broken, and a peculiar conglomerate. The pebbles in the conglomerate are
of many varieties, and were observed at places along the Pinnacle pass cliffs.
Their most marked peculiarity lies in the fact that they have been sheared by a
movement in the rocks and sometimes broken into several fragments which
have been reunited, probably by pressure. These faulted pebbles are
characteristic of the strata from which they were derived. Similar pebbles were
afterward obtained in the Marvine glacier near its junction with the Malaspina
glacier, thus indicating that there are other outcrops of the conglomerate about
Mount Cook, near where the Marvine glacier has its source. Two quartz
pebbles from the conglomerate of Pinnacle pass are shown in the
accompanying illustrations. The larger pebble (shown in figure 7) is of bluish-
gray quartz, and the smaller one (depicted in figure 8) is of white quartz. The
fragments into which they have been broken are now firmly united. The
engravings are photo-mechanical (Moss process) reproductions from the
objects.

Page 262

FIGURE 7—Faulted Pebble from Pinnacle Pass.

FIGURE 8—Faulted Pebble from Pinnacle Pass.

In the northern and western part of the Samovar hills the rocks of the Pinnacle
system again appear, forming a bold angular ridge, curving southward and
reaching the border of the Agassiz glacier. The southern face of this range is
precipitous and, like the Pinnacle pass cliffs, exhibits the edges of northward-
dipping strata. Its northern and western slopes are heavily snow-bound. It is in

Page 263

reality a continuation of the Pinnacle pass fault, but thrown out of line by the
cross-fault which marked out the course of the Seward glacier.

The Yakutat and Pinnacle systems are so easily recognized that their
distribution can be distinguished at a glance, when the outcrops are not
concealed beneath the nearly universal covering of snow. The rocks of the
Yakutat series are heavily bedded sandstones and shales, and have in general a
light-brown tint; while the rocks of the Pinnacle series are thinly bedded and
dark in color, appearing black at a distance.

The presence of a Pecten (P. caurinus (?) Gld.) in the limestone of the
Pinnacle series has already been mentioned. Other fossils were obtained from
sandstones and shales at the crest of the cliffs above Pinnacle pass at an
elevation of 5,000 feet. These were submitted to Dr. W. H. Dall, who kindly
identified them as follows:

Mya arenaria, L.;
Mytilus edulis, L.;
Leda fossa, Baird, or L. minuta, Fabr.;
Macoma inconspicua, B. and S.;
Cardium islandicum, L.;
Litorina atkana, Dall.

All of these species are stated by Dall to be still living in the oceanic waters of
Alaska. The very recent age of the rocks in which they occur is thus
established.

In strata closely connected with the layers in which these shells were found
there occur many fine leaf impressions, a few of which were brought away.
These have been examined by Professor L. F. Ward, who has identified them
with four species of Salix, closely resembling living species. The report on
these interesting fossils forms Appendix D.

The age indicated by both invertebrates and plants is late Tertiary (Pliocene) or
early Pleistocene. This determination is of great significance when taken in
connection with the structure of the region, and shows that the mountains in
the St. Elias region are young.

Page 264

Not only was a part, at least, of the Pinnacle system deposited during the life
of living species of mollusks, but also the whole of the Yakutat series, the
stratigraphic position of which is, if my determination is correct, above the
Pinnacle system. After the sediments composing the rocks of these two series
were deposited in the sea as strata of sand, mud, etc., they were consolidated,
overthrust, faulted, and upheaved into one of the grandest mountain ridges on
the continent. Then, after the mountains had reached a considerable height, if
not their full growth, the snows of winter fell upon them, and glaciers were
born; the glaciers increased to a maximum, and their surfaces reached from a
thousand to two thousand feet higher than now on the more southern mountain
spurs, and afterward slowly wasted away to their present dimensions. All of
this interesting and varied history has been enacted during the life of existing
species of plants and animals.

The relative age of the Yakutat and Pinnacle series is the weakest point in the
history sketched above. The facts on which it rests are as follows: At Pinnacle
pass the sandstones and shales forming the southern wall belong to the Yakutat
system and are much disturbed, while the northern wall, or the heaved side of
the fault, is composed of the rocks of the Pinnacle system, inclined northward
at an angle of 30° or 40°. North of this fault-scarp, in the foothills of Mount
Owen, sandstones and shales, seemingly identical with those of the Yakutat
system, again occur, although their direct connection with the rocks south of
Pinnacle pass was not observed, owing to the snow that obscured the outcrops.
Again at Dome pass a similar relation seems evident, but cannot be directly
established. The immediate foothills of Mounts Augusta, Malaspina, and St.
Elias are also of sandstone, lithologically the same as the Yakutat series. The
conclusion that the Yakutat system is younger than the Pinnacle-pass rocks
was reached in the field after many other hypotheses had been tried and found
wanting, and to my mind it explains all the observations made. Even should
the supposed relations of the two series under discussion be reversed, it would
still be true that a very large part of the rocks of the St. Elias region were
deposited since the appearance of living species of mollusks and plants, and
that the prevailing structure of the region was imposed at a still later date. This
will appear more clearly after examining the structure of the region.

ST. ELIAS SCHIST.

Page 265

The rock forming several thousand feet of the upper portion of the St. Elias
range is a schist in which the planes of bedding are preserved. The dip of the
strata is northeastward, and has exerted a decided influence on the weathering
of the mountain crests. As the opportunities for examining this formation were
unsatisfactory, a detailed account of it will not now be attempted.

GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURE.

The abnormal thickness of the Yakutat series, due to crushing and overthrust,
has been referred to, as has also the superposition of the St. Elias schist upon
rock supposed to belong to the Yakutat system.

The plane of contact between the sandstone and the overlying schist of the St.
Elias range dips northeastward at an angle of about 15°, corresponding, as
nearly as can be determined, with the dip of the strata in the sandstone itself.
All of the observations made in this connection indicate that the schist has
been overthrust upon the sandstones. After this took place the great faults to
which the range owes its present relief were formed.

About Mount Cook, however, and in the elevated plateau east of Yakutat bay,
the conditions are different from those observed along the base of the St. Elias
range. The only displacements known in the Yakutat system south and east of
Pinnacle pass is the great fault which presumably exists where the rocks of the
foothills disappear beneath the gravel and glaciers of the Piedmont region, the
faults referred to belonging to the same series as those which determine the
southern and southwestern borders of the St. Elias range and many of the
foothills south of the main escarpment. Besides the great faults which trend
from St. Elias toward the northeast and northwest, there are several cross-
faults, one of which determines the position of the Seward glacier through a
portion of its course, while another marks out the path of the Agassiz glacier;
and two others may be recognized just east of the summit of St. Elias, which
have dropped portions of the eastern end of the orographic block forming the
crowning peak of the range.

The southern face of Mount St. Elias is a fault-scarp. The mountain itself is
formed by the upturned edge of a faulted block in which the stratification is
inclined northeastward. As has just been mentioned, the mountain stands at the
intersection of two lines of displacement, one trending in a northeasterly and

Page 266

the other in a northwesterly direction. The one trending northwestward
extends beyond the end of the northeast fault. The point of union is at the pass
between Mount St. Elias and Mount Newton. The upturned block, bounded on
the southwest by a great fault, projects beyond the junction with the
northeasterly fault. It is this projecting end of a roof-like block that forms
Mount St. Elias. That this is the case may be clearly seen when viewing the
mountain from the glacier near the base of Mount Owen. Such a view is
shown on plate 20. The crest-line of St. Elias extends with a decreasing grade
northwestward from the culminating peak, and the northern slope of the ridge
is the surface of the tilted block.

From what has been stated already, it will be seen that the St. Elias range is
young. Its upheaval, as indicated by our present knowledge, was since the
close of the Tertiary. The breaking of the rocks and their upheaval is an event
of such recent date that erosion has scarcely modified the forms which the
mountains had at their birth. The formation of glaciers followed the elevation
of the region so quickly, that there was no opportunity for streams to act. The

Page 267

ice drainage is consequent upon the geological structure, and has made but
slight changes in the topography due to that structure.

About Mount Cook, and in the elevated plateau east of Yakutat bay, there has
been deeper erosion than about Mount St. Elias. The glaciers in this region
occupy deep valleys radiating from the higher peaks; but whether these are
really valleys of erosion is not definitely known. In some instances, changes of
dip on opposite sides of the valleys indicate that they may in part be due to
faulting; but, owing principally to the fact that every basin has its glacier, it
has not been practicable, up to the present time, to determine how they were
formed.

The crests of the mountains are always sharp and angular, by reason of the
rapid weathering of their exposed summits, but while disintegration is rapid,
no evidences of pronounced decay are noticeable. The peaks on the summits
of the St. Elias range are either pyramids or roof-like crests with triangular
gables. These forms have resulted from the weathering of schist in which the
planes of bedding are crossed by lines of jointing.

PART IV.

GLACIERS OF THE ST. ELIAS REGION.

NATURAL DIVISIONS OF GLACIERS.

The glaciers of the St. Elias region form two groups. The ice-streams from the
mountain are of the type found in Switzerland, and hence termed Alpine
glaciers. The great plateau of ice along the ocean formed by the union and
expansion of Alpine glaciers from the mountains belongs to a class not
previously described, but which in this paper have been called Piedmont
glaciers. The representative of the latter type between Yakutat bay and Icy bay

Page 268

is the Malaspina glacier. Both types are to be distinguished from Continental
glaciers.

ALPINE GLACIERS.

The glaciers in the mountains are all of one type, but present great diversity in
their secondary features, and might be separated into three or four subordinate
divisions. The great trunk glaciers have many tributaries, and drain the snows
from the mountains through broad channels, which are of low grade
throughout all the lower portions of their courses. Besides the trunk glaciers
and the secondary glaciers which flow into them, there are many smaller
glaciers which do not join the main streams, but terminate in the gorges or on
the exposed mountain sides in which they originate. These have nearly all the
features of the larger streams, but are not of sufficient volume to become
rivers of ice.

A minor division of Alpine glaciers for which it is convenient to have a special
name includes those that end in the sea and, breaking off, form icebergs. These
may be designated as "tide-water glaciers." Typical examples of this class are
furnished by the Dalton and Hubbard glaciers, but other ice-streams having
the same characteristics occur in Glacier bay, in Taku inlet, and at the heads of
several of the deep fjords along the coast of southeastern Alaska.

A noticeable feature of the Alpine glaciers of Alaska is that they expand on
passing beyond the valleys through which they flow and form delta-like
accumulations of ice on the plains below. This expansion takes place
irrespective of the direction in which the glaciers flow, and, so far as may be
judged from the many examples examined, is independent of the débris that
covers them. It should be remembered, however, that none of the Alaskan
glaciers thus far studied show marked inequalities in the distribution of the
moraines upon their surfaces. Should one side of a glacier, on leaving a cañon,
be heavily loaded with marginal moraines, while the opposite border was
unprotected, it is to be presumed that a deflection of the ice would take place
similar to the change in direction recorded by the moraines about Mono lake,
California.34 The normal tendency of ice, when not confined, to expand in all
directions and form a plateau is illustrated on a grand scale by the Malaspina
glacier.

Page 269

34
Eighth Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Surv., 1889, part I, pp. 360–366.

The most important ice-streams about Mount St. Elias and Mount Cook are
indicated on the map forming plate 8. The Tindall, Guyot, and Libbey glaciers
and the lower part of the Agassiz glacier there represented are taken from a
map published by H. W. Topham.35 All of the other glaciers indicated on the
map were hastily surveyed during the present expedition and are described to
some extent in the accompanying narrative. By far the most important of these
is the one named the Seward Glacier.
35
Alpine Journal, London, vol. XIV, 1887, pl. op. p. 359.

The Seward Glacier is of the Alpine type, and is the largest tributary of the
Malaspina glacier. Its length is approximately 40 miles, and its width in the
narrowest part, opposite Camp fourteen, is about 3 miles. The main
amphitheatre from which its drainage is derived is north of Mount Owen and
between Mount Irving and Mount Logan. The general surface of the broad
level floor of this névé field has an elevation of approximately 5,000 feet. The
snow from the northern and western sides of Mount Irving, from the northern
slope of Mount Owen, and from numerous valleys and cañons in the vast
semicircle of towering peaks joining these two mountains, unite to form the
great glacier. There is another amphitheatre between Mount Owen and the
Pinnacle pass cliffs supplied principally by snows from the northwestern slope
of Mount Cook, which sends a vast flood of ice and snow into the main
drainage channel. Other tributary glaciers descend the steep slopes of Mount
Augusta and Mount Malaspina, and a lesser tributary flows eastward from
Dome pass. All of these ice-drainage lines converge toward the narrow outlet
of Camp 14 (plate 8) and discharge southward down a moderately steep
descent several miles in length. Below Camp 14 there are other névé fields
bordering the glacier, which contribute no insignificant amount of ice and
snow to its mass. Between the extremity of the Hitchcock range and the
Samovar hills the path of the glacier is again contracted and greatly broken as
it descends to the plateau below.

The Seward glacier, like all ice rivers of its class, has its névé region above,
and its ice region below. The limit between the two is the lower margin of the
summer snow, and occurs just above the ice-fall between the southern

Page 270

extremity of the Hitchcock range and the Samovar hills. All the névé region is
pure white and without moraines, except at the immediate bases of the most
precipitous cliffs. At the bases of the Corwin cliffs, which rise fully 2,000 feet
above its border, no débris can be distinguished even in midsummer. An
absence of moraines along the base of Pinnacle pass cliffs was also noticed
during our first visit, but when we returned over the same route in September
the melting of the snow had revealed many large patches of dirt and
disintegrated rock. In several places near the bases of steep cliffs, strata of
dirty ice, containing many stones, were observed in deep crevasses. It was
evident that vast quantities of débris were sealed up in the ice along the
borders of the glacier, only to appear at the surface far down the stream where
summer melting exceeds the winter accumulation.

The surface of the glacier below the lower fall is composed of solid ice with
blue and white bands, and has broad moraines along its borders. The course of
the glacier, after entering the great plateau of ice to which it is tributary, may
be traced for many miles by the bands of débris along its sides. These
moraines belong to the Malaspina glacier, and have already been referred to.

At the outlet of the upper amphitheatre, about 6 miles above Mount Owen,
there is an ice-fall which extends completely across the glacier. Below the
pinnacles and crevasses formed by this fall the ice is recemented and flows on
with a broad, gently descending surface, gashed, however, by thousands of
crevasses, as shown in plate 20, to the end of the Pinnacle pass cliffs. It there
finds a more rapid descent, and becomes crevassed in an interesting way. The
slope is not sufficient to be termed a fall, but causes a rapid in the ice-stream.

The change of grade in the bed of the glacier is first felt about a mile above
Camp 14. A series of crevasses there begins, which extends four or five miles
down-stream. At first the cracks are narrow, and trend upstream in the manner
usual with marginal crevasses. Soon the cracks from the opposite sides meet in
the center and form a single crevasse, bending upstream in the middle. A little
lower down, the crevasse becomes straight, showing that the ice in the center
of the current flows more rapidly than at the sides. The more rapid movement
of the center is indicated by the form of the crevasses all the way down the
rapid. After becoming straight they bow in the center and form semi-lunar
gashes, widest in the center and curving up-stream at each extremity. Still
farther down they become more and more bent in the center and at the same
time greatly increased in breadth. Still lower the curve becomes an angle and

Page 271

the crevasses are V-shaped, the arrow-like point directed down-stream. These
parallel V-shaped gashes set in order, one in front of the other, are what gives
the glacier the appearance of "watered" ribbon when seen from a distance.

With the change in direction and curvature of the crevasses, there is an
accompanying change in color. The cracks in the upper part of the rapid are in
a white surface and run down into ice that looks dark and blue by contrast.
Lower down, as the cracks increase in width, broad white tables are left
between them. Cross-fractures are formed, and the sides of the table begin to
crumble in and fill up the gaps between. As the surface melts the tables lose
their pure whiteness and become dust-covered and yellow; but the blocks
falling into the crevasses expose fresh surfaces, and fill the gulfs with pure
white ice. In this way the color of the sides of the crevasses changes from deep
blue to white, while the general surface loses its purity and becomes dust-
covered. Far down the rapid where the V-shaped crevasses are most pointed,
the tables have crumbled away and filled up the gulfs between, so that the
watered-ribbon pattern is distinguished by color alone. The scars of the
crevasses formed above are shown by white bands on a dark dust-covered
surface. Before the lower fall is reached nearly all traces of the thousands of
fissures formed in the rapids above have disappeared.

On looking down on the rapids from any commanding point, the definite
arrangement of the crevasses along the center of the ice-stream at once attracts
attention, and their order suggests a rapid central current in the stream.

Below Camp 14, for at least two or three miles, as well as at many places
above that point, the Seward glacier flows between banks of snow. Along its
border there are marginal crevasses trending up-stream, and in the adjacent
banks there are similar breaks trending down-stream. Where the two systems
meet there is a line of irregular crevasses, exceedingly difficult to cross, which
mark the actual border of the flowing ice. A similar arrangement of marginal
crevasses and of shore crevasses has been referred to in connection with the
Marvine glacier, and was observed in many other instances.

While occupying Camp 14 we could hear the murmur of waters far down in
the glacier below our tent, but there were no surface streams visible. Crashing
and rumbling noises made by the slowly moving ice frequently attracted our
attention, and sometimes at night we would be awakened by a dull thud,

Page 272

accompanied by a trembling of the rocks beneath us, as if a slight earthquake
had occurred. Occasionally a pinnacle of ice would fall and be engulfed in the
crevasses at its base. These evidences of change indicated that movements in
the Seward glacier were constantly in progress. A short base-line was
measured and sights taken to well-marked points in the Seward glacier for the
purpose of measuring its motion. The angles between the base-line and lines
of sight to the chosen points were read on several successive days, but when
these observations were compared they gave discrepant results. The
measurements which seemed most reliable indicate that the central part of the
ice-stream has a movement of about twenty feet a day. This is to be taken only
as an approximation, which needs to be verified before much weight can be
attached to it.

CHARACTERISTICS OF ALPINE GLACIERS ABOVE THE SNOW-LINE.

The surface of the névé is white, except near its lower limit in late summer,
where it frequently becomes covered with dust blown from neighboring cliffs.
It is almost entirely free from moraines, but at the bases of steep slopes small
areas of débris sometimes appear at the surface when the yearly melting has
reached its maximum. The absence of moraines is accompanied by an absence
of glacial tables, sand-cones and other details of glacial surfaces due to
differential melting. Streams seldom appear at the surface, for the reason that
usually the water produced by surface melting is quickly absorbed by the
porous strata beneath; yet the crevasses are frequently filled with water, and
sometimes shallow lakes of deep blue occur at the bottoms of the
amphitheatres and form a marked contrast to the even white of the general
surface. Crevasses are present or absent according to the slope of the surface
on which the névé rests. In the crevasses the edges of horizontal layers of
granular ice are exhibited, showing that the névé down to a depth of at least
one or two hundred feet is horizontally stratified. In the St. Elias region the
strata are most frequently from ten to fifteen feet thick, but in a few instances
layers without partings over fifty feet thick were seen. The surface is always of
white, granular ice, but in the crevasses the layers near the bottom appear
more compact and bluer in color than those near the surface.

Some of the most striking features of the névé are due to the crevasses that
break their surfaces. The orderly arrangement of marginal crevasses and of the
interior crevasses at the rapids in the Seward glacier have already been

Page 273

referred to; but there are still other crevasses, especially in the broad, gently
sloping portions of the snow-fields where the motion is slight, which, although
less regular in their arrangement, are fully as interesting. The crevasses on
such slopes generally run at right angles to the direction in which the snow is
moving. On looking down on such a surface, the breaks look like long clear-
cut gashes which have stretched open in the center, but taper to a sharp point
at each end. The ability of the névé ice to stretch to a limited extent is thus
clearly shown. The initiation of the crevasses seems to be due to the
movement of the névé ice over a surface in which there are inequalities of
such magnitude that the ice cannot stretch sufficiently to allow it to
accommodate itself to them, so that strains are produced which result in
fractures at right angles to the line of general movement. Crevasses found
where the grade is gentle vary from a fraction of an inch to 10 or 15 feet in
width, and are sometimes two or three thousand feet long. Broader gulfs are
seldom formed unless the slope has an inclination of 15° or 20°.

The grandest crevasses are in the higher portions of the névé, and occur
especially on the borders of the great amphitheatres. In such situations the
crevasses are usually fewer in number but are of greater size than in equal
areas lower down. A length of three or four thousand feet and a breadth of fifty
feet or more is not uncommon. The finest and most characteristic glacial
scenery is found among these great cañon-like breaks. Standing on the border
of one of the gulfs, as near the brink as one cares to venture, their full depth
cannot usually be seen. In some instances they are partially filled with water
of the deepest blue, in which the ice-walls are reflected with such wonderful
distinctness that it is impossible to tell where the ice ends and its counterfeit
begins. The walls of the crevasses are most frequently sheer cliffs of stratified
ice, with occasional ornamentations, formed of ice-crystals or a pendent icicle.
After a storm they are frequently decorated in the most beautiful manner with
fretwork and cornice of snow. The bridges spanning the crevasses are usually
diagonal slivers of ice left where the clefts overlap; but at times, especially in
the case of the larger crevasses, there are true arches resembling the Natural
Bridge of Virginia, but on a larger scale, spanning the blue cañons and adding
greatly to their strange, fairy-like beauty. The most striking feature of these
cracks is their wonderful color. All tints, from the pure white of their crystal
lips down to the deepest blue of their innermost recesses, are revealed in each
gash and rent in the hardened snow.

Page 274

Above the snow-line all of the mountain tops that are not precipitous are
heavily loaded with snow. Where the snow breaks off at the verge of a
precipice and descends in avalanches a depth of more than a hundred feet is
frequently revealed, but in the valleys and amphitheatres the snow has far
greater thickness. Pinnacles and crests of rock, rising through the icy covering,
indicate that the thickness of the névé must be many hundreds of feet.

There are no evidences of former glaciation on the mountain crests which
project above the névé fields. There are no polished and striated rock surfaces
or glaciated domes to indicate that the mountains were ever covered by a
general capping of ice, as has been postulated for similar mountains
elsewhere. When the glaciers had their greatest expansion the higher
mountains were in about their present condition. The increase in the volume of
the glaciers was felt almost entirely in their lower courses.

CHARACTERISTICS OF ALPINE GLACIERS BELOW THE SNOW-LINE.

The first feature that attracts attention on descending from the névé region to
the more icy portion of the glaciers is the rapid melting everywhere taking
place. Every day during the summer the murmur and roar of rills, brooks and
rivers are to be heard in all of the ice-fields. The surface streams are usually
short, on account of the crevasses which intercept them. They plunge into the
gulfs, which are many times widened out by the flowing waters so as to form
wells, or moulins, and join the general drainage beneath. The streams then
flow either through caverns in the glaciers or in tunnels at the bottoms. While
traversing the glacier one may frequently hear the subdued roar of rivers
coursing along in the dark chambers beneath when no other indication of their
existence appears at the surface. When these subglacial streams emerge,
usually near the margin of the ice, they issue from archways forming the ends
of tunnels, and perhaps flow for a mile or two in the sunlight before plunging
into another tunnel to continue their way as before.

The best example of a glacial river seen during our exploration was near the
western border of the Lucia glacier. It is shown in the illustration forming
plate 12, which is reproduced mechanically from a photograph. This Styx of
the ice-world has been described on an earlier page. The lakes formed at the
southern end of nearly every mountain spur projecting into the Malaspina

Page 275

glacier discharge through tunnels in the ice, which are similar in every way to
those formed by the stream already mentioned.

In the beds of the glacial streams there are deposits of sand and gravel, and
when the streams expand into lakes these deposits are spread over their
bottoms in more or less regular sheets. When streams from the mountains
empty into the lakes, deltas are formed. While these deltas have the same
characteristics as those built in more stable water bodies, many changes in
detail occur, owing to the fluctuation of the water level.

One of the tunnels leading to a dry lake-bed at the end of the Hitchcock range
was explored for several rods and found to be a high, arching cavern following
a tortuous course, and large enough to allow one to drive a coach and four
through it without danger of collision. Its floor was formed of gravel and
bowlders, and its arching roof was clear ice. Here and there the courses of
crevasses could be traced by the stones and finer débris that had fallen in from
above, giving the appearance of veins in a mine. The deposit on the floor of
the tunnel rested upon ice, and would certainly be greatly disturbed and
broken up before reaching a final resting place in case the glacier should melt.
In the lake basins, also, the sand and gravel forming their bottoms frequently
rested upon substrata of ice, and are greatly disturbed when the ice melts.

At the ends of the glaciers the subglacial and intraglacial drainage issues from
tunnels and forms muddy streams. These usually flow out from the foot of a
precipice of ice, down which rills are continually trickling. The streams
flowing away from the glaciers are usually rapid, owing to the high grade of
their built-up channels, and sweep away large quantities of débris which is
deposited along their courses. The streams widen and bifurcate as they flow
seaward, and spread vast quantities of bowlders, sand, and gravel over the
country to the right and left, not infrequently invading the forests and burying
the still upright trees. The deposits formed by the streams are of the nature of
alluvial fans, over which the waters meander in a thousand channels. Where
this action has taken place long enough the alluvial fans end in deltas; but
should there be a current in the sea, the débris is carried away and formed into
beaches and bars along adjacent shores. Should these glaciers disappear, it is
evident that these great bowlder washes would form peculiar topographic
features, unsupported at the apexes, and it might be perplexing to determine
from whence came the waters that deposited them. I am not aware that similar

Page 276

washes have been recognized along the southern border of the Laurentide
glaciers, but they should certainly be expected to occur there.

Another very striking difference in the appearance of the glaciers above and
below the snow-line is due to the prevalence of débris on the lower portion.
The melting that takes place below the snow-line removes the ice and leaves
the rocks. In this manner the stones previously concealed in the névé are
concentrated at the surface, and finally form sheets of débris many miles in
extent. So far as my observations go, there is nothing to indicate that stones
are brought to the surface by any other means than the one here suggested.
Upward currents in the ice that would bring stones to the surface have been
postulated by certain writers, but nothing sustaining such an hypothesis has
been found in Alaska.

The moraines on the lower extremities of the Alpine glaciers may frequently
be separated into individual ridges, which in many instances would furnish
instructive studies; but in no case has the history of these accumulations been
worked out in detail.

With the appearance of moraines at the surface come a great variety of
phenomena due to unequal melting. Ridges of ice sheathed with débris, glacial
tables, sand cones, etc., everywhere attract the attention; but these features are
very similar on all glaciers where the summer's waste exceeds the winter's
increase, and have been many times described.

The general distribution of the moraines of the lower portion of the Alpine
glaciers of the St. Elias region merits attention. The moraines themselves
exhibit features not yet observed in other regions. From Disenchantment bay
westward to the Seward glacier the lower portions of the ice-streams are
covered and concealed by sheets of débris. About their margins the débris
fields support luxuriant vegetation, and not infrequently are so densely clothed
with flowers that a tint is given to their rugged surfaces. On the extreme outer
margins of the moraines there are sometimes thickets and forests so dense as
to be almost impenetrable. The best example of forest-covered moraines
resting on living glaciers, however, is found along the borders of the
Malaspina ice-field.

PIEDMONT GLACIERS.

Page 277

This type is represented in the region explored by the Malaspina glacier. This
is a plateau of ice having an area of between 500 and 600 square miles, and a
surface elevation in the central part of between 1,500 and 1,600 feet. It is fed
by the Agassiz, Seward, Marvine, and Hayden glaciers, and is of such volume
that it has apparently displaced the sea and holds it back by a wall of débris
deposited about its margin. All of its central portion is of clear white ice, and
around all its margins, excepting where the Agassiz and Seward glaciers come
in, it is bounded by a fringe of débris and by moraines resting on the ice.
Along the seaward border the belt of fringing moraines is about five miles
broad. The inner margin of the moraine belt is composed of rocks and dirt,
without vegetation, and separated more or less completely into belts by strips
of clear ice. On going from the clear ice toward the margin of the glacier one
finds shrubs and flowers scattered here and there over the surface. Farther
seaward the vegetation becomes more dense and the flowers cover the whole
surface, giving it the appearance of a luxuriant meadow. Still farther toward
the margin dense clumps of alder, with scattered spruce trees, become
conspicuous, while on the outer margin spruce trees of larger size form a
veritable forest. That this vegetation actually grows on the moraines above a
living glacier is proved beyond all question by holes and crevasses which
reveal the ice beneath. The curious lakes scattered abundantly over the
moraine-covered areas, and occupying hour-glass-shaped depressions in the
ice, have already been described.

From the southern end of the Samovar hills, where the Seward and Agassiz
glaciers unite, there is a compound moraine stretching southward, which
divides at its distal extremity and forms great curves and swirl-like figures
indicating currents in the glacier.

All the central part of the plateau is, as already stated, of clear white ice, free
from moraines; at a distance it has the appearance of a broad snow surface.
This is due to the fact that the ice is melted and honey-combed during the
warm summer and the surface becomes vesicular and loses its banded
structure. A rough, coral-like crust, due to the freezing of the portions melted
during the day, frequently covers large areas and resembles a thick hoar-frost.
Crevasses are numerous, but seldom more than a few feet deep. They appear
to be the lower portions of deep crevasses in the tributary streams which have
partially closed, or else not completely removed by the melting and
evaporation of the surface.

Page 278

Many of the crevasses are filled with water, but there are no surface streams
and no lakes. Melting is rapid during the warm summer days, but the water
finds its way down into the glacier and joins the general subglacial drainage. It
is evident that the streams beneath the surface must be of large size, as they
furnish the only means of escape for the waters flowing beneath the Agassiz,
Seward and Marvine glaciers, as well as for the waters formed by the melting
of the great Malaspina glacier.

The outer borders of the Malaspina glacier are practically stationary, but there
are currents in its central part. Like the expanded ends of some of the Alpine
glaciers, as the Galiano and Lucia glaciers, for example, this glacier is of the
nature of a delta of ice, analogous in many of its features to river deltas. As a
stream in meandering over its delta builds up one portion after another, so the
currents in an expanded ice-foot may now follow one direction and deposit
loads of débris, and then slowly change so as to occupy other positions. This
action tends to destroy the individuality of morainal belts and to form general
sheets of débris. The presence of such currents as here suggested has not been
proved by measurements, but the great swirls in the Malaspina glacier and the
tongues of clear ice in the upper portions of the débris fields on the smaller
glaciers strongly suggest their existence.

The Malaspina glacier is evidently not eroding its bed; any records that it is
making must be by deposition. Should the glacier melt away completely, it is
evident that a surface formed of glacial débris, and very similar to that now
existing in the forested plateau east of Yakutat bay, would be revealed.

The former extent of the Malaspina glacier cannot be determined, but it is
probable that during its greatest expansion it extended seaward until deep
water was reached, and broke off in bergs in the same manner as do the
Greenland glaciers at the present day. Soundings in the adjacent waters might
possibly determine approximately the former position of the ice-front, and it is
possible that submarine moraines might be discovered in this way. The
Pimpluna reefs, reported by Russian navigators and indicated on many maps,
may possibly be a remnant of the moraine left by the Piedmont glacier from
the adjacent coast.

The glaciers west of Icy bay were seen from the top of Pinnacle pass cliffs,
and are evidently of the same character as the Malaspina glacier and fully as
extensive. A study of these Piedmont glaciers will certainly throw much light

Page 279

on the interpretations of the glacial records over northeastern North America.
Their value in this connection is enhanced by the fact that they are now
retreating and making deposits rather than removing previous geological
records.

The expedition of last summer was a hasty reconnoissance, during which but
little detail work could be undertaken. The actual study of the ice-fields of the
St. Elias region remains for those who come later.

PART V.

HEIGHT AND POSITION OF MOUNT ST. ELIAS.

The height and position of Mount St. Elias have been measured several times
during the past century with varying results. The measurements made prior to
the expedition of 1890 have been summarized and discussed by W. H. Dall, of
the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, and little more can be done at
present than give an abstract of his report.

The various determinations are shown in the table below. The data from which
these results were obtained have not been published, with the exception of the
surveys made by the United States Coast Survey in 1874, printed in report of
the superintendent for 1875.

Height and Position of Mount St. Elias.

Longitude
Date. Authority. Height. Latitude.
W.
1786 La Pérouse 12,672 feet 60° 15' 00" 140° 10' 00"

Page 280

1791 Malaspina 17,851 feet 60° 17' 35" 140° 52' 17"
1794 Vancouver —— 60° 22' 30" 140° 39' 00"
1847 Russian Hydrographic Chart 1378 17,854 feet 60° 21' 00" 141° 00' 00"
1847 Tebenkof (Notes) 16,938 feet 60° 22' 36" 140° 54' 00"
1849 Tebenkof (Chart VII) 16,938 feet 60° 21' 30" 140° 54' 00"
Buch. Can. Inseln 16,758 feet 60° 17' 30" 140° 51' 00"
1872 English Admiralty Chart 2172 14,970 feet 60° 21' 00" 141° 00' 00"
1874 U. S. Coast Survey 19,500 ±400 60° 20' 45" 141° 00' 12"

All of the figures given in the table have been copied from Dall's report, with
the exception of the position determined by Malaspina; this is from a report of
astronomical observations made during Malaspina's voyage, which places the
mountain in latitude 60° 17' 35" and longitude 134° 33' 10" west of Cadiz.36
Taking the longitude of Cadiz as 6° 19' 07" west of Greenwich, the figures
tabulated above are obtained.
36
Ante, p. 65.

It was intended that Mr. Kerr's report, forming Appendix B, should contain a
detailed record of the triangulation executed last summer, but a careful
revision of his work by a committee of the National Geographic Society led to
the conclusion that the results were not of sufficient accuracy to set at rest the
questions raised by the discrepancies in earlier measurements of the height of
Mount St. Elias; and as the work will probably be revised and extended during
the summer of 1891, only the map forming plate 8 will be published at this
time. Some preliminary publications of elevations have been made, but these
must be taken as approximations merely.37
37
The shore-line of the map, plate 8, and the positions of the initial points or base-line of the
triangulation are from the work of the United States Coast Survey. The extreme western portion is
from maps published by the New York Times and Topham expeditions. All the topographic data
are by Mr. Kerr, and all credit for the work and all responsibility for its accuracy rest with him.
The nomenclature is principally my own, and has been approved by a committee of the National
Geographic Society.

By consulting the map forming plate 8 it will be seen that Mounts Cook,
Vancouver, Irving, Owen, etc., are not in the St. Elias range. Neither do they
form a distinct range either topographically or geologically. Each of these

Page 281

mountains is an independent uplift, although they may have some structural
connection, and are of about the same geological age. Mount Cook and the
peaks most intimately associated with it are composed mainly of sandstone
and shale belonging to the Yakutat system. Mounts Vancouver and Irving are
probably of the same character, but definite proof that this is the case has not
been obtained.

The St. Elias uplift is distinct and well marked, both geologically and
topographically, and deserves to be considered as a mountain range. The limits
of the range have not been determined, but, so far as known, its maximum
elevation is at Mount St. Elias. The range stretches away from this
culminating point both northeastward and northwestward, and has a well-
marked V-shape. The angle formed by the two branches of the range where
they unite at Mount St. Elias is, by estimate, about 140°. Each arm of the V is
determined by a fault, or perhaps more accurately by a series of faults having
the same general course, along which the orographic blocks forming the range
have been upheaved. The structure of the range is monoclinal, and resembles
the type of mountain structure characteristic of the great basin. The dip of the
tilted blocks is northward.

The crest of the St. Elias range, as already stated, is composed of schists which
rest on sandstone, supposed to belong to the Yakutat system. The geological
age of the uplift is, therefore, very recent. The secondary topographic forms on
the crest of the range have resulted from the weathering of the upturned edges
of orographic blocks in which the bedding planes are crossed by joints. The
resulting forms are mainly pyramids and roof-like ridges with triangular
gables. Extreme ruggedness and angularity characterize the range throughout.
There are no rounded domes or smoothed and polished surfaces to suggest that
the higher summits have ever been subjected to general glacial action; neither
is there any evidence of marked rock decay. Disintegration of all the higher
peaks and crests is rapid, owing principally to great changes of temperature
and the freezing of water in the interstices of the rock; but the débris resulting
from this action is rapidly carried away by avalanches and glaciers, so that the
crests as well as the subordinate features in the sculpture of the cliffs and
pyramids are all angular. The subdued and rounded contour, due to the
accumulation of the products of disintegration and decay, the indications of
the advancing age of mountains, are nowhere to be seen. The St. Elias range is
young; probably the very youngest of the important mountain ranges on this

Page 282

continent. No evidences of erosion previous to the formation of the ice-sheets
that now clothe it have been observed. Glaciers apparently took immediate
possession of the lines of depression as the mountain range grew in height,
and furnish a living example from which to determine the part that ice streams
play in mountain sculpture.

APPENDIX A.

OFFICIAL INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING THE
EXPEDITION.

In order to make the records of the St. Elias expedition complete, copies of the
instructions under which the work was carried out are appended:

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR,
UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, GEOLOGIC BRANCH,
Washington, D. C., May 28, 1890.

Mr. I. C. RUSSELL, Geologist.

SIR: You are hereby detailed to visit the St. Elias range of Alaska for work
of exploration, under the joint auspices of the National Geographic
Society and the United States Geological Survey. The Geological Survey
furnishes instruments and contributes the sum of $1,000 towards the
expenses of the expedition. The money devoted to this purpose is taken
from the appropriation for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1890, and the
manner of its expenditure must conform to that fact.

The Survey expects that you will give special attention to glaciers, to
their distribution, to the associated topographic types, to indications of

Page 283

the former extent of glaciation, and to types of subaërial sculpture under
special conditions of erosion, and that you will also bring back
information with reference to the age of the formations seen and the type
of structure of the range.

With the aid of Mr. Kerr, it is expected that you will secure definite
geographic information as to the belt of country traversed by you.

Very respectfully, G. K. GILBERT,
Chief Geologist.

Approved,
J. W. POWELL, Director.

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR,
UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, GEOLOGIC BRANCH,
Washington, D. C., May 28, 1890.

Mr. I. C. RUSSELL, Geologist.

SIR: You will proceed at the earliest practicable date to Tacoma,
Washington Territory, and thence by water to Sitka, Alaska, at which
point you will make special arrangements to visit the St. Elias range of
mountains and make geological examinations as per instructions
otherwise communicated. Mr. Mark B. Kerr, Disbursing Agent, will
report to you at Victoria, B. C., and accompany you on the expedition,
assisting you in the capacities of Disbursing Agent and Topographer. On
the completion of your work you will return to Washington, the route
being left to your discretion, to be determined by considerations which
cannot now be foreseen.

Very respectfully, G. K. GILBERT,
Chief Geologist.

Page 284

Approved,
J. W. POWELL, Director.

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR,
UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, GEOLOGIC BRANCH,
Washington, D. C., May 28, 1890.

Mr. MARK B. KERR, Disbursing Agent.

SIR: You are hereby detailed to assist Mr. I. C. Russell, Geologist, who
starts at once on an expedition to Alaska, under the joint auspices of the
National Geographic Society and the United States Geological Survey. It
is expected that you will immediately aid him in disbursement, and that
you will act during the exploratory part of the expedition as topographer.
Your duties will, however, not be limited to these special functions, but
you will be expected to perform any other duties he may assign to you,
and to labor in every way for the success of the expedition.

It is expected that you will be reappointed to the grade of topographer on
the United States Geological Survey on the 1st of July, 1890, and you
will please take the required oath of office before your departure.

The money remaining in your possession as Disbursing Agent includes
that needed to meet Mr. Russell's salary and your own, and also the sum
of $1,000, allotted from the funds of the Geographic Branch for expenses
of the expedition prior to June 30. This amount you will expend as
directed by Mr. Russell, and his authority and certificate will need to
accompany your vouchers in rendering account of the same.

Very respectfully, G. K. GILBERT,
Chief Geologist.

Approved,
J. W. POWELL, Director.

Page 285

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR,
UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, GEOLOGIC BRANCH,
Washington, D. C., May 28, 1890.

Mr. MARK B. KERR, Disbursing Agent.

SIR: You will proceed at once to San Francisco, California, and thence by
steamer or by rail and steamer to Sitka, Alaska. It is expected that you
will join Mr. I. C. Russell, Geologist, at Victoria, B. C., or at Sitka; and
you will report to him for further orders.

Very respectfully, G. K. GILBERT,
Chief Geologist.

Approved,
J. W. POWELL, Director.

Washington, D. C., May 29, 1890.

Mr. MARK B. KERR, Topographer.

SIR: You are hereby assigned to field-work in the vicinity of Mount St.
Elias, Alaska, in the party under charge of Mr. I. C. Russell. Upon the
receipt of these instructions you will please proceed without delay to the
field, and map upon a scale of four miles to an inch such territory in the
vicinity of Mount St. Elias, including that mountain, as the field season
will permit. The work should, if practicable, be controlled by
triangulation. Special attention in the course of your work should be
given to measuring the altitude of Mount St. Elias, and it should be
determined by triangulation and also, if practicable, by barometer in such
manner as to be conclusive.

Page 286

The topographic work should be controlled by triangulation. As many
positions on this coast are approximately known, including a number of
the prominent peaks, astronomical determinations of position will not be
necessary unless needed to supplement the triangulation.

The details of your outfitting and the management of the work will be left
to your own judgment.

Very respectfully, HENRY GANNETT,
Chief Topographer.

NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY.

Memorandum of Instructions to the Party sent out under the Direction of
Mr. I. C. Russell, assisted by Mr. Mark B. Kerr, to explore the Mount St.
Elias Region, Alaska, 1890.

The general object of the expedition is to make a geographic
reconnoissance of as large an area as practicable in the St. Elias range,
Alaska, including a study of its glacial phenomena, the preparation of a
map of the region explored, and the measurement of the height of Mount
St. Elias and other neighboring mountains. Observations should also be
made and information collected on other subjects of general scientific
interest as far as practicable.

The purpose of these instructions is mainly to suggest the lines of
investigation that give promise of valuable results, but it is not intended
that they shall limit the director of the expedition in the exercise of his
own discretion.

GARDINER G. HUBBARD, Chairman,
MARCUS BAKER,
WILLARD D. JOHNSON,
Committee.

Page 287

Washington, D. C., May 29, 1890.

APPENDIX B.

REPORT ON TOPOGRAPHIC WORK.

BY MARK B. KERR.

In addition to the ascent of Mount St. Elias, it was part of the original plan of
the expedition to make an accurate topographic map of the region explored. It
was not, however, for this purpose proposed to divide the party or to deviate
much from the most direct route to Mount St. Elias from Yakutat bay.
Triangulation of fair precision was provided for. Details were to be filled in by
approximate methods.

Field-work began June 20 by the careful measurement of a base-line, 3,850
feet in length, near the point of landing, on the northern shore of Yakutat bay.
Expansion was readily carried to the foot-hills, and several horizontal angles
were taken to an astronomical station of the United States Coast and Geodetic
Survey at Port Mulgrave. In the region of these initial triangles, work was
done from a central camp; and topographic details were fixed with
considerable precision by intersection and vertical angles.

After the departure of the expedition from the Base Line camp, an accident to
the transit made resort to an inferior instrument necessary, and, furthermore, as
the region traversed proved to be ill-adapted to, and the line of travel too direct
for, the proper development of a narrow belt of triangles, the anticipation of a
degree of precision in the triangulation which would give high value to the
determinations of position and altitude of the several peaks was not realized;
but topographic map work, showing the general features, altitudes and
location of the mountain ranges, valleys and glaciers, was extended over about
600 square miles.

Page 288

Within the approximate geometric control, stations were interpolated by the
three-point method, and minor locations were multiplied by intersection and
connected by sketch. The best meander possible under the circumstances was
carried forward on the line of travel by compass directions and estimates of
distance from time intervals. The work ceased August 22 with the
abandonment of the instruments in a snow-storm of four days' duration on the
eastern slope of Mount St. Elias.

The accompanying map (a reduction of which forms plate 8, page 75) shows
the ice-streams and peculiar mountain topography of a region heretofore
unvisited, and constitutes a considerable addition to the geography of Alaska.

APPENDIX C.

REPORT ON AURIFEROUS SANDS FROM YAKUTAT BAY.

BY J. STANLEY-BROWN.

Among the specimens obtained by Mr. I. C. Russell during the course of his
explorations on and about Mount St. Elias is a bottle of sand procured from
the beach on the extreme southern end of Khantaak island, Yakutat bay, and
characteristic of the shore material over a large area. This sand was turned
over to me for examination, and additional interest was given to its study by
the fact that it is from a comparatively uninvestigated region and possesses,
perhaps, economic value; for the sample is gold-bearing, and it is said that a
"color" can readily be obtained by "panning" at many points on the bay shore.

Macroscopically, the sand has the appearance of ordinary finely comminuted
beach material; but it differs in the uniformity of the size of its particles from
beach sand from Fort Monroe and Sullivan island, South Carolina, with which
it was compared. Its mineralogic constituents greatly surpass in variety those
of the sands referred to, but are markedly similar to those of gold-bearing sand

Page 289

from New Zealand. At least twelve minerals are present, with an unusual
predominance of one, as will be noted later. Through the mixture of white,
green, and black grains, a dull greenish-black color is given to the mass. The
roundness of fragments is such as usually results from water action, but it is
less than that which results from transportation by wind.

When put into a heavy liquid (Thoulet solution of a density of 3.1) in order to
determine the specific gravity of the constituents, it was found that the sand is
made up largely of the heavier materials, for the amount that floated was
trifling compared with that which quickly sank. Even the abundant quartz was
largely carried down by the weightier ingredients bound up within it, and only
a few water-clear fragments were left behind. This would seem to suggest that
the lighter minerals are lacking in the neighboring rocks, or else have been
carried to greater distances by the sorting power of the water.

Among the minerals recognized, gold is the most important, though relatively
not abundant. It occurs in flakes or flattened grains from a quarter to a half of
a millimeter in size. The particles are sufficiently numerous to be readily
selected from their associates by the aid of "panning" and a hand lens of good
magnifying power, and if distributed throughout the beach as plentifully as in
the sample would, under favorable conditions, pay for working. The flakes in
their rounded character show the effect of the agency which separated them
from their matrix; a separation so complete that no rock is found adhering to
the grains.

Magnetite is present in great abundance and in a finely divided state, the
largest grains not exceeding a millimeter in length. It forms by weight alone
15 or 20 per cent. of the entire mass, and when the latter is sifted through a
sieve of a hundred meshes to the inch it constitutes 44 per cent. of this fine
material. Crystallographic faces are rare, and though often marred, still
octahedrons (111, 1) of considerable perfection are found.

Garnet occurs in such profusion that a pink tint is given to a mass of selected
grains of uniform size, and its predominance may be considered the chief
physical characteristic of the sand.

Two species were noted: one is a brilliant wine-red variety, which, though not
nearly so numerous as its duller relative, occurs more frequently in crystals—
the trapezohedral faces (211, 2–2) predominating. The other garnet is readily

Page 290

distinguished by its lighter amethystine tint and its greater abundance.
Crystallographic faces are somewhat rare and invariably dodecahedral (110, i).
In the absence of chemical analyses, any statements as to the exact species to
which these garnets should be referred would be largely conjectural. Attention
is quickly drawn to the perfection of these minute garnets in their
crystallographic faces and outlines, and to their association with rounded
fragments of their own kind as well as of other minerals. Have these crystals
survived by reason of their hardness or by favoring conditions, or does their
preservation suggest the impotency of wave-action in the destruction of
minute bodies?

Among the black, heavy grains occur individuals which, except in shape and
non-magnetic character, resemble magnetite. On crushing between glass
slides, thin slivers are obtained which in transmitted light are green, and
which, from their cleavage, pleochroism, high index of refraction, small
extinction angle, and insolubility in acid, are readily recognized as hornblende.

Two groups of grains were noted which are distinguishable by slight variation
in color. Both are clear-yellowish green, but one is somewhat darker than the
other. The optical properties of both indicate pyroxene and possibly olivine.
Fortunately a fragment was obtained in the orthodiagonal zone nearly normal
to an optic axis which gave an axial figure of sufficient definiteness to indicate
its optically positive character. A number of grains were selected from
minerals of both colors and subjected to prolonged heating in hydrochloric
acid without decomposition, indicating that both minerals are pyroxene.

A few zircons, a fraction of a millimeter in size but perfect in form, were
found associated with others rounded on their solid angles and edges. The
crystals are of the common short form and bear the usual faces in a greater or
less degree of development. Pyramids of the first and second order alternate in
magnitude; pinacoid encroaches upon prism, and vice versa.

Quartz constitutes by far the largest proportion of the minerals, both in bulk
and in weight. It is always fragmental; sometimes water-clear, but chiefly
occurs in opaque grains of different colors. It is seldom free from material of a
higher specific gravity, and is often so tinted as to be almost indistinguishable
from magnetite, but readily bleaches in acid.

Page 291

Feldspar is sparingly present, and includes both monoclinic and triclinic
forms, whose crystallographic boundaries are invariably lacking.

Treatment of the sand with dilute acid produces effervescence, which is not
due to incrustations of sodium carbonate. By persistent search among particles
separated in a heavy solution, a few grains were discovered which, from their
complete solubility with effervescence in very dilute acid, as well as their
optical properties, left no doubt as to their being calcite.

The mica group has only one representative, biotite, and this occurs most
sparingly. Though much of the sand was examined, but few fragments were
found. Its foliated character renders it easily transported by water and explains
its absence from among the heavy minerals.

Shaly, slaty and schistose material forms the major part of the coarser grains.
Thin sections from the largest pieces plainly indicated hornblende schist.

A region of glaciers would seem to be favorable not only to the collection of
meteoric material, but also to the destruction of the country rocks, the setting
free of their mineralogic constituents in a comparatively fresh state, and their
transportation to the sea. It was hoped that this sand would yield some of the
rarer varieties of minerals, but tests for native iron, platinum, chromite, gneiss,
and the titaniferous minerals proved ineffectual. Titanium is present, but in
such small quantities that it could only be detected by means of hydrogen
peroxide. The use of acid supersulphate and the borotungstate of calcium test
of Lasaulx failed to reveal the presence of native iron.

It will be seen from the foregoing enumeration that the sand is made up of
grains of gold, magnetite, garnet, hornblende, pyroxene, zircon, quartz,
feldspar, calcite and mica, associated with fragments of a shaly, slaty and
schistose character. While the information at hand is hardly sufficient to
warrant much speculation concerning the rock masses of the interior, still there
is no doubt that the sand is derived from the destruction of metamorphic rocks.

Page 292

APPENDIX D.

REPORT ON FOSSIL PLANTS.

BY LESTER F. WARD.

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR,
UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY,
Washington, D. C., March 12, 1891.

Mr. I. C. RUSSELL, United States Geological Survey.

MY DEAR SIR: The following report upon the small collection of fossil
plants made by you at Pinnacle pass, near Mount St. Elias, Alaska, and
sent to this division for identification has been prepared by Professor F.
H. Knowlton, who gave the collection a careful study during my absence
in Florida. Previous to going away I had somewhat hastily examined the
specimens and seen that they consisted chiefly of the genus Salix, some
of them reminding me strongly of living species. I have no doubt that
Professor Knowlton's more thorough comparisons can be relied upon
with as much confidence as the nature of the collection will permit, and I
also agree with his conclusions.

"The collection consists of seven small hand specimens, upon which are
impressed no less than seventeen more or less completely preserved
dicotyledonous leaves.

"These specimens at first sight seem to represent six or eight species, but
after a careful study I think I am safe in reducing the number to four, as
several of the impressions have been nearly obliterated by prolonged
exposure and cannot be studied with much satisfaction.

"The four determinable species belong, without much doubt, to the genus
Salix. Number 1, of which there is but a single specimen, I have
identified with Salix californica, Lesquereux, from the auriferous gravel
deposits of the Sierra Nevada in California.38 The finer nervation of the
specimens from the auriferous gravels is not clearly shown in

Page 293

Lesquereux's figures, nor is it well preserved in the Mount St. Elias
specimens; but the size, outline, and primary nervation are identical.

"Number 2, of which there are six or eight specimens, may be compared
with Salix raeana, Heer,39 a species that was first described from
Greenland and was later detected by Lesquereux in a collection from
Cooks inlet, Alaska.40 The Mount St. Elias specimens are not very much
like the original figures of Heer, but are very similar, in outline at least, to
this species as figured by Lesquereux.41 They are also very similar to
some forms of the living S. rostrata, Richardson, with entire leaves. It is
clearly a willow, but closer identification must remain for more complete
material.

"Number 3, represented by four or five specimens, is broadly elliptical in
outline, and is also clearly a Salix. It is unlike any fossil form with which
I am familiar, but is very similar to the living S. nigricans, For., var.
rotundifolia, and to certain forms of S. silesiaca, Willd. The nervation is
very distinctly preserved, and has all the characters of a willow leaf.

"Number 4, represented by three or four very fine specimens, is a very
large leaf, measuring 13 cm. in length and 3½ cm. in width at the
broadest point. It may be compared with Salix macrophylla, Heer,42 but it
cannot be this species. It is also like some of the living forms of S. nigra,
Marsh., from which it differs in having perfectly entire margins.

"While it is manifestly impossible, on the basis of the above
identifications, to speak with confidence as to the age or formation
containing these leaves, it can hardly be older than the Miocene, and
from its strong resemblance to the present existing flora of Alaska it is
likely to be much younger." [F. H. Knowlton.]

Very sincerely yours, LESTER F. WARD.

38
Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., vol. VI, no. 2, 1878, p. 10, pl. i, figs. 18–21.

39
Flor. foss. Arct., vol. I, 1868, p. 102, pl. iv, figs. 11–13; pl. xlvii, fig. 11.

40
Proc. Nat. Mus., vol. V, 1882, p. 447.

Page 294

41
loc. cit., pl. viii, fig. 6.

32
Tert. Fl. Helv., vol. II, 1856, p. 29, pl. lxvii, fig. 4.

INDEX.

Admiralty bay, 56

Agassiz glacier, Ascent of, 147
— — named, 73

Age of St. Elias range, 175

Alpenstocks, Necessity for, 165

Alpine glaciers, 176, 180

Alton, Edmund, Contributions to exploration fund by, 75

Archangelica, Mention of, 89, 114

Atrevida (The), Mention of, 63

Arevida glacier, 92, 105

Auriferous sands, 196, 197, 198

Avalanches, 145, 155

Baie de Monti, 56
— named by La Pérouse, 60

Page 295

Baker, Marcus, Explorations by, 70, 72
— reference to bibliography by, 58

Base Line, Measurement of, 86

Bear, Meeting with, 94, 109

Belcher, Sir Edward, Explorations by, 68, 69

Bell, A. Graham, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Bell, Charles J., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Bering bay, Mention of, 56

Bering, Vitus, Explorations by, 58

Bien, Morris, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Birnie, Jr., Rogers, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Black glacier, Brief account of, 101, 104

Blossom island, Description of, 113, 122

Boursin, Henry, Mention of, 79

Broka, George, Explorations by, 73, 74

Camp hands, 166

Carpenter, Z. T., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Carroll, Captain James, 78

Cascade glacier named, 144

Page 296

Chaix hills named, 73

Chariot, The, Mention of, 140

Page 297

Chatham, Mention of, 66

Cherikof, Alexei, Explorations of, 58

Christie, J. H., Member of expedition, 76
— Work of, 82, 83, 84, 96, 103, 112, 113, 123, 162

Clover, Richardson, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Cook, Captain James, Explorations of, 58

Corwin (The) in Disenchantment bay, 100
— Return of, 163

Crevasses, 181, 182
— at Pinnacle pass, 130

Cross sound, visited by Vancouver's expedition, 67

Crumback, J. H., Member of expedition, 76
— Work of, 96, 103, 122, 125, 129, 131, 135, 137

Dagelet, M., Mention of, 60

Dall, W. H., Explorations by, 70, 72
— reference to bibliography by, 58

Dalton, John, glacier named for, 98
— mention of, 73

Definition of formations in St. Elias region, 167

Desengaño bay, named by Malaspina, 63

Digges' sound, named by Vancouver, 68

Page 298

Diller, J. S., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Dip at Pinnacle pass, 140

Discovery (The), Mention of, 66

Disenchantment bay, Canoe trip in, 96, 103
— — last view of, 163
— — mention of, 56
— — visited by Malaspina, 63, 64

Dixon, Captain George, Explorations of, 60, 62

De Monti bay, Arrival at, 79

Descubierta (The), Mention of, 63

Devil's club (Panax horridum), Mention of, 95, 115

Dobbins, J. W., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Dome pass, named, 146

Doney, L. S., Member of expedition, 76
— Work of, 85, 158, 159, 160, 162

Douglass, Captain, Explorations of, 62

Dry bay, Mention of, 55

Farenholt, Lieutenant Commander O. F., Commander of U. S. S. Pinta, 79

Faulted pebble from Pinnacle pass, 171

Faults, 83, 136
— Thrust, in Hitchcock range, 118

Page 299

Floral hills, brief account of, 105, 108
— pass, brief account of, 105, 108, 110

Formations of the St. Elias region, 167

Fossils at Pinnacle pass, 140
— description of Yakutat system, 172

Fossil plants, Report on, by Lester F. Ward, 199, 200

Gabbro on the Marvine glacier, 123

Galiano, Don Dionisio Alcala, Mention of, 63

Galiano glacier, Visit to, 89, 90

Gannett, Henry, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75
— Instructions from, 194

Geology of the St. Elias region, 167, 190, 191, 174

Geological Survey, Instructions from, 192, 193, 194

Gilbert, G. K., Instructions from, 192, 193

Glacial currents, 187
— river, best example of, 183
— streams, 183, 184

Glacier bay, mention of, 67

Glaciers in Disenchantment bay in 1792, 64, 65, 97
— — — — observed by Malaspina, 64, 65
— — — — — — Puget, 67, 68
— of the St. Elias region, 176

Page 300

— west of Icy bay, 187

Greely, A. W., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Guides, use of in ascending St. Elias, 166

Guyot glacier named, 73

Haenke, D. Tadeo, Haenke island named for, 65
— island, Condition of, when seen by Malaspina, 63, 64, 65, 97
— — visit to, 96, 103

Hayden, Dr. F. V., glacier named for, 108

Hayden, Everett, Contributions to exploration fund by, 75

Hayden glacier, Brief account of, 108, 110, 111

Hays, J. W., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Height and position of St. Elias, 189, 190

Hendriksen, Reverend Carl J., mention of, 80, 83

Hitchcock, Professor Edward, range named for, 112
— range, brief account of, 112
— — from Pinnacle pass, 133
— — structure of, 118

Hooper, Captain C. L., Navigation of Disenchantment bay, 56, 100

Hosmer, E. S., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75
— return of, 83
—, volunteer assistant, 76

Hubbard, Gardiner G., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Page 301

—, glacier named for, 99

Hubbard glacier, brief description of, 99

Icebergs, Formation of, 98, 99, 101, 102
— in Yakutat bay, description of, 87

Ice tunnels, 184

Instructions from Geological Survey, 192, 193, 194
— — National Geographic Society, 194

Irving, Professor R. D., Mountain named for, 144

Johnson, Willard D., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75
— exploration planned by, 75

Judd, J. G., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Jungen, Ensign C. W., Mention of, 81

Kerr, Mark B., assigned as an assistant, 75
— report on topographic work, 193

Khantaak island, village on, 79, 80

King, Harry, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Knapp, Hon. Lyman E., Mention of, 79

Knight island, scenery near, 83
— — named by Puget, 68

Knowlton, F. H., Report on fossil plants, 199, 200

Page 302

L'Astrolabe, Mention of, 58

La Boussole, Mention of, 58

Lake Castani, Named, 73

Lakelets on the glaciers, 119, 120

Lakes, Abandoned beds of, near Blossom island, 116

La Pérouse, J. F. S., Explorations of, 58, 60

Leach, Boynton, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Libbey, Professor William, explorations by, 72, 73

Lindsley, W. L., Member of expedition, 76
— Work of, 122, 131, 134, 135, 139, 144, 149, 150, 153, 157, 158, 164

Lituya bay, mention of, 55

Logan, Sir W. E., Mountain named for, 141

Lucia glacier, brief account of, 192
— — crossing of, 105, 106, 108, 109

Lynn canal, mention of, 78

Malaspina, Alejandro, Explorations of, 62, 66

Malaspina glacier, character of, 187
— —, described and named, 71, 72
— —, excursion on, 120, 121, 162
— —, from Blossom island, 118, 119

Page 303

— —, mention of, 56

Maldonado, reference to, 62, 63

Marvine, A. R., Glacier named for, 112

Marvine glacier, Account of, 112, 122, 124

McCarteney, C. M., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Mirage in Yakutat bay, 87

Moraines, 195
— medial, on the Marvine glacier, 123
— on the Malaspina glacier, 134
— near Yakutat bay, 191

Mount Augusta, avalanches on the sides of, 145
— elevation of, 117

Mount Bering, Height and condition of, 65

Mount Cook, Appearance of, 92
— named, 72
— rocks composing, 92

Mount Fairweather, height of, 69

Mount Logan, named, 141

Mount Malaspina, Elevation of, 117
— named, 72

Mount Newton, named, 146

Mount St. Elias (see St. Elias, Mount)

Page 304

Mount Vancouver, named, 72

Muir glacier, Visit to, 78, 79

Mulgrave, Lord, Port Mulgrave named for, 60

National Geographic Society, Instructions from, 194

Névé fields, 180, 181, 182

Newton glacier, Ascent of, 150

Newton, Henry, Mountain named for, 146

New York Times, Expedition of, 72, 73

Nordhoff, Charles, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Norris glacier, Mention of, 78

Nunatak in the Lucia glacier, 106

Oil stoves, Use of, 164

Orel, Mention of the, 70

Otkrytie, Mention of the, 69

Outfit necessary for Alaskan expeditions, 165

Panax horridum, 95, 115

Partridge, William, Member of expedition, 76
— Work of, 158, 159, 162

Page 305

Piedmont glaciers, characteristics of, 122, 176, 185, 186
— — example of, 120, 121
— type of glaciers, mention of, 57

Pimpluna rocks, mention of, 70, 187

Pinnacle pass cliffs, account of, 132, 137
— — —, height of, 137
— — —, view from, 132
— —, description of, 130, 132
— — named, 130
— system, description of rocks of, 167, 170
— — named, 131

Pinta, mention of the, 79, 81

Phipps, C. J., Port Mulgrave named for, 60

Plants on Blossom island, 114

Point Esperanza, Camp at, 82, 84, 85
— Glorious, named, 137
— Riou, Mention of, 69

Port Mulgrave, 56
— — named by Dixon, 60

Powell, J. W., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Powell, William B., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Puerto del Desengaño, Mention of, 56

Puget, Peter, Explorations of, 66, 68

Pyramid harbor, Mention of, 78

Page 306

Queen Charlotte, Mention of the, 60
—, voyage on the, 78, 79

Rations, 164

Report on sands from Yakutat bay by J. Stanley-Brown, 196, 197, 198

Rivers, Glacial, 183

Rope cliff, named, 149

Route (new), suggested, 163, 164

Russell, Israel C., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Salmon (and trout) fishing, 162

Sands, Auriferous from Yakutat bay, 196, 197, 198

Schwatka, Lieutenant Frederick, explorations by, 72, 73

Serpentine on the Marvine glacier, 123

Seton-Karr, H. W., explorations of, 72, 73

Seward glacier, crevasses on, 133, 179, 180
— — crossing of, 142
— — description of, 177, 178, 179

Seward, Hon. W. H., Glacier named for, 129

Sitka, arrival at, 79

Page 307

Snow crests, figures of, 143
— line, description of Alpine glaciers above, 180
— — — — — — below, 183

Snow line, elevation of, 92, 111
— on mountain crests, 182

Soundings in Disenchantment bay, 56

Stamy, Thomas, Member of expedition, 76
— Work of, 137, 139, 144, 150, 153, 157, 158, 160

Stanley-Brown, J., Report on sands from Yakutat bay, 196, 197, 198

St. Elias described by La Pérouse, 59, 60
—, discovery of, by Bering, 58
—, first full view of, 135
—, view of, 91, 92
—, height and position of, 189, 190
— — — — —, by Tebenkof, 69
— — — of, determined by La Pérouse, 60
— — — — — Malaspina, 64, 65, 66
— range, age of, 175
— —, character of peaks of, 175
— region, glaciers of, 176
— schist, description of rocks of, 167, 173
—, suggested new route to, 163, 164
— uplift, 190

Stein, Robert, translations by, 59, 64, 65, 66

Strait of Annan, 56

Structure, 174

Swiss guides in Alaskan exploration, 166

Page 308

Sulphur, Mention of the, 69

Taku glacier, Mention of, 78
— inlet, Visit to, 78

Tebenkof, Captain, Notes on Alaska by, 69, 70

Terrace on northern shore of Yakutat bay, 82, 85
— point, Brief account of, 106

Thompson, Gilbert, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Tide-water glaciers defined, 101

Topographic work, Report on, 195

Topham, Edwin, Explorations by, 73, 74

Topham, W. H., explorations by, 73, 74
— reference to map by, 177

Triangulation, Commencement of, 86

Tunnels in the ice, 184

Tyndall glacier, Named, 73

Tyndall, J., cited on marginal crevasses, 127

United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, explorations of, 70, 72

Vancouver, Captain George, Explorations by, 66, 68

Veratrum viride, Mention of, 114

Page 309

Ward, Lester F., Report on fossil plants, 199, 200

White, Thomas, Member of expedition, 76
—, Work of 158, 160

Willis, Baily, contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Williams, C. A., contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Williams, William, explorations by, 73, 74

Yakutat bay, Arrival at, 79
— —, Base camp on Western shore of, 86, 89
— —, Shores of described, 57
— —, Synonomy of, 56
— Indians, described by Dixon, 61
— system, Description of rocks of, 167
— — named, 131

Page 310

Page 311

Page 312

CONTENTS.

The Cartography and Observations of Bering's First Voyage; by A. W.
GREELY

Height and Position of Mount St. Elias; by ISRAEL C. RUSSELL

The Heart of Africa; by E. C. HORE

Report of Committee on Exploration in Alaska

Notes—La Carte de France, dite de l'Etat Major, par M. J. COLLET

Polar Regions

The Crossing of Tibet

Statistics of Railways in United States

Index to volume III

Title-page and Imprimatur of Board of Managers

Contents and Illustrations

Publications of the National Geographic Society

Proceedings of the National Geographic Society

Officers of the Society for 1892

Members of the Society

Page 313

VOL. III, PP. 205–230, PL. 21 JANUARY 28, 1892

THE

Page 314

NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE.

THE CARTOGRAPHY AND OBSERVATIONS

OF

BERING'S FIRST VOYAGE.
BY

GENERAL A. W. GREELY.

(Presented before the Society March 20, 1891.)

It was with no ordinary pleasure that the members of the National
Geographic Society listened to the critical review and admirable essay on
Bering's first expedition, 1725–1730, read before this Society, together with
a translation of Bering's report on the expedition in question, by one of our
learned and distinguished members, Professor William H. Dall. The subject
then under consideration is one of great interest, and this Society owes a debt
of gratitude to Professor Dall for his assiduous labor in collating and
translating the available data on this voyage, and must indorse the general
conclusions reached in a critical essay which is the result of careful,
conscientious research conjoined to much erudition. It is especially
fortunate, in view of the vagueness of Bering's report, that it should have

Page 315

been translated and reviewed by a traveler and investigator so thoroughly
familiar with the topography of Bering strait and the adjacent region.

It may appear somewhat presumptuous for the present writer to further dwell
on some points of subordinate importance, even with the view of
supplementing the investigations of Professor Dall; but he is encouraged to
the effort by the admirable spirit in which that gentleman works, which is so
clearly indicated in his own words: "I am well aware this paper cannot be
regarded as a finality, but as a contribution to the geographical history of
North America it will not be without its value." This spirit encourages every
one to contribute his mite to elucidate the history of this interesting and ill-
known period.

The supplementary remarks now presented mainly relate to two points: first,
the cartographic reproduction of Bering's discoveries; second, the alleged
observations of lunar eclipses in Kamshatka by Bering and his lieutenants in
1728–'29.

In attempting to add to Professor Dall's essay or to elucidate some points, it
is but natural to felicitate one's self that chance has put in one's way rare data
in the shape of text and map. Nevertheless, much difficulty has been
experienced in efforts to consult publications and charts bearing on this
subject, as supplementary to the data in the writer's own library. Fortunately,
among his personal books and maps are the following, which have escaped
the critical, if not casual, observation of Professor Dall:

1. The original Hague1 edition of Père du Halde, which Dall was unable to
consult; it is entitled "Description Géographique, Historique, Chronologique,
Politique, et Physique de l'Empire et de la Tartarie Chinoise," etc. 4 vols., 4°:
à la Haye, 1736.
1
The first edition, in French, was published at Paris, 4 vols., folio, 1735.

2. De l'Isle's scattered essays, entitled "Mémoires pour servir à l'histoire et au
progres de l'Astronomie, de la Géographie, et de la Physique, etc., etc.: à St.
Petersbourg, de l'imprimeris de l'Académie des Sciences. MDCCXXXVIII
[1738]."

Page 316

3. "Atlas Russien: contenant une Carte Générale et dix-neuf Cartes
particulieres de tout l'Empire de Russie et des Pays limitrophes construites
conformément aux règles de la Geographie et aux dernières Observations.
Par l'Académie Impériale des Sciences de St. Petersbourg. St. Petersbourg,
1745."

This was the first atlas published in Russia in the map department
established by order of Peter the Great in the Academy of Sciences of St.
Petersburg. It includes a general map of the Russian Empire and nineteen
maps of provinces.

4. "Carte de la Sibérie et des Pays voisins. Pour servir a Histoire générale
des Voyages par le S. Bellin, Ing. de la Marine," two parts, undated, but to
which E. Dufosse, of Paris, assigns the date of 1749. The atlas for this work
was originally published by Abbe Prevost at Paris, 1747, et seq., the charts
being engraved by Bellin.

This chart appears on casual inspection to be more accurate than either that
of d'Anville or of de l'Isle, or of the Russian atlas.

5. The very interesting and valuable map of J. N. de l'Isle, Paris, 1752
(without, however, the accompanying memoir).

I do not think the original map has ever fallen under the notice of Professor
Dall, although a garbled reproduction of it is mentioned in his review as
follows:

"A chart which deserves notice, though almost wholly fictitious, being chiefly devoted to the
spurious discoveries of the alleged Admiral de Fonte, was issued by J. N. de l'Isle with the
concurrence of M. P. Bauche or at his suggestion. It appeared at Paris in 1752, and was copied
for Jeffery's second edition of voyages from Asia to America in 1764. I do not know if this copy
appeared in the first edition, but presume it did."

As the original of de l'Isle's chart (1752) is here exhibited to-night, it is
evident that Jeffery was careless, and that the map, which I infer Dall has
never seen, is really more valuable than is set forth in his address; otherwise
so critical an observer as Dall would not have said: "I suspect this (referring
to d'Anville's map of 1753, with Bering island thereon) is the first

Page 317

publication of a cartographic kind on which Bering island is laid down, as
the map of the Imperial Academy of Sciences, embodying the geographical
results of Bering's voyage to the coast of America, was not engraved until a
year later, while de l'Isle's of 1752 does not contain them." You will see that
this is an error, for the "I(sle) de Beering" is plainly inscribed on the map.
(This map has been reproduced by photolithography and forms the
accompanying plate 21.)

Dall further describes the copy of this map in the following terms:

"Connected with America and north of the Chukchi peninsula is land with an island off it
corresponding not badly to Wrangell and Herald islands and marked 'Discovered in 1722.' It is
possible that this land is a hypothetical compound of the land reported by the Chukchis east of
the strait with that which they knew to be visible in clear weather from Cape Yakan, more or
less confused accounts of which had long been current among persons interested in these
regions."

Page 318

The legend on the original chart indicates that Dall's surmise is correct, for
the copy is not only abbreviated, but is in error as to date. On the original it
runs: "Grande Terre découverte en 1723 au s'enfeuit les Tzutzy l'orsqu'ils
sont poursuivis par les Russes que ne les ont pas encore soumis."

There is another important legend on a very large imaginary island about
five degrees of longitude to the east of Bering island. On the northern side of
this land the text runs thus: "Terres dont le Capitaine Beering's à en des
indices dans son premier voyages en 1728." On the southern edge is the
legend: "Cotes vues par Mrs. Tchirikow et de l'Isle en Septembre 1741."
Immediately south of the land are two route tracks, with these legends:
"Route du Kamtschatka a l'Amerique par le Capitaine Tchirikow et Mr. de
l'Isle de la Croyere en Juin et Juillet, 1741," "Retour de l'Amerique au
Kamtschatka en Aout et Septembre 1741." The latter route track touches an
indentation in the southwestern coast, as though the vessel had entered the
bay, which has five mountains in the background.

The legend—"Terres vues par les Russes en 1741 ou le Capitaine Tchirikow
perdit sa Chaloupe armée de 10 hommes"—is likewise of interest, as
controverting the statement that "De l'Isle's (chart) of 1752 does not contain
... the geographical results of Bering's voyage to the coast of America." It
embodies a large part, but not all, of the discoveries.

6. Buache's memoir and maps entitled: "Considerations geographiques et
physiques sur les Nouvelles Decouvertes au Nord de la Grande Mer,
appellee vulgairement la Mer du Sud; avec des Cartes qui y sont relatives.
Par Philippe Buache, Premier Geographe," etc. A Paris M.DCC.LIII [1753],
4°, 158 pp. With my copy there is a separate pamphlet, consisting of 13
maps, folio, with a preface and index, quarto. The preface (4°, two leaves
unpaged) is entitled: "Exposé des Découvertes au Nord de la Grande Mer,
etc., etc. Presenté au Roy le 2. Septembre 1753, par Philippe Buache, etc."
The index (4°, 4 pp.) runs: "Liste des Cartes concernant les Nouvelles
Découvertes au Nord de la Grande Mer, &c. Par Philippe Buache, &c.
Janvier, 1755."

These thirteen maps are very interesting. The first and second charts bear
particularly on the subject of this paper. The first is entitled: "Carte des
Nouvelles Découvertes entre la partie Orient'le de l'Asie et l'Occid'le de

Page 319

l'Amerique avec des Vues sur la Gr'de Terre reconnue par les Russes en 1741
&c., &c. Dressée par Philippe Buache. Presentée a l'Acad. des Sciences le 9.
Aout 1752 et approuvée dans son Assemblée du 6. Septembre suivant."

This map, somewhat fuller in details than that of de l'Isle, shows:
"Découvertes des Russes depuis 20 ans." There are route tracks of the first
expedition marked: "Route des Russes au N.E. et au N. en 1728 et 1731,"
and "Retour en 1731." Two route tracks of the later voyage have the legends:
"Route de Kamtchatka a l'Amerique en 1741. Retour des Russes au
Kamtchatka." Other legends are as follows: "Isle Beering;" "Detroit du
Nord" (Bering strait); "Terre déc. en 1723 par les Russes, ou Isle dont le P.
Avril a parle" (large land near Wrangell island); "Terres reconnues par les
Russes" (American coast in latitude 56 N.); "Côtes vues par les Russes en
1741; Port ou les Russes ont aborde" (fictitious and extensive land east of
Bering island, on which are also the following: "Puchochotskes selon
Strahlenberg," and "Terre habitée, ou Presqu' Isle, que je suppose joindre les
découvertes des Russes avec celles de l'Am'l de Fonte").

The second map, "Carte des Découv'tes de l'Am'al de Fonte avec les Terres
vuës et reconnues par les Russes, par Philippe Buache," has other pertinent
and interesting legends. In Bering strait appears: "Beering a trouvé au N. et a
l'E. de ce parage que la Mer y etoit libre," and immediately eastward on the
American coast below the parallel of the arctic circle: "Terre découv. en
1731, et ou les Russes ont rencontré un home qui s'est dit habitant d'un gr'd
Continent." On the American coast from 55° to 57° north latitude: "Terres
déc. en Juill., 1741, et où les Russes ont laisse 10 homes qu' ils n' ont pu
rejoindre." Over "Terre habitée," a large land just east of Bering island: "Le
Capitaine Beering a trouvé dans ce parage de 50 à 60 deg. les Indices d'une
Côte et une gr. Riv. ou il a envoye quelqu's homes qui ne sont revenus."

It is evident that these maps must have been actually published as early as
September 2, 1753, the date on which was presented the "Exposé des
Découvertes, etc., au Roy," but the charts give no further indication than the
legend: "Publiée sous le privilege de l'Acad. R'le. des Sc. du 6 Sept'bre,
1752: à Paris." The actual date of issue may or may not have been earlier
than the map of de l'Isle of September 9, 1752.

Page 320

7. (Possibly most important of all) a letter of an officer of the Russian Navy.
This appeared first in Russian, presumably printed at St. Petersburg in 1752
or 1753; the original Russian I have not seen. It was translated, however,
into French and printed at Berlin (not dated) in 1753, under the following
title: "Lettre d'un officier de la Marine Russienne. A un Seigneur de la Cour
concernant la carte des nouvelles découvertes au nord de la mer du Sud et le
mémoire qui y sert d'explication. Publiée par M. de l'Isle, à Paris en 1752.
Traduit de l'Original Russe, à Berlin, chez Haude et Sperer, Libraires de la
Cour et de l'Academie Royale (1753)."

This edition forms part of my library, and is the only copy which I know of
in the United States. It is not to be found in the Library of Congress, the
Astor Library, the Boston Athenæum, or the Boston Public Library. It is not
even in the Royal Library at St. Petersburg, but, as might be anticipated, is in
the British Museum. I find it nowhere catalogued in any bibliography of
arctic or subarctic works. The French edition was inserted, with some
changes, it is believed, in the eighteenth volume of the Nouvelle
Bibliotheque Germanique.

8. "A letter from a Russian Sea-Officer to a Person of Distinction at the
Court of St. Petersburg, containing Remarks on Mr. de l'Isle's Chart and
Memoir relative to the New Discoveries North and East from Kamtschatka,
together with some Observations on that Letter by Arthur Dobbs, Governor
of East Carolina, to which is added Mr. de l'Isle's Explanatory Memoir on his
Chart." 8vo, 85 pp., London, 1754.

The "Arthur Dobbs" who published this edition, and who possibly was the
translator thereof, is well known as the energetic promoter of the discovery
of the "northwest passage," and was personally interested in discovery
voyages to Hudson bay. The explanatory memoir of de l'Isle's chart is a
translation of the memoir previously mentioned as belonging to the map of
1752, which memoir I have not been able to consult in the original French. It
may be added that Dobbs' reproduction of the "Letter from a Russian naval
officer" is not accurate, the translation in places being so carelessly or
indifferently made that the text cannot be relied on for critical purposes.

This English translation is to be found neither in the Library of Congress, the
Boston Public Library, the Boston Athenæum, nor in the Library of the

Page 321

American Geographic Society. It is, however, in the Astor Library, and a
second copy at one time belonged to the library of Mr. J. C. Brevoort.

9. "Mappe Monde. Carte Universelle de la Terre. Par J. B. Nolin,
Geographe." 1755, 20¼ x 27 inches. On this appear the legends: "I. de
Beering; Detroit de Nord; Terres découvertes par les Ruses [sic] en 1741;
Terres veues en 1741."

It is quite possible that this is the first map of the world on which Bering
island was charted.

10. John Christopher Adelung's very interesting history of sea voyages for
the discovery of a "northeast passage," which was published in quarto form
under the following title: "Geschichte der Schiffahrten und Versuche welche
zur Entdeckung des Nordöstlichen Weges nach Japan und China von
verschiedenen Nationen unternommen worden. Zum Behufe der
Erdbeschreibung und Naturgeschichte dieser Gegenden entworfen von
Johann Christoph Adelung, Herzoglich Sachsichen Rath Halle bey Johann
Justinus Gebauer, 1768."

11. Notice des Ouvrages de M. d'Anville. 8°, Paris, An. X [1802], 120 pp.
By Barbic du Bocage.

In addition to these and other works from my own collection, I have
consulted at the library of the United States Naval Observatory, in this city,
"Histoire de l'Academie Royale des Sciences, Année 1750," Paris, 1754, and
the same, "Année 1754," Paris, 1757, which contain articles on de l'Isle's
manuscript maps of 1731 and 1752, the latter being substantially identical
with the published map of 1752.

From Dall's review we learn that Lauridsen is responsible for the statement
that the discoveries of Bering in his first voyage were shown on a chart made
at Moscow in 1731, but no authority is given as to the cartographer. Later I
shall adduce evidence to confirm Dall's opinion that the Moscow map was
merely a copy, such as were distributed to personages of importance or to
those connected with the expedition. It is further susceptible of, as I think,

Page 322

tolerably satisfactory proof that the outlines of Kamshatka, with fairly
correct meridians of longitude, were made public in a chart by de l'Isle not in
1731, but the year following, 1732, and it is likely that the lost map of that
year was substantially reproduced in the chart of 1752, which I have the
pleasure of now presenting for your examination.

De l'Isle presented this map to the Academy of Sciences of Paris on April 8,
1750. The circumstances connected with the presentation have been drawn
from the official records of the Royal Academy of Sciences, and are as
follows:2

Cette année (1750) M. de l'Isle lut à l'assemblee publique de l'Acadèmie, un Mémoire sur les
Nouvelles Découvertes au nord de la mer du Sud; et presenta en meme temps une Carte que M.
Buache avoit dressée sur ses Mémoires, et qui representoit ces Découvertes avec toute la partie
du Globe terrestre, à laquelle elles appartiennent. Ces Ouvrages, alors manuscrit, furent depuis
publiés en 1752, M. Buache presenta dans cette meme année la première partie de ses
Considérations géographiques sur le meme sujet, avec les Cartes qui y étoient relatives.3

"Muni de ces premières connoissances [referring to the discoveries of 1729–1739] M. de l'Isle
traça une carte qui representoit l'extremite orientale de l'Asie, avec la partie opposée de
l'Amerique septentrionale qui y répond, afin de faire voir aisément ce qui restoit à découvrir, et
il dressa un Mémoire dans lequel il exposoit la manière qu'il jugeoit la plus avantageuse pour
faire ces découvertes."4

"Mais les vaisseaux Russes qui avoient été envoyés pour les découvertes dont nous venous de
parler (1731–1741), n'étant pas encore revenus lorsqu'elle lui fut envoyé il extremit l'examen
après son retour en France, qui étoit assez prochain. A son arrivée, il communiqua ses vues et
cette relation a M. Buache; celui-ci, qui par la," etc., etc.5

"Cette Mémoire [de l'Isle, 1750] étoit accompagnée d'une carte qui étoit comme l'esquisse du
système géographique de M. de l'Isle sur cette partie."6

2
Extracts from Histoire de l'Acadèmie Royale des Sciences, Année MDCCL (1750), 4°, Paris,
1754; and the same, Année 1753, 4°, Paris, 1757.

3
Loc. cit., "Année MDCCL," p. 142.

4
Ibid., p. 151.

Page 323

5
Ibid., p. 145.

6
Loc. cit., "Année 1753," p. 263.

It has been pointed out by several authorities that some of M. de l'Isle's
statements in his memoir of 1752 are to be received with caution, especially
his elaborate endeavors to impress the Paris Academy with the belief that the
discoveries of Bering subsequent to the first voyage were the result of his
(de l'Isle's) own carefully considered instructions. In this connection
Adelung says:

"De l'Isle, in his Explication de la carte des nouvelles découvertes au Nord [1752], traces out
his proposed route quite differently [referring to de l'Isle's previous statements in his report to
the St. Petersburg Academy in 1732], somewhat as if it had been outlined in view of
accomplished facts."

It behooves us, then, to inquire carefully into the authenticity of the alleged
map of de l'Isle of 1731, since if he antedated his opinions as to the route he
might also have antedated his map. Fortunately we do not have to depend
only on de l'Isle's own statement, either in 1750 before the Academy of
Sciences at Paris, or as published in 1738 at St. Petersburg and printed at the
printing office of the Royal Academy; for we also have extraneous and
convincing evidence, even from sources critically hostile to the French
astronomer.

M. de l'Isle, in his Mémoires sur les Nouvelles découvertes au Nord de la
mer du Sud, Paris, 1752, says:

"After I had, near twenty years ago, got these first informations of the longitude of Kamschatka
by means of Captain Bering's map and journal, I made use of them in constructing the map,
representing the eastern extremity of Asia, with the opposite coast of North America, in order to
show at once what still remains for discovery between two large parts of the world.

"This map I had the honor of presenting to the Empress Anne and the Senate, in order to
animate the Russians to undertake these discoveries, and it took effect, this princess ordering a
second voyage to be made according to the plan which I had drawn up for it."

"Two maps," he adds, were presented to the Academy in Paris, "one being a
copy of the map which I had drawn at St. Petersburg, 1731, on Captain

Page 324

Bering's first voyage, and had the honor of presenting to the Empress Anne
and the Senate, with a manuscript memoir explaining its use and
construction." The other map (from which the lithograph before you was
lately reproduced) was, according to de l'Isle, only changed by adding the
later discoveries of Bering and his lieutenants.

De l'Isle further says of this chart:

"The second manuscript map which I laid before the Academy at Paris was in all respects like
the former, only with the advantages of the new discoveries made since 1731."

Ph. Buache, the French geographer, made for de l'Isle a reduced copy of the
second chart, and it is supposed that the map before you is a substantial
reproduction of that copy.

In the preface to de l'Isle's scattered essays, 1738, St. Petersburg, page 2, we
find:

"Aiant comparé la situation du Kamschatka et des pais voisins, avec celle de la Chine, du
roiaume de Corée, du Japon, et de la terre d'Yeco, qui m'étoit connue d'ailleurs, je me suis fait
un sistème, & j'ai dressé l'an 1731, une carte de cette extremité orientale de l'Asie. J'ai marque
aussi sur cette carte les dernières terres connues de l'Amerique, les plus voisines de cette partie
septentrionale de l'Asie, afin de faire voir ce qui restoit encore d'inconnu entre-deux. On
trouvera dans ce recueil une reduction de cette carte, avec le Mémoire que j'ai dressé dans ce
temsla, & lu a l'Academie, dans lequel je rends raison de la construction de cette carte."

Only one volume of de l'Isle's essays appeared, so that the map and memoir
promised in the introduction were never, so far as can be learned, published
in their original form. The statements made by de l'Isle, however, unless
definitely refuted, should be given full credit, seeing that the work was
published by the Academy of Sciences at St. Petersburg, to which the map
and memoir were presented, as is claimed, only seven years earlier. A doubt
does, however, exist as to the date of the map made by de l'Isle. On this point
Adelung, in his "History of Northeastern Voyages," Halle, 1768, page 569,
evidently quoting from Müller, says:

"On the 17th of April, 1732, the order was, therefore, sent from the privy Cabinet to the Senate,
which thereupon inquired of the Academy of Sciences of St. Petersburg what and how much

Page 325

had as yet been found out about Kamschatka, the surrounding countries and waters. The
Academy confided the making of the report to Mr. Delisle, who prepared a chart upon which
Kamschatka, Jeso, according to the description of the crew upon the Castricom, the Staten
island, Company island, and the coast of Gama were designated. This chart was supplemented
by a memoir in which he described the discoveries already made and suggested various routes
for making new ones. He expressed himself in regard to those routes in the following manner:
'If one have attained the northern boundary of Asia, and at the same time the eastern limits, as
far as Captain Bering went on his first voyage, one cannot fail to arrive in America, and might
even choose the route, either northeast or southeast, whichever he prefers, as he would have, at
most, only 600 miles to pass over. 2. Or, without venturing so far, it would perhaps be better
and more comfortable to sail from the east coast of Kamschatka, go directly east, to look for the
neighboring country which Bering found traces of in his first voyage. 3. Finally, he thought that
if they should sail southeast from Kamschatka they would perhaps more speedily and more
certainly discover the country seen by Juan de Gama.'"

Can the inconsistency between the dates, as given by Müller and Adelung on
the one hand, and by de l'Isle on the other, be reconciled, or is it apparent
rather than real? As Bering, according to the Russian marine officer
(Waxel?) returned to St. Petersburg on March 1, 1730, it is reasonable to
suppose that de l'Isle, whose duties were those of a cartographer, had
finished within the next year and a half his reproduction of Bering's working
chart. The fact that the order of inquiry about the results of the voyage did
not leave the privy council until April 17, 1732, does not necessarily indicate
that the map at least, if not the memoir, was not already prepared, even if not
in possession of the Academy of Sciences. It appears probable that the map
may have been drawn by de l'Isle in 1731, but it is quite certain that it was
not made public until 1732.

Lauridsen speaks of a map in Moscow in 1731, and, as it is evident from
"Lettre d'un" that there was no difficulty in persons of influence procuring
copies from the Senate, it is likely that the Moscow chart was a copy of the
map of de l'Isle, and that the date of 1731 is correct; but this theory must rest
on Lauridsen producing evidence that such a map existed in Moscow in
1731.

The Russian officer speaks with authority as to the map of 1732.
Commenting on de l'Isle's account of the circumstances under which he
compiled the map of 1732, he continues as follows:

Page 326

"The Empress Anne having directed her Senate to give instructions to M. Bering for the second
voyage, that body believed that it could not act with success unless it obtained from the
Academy the fullest information relative to the situation of the lands and seas to be traversed.
Therefore the Academy was so ordered by the Senate, which enjoined on M. de l'Isle the
construction of the map of which I speak, and, for a clearer understanding, an explanatory
memoir; which being done, both map and memoir were presented to the Academy by the
Senate. Consequently, there is no reason to doubt that, far from exciting the Russians to new
discoveries, far from being the cause of Bering's second voyage, M. de l'Isle only worked under
specific orders. It is quite another question whether or not the memoir contributed to the success
of the expedition, which I will discuss later. However that may be, the Senate gave a copy of it,
as well as of the map, to M. Bering. I took a second copy of the memoir, which enabled me to
compare it with what M. de l'Isle has now said to us of it in his later memoir of Paris."

These and other statements confirm those of de l'Isle as to the date of the
map, in which year d'Anville engraved it (1732, or 1731 at the earliest), and
likewise indicate that copies of both map and memoir were obtainable
without great difficulty.

An interesting note as to the authenticity and origin of the chart of d'Anville,
1737, appears in the narrative of Adelung, who speaks with a certain air of
authority. He says:

"These Beering maps were, after the captain's return, sent from Russia to the King of Poland,
who presented them to Mr. du Halde or, rather, to Mr. d'Anville, who made the charts for his
work. Du Halde is therefore very correctly informed when he, in the Mémoires de Trevoux (737
pages, 2,389 f.) considers these charts questionable and imagines that they were merely made
by d'Anville from Beering's journal."

But further evidence from an unquestionable source is available as to date.
The charts in du Halde's "China" were engraved between the years 1729 and
1734, and all but the general maps were completed prior to 1733. The date
1732 is assigned by d'Anville's colleague to the map of Bering's journey. Of
these maps it is further said:

"They form what is commonly known as d'Anville's Atlas of China. Nevertheless this
geographer did not participate equally in the production of all. The detailed maps (of which the
Bering map is one) were furnished by the Jesuits and he only supervised the engraving, but the
general charts were entirely the work of d'Anville, who reconstructed and amplified them from

Page 327

all possible sources. They were reproduced at Hague under the title 'New Atlas of China,' etc.,
by M. d'Anville."

These statements of d'Anville's colleague, M. Barbic du Bocage, are thus
verified by du Halde, page lxix:

"Pour les Cartes Générales, nous y avons peu touché & celle du Voyage du Capitaine Beerings
paroit sans le moindre changement."

In the Russian atlas, 1745, the explanatory text regarding map 19, whereon
appears the extreme northeastern coast of Siberia and the greater part of
Kamshatka, runs as follows:

"We have determined the location of these provinces in part by astronomical observations
which have been made there, and in part upon certain geographical and hydrographic maps
which have been transmitted to us."

So far as Kamshatka and the Bering strait regions go, it is reasonable to
believe that this chart, since it was published by the Royal Academy of
Sciences, is substantially a reproduction of the map transmitted to the
Academy by de l'Isle in 1732, especially as this geographer was employed
for about thirteen years in amassing data for the atlas in question.

The writer has very carefully compared the chart of Kamshatka and
adjoining regions as published in d'Anville's atlas of 1736, in the Russian
atlas of 1745, and in the de l'Isle chart of 1752. From comparisons he is led
to believe that these maps have substantially the same basis—that is, the
chart prepared by de l'Isle in 1732 for the Academy of Sciences, St.
Petersburg. In this connection the criticism of the Russian officer is
significant. He says: "I will now finish with a general observation about the
part of Siberia that we see on M. de l'Isle's chart (1752). It is simply a copy
of the Russian atlas (1745), without even corrections of the errors of drawing
and writing which have crept into that work." Elsewhere he adds: "We can
correct the error of M. de l'Isle, who places Bering island at 54 degrees, only
a short distance from Avatscha, whereas it is on the 56th parallel, 60 miles
off Avatscha and 40 Dutch miles from the mouth of the Kamschatka river."

Page 328

It is worthy of note that on Bellin's map of 1749(?) Bering island is crossed
by the 56th parallel of latitude, and that along the southern edge of the Arctic
ocean is a route track, marked "Voyage fait par Mer en 1648 par 3 vaisseaux
Russiens dont un est parvenu a la Kamtschatka." On de l'Isle's chart of 1752
also appears the route of 1648, but Bering island is in latitude 54°. As to the
position of Bering isle, the truth, as the Wise Man tells us is oft the case,
abides between the two, as the 55th parallel intersects the land in question.
At Cape Shelagskoi, d'Anville, 1737, the Russian atlas of 1745 and the de
l'Isle of 1752 agree in charting four islands northeast of the cape instead of
two islands to the west. This indicates a common origin to the charts, and
where else can it be ascribed than to the de l'Isle map of 1732? The Russian
officer, however, gives a clue as to the date when work on the map was
commenced. He says:

"At that time I visited M. de l'Isle. I was a witness of his geographical labors as far as they had
new discoveries for their object. I acted as interpreter to M. Bering in the conversations which
he had with him; and I can assert positively that when M. de l'Isle began that chart the second
expedition was already ordered, and Captain Bering, knowing what was still wanting to his
discoveries, offered to continue them and his lieutenants with him, and they received promotion
in consequence."

Lauridsen says:

"On January 5, 1732, the Senate gave him leave of absence to go to St. Petersburg.... Almost
simultaneously he was promoted, in regular succession, to the position of captain-commander
in the Russian fleet, the next position below that of rear-admiral."

This indicates that the expedition was decided on at least as early as January
5, 1732; possibly earlier. Fortunately we are not left to inference, for
elsewhere the Russian officer says:

"Mr. de l'Isle 'throws discredit on our discoveries by leaving on his chart the fictitious land of
Gama, which, in order to avoid conflicting with our accounts, he places (in 1752) a little more
to the west and south than he did on his chart of 1732.'"

This definitely fixes the year in which de l'Isle presented the map to the
Senate.

Page 329

We learn, however, from Lauridsen that "as early as April 17 (1732) the
Empress ordered that Bering's proposition should be executed, and charged
the Senate to take the necessary steps for that purpose.... On May 2 it [i.e.,
the Senate] promulgated two ukases, in which it declared the objects of the
expedition and sought to indicate the necessary means." It is very
improbable that, in the case of so dilatory a man as de l'Isle, this chart could
have been elaborated and drawn, the memoir written, a report made by the
Academy to the Senate, and action be taken in the fifteen days which elapsed
between the order for the chart and Bering's instructions. It is possible that
the chart was drawn at the end of 1731, and that de l'Isle, for obvious
reasons, gave it the earliest possible date.

In giving an account of Bering's provisions, as Dall says, every historian has
followed a mutilated, if not garbled, paragraph from Bering's original report.
The excerpts from Brooke's translation of du Halde, which was followed in
Campbell's edition of Harris' Voyages, are as follows:

"The provisions consisted of carrots for want of corn [= grain or wheat], the fat of fish, uncured,
served instead of butter, and salt fish supplied the place of all other meats."

"Fish oil was his butter and dried fish his beef and pork. Salt he was obliged to get from the sea;
... he distilled spirits from 'sweet straw.'"

It appears from Bering's own journal, as well as from du Halde's account,
that in 1727 Bering ordered one of his officers to endeavor to "deliver to the
command at Kamschatka some part of the provisions, iron, and tar." Bering
himself said that he was obliged to use tar made from the native spruce,
"since the tar which we should have brought with us had not arrived." This is
confirmed by the additional note in du Halde, which says that the provisions,
iron, pitch, and tar did not arrive till 1728, conveying the inference that it
came too late to be of service. Bering appears to have had, on July 3, 1727,
2,300 poods of flour, equal to about 8,300 pounds, which would be less than
a year's supply for his entire party. I cannot agree with Dall that Bering had
plenty of flour or meal and meat.

I have said "From Bering's own report," because it seems incredible that du
Halde did not have a transcript of Bering's report, since his narrative (du

Page 330

Halde's) follows almost word for word Dall's translation. It is not surprising
that different transcripts should differ slightly on unimportant matters.

However this may be, it is evident that Brooke's translation of du Halde is
careless. For instance, in Brooke's translation (edition London, 1736) of du
Halde, on page 430, the number of Bering's party should be 33 instead of 30,
and on page 440, where the voyage from Ochotsk to Takutski is given as
from July 23 to October 2, the first-named date should be July 29.

Dall doubts that "carrots" were of Bering's provisions. Brooke omits the
italicized words of du Halde's narrative (p. 567, la Haye, 1736): "Les
provisions consistoient en carottes et en racines." As indicated by context,
the roots were radishes and turnips. The word "carottes" is explained by a
passage in Grieve's Kamshatka as follows: "The morkovai poushki, or carrot
bunches, are so called because they are like carrots in their leaf as well as in
taste. They likewise eat this green in the spring, but they oftener sour it like
sour crout or make a liquor with it." Doubtless Bering took these "carrot
bunches" with him.

Another question which has engaged my attention is that concerning the
lunar eclipses which Bering or his party is said to have observed in the
winter 1728–'9. Dall says: "In none of the published reports of the
expedition is any mention made by Bering or his officers of the occurrence
or observation of an eclipse.... However, Middendorf states (Sib. Reise, iv. I,
p. 56) that Bering and his lieutenants in the years 1728 and 1729 observed in
Kamtschatka two eclipses of the moon, by which they corrected the
longitude. He gives," says Dall, "no authority for this statement, and it is
probable that an eclipse observed at Ilimsk, in middle Siberia, by Chirikoff is
thus erroneously referred to." Mr. Marcus Baker, in a paper appended to
Dall's account, makes it evident that such eclipses, if any, were those of
February 25 (local calendar), 1728, or February 24, 1729.

My own investigations confirm the statements of Middendorf, and in support
of this I refer to de l'Isle and to the author of the "Letter." In this connection,
however, we have the clear and definite statements of de l'Isle, both in his
essays of 1738 at St. Petersburg and his memoir of 1752 at Paris. These
statements are fully confirmed by the evidence of the Russian marine officer,
who certainly served with Bering in his later expeditions if not in the first,

Page 331

and whose familiarity with all the records and papers should have enabled
him definitely to contradict de l'Isle on the main question instead of
correcting him in details. In his St. Petersburg memoirs of 1738 (page 10) de
l'Isle writes:

"On verra a cette occasion la situation du Kamtchatka de terminée par deux eclipses de Lune,
que M. le Capitaine Bering & ses gens y sont observées dans leur premier voyage [the
expedition 1725–'30], & dont j'ai rendu compte a l'Academie aussi-tot que ces observations
m'ont ete communiquées."

In the paper of Paris, 1752 ("Nouvelles découvertes au Nord de la Mer du
Sud") de l'Isle says on this point:

"Captain Beering and his lieutenant likewise took observations at Kamschatka of two eclipses
of the moon in the years 1728 and 1729, which helped me to chart the longitude of that eastern
extremity of Asia with all the precision which the nature of these observations, made by seamen
and with their own instruments, would admit of; but these first determinations have been since
confirmed by observations on Jupiter's satellites, taken in that place with the utmost accuracy
by my brother and some Russians conversant in this kind of observations and who were
provided with the best of instruments."

It appeared to me possible that the report on the eclipses of the moon made
by de l'Isle to the St. Petersburg Academy of Sciences might be traced up
among the archives of that society. In searching for information on this point
it was learned from Mr. O. Fassig, librarian of the Signal Office, that among
the unpublished manuscripts in the Pulkova library, St. Petersburg, were a
number by de l'Isle. A list of the manuscripts of M. de l'Isle was compiled
and published in 1844 by the distinguished astronometer O. Struve, and
among the number is one entitled: "Observations pour la longitude du
Kamchat, d'ou se conclut aussi de Tobolsk. 1729, MSS."

It was reasonable, in view of de l'Isle's statements in 1738, to suppose that
this is the report made to the Academy by him as soon as the observations
were furnished him. I had hoped to present with this sketch definite
information on this point, since a kinsman of the collator of the manuscripts
(I refer to the very distinguished representative of Russia to the United
States, M. de Struve) most courteously offered his valuable mediation in the

Page 332

matter. Unfortunately, I have as yet no further information, but I expect a
communication as to the contents of the MSS. at an early day.

Criticising the memoir of de l'Isle of 1752, the Russian officer ridicules the
author for speaking of Kamshatka as a town, but he adds:7

"It is certain likewise that M. Bering and his lieutenant, M. Tschirikow [quoting from de l'Isle's
Memoir of 1752], had, in the years 1728 and 1729, observed at Kamschatka two eclipses of the
moon; but that by these observations M. de l'Isle was enabled to determine the longitude of this
most eastern part of Asia, with such precision that the same had been confirmed in the second
expedition, by precise observations of the satellites of Jupiter is what I cannot well conceive.
Mr. de l'Isle himself intimates that Messieurs Bering and Tschirikow were not provided with
astronomical instruments. They observed both these eclipses by the help, not of pendulums, but
of their watches, without being able to know whether they went right or wrong; which makes it
almost incredible that a determination based on these two eclipses should exactly agree with
that deduced from the observations of Jupiter's satellites."

7
"Une Lettre," Berlin, p. 19.

The officer, from his own account, served with Bering. In the introduction to
"Une Lettre" he says:

"The orders of your Excellency [to whom the letter was addressed as written by his orders] will
be complied with by me with more than one inspiring motive, and I shall not dwell on my
unfitness, although I could find excellent pretexts for such an excuse, inasmuch as many of
greater experience and equal application participated with me in the discoveries which resulted
from the two voyages, called by us the Kamtschatkan expeditions. The only grounds on which
preference could be shown me over them arise from my being charged, after my return from
America, with the comparison of the journals of the various vessels together and with whatever
was elsewhere to be found relative to lands situated in the South Sea, in order to therefrom
construct a map which should accurately represent them all."

This officer, then, should be the very best authority on this question,
especially as he gives details, is always exact in his dates, and sets no value
on the observations. Whether or not such observations of lunar eclipses took
place, these extracts tend to confirm Dall's opinion that they served no
purpose in determining the longitude of Kamshatka.

Page 333

The letter and its author are worth some attention at our hands. As has been
said, it was published anonymously, and I do not know that its authorship
has ever been traced. It appears from the letter that the writer was an officer
of the Russian navy; that he was a Russian; that he was on familiar terms
with both Bering and de l'Isle; that he acted as interpreter between them in
1730–1731; that he was with Bering in his last voyage to America, and was
one of the ship-wrecked mariners on Bering island, and that on his return to
St. Petersburg he was charged with the compilations from the various ship
journals. As the naval officer states he was with Bering on Bering island, it is
evident that it must have been either Swen Waxel, Sophron Chitrow, or
Steller, the well-known scientific professor serving with Bering's expedition.
It could not have been Steller, since the professor was a German, and
moreover he died in November, 1746, prior to the date of the letter. It is
improbable that it was Chitrow, who was originally in a subordinate position
as a master-of-fleet, but while serving in Kamshatka and prior to Bering's
second voyage was made a lieutenant. It is not likely that a subordinate of
Chitrow's position should have been so situated in St. Petersburg as to have
served as an interpreter between Bering and de l'Isle. It is therefore more
than probable that Lieutenant Swen Waxel was the author of the letter. In
further confirmation, this officer says that he is charged with the preparation
of a chart out of the material furnished by the maps and journals of the
separate vessels. As we know from other sources, Waxel later made a chart
of the Kamschatka region.

Waxel displayed great energy and excellent judgment in conducting affairs
on Bering island, both before and after Bering's death, and it is gratifying to
note his intellectual discrimination in dealing with de l'Isle's fictitious
account of a journey in America said to have been made by one Admiral de
Fonte. Waxel skilfully dissects this geographical invention, clearly proving
its inconsistencies, while geographical writers in England were engaged
years later in endeavoring to prove its truthfulness.

It is significant that although Waxel omits any reference to it, the following
paragraph, which is evidently intended to be exculpatory of Bering's turning
back at the most northerly point of his first voyage, forms part of Bering's
report as translated by Dall: "Neither from the Chukchi coast nor to the
eastward could any extension of the land be observed." This very important
sentence does not appear in du Halde's account, and evidently was not in the

Page 334

copy which was furnished him. Possibly the person who furnished the copy
to du Halde omitted it. Elsewhere Waxel adds:

"I say nothing here which I have not repeatedly heard M. Bering say. I also saw his
instructions."

This gives value to his statements in reference to Bering's efforts to find land
east of Avatscha bay, whereof Waxel quotes de l'Isle as saying:

"On his return to Kamtschatka (in 1729) M. Bering learned that there was a land to the east,
which could be seen in clear, fine weather. He attempted to go thither, after having repaired the
damage his vessel had suffered in a storm. The second attempt was fruitless, for after sailing
about forty leagues to the east without seeing land, he was assailed by a violent tempest and a
contrary wind, which quickly drove him back to the port whence he had emerged."

In criticism Waxel adds:

"Would not this narrative lead one to believe that the second attempt of M. Bering had been
made immediately after the first voyage [in 1729]? However, it was entirely otherwise: Before
making this journey M. Bering wintered at Kamtschatka, set sail only on June 5, 1729, and,
without intending to return to the port which he was quitting, doubled the southern point of
Kamtschatka and went straight to the mouth of the river Bolschaia-Reka and thence to
Ochozk."

He further says:

"Perhaps it may appear strange that M. Bering during this voyage did not fall in with the island
(Bering island) whereon he was shipwrecked during his second expedition; but the isle might
have been hidden by fogs, which are very common in that sea."

Waxel's account of the second voyage is worth translating, being the plain
tale of a participant, who is as modest as he is truthful, for Waxel nowhere
mentions his own name nor the efficient service he rendered first to his chief
and later to his shipwrecked comrades. He writes in "Une Lettre" as follows:

"Let us now come to the details of the second expedition, which M. de l'Isle pretends owes its
origin to a map of his and was undertaken according to a memoir made by himself. 'I had the
honor,' he says, 'in 1731 to present this chart to the Empress Anne and to the Senate, in order to
stimulate the Russians to explorations of what still remained to be discovered, and it had its

Page 335

effect.' Was it time or age which caused M. de l'Isle to commit this error? Could he have
forgotten the orders which led him to make the chart in question? Had he remembered it,
perhaps he would not have said that he presented the chart to the Empress, and still less that he
made it in order to excite the Russians to new discoveries. At that time I visited M. de l'Isle; I
was a witness of his geographical labors, as far as they had new discoveries for their object; I
acted as interpreter to M. Bering in the conversations which he had with him; and I can assert
positively that when M. de l'Isle began that chart the second expedition was already ordered,
and Captain Bering, knowing what was still wanting to his discoveries, offered to continue
them and his lieutenants with him; and they each received promotion in consequence.

"It is therefore true that M. de l'Isle's work must be attributed to the orders of his superiors; and
I remember that the Empress Anne having commissioned her secretary to give the necessary
instructions to M. Bering for his new voyage, the latter did not think he could carry it on
successfully without getting from the Academy all the information possible concerning the
countries and waters where he was to navigate. The Academy was therefore called upon by the
Senate, and it ordered M. de l'Isle to compile the chart of which I speak, and in order that it
might be better understood, to explain it in a memoir; which having been done, the chart and
the memoir were presented to the Senate by the Academy; so that there can be no possible
doubt that, so far from having stimulated the Russians to new discoveries, so far from having
occasioned the new voyage of M. Bering, M. de l'Isle only worked according to the orders he
had received. There arises another question, as to whether the memoir caused the success of the
expedition, which I will treat later on. However that may be, the Senate gave a copy of it to M.
Bering as well as of the chart. I took a second copy, which enables me to compare it with what
M. de l'Isle tells us about it in his last memoir from Paris.

"He pretends to have proposed three different routes to be followed in order to discover what
was still unknown. The first, to sail straight to Japan, pass Yeco, or rather the straits which
separate it from the island of the States and the land of the Company, to discover what is to the
north of Yeco and search for the passage between that country and the coast of eastern Tartary.
This is what is called giving advice after the event. In the original memoir there is not a word
said about any such researches. M. de l'Isle contents himself with proposing three different
routes for finding the countries lying near to Kamshatka on the east. The first two, we must
admit, agree well enough with the second and third routes mentioned in the Paris memoir. They
are expressed in these terms:

"1. 'If one advances to the most northern extremity of Asia, and at the same time the most
eastern point reached by Captain Bering (wrong supposition, as I have already remarked), one
cannot fail to reach America, no matter what route one takes between the northeast and

Page 336

southeast, at a distance of not more than 600 leagues (great error in estimating the distance of
the opposite lands of Asia and America, since they are only separated in the north by a narrow
strait which widens as it goes south).'

"2. 'Without going so far, it would perhaps be easier to start from the eastern coast of
Kamshatka, sail directly east and reconnoitre the neighboring land, of which M. Bering
discovered indications on his first voyage.'

"In regard to the third route, M. de l'Isle conjectures as follows:

"3. 'Perhaps the countries seen by Don Juan de Gama might be found more speedily and with
more certitude by seeking them to the southeast of Kamshatka;' the outcome of which project
showed him his mistake, which is apparently the reason that induced him to change it to that of
the route by Japan and Yeco.

"Nothing is so imperfect in detail, and withal so dry, as the recital of M. Bering's voyage with
which M. de l'Isle regales us. He makes him start in 1741 to look to the east of Kamshatka for
the land which he had seen indications of in his first voyage. 'He did not go very far,' he says,
'for, being assailed by a violent storm during thick weather, he could not remain at sea, and
brought up on a desert island in latitude 54°, only a short distance from the Port of Avatcha
from whence he had sailed.'

"M. Bering, then, did nothing but fail, and he did so soon after leaving port. I must therefore
supplement the meagreness of M. de l'Isle's relation by giving an account of the voyage of M.
Bering and the other officers, chiefs of these expeditions, which will be so much the more easy
as I took part in them and as I can, besides, refer to the charts and journals of each vessel as
proofs of my correctness.

"The Captain Commanding Bering and Captains Spangenberg and Tschirikow, with several
other naval officers, left St. Petersburg in the spring of 1733. They waited at Yakouzk and
Ochozk until the vessels being built at this latter place for their expedition were completed, and
when all was ready for the departure of M. de Spangenberg he was dispatched first, according
to the orders of the Senate. He started, then, from Ochozk in the month of June, 1738, having
three vessels under his command, to which he added a large covered row-boat of 24 oars, which
he caused to be constructed at Bolscherezkoi Ostrog in Kamshatka, where he wintered. This
boat was to be used to go into the narrow straits between the islands that they might find and
where the ships could not go. In the summer of 1739 he went to Japan, the long chain of islands
situated between Japan and Kamshatka serving to guide him. He landed at two different places

Page 337

in Japan and was received with great civility by the people of the country; but he never went to
Matsmai, the principal place on the island of Yeco, as M. de l'Isle erroneously states. He
thought he had sufficiently complied with his instructions without doing so, and returning to
Ochozk, passed the winter at Yakouzk. As soon as a detailed account of this voyage was seen in
St. Petersburg they concluded by the route which M. Spangenberg had followed that he must
have passed near the coast of Corea, and he was therefore ordered to make a second voyage in
order to confirm the first. He started in 1741 and 1742, but his ship, built hastily and of
unseasoned wood, leaked and obliged him to return.

"MM. Bering and Tschirikow left Ochozk the 4th of September, 1740. They both had the same
destination; the second was to follow the track of the first. They only took different vessels so
as to be able to assist each other more efficaciously in case of any accident. Without entering
the Bolschaia-Reka river, as is customary in coming from Ochozk, they immediately rounded
the southern point of Kamshatka and anchored at Avatscha, or port of St. Peter and St. Paul, as
they called it. While wintering in these places, they made all their preparations for commencing
in spring their principal voyage, which was to have America as its object. Owing, however, to
the uncertainty as to the route which they were to follow, M. Bering assembled a naval council
on the 4th of May, 1741, and it was resolved to endeavor first to discover the land of Don Juan
de Gama, a fatal resolution which was the cause of all of our disasters. The 4th June we put to
sea. M. Bering had on his vessel, sent by the Academy, an adjutant, M. Steller, physician by
profession, but above all well versed in all that pertained to natural history. M. de la Croyere
was with M. Tschirikow. Although M. Bering and M. Tschirikow were not to separate,
according to their instructions, they could not avoid it, for eight days after sailing they were
separated by storms and fogs. The search for the pretended land of Gama caused them to direct
their course southeast; they continued to sail in that direction as far as the 46th degree without,
however, finding the slightest vestige of it. They then changed their course to the northeast and
both reached the coast of America, but in different places and without knowing of the
whereabouts of the other. M. Bering and we who accompanied him saw land for the first time
after being six weeks at sea. We then calculated that we were about five hundred Dutch leagues
from Avatscha. We provided ourselves with fresh water. We saw indications of inhabitants, but
could perceive no one. After being at anchor three days, M. Bering consulted with his officers,
and it was resolved to return. The 21st July we weighed anchor before sunrise. There was
nothing to do but to follow the coast, which stretched westward; but navigation was seriously
embarrassed by frequent islands, and when we tried to put to sea we were met by storms and
contrary winds, which caused us new delays every day. In order to procure fresh water, we
returned towards the coast, from which we had kept as far as possible. Soon it was in sight,
seeming about ten miles distant. We anchored between the islands, and the one where we
landed was Schoumagin-Ostrow. The water was good, but although taken from a lake, there

Page 338

was, nevertheless, some sea water in it brought by the tide, which sometimes inundated the
island. Afterwards we felt disastrous effects from its use, in sickness and the loss of several of
our men, who died. We tried in vain during three or four days to discover some natives of the
country, whose fires we could see at night on the coast. The 4th of September these savages
finally came, of themselves, in little canoes, and, having announced their arrival to us by a loud
cry, they presented us with their calumets, in sign of peace. These calumets were sticks with the
wings of falcons attached to the end. We understood from their gestures that they were inviting
us to come on land in order to furnish us with provisions and fresh water. We wished to profit
by the opportunity, and some of us ventured to follow them; but soon, however,
misunderstandings arose and all communication was broken off.

"The 6th of September, after having at first had a tolerably good wind for the voyage, we began
to find that as we advanced the obstacles were increasing, nothing but coasts and islands on
every side. M. Bering wished to get away from them by sailing more southwards, and, in truth,
for several days the sea appeared much more free. Our joy, however, was of short duration. The
24th of September, in latitude 54 degrees, we came upon coasts bordered with a number of
islands, and at the same time a violent tempest arose, which lasted seventeen days and sent us
back a distance of eighty miles. An old pilot acknowledged that during the fifty years that he
had followed the sea he had never seen such a storm. We should then stop calling this ocean
'Pacific.' This name may, perhaps, be suitable to it in the tropics, but certainly is wrongly given
to it here. The weather became calm again, but our provisions were by this time considerably
diminished and there was only about a third of our crew who remained well and serviceable
after all the hardships to which they had been exposed. There was still more than half of our
way to make, counting from the extreme point of our voyage in the East to Avatscha. In view of
these facts, many of us were of opinion that it would be better to winter somewhere in America,
rather than run the risk of encountering new dangers worse, perhaps, than those we had just
escaped; and these counsels came near prevailing over those who were of opinion that we
should make a supreme effort to reach Avatscha, and that it would be time to think of seeking
another refuge when we had lost all hope of succeeding in so doing. The month of October,
however, was passed as fruitlessly as the preceding ones. The 30th of that month we came upon
two islands, which seemed to us to bear some resemblance to the first two of those islands
which stretch from the southern extremity of Kamshatka to Japan. Thereupon we directed our
course northwards, and the 4th November, having observed the latitude, we found that we were
under the 56th parallel. The 5th, however, finished our voyage. Wishing to sail to the west, we
struck upon a desert island, where we had a good prospect of finishing our lives. Our vessel
went to pieces upon one of those banks with which the island is surrounded, and we were not
long in seeking land, which we fortunately reached with everything which we thought we
should need. By a special dispensation of Providence, the winds and waves threw the remains

Page 339

of our vessel on shore; we gathered them together to try, with the aid of God, to put ourselves in
a position to leave this sorry dwelling. The island where we now found ourselves was destitute
of trees. We were, therefore, obliged to depend upon the wood that the sea brought us to build
our cabins and warm ourselves. We gave to this desert place the name of Bering island, in honor
of the chief of our expedition, and it was there that he died, on the 8th of December, of grief and
sorrow at having to give up all hope of returning to Kamshatka. He refused to eat or drink, and
disdained the shelter of our cabins; his advanced age could not rally under such a disaster. We
young men kept our courage up, resisted with firmness all discouragement, made it a duty to
still enjoy life and to make as much as we could out of our prison home. Before our arrival,
Bering island was the refuge only of the inhabitants of the sea, who came there to breathe the
air and deposit their young. We were, therefore, able at first to observe these creatures very
closely without their taking fright. It was only after having seen several of their number fall
before our guns that they fled at our approach. We killed a great number of them, as much to
furnish us with food as for their skins. It was by these valuable spoils, splendid castor skins, that
we were repaid in some measure for our sufferings.

"At the approach of spring the following year we built of the remains of our vessel, as we had
intended, a large covered boat, furnished with anchors and sails and able to live at sea if not
exposed to storms. In this boat we confided ourselves to the sea, trusting in Providence, the
17th of August, 1742, and after nine days at sea, with beautiful calm weather, we arrived safely
at Avatscha on the 26th, giving thanks to the Almighty, who had delivered us from such great
dangers, and imbued us with gratitude such as time can never efface.

"From this account we can correct the error of M. de l'Isle, who places Bering island at the 54th
degree, only a short distance from Avatscha, whereas it is on the 56th parallel, sixty miles from
Avatscha and forty Dutch miles from the mouth of the Kamshatka river.

"The voyage of M. Tschirikow, although attended with less fatigue and danger, was not less
painful to him. His tender heart, which his profession of mariner had not rendered indifferent to
the sufferings of others, was indeed sorely tried. After parting from M. Bering, sailing
northwest, he came on the 15th of July to a country the shores of which were lined with rugged
rocks, at the foot of which rolled a deep sea. He prudently refrained from approaching too near
the shore, but at the end of three days sent the pilot, Abraham Dementiew, with a crew of ten
men, to reconnoiter the country. Neither Dementiew nor any of those who accompanied him
ever returned; and most sincerely was he mourned, and deservedly so, for he was young, good-
looking, of an honorable family, steady and clever in his profession, and zealous in the service
of his country. After waiting six days, M. Tschirikow sent the boatman, Sidor Sawelef, with
three men, but they did not return any more than the others. While waiting for their return we

Page 340

constantly saw smoke on the shores, and the day after the departure of the boatman two men, in
different boats, came from the spot where Dementiew and Sawelew had landed. When they had
approached near enough to be heard they began to call out, 'Agai, agai,' and then went back. M.
Tschirikow did not know what to think of their conduct, and now, despairing of the return of his
men and having no more boats to send on shore, he determined, on the 27th of July, to leave the
place, follow the coast as much as possible, and then return to Kamshatka. M. de l'Isle, then,
makes an addition of his own when he says that 'M. Tschirikow made many excursions into the
country, during the month of August, while waiting for the return of his men.' To return to the
truth, M. Tschirikow, in a distance of one hundred miles, never lost sight of land; he battled
often with contrary winds, had much anxiety on account of the heavy fogs, and lost an anchor
which he had put out, not far from the coast, in a moment of great danger. He was visited by
twenty-one canoes, of tanned skins, each one containing a man; but this was all—for he was
unable to converse with them. The scarcity of water and the scurvy carried off many of his men.
Among the officers he lost two lieutenants—Lichatschew and Plautin, fine men and excellent
mariners—who might have rendered good service had they lived. M. Tschirikow himself began
to have the symptoms of disease, but good food and the air on land restored him to health. M.
de la Croyere was not so fortunate; he appeared to have held his own until he was just at the
point of death. His companions marveled at the good effects of the large quantities of brandy
which he drank every day; but they soon saw that the only good it did him was to make him
forget his sufferings. He died on the 10th of October, as they were entering the port of Avatscha,
having dressed himself to go on shore and having celebrated his arrival by new excesses. We
cannot ignore the important service rendered by M. de la Croyere to the expedition, when he
recognized the Americans who came to M. Tschirikow as bearing great resemblance to the
inhabitants of Canada, whom he had met while serving in that country seventeen years before
coming to Russia, with the King of France's troops."

NOTE.—A pamphlet which has just come into my possession, entitled "Lettre
de Monsieur d'Anville au R. P. Castel, Jesuit. Au sujet des Pays de
Kamtchatka," etc. (24mo, Paris, 1737), throws some light on the map of du
Halde (1732), and definitely fixes the date and locality of the observation of
the eclipse of the moon referred to by de l'Isle and the Russian officer, as
well as later geographers.

D'Anville says:

Page 341

"The map of Bering's voyage is attributed to me.... The only part I had therein was to reduce it
from the much larger original map, of which I had made a tracing by means of oiled paper.... I
first learned of Bering's voyage by letters from de l'Isle, then in Russia; and finally an account
of this voyage having been sent to R. P. du Halde by His Majesty Stanislas, King of Poland, it
was placed in my hands.

"Likewise, both by a sheet of astronomical observations made by Bering which came to me
later, and by the same letters of M. de l'Isle, I knew that the mouth of the river of Kamtchatka
was found by astronomical determination to be in latitude 56° and some minutes.

"Bering in his navigation doubled the southern point of this continent [Kamshatka] in latitude
51° 10", as is expressly noted in the sheet of observations which is now before me.

"But though the solution of the difficulty in the case of the Land of Jeco may be very simple
and natural, yet it was not obvious to me, it may be said, for Bering's voyage and observations
caused me to recur to this subject, and I can no longer doubt that the eastern coast of Tartary
should be moved to the east as far as the maps of the Jesuits first indicated; for although M. de
Strahlenberg in his excellent map of Siberia shows only 65° of longitude between Tobolsk and
Okhotsk, and there are even less in de l'Isle's map of Tartary, yet Bering's map indicates that
there are 74°.

"It was found that it (Ohkotz) is 25° off of the meridian of Peking, which the observations of P.
Gaubil placed in 113° fifty-odd minutes from Paris, so that it closely approximates the 139°
which we have found it to be from Bering's observations. This determination does not differ
much from the result of some astronomical observations, which, as I learn from China, M. de
l'Isle, now in Russia, contemplated using in order to ascertain approximately the longitude of
Kamtchat. The observation upon which I place the most dependence, and which likewise gives
the greatest difference, is of an eclipse of the moon of February 25, 1728, of which the end was
observed on the west coast of Kamtshat in latitude 52° 46' N., Sirius having an altitude of 19°
18' to the west, wherefrom M. de l'Isle calculated that the true time answered to 6h. 52m. p.m.

"This eclipse, the end especially, fell throughout Europe in the daytime, but having been
observed at Carthagena, West Indies, by D. Jean Herrera, where it ended at 3h. 34m. a.m., a
difference of 8h. 42m. is deduced between the meridians of Carthagena and the coast of
Kamtshat."

It is thus evident that Bering observed an eclipse of the moon in Kamshatka,
and that the observations came into the hands of M. d'Anville.

Page 342

A. W. G.

JANUARY 21, 1892.

HEIGHT AND POSITION OF MOUNT ST. ELIAS.
BY

ISRAEL C. RUSSELL.

(Laid before the Board of Managers December 11, 1891.)

The height and position of Mount St. Elias have been measured several
times during the past century with varying results. The measurements made
prior to 1891 have been summarized and discussed by W. H. Dall, of the U.
S. Coast and Geodetic Survey.1 The various results obtained are shown in the
following table. With the exception of the position determined by Malaspina
and the measurements of 1891, they are copied from Dall's report.
1
Rep. of the Superintendent of the U. S. Coast Survey for 1875, pp. 157–188.

Height and Position of Mount St. Elias.

Date. Authority. Height. Latitude. Longitude.
1786 La Pérouse 12,672 feet 60° 15' 00" 140° 10' 00"
1791 Malaspina 17,851 feet 60° 17' 35" 140° 52' 17"
1794 Vancouver ————— 60° 22' 30" 140° 39' 00"

Page 343

Russian Hydrographic Chart,
1847 17,850 feet 60° 21' 00" 141° 00' 00"
1378
1847 Tebenkof (Notes) 16,938 feet 60° 22' 36" 140° 54' 00"
1849 Tebenkof (Chart VII) 16,938 feet 60° 21' 30" 140° 54' 00"
Bach. Can. Inseln 16,758 feet 60° 17' 30" 140° 51' 00"
English Admiralty Chart
1872 14,970 feet 60° 21' 00" 141° 00' 00"
2172
1874 U. S. Coast Survey 19,500±400 feet 60° 20' 45" 141° 00' 12"
1891 Nat. Geog. Soc. Ex. 18,100±100 feet 60° 17' 51" 140° 55' 30"

The position given by Malaspina is from a report on astronomical
observations made during his voyage,2 which places the mountain in
longitude 134° 33' 10" west of Cadiz. Taking the longitude of Cadiz as 6° 19'
07" west of Greenwich, the figures given in the table are obtained.
2
Memorias sobre las obversaciones astronomicas hechas por les navegantes Españoles en
distintos lugares del globe; Por Don Josef Espinosa y Tello. Madrid, en la Imprente real, Ano de
1809: 2 vols., large 8°; vol. 1, pp. 57–60. My attention was directed to this work by Dr. Dall,
who owns the only copy I have seen.

The data from which the various determinations made previous to 1874 were
obtained have not been published. The observations made by Messrs. Dall
and Baker, of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, are published in full in
the annual report of that Survey for 1875, already referred to. The
observations made by myself last summer as a part of the work of an
expedition sent to Mount St. Elias by the National Geographic Society and
the U. S. Geological Survey, from which the height and position of the
mountain have been computed, are as follows:

A base line 16,876 feet long was measured on the beach at Icy bay. The line,
with the exception of section C to D, as shown below, was measured three
times in sections of about 3,000 feet each. The distances given below in
columns 1 and 2 were obtained with a 100-foot steel tape, and those given in
column 3 with a 300-foot iron wire. These are rough measurements, made
without the use of a plumb-bob and without taking account of temperature.
The ground was quite smooth, with a rise of about five feet in the center; but
section C to D was crossed by a stream channel about 300 feet broad and

Page 344

twenty feet deep. Throughout much of the distance the ground was covered
with grass, which was only partially cleared away. The stations at the ends of
the line were ten feet above high tide. The bearing of the line from the
western base was S. 89° E., magnetic.

Measurements of Base Line.

1. 2. 3. Mean.
Ft. in. Ft. in. Ft. in. Ft. in.
Western base to station A 3,179 10 3,178 7 3,178 9 3,179 1
Station A to station B 2,355 2 2,354 1 2,354 2 2,354 6
Station B to station C 3,589 0 3,587 9 3,586 0 3,587 7
Station C to station D Rejected. 2,609 2 2,609 5 2,609 3
Station D to eastern base 5,145 5 5,144 10 Not meas- 5,145 1
ured.
Length of base line 16,875 6

The measurements of angles were made with a gradienter reading by vernier
to minutes. The error of the vertical arc was –3', and remained constant
during the observations.

Measurements of Angles at Western Base.

Right Left Vertical
Date.
vernier. vernier. angle.
St. Elias 218° 35' 38° 35' +5° 40' 1891, Aug. 14, 10 a.m.
1.
Eastern base 317 6 137 7 —— " " "
St. Elias 218° 34' 38° 37' +5° 40' " " "
2.
Eastern base 317 6 137 7 —— " " "
St. Elias 218° 37' 38° 39' +5° 40' " " "
3.
Eastern base 317 6 137 8 —— " " "
St. Elias 261° 41' 81° 43' +5° 40' " " "
4.
Eastern base 0 10 180 11 —— " " "

Page 345

St. Elias 261° 41' 81° 43' +5° 40' " " "
5.
Eastern base 0 10 180 10 —— " " "
St. Elias 50° 15' 230° 15' +5° 40' 1891, Aug. 14, 6 p.m.
6.
Eastern base 148 45 328 45 —— " " "
St. Elias 50° 15' —— —— " " "
7.
Eastern base 148 45 —— —— " " "
St. Elias 181° 5' 1° 5' +5° 40' " " "
8.
Eastern base 279 30 99 32 —— " " "

Measurements of Angles at Eastern Base.

Right Left Vertical
Date.
vernier. vernier. angle.
St. Elias 252° 26' 72° 27' +5° 34' 1891, Aug. 17, 11.30 a.m.
1.
Western base 176 19 356 19 —— " " "
St. Elias 252° 26' 72° 26' +5° 34' " " "
2.
Western base 176 19 356 19 —— " " "
St. Elias 252° 25' 72° 26' +5° 34' " " "
3.
Western base 176 19 356 19 —— " " "
St. Elias 252° 26' 72° 27' +5° 34' " " "
4.
Western base 176 19 356 19 —— " " "
St. Elias 252° 26' 72° 26' +5° 34' " " "
5.
Western base 176 19 —— —— " " "
St. Elias 252° 27' 72° 28' +5° 34' 1891, Aug. 17, 2 p.m.
6.
Western base 176 20 356 20 —— " " "
St. Elias 252° 28' —— —— 1891, Aug. 17, 4.30 p.m.
7.
Western base 176 21 —— —— " " "

From these observations the following angles between the base line and the
line of sight to the summit of Mount St. Elias are obtained. The correction
for error of vertical circle has been applied to the angles of elevation.

Resulting Angles.

Page 346

WESTERN BASE. EASTERN BASE.
Corrected Corrected
Right Left Right Left
vertical vertical
vernier. vernier. vernier. vernier.
angle. angle.
1 98° 31' 98° 32' +5° 43' 1 76° 7' 76° 8' +5° 37'
2 98 32 98 30 +5 43' 2 76 7 76 7 +5 37
3 98 29 98 29 +5 43' 3 76 6 76 7 +5 37
4 98 29 98 28 +5 43' 4 76 7 76 8 +5 37
5 98 29 98 27 +5 43' 5 76 7 —— +5 37
6 98 30 98 30 +5 43' 6 76 7 76 8 +5 37
7 98 30 —— +5 43' 7 76 7
8 98 25 98 27 +5 43'
98 29 22 98 29 00 76 6 51 76 7 36
Mean 98° 29' 12" +5° 43' Mean 76° 7' 10" +5° 37'

The known elements of the triangle from which the distance of St. Elias
from the ends of the base line may be determined are:

These data were sent from the field to the Secretary of the National
Geographic Society, and, in connection with other measurements made at the
same time, have been computed by Mr. S. S. Gannett, of the United States

Page 347

Geological Survey. The results of the computation, so far as they relate to
Mount St. Elias, are given below:

Computation of the Height of Mount St. Elias.

Station. Angle. 16,876 ft. log.
Dist. E. base — W. base = 4.227270
St. Elias 5° 23' 38"A. C. log. sine = 1.026862
Western base 98 29 12 log. sine = 9.995218
Eastern base 76 07 10 log. sine = 9.987129
St. Elias — W. base = 5.241261
St. Elias — E. base = 5.249350

log. feet. log. miles. miles.
Log. distance: St. Elias — W. base = 5.241261 1.518627 33.01
Log. tan angle of elevation 5° 43' = 9.000465
17447 ft. 4.241726
Curvature and refraction = +623
Western base above sea +10 Correction for curvature and
refraction in feet = 4/7 sq. of
St. Elias above sea = 18080 ft. dist. in miles.
log. distance miles = 1.51863
1.51863
log. 4 = 0.60206
A. C. log. 7 = 9.15490
log. 623 ft. = 2.79422

log. feet. log. miles. miles.
Log. distance: St. Elias — E. base = 5.249350 1.526716 33.63
Log. tan 5° 37' 8.992750 1.526716
0.602060
17462 = 4.242100 9.154902
Curvature and refraction +646

Page 348

E. base above sea +10 log. 646 ft. = 2.810394
St. Elias above sea = 18118 ft.

Mean elevation above sea level = 18099 ft.; or in round numbers 18,100 ft.

Mr. A. Lindenkohl, of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, and Mr. S. S.
Gannett have each computed the geographic position of Mount St. Elias,
using the azimuth and angle of elevation of the mountain obtained by the U.
S. Coast Survey at Port Mulgrave in 1874,3 and the elevation given above.
From these data the approximate position of Mount St. Elias was found to
be:

Lat., 60° 17' 51" N.
Long., 140° 55' 30" W.

3
Report of the Superintendent of the U. S. Coast Survey for 1875, Appendix 10, pp. 157–188.

The computation by which these results were obtained is given below:

Computation of Geographic Position of Mount St. Elias.

Azimuth: Port Mulgrave to Mount St. Elias = 142° 17' 17"
Diff. azimuth –59 55
+ 180° +180°
Azimuth: Mount St. Elias to Port Mulgrave = 321° 17' 22"

Latitude. Longitude.
59° 33' 42" = Port Mulgrave 139° 46' 16"
+44 09 = Diff. lat. +1 09 14 = Diff. long.
60° 17' 51" = Mount St. Elias 140° 55' 30"

2d
1st Term.
Term.

Page 349

Log. meters.
Log. K = (Distance, = 2 =
K
Mulgrave — St.Elias) 5.0183184 0.0366
= =
Log. cosine azimuth, Z, 142° 17' 17" Sine2 Z
9.8982292 9.5731
= =
Log. B Log. C
8.5093902 1.6335
= Log. =
Log. 2666".5
3.4259378 17".6 1.2432
1st term = + 2666".5
2d term = – 17 .6
Difference lat. = 2648".9

Log. K = 5.0183184
Log. sine azimuth = 9.7865328
Log. A4 = 8.5086148
Arithmetical complement 60° 17' 51" = 0.3049593
Log. diff. in longitude 4153".6 = 3.6184253

Log. diff. long. = 3.61843
Log. sine mean latitude 59° 55' 46" = 9.93722
Log. diff. azimuth — 3595" = 3.55565

4
A, B and C are terms depending on the size and figure of the earth and the latitude of the place.

The geographic position of Mount St. Elias is of popular interest in
connection with the boundaries of Alaska.

In the convention between Great Britain and Russia,5 wherein the boundaries
of Alaska are supposed to be defined, it is stated that the boundary,
beginning at the south, after leaving Portland channel, shall follow the
summit of the mountains situated parallel to the coast as far as the 141st
meridian, and from there northward the said meridian shall be the boundary
to the Arctic ocean. Whenever the summit of the mountains between
Portland channel and the 141st meridian "shall prove to be at the distance of

Page 350

more than ten marine leagues from the ocean, the limit between the British
possessions and the line of coast which is to belong to Russia, above
mentioned, shall be formed by a line parallel to the windings of the coast and
which shall never exceed the distance of ten marine leagues therefrom."
5
Message from the President of the United States, transmitting Report on the boundary line
between Alaska and British Columbia. 50th Congress, 2d session, Ex. Doc. No. 146, Senate,
1889.

As Mount St. Elias is approximately in longitude 140° 55' 30" west from
Greenwich, as already shown, it is therefore only 4' and 30" of longitude or
2½ statute miles east of the boundary of the main portion of Alaska. Its
distance from the nearest point on the coast is 33 statute miles. There is no
coast range in southeastern Alaska parallel with the coast within the limits
specified by the treaty, and the boundary must therefore be considered as a
line parallel with the coast and ten marine leagues, or 34½ statute miles,
inland. The mountain is thus one and one-half miles south of the boundary
and within the territory of the United States. Its position is so near the
junction of the boundary separating southeastern Alaska from the Northwest
Territory with the 141st meridian that it is practically a corner monument of
our national domain.

THE HEART OF AFRICA.
BY

E. C. HORE.

(Abstracts of two Lectures presented before the Society March 6 and March 13, 1891.)

I.

Page 351

The subject of Africa and its people has recently become a most interesting
and popular one. We are but now beginning to realize the size and
importance of Africa, as we are reminded that it contains nearly one-fourth
part of the land area of the world; that it has mountains at least 1,000 feet
higher than the most lofty American peaks; that the known extent of the Nile
and the Congo now make them the rivals of the Yang-tse-Kiang and the
Mississippi as the longest rivers in the world; that its central regions, instead
of the great desert blank so long shown on our maps, is a rich and beautiful
elevated region, having upon its heights a splendid collection of fresh-water
lakes or inland seas, fertilizing by their outflowing streams the whole
continent; and that it is known to contain over 250,000,000 people, or about
one-seventh part of the world's population. It is called the "dark continent:"
rather should it be called the "new world," in which our interest and
responsibility—political, commercial and social—is rapidly growing.

For purposes of general description, there are three great divisions of the
African continent and its peoples and affairs:

The northern division, stamped and characterized—men, manners and
things—by the orientalism of its conquering settlers, so intimately
blended by blood, religion and character with the natives as to have
become essentially African, its original peoples so thoroughly
influenced by the incoming foreigners as to be now essentially oriental;

The southern division, overrun in more modern times by foreigners of
other races, and having its own peculiar civilization and characteristics
due to that influx; and

Central Africa, including all that portion of the continent lying between,
say, the Albert Nyanza and the river Zambesi, and Zanzibar and the
Congo mouth, and which, although no part now remains of it that is not
nominally the territory either of the Congo Free state or some European
power, is still almost entirely in the possession and occupation of its
lawful owners, the native uncivilized tribes.

As well as this transverse political division of Africa, we may make what
may be called a concentric analysis. Commencing with the outer skin, the
16,000 miles of African coast, we find upon it certain excrescences, which, if

Page 352

our examination went but skin-deep, might well lead us to regard Africa not
as a "new," but as an "old, old" world. On the north and east the remains of
ancient civilizations, Morocco, Tangier, Egypt, remind us of Africa's bygone
grandeur—remind us how very much of forms of beauty and secrets of
science and art came to us in the birth of civilized Europe from or through
Africa. On the south and west again, memorials of Phoenician, of
Portuguese, of Dutch, English and American conquering visitors and
adventurers remind us of the constant preying of the nations on the dark
continent—remind us, through certain prison castles still to be seen on the
western coast, of the great world's crime, the slave trade. But on the outer
surface of Africa other signs are to be read: North, south, east and west there
are ports and roadsteads forested with the masts of the world's shipping
conveying to Africa's every shore those products of the civilized world
which, according to their nature for good or harm, are to influence and
civilize the Africans; carrying away from her shore the land's products—a
constant stream, increasing perhaps just now, but which has always been
flowing—of wool, cotton, oil, rich spices, dyes and medicinal and
ornamental woods, india-rubber, gum-copal, ivory, precious stones, gold.
Are these the products of a desert land inhabited only by a lazy and savage
people?

Following our concentric analysis, the first layer behind the outer skin of
Africa may be said to consist of a verdant slope, broad and luxuriant in the
tropics, where nature herself has been lavish, narrower, but still ever
widening, in the drier north and south, as the oriental and the European
respectively advance their groves of fruit and fields of corn, maintained in
luxuriance alike by the vapors of the sea and the down drainage from the
higher lands, and from the same causes also malarious and unhealthy. In
another sense, too, this outer belt is both rich and unhappy. Into it come
those men and things representing "civilization" from afar. To it, from the
interior, gravitate those of the natives who are influenced by contact with
those men and things, deprived to a great extent of the old uncivilized
condition and its innocencies and partially imbued with what of civilization
has come to them. Mankind, too, in this outer belt is often only too rank and
unhealthy in his character. It is truly "darkest Africa;" for, first, the slave
trade and then the rum bottle have in many parts been the preponderating
representatives to them of outer civilization.

Page 353

The next layer is a step or terrace of flat sandy semi-arid country, narrow in
the tropics, widening toward each extreme, until it bulges out in the north
into the Sahara desert, in the south into the Kalahari, some parts always bare
and sandy or covered with a sparkling saline or alkaline deposit, some parts
forming broad savannas or prairies, bearing rich grasses in the rains, burnt
bare in the dry season; others covered with thickets of thorns or stunted and
crippled trees under the same variations of seasons. This is the land of the
ostrich and the pelican, the scene of vast prairie fires or whirling dust spouts;
it is the land also of the nomad man. Across the Sahara the wandering Arab
leads his camels from oasis to oasis; amid the wastes of the Kalahari the
homeless Bushman finds a congenial hunting territory; in the narrow,
tropical parts such semi-nomads as the Somali, the Wamasai, and the
Wagogo lead their cattle from place to place, as the grass and water serve
them with the seasons.

This terrace or flat sandy belt being crossed, we come to the true central
region of Africa, a long irregular oval-shaped elevation of mountain masses,
spreading out in many places as vast plateaus and forming altogether that
mysterious elevated region reported from time to time by old investigators as
well as compilers of native reports as the Mountains of the Moon. In the
crevices of this central mass, in rocky basins, in fathomless chasms, in vast
depressions of the plateaus, lie those great natural rainwater tanks known as
the central African lakes. On and around it are the richest and most beautiful
and healthful countries. Spreading over it and around its beautiful waters are
the most intelligent and industrious of the native African tribes, their native
industry and enterprise yet almost undisturbed by the busy excitement of
civilization. Hence there may fairly be drawn something like a sample of the
real African native character and condition. They live in families; among
them the family tie and the rights of property are regarded; conscience
pronounces criminal and offensive the same irregularities as are so regarded
among civilized peoples; in stature and physical condition they come up to
the best standards. I argue that the life and condition which presents this
state of things after isolation for thousands of years from all we call civilized
can scarcely be called evil or degraded.

Among these people, both pastoral and agricultural, are to be found in
progress the germs at least of all the useful arts—the procuring and working
of both iron and copper, pottery-making, the spinning and weaving of cotton

Page 354

cloth, the very beautiful development of plaiting of all kinds of vegetal fibers
into string, rope, mats, baskets and cloth; and where valuable materials and
products are naturally confined to particular localities, as is the case
sometimes with oil, salt, etc., it is manufactured and distributed. Too often
are people described as lacking in industry who are not the same as
ourselves; but it seems to me ridiculous that a man should be called lazy
because he has ample leisure between his busy times, who has made with his
own hands, from nature's absolutely raw material, his house, his axe and hoe
and spear, his clothing and ornaments, his furniture, his corn mill, all things
that he has, and who, though liable often in a lifetime to have to repeat that
whole process over again, has the energy and enterprise to commence afresh.
Too often have the same people been called savage and bloodthirsty who,
through all experience and by all their traditions getting naturally to regard
unintroduced armed strangers as enemies, have the same desperate energy to
defend themselves and their own which, as displayed by our own ancestral
relatives, we love to term patriotism and courage.

In a fairly central position on this great central elevation is the elongated
basin surrounded by a mountain rim in the bottom of which, in a long chasm,
lies Lake Tanganyika, in a position alike so central and so unique that I have
termed it the Heart of Africa. Inside the mountain basin rim, the rainfall all
converges into Tanganyika; outside, it all flows to the outer shores of the
continent by the Nile, the Congo or the Zambesi. Fifteen years ago the
waters of Lake Tanganyika, having very slowly gained upon the evaporation
(the then only means of carrying off its surplus) attained to the height of the
lowest gap in its rim and commenced to flow out, and thence its surplus
water ever since has found an exit and now forms part of the Congo system.
Tanganyika is 400 miles long and from 15 to 50 miles in width, and is 2,700
feet above the sea.

To leave, however, this very rough general description of Africa at this point
would convey a wrong idea. We have described the verdant slope from the
coast, the terrace of flatter country, the central elevation and its heart; now
we may imagine a series of great ridges and furrows and other radial features
diverging from the heart of Africa to its very shores, besides certain isolated
ridges and peaks, some of them snow-clad, and certain isolated depressions
forming lakes or swamps; first the three great furrows of the Nile, Zambesi
and Congo and the three great ridges formed by their dividing water-sheds,

Page 355

and so on through fan-like expansions of rim or ridges and furrows until the
previously described concentric formation, although still there, is
considerably cut up.

The great central mountain mass, buttressed by its far-stretching ridges,
forms the backbone, from which, outward and downward, in intricate
articulations, extends the complicated bony skeleton of Africa.

Set like sparkling jewels in its crevices and depressions, the great lakes send
forth the streams which, flowing through gaps in their surrounding mountain
barriers, rushing through narrow channels, oozing slowly through elevated
flats or bounding in beautiful cascades over steep steps, and carrying the
vitalizing fluid in every direction through the length and breadth of Africa,
form its system of circulation.

Bordering the great lakes and clustering on the slopes, forests of gigantic
trees form the flesh and muscle of this great creation; preserved in perpetual
verdure wherever water constantly remains and in long extending lines and
network fringing the ever-winding banks of the streams, and finally joining
with the verdant belt of the sea-coast to form the brilliant epidermis of the
whole, and forming background and filling to the network of these
prominent features, in broad concentric curves and in belts and patches, the
more stunted thorny growth, long grass, broad savanna and sandy plain, ever
changing in color and aspect.

The great new and beautiful world of Africa lies open before us;
250,000,000 intelligent and courageous people have become exposed to the
influence, for good or evil, of the civilized races. What shall we do with it
and them? Quite possible is it fairly and honestly so to explore and deal with
both country and people as to develop its resources and benefit them, while
adding to the world's treasury of comfort-bringing products and human
brotherhood the riches and the friendship of a new continent; but it must be
by peaceful and just measures and by honest trade with wholesome wares.

II.

Page 356

As a practical way of leading you in imagination to the heart of Africa, and
as indicating the circumstances and experience upon which my observations
on Africa are based, I shall describe one of my many journeys.

In the year 1882 I had the honor to be leader of the largest European
expedition that has yet entered Africa, having in it, for instance, 200 more
men than the Emin Pasha relief expedition. There were ten Europeans, all
told, who represented survey and navigation, medicine, carpentry,
blacksmithing, and other specially selected talent for the purpose of
exploration and civilization, as well as those specially devoted to the
teaching of Christianity, which was the ultimate aim of all. We entered
Africa from the village of Saadani, on the eastern coast, opposite Zanzibar,
our destination being the shores of Lake Tanganyika at Ujiji.

To make not only our progress sure, but work and residence at our
destination safe and possible in such a land, we had stores of groceries,
medicines, tools and clothing, and a large quantity of calico and other cloth,
which forms the currency of the country, for the purchase of supplies and
payment of wages to porters, servants and workmen.

The special locality to be worked being the countries surrounding Lake
Tanganyika, to which that extensive and beautiful inland sea gives access,
we carried with us also, for its navigation, a sailing boat built of steel, of the
form of a sea-going life-boat, and constructed in small sections and pieces
for transport. This boat I designed myself. Six of the sections were to travel
on specially constructed light carts, drawn by African natives, and the rest, in
small pieces, were to be carried by the porters in the ordinary way.

The mode of travel was walking, except when now and then an invalid was
carried in a hammock. The method of transport was by means of native
porters, hundreds of whom devote themselves to this work. They are paid $5
per month as wages, payable at Zanzibar on their return to the coast, less
such advance in kind as they may draw from their leader along the road. In
addition, they get a regular allowance of two yards of white calico per seven
days, each man, as barter with which to obtain food.

The organization and start of such a party took some time, and parties of
from 100 to 300 were dispatched along the road as things were ready, until,

Page 357

when I started with the final rear guard, we had on the road over 900 of these
porters, with their headmen and petty officers, all under complete
organization.

The first start of the boat-section carts was the scene of apparent disaster.
The men, wild with excitement and uniting their shouts with those of
onlookers, were beyond all restraint for the moment, and as they rounded a
sharp turn to get out of the village of Saadani, over went the carts, one after
the other, on their sides; and it was some time before I could train the men to
steer more carefully or to move gently down a declivity. In time, however,
the whole thing worked well. The fore compartment of the boat, going stem
first, often forced its own way through masses of brush and creeper, helping
to clear the way for the narrower sections, whose carts insinuated themselves
through surprisingly small gaps. The men themselves were most zealous in
the service, and as we emerged from lengthy stretches of jungle, ascended
steep river banks, or jolted whole days over rugged stony places unharmed,
we made up our minds that, these carts would "go anywhere." In twenty
days we reached Upwapwa, 200 miles from the coast, and joined an advance
party awaiting us; and after a few days rest and reorganization, we started
once more westward.

The first village beyond, in the country of Ugogo, was thirty miles off. The
first day was a comparatively easy march to a watering place, but the next
two days gave us tough work. The thick, tangled, thorny scrub became quite
dense, and for those two days we had to cut our way through it foot by foot.
Hour after hour the twang of the sword-bayonets and the thud of the axes
were almost the only sounds to be heard till the train of carts moved slowly
on as the way was opened. Toward evening of the second day we followed a
narrow pass along the side of a rocky river bed, stout, inflexible trunks and
branches here projecting into our path. On some of these ebony bars the axes
resounded as on an anvil, and they yielded only to the more patient saw. As
the sun descended we began to flag, but help was at hand; for a party coming
back to us from the camp ahead with food and water, we picked up strength
and spirit and reached camp late in the evening.

The level plains of Ugogo, which here represent the flat, open step or terrace
to which I have referred in the general description of Africa, enabled us to
make a week or so of splendid and comfortable marches. Ugogo passed,

Page 358

there lay before us the much-dreaded wilderness, so-called, of the Magunda-
Mkali, separated from Ugogo by a steep, rocky ascent, which we could only
tackle one cart at a time, and we soon came to a point so rugged with broken
rocks that we could proceed no further; but the sections were unlashed, the
carts taken to pieces, and all handed or dragged across the difficult place and
put together again beyond. Over the scrubby, rugged hill and dale of
Magunda-Mkali, without inhabitants, 20 to 25 miles a day was often made;
every man knew the necessity of pushing on for food and water, and the
danger, from wild beasts or wandering highwaymen, of lagging in the rear.

On, on, went the novel train, through weary miles of forest, across the
scorched plain, rattling over the hard sun-baked footprints of the elephant
and rhinoceros; on through grassy glades where the nimble antelope
bounded, scared out of our path, and the zebra and giraffe were startled by
the rattling of these strange disturbers of their solitude; on still, through
miles of swamp, with its croaking legions; on through scenes of surpassing
beauty, bright flowers and gleaming birds and butterflies; on past the
bleaching bones of other travelers waylaid or exhausted, till the sun creeps
up high overhead and eager glances are cast at green spots where water once
had been; on, till the pace grows slow with weariness and thirst, and still on,
till it revives again as the welcome messenger from the front appears in sight
with water or the camp-fires tell of food and rest.

Completing this difficult section of the journey and mounting to the
beautiful forests and numerous villages of Unyamwesi, we had arrived upon
the central heights of the continent, which everything around us bespoke its
best part; the clearer, more healthy air, the rich land, the open forests, the
numerous and industrious people, all spoke eloquently of a better and
brighter state of things in the interior of Africa than on its outside.

At Urambo we elicited the pleased surprise of our friend, the famous chief
Mirambo. Said Mirambo, laying his hand emphatically on one of the boat
sections, "This boat and these carts are mine, and all Unyamwesi is yours." It
was his way of expressing sympathy and admiration of what he considered
to be a very wonderful enterprise, and we left him pondering more deeply
than ever on the doings of the "white men."

Page 359

The rains were now at hand and the country rich and verdant; we hastened
on with all speed possible to enable us to cross the Malagarasi river before it
should be too swollen. Emerging from elevated forest land to a view of the
valley of the river, it appears like a vast level expanse of harmless grass, but
the swift river is flowing in the bottom. The toll required by the natives
being paid, we descended to the river through the thick grass. We crossed the
river in tiny dug-out or bark canoes managed by the natives. One old man, a
leader among these ferrymen, we had especial cause to notice; we called him
"the old admiral." He wore a curious skull cap apparently made of bladder,
and presented a most odd appearance. To him we paid a special fee of
propitiation for the boatmen. As we proceeded down toward the river the
first sign of it among the long grass was quiet shallow water on the path; this
grew deeper and deeper as we walked on until we were immersed to the
armpits, the grass rising avenue-like overhead. We emerged upon a small
island or rising ground, and the river proper was before us. On this little
eminence stood "the old admiral" superintending all. The porters and their
ordinary loads all crossed in the usual way, two or three at a time in the little
canoes. The two large carts, with the bow and stern compartments of the
boats, were floated along the watery avenue by the buoyancy of their tank-
like loads; the others came, sections and carts, separately. The fare for each
load was one yard of calico, but when the carts appeared there was general
astonishment among the ferrymen, who showed signs of clearing off
altogether; "the old admiral" alone was unmoved; his stolid countenance
showed no sign, but a deep bass growl, "Eight yards, eight yards for these!"
expressed at once his nonchalance and his determination; and eight yards we
had to pay. All was safely got over in a day. Two of the bark canoes were
lashed together with poles across, and one section or one cart at a time laid
on top, and thus all was carried across.

Obstacles which further back would have been regarded as great hindrances
were now made little of; success seemed assured to all, and the men even
began to rehearse their triumphal entry into Ujiji. One more difficult river,
the Lusugi, we had to cross. We reached its banks, down a rocky descent,
late one night in a heavy fall of rain. We waited an hour or two next morning
till the river had somewhat subsided, and then commenced work. Two or
three volunteers swam across with a stout rope, which was then hauled tight
across the stream. The porters, holding this rope in one hand, slowly but
surely made their way across. Then the carts and sections were attached to a

Page 360

block running on the rope, and so, carefully attended by two or three men,
were floated over in safety.

Ujiji was now only a few marches ahead. The view of the lake was caught at
last, a narrow strip of its waters gleaming in the sun in the distance, and next
morning we slowly marched into Ujiji in a compact body. The boat was duly
launched and has now been for years at work on Lake Tanganyika in the
cause of civilization and Christianity.

The completion of this journey, however, was but the commencement of a
still larger enterprise in the region reached. Stations were established among
the tribes on the lake shores; a larger vessel, with steam power, was built and
launched on the lake, and a substantial mission was established and is still at
work at a point which is only 400 miles from that point on the Congo river
accessible to the steamers of the missions there.

All the work I have described was done at the expense of the London
Missionary Society.

REPORT OF COMMITTEE ON EXPLORATION IN
ALASKA.

(Accepted April 3, 1891.)

Washington, D. C., April 3, 1891.

TO THE BOARD OF MANAGERS OF THE NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY,
Washington, D. C.

Page 361

Gentlemen: Your Committee, instructed "to consider the advisability of
further Alaskan exploration by the Society this year and if deemed advisable,
to consider and report upon ways and means for accomplishing it,"
respectfully submit the following report:

The general question of desirability has been decided affirmatively by the
Board of Managers; it therefore is inferred that the question of advisability
may be taken as involved in that of ways and means.

In outlining a plan of work, concerning which such inquiry is to be made, it
has been found necessary, in the lack of formulated opinion by the Society,
to make assumptions as to what should be its purpose and policy in
undertaking exploration. It is assumed tentatively that in order best to further
the object for which the Society is organized, namely, "the increase and
diffusion of geographic knowledge," the aim in exploration should be not so
much to promote the growth of science as to diffuse a general interest in
geographic work in its several departments, and, adhering to the principle of
attractiveness, to increase the sum of knowledge by discovery and by the
addition of general and elementary facts rather than by detailed
investigation, for appreciation of which scientific training must be
presupposed. It is furthermore believed that the policy of the Society should
be to invite coöperation, offering opportunity at the same time for special
study in related sciences; to effect the organization and devise the plan, and
itself to take part directly in field work only so far as may be necessary to
initiate and promote it.

Your Committee find that apparently it will be practicable, with coöperation,
for the Society to extend this year the exploration work of last year in the
vicinity of Mount St. Elias. Specifically it is recommended that the plan be
to determine directly, from a long base line near the coast, the height of the
mountain, to ascend it, to observe systematically the unique phenomena of
physical geography of the Malaspina glacier from Icy bay to the initial point
of last year's exploration, and to explore the Seward glacier to its head if
deemed advisable after the ascent of the peak.

In view of the fact that it is the purpose of the Coast and Geodetic Survey to
carry the international boundary survey into this region within one or two
years, it is considered inexpedient for the Society to undertake extended

Page 362

topographic work. It is, however, submitted, as a principle which this
Society should emphasize in projecting exploration, that facts of physical
geography have minimum value and may lead to false conclusions unless
correlated through their space relations; and it is recommended that the
expedition aim always to employ such means as may be practicable for
making record of its course and of its observations in approximate geometric
relation to surroundings.

Conditional offers of coöperation have been made by the Revenue Marine
Service, the Geological Survey, the Coast and Geodetic Survey, and the
Century Company of New York. Transportation from Seattle to Alaska and
return, it is thought, may be secured on the steamer Corwin, and that vessel's
commander, Captain Hooper, has expressed a desire to extend his coast-line
exploration of last year by making a survey of Disenchantment bay. The
Geological Survey offers to detail Mr. Russell to conduct the expedition, and
to bear the expense of a number of field hands and of their equipment. The
Coast and Geodetic Survey has expressed a desire to aid, if practicable, by
beginning boundary work in the same field this year, and incidentally to do
other surveying with special relation to the work of the expedition. The
Century Company offers to send an artist experienced in Alpine work and to
pay the greater portion of his expenses. The opportunity for study of the
fauna and flora of the region it is thought should not be neglected.

The cost to the Society, wholly in items of field expense otherwise
unprovided for, which may be considered as the cost of enabling the
combination to work as one organization, is estimated at $500.

Page 363

The expedition should leave Seattle in the latter part of May, aiming to
reach Icy bay by the first of June, and field work should close by the end of
September.

Your committee consider further exploration in Alaska by the Society this
year as practicable, and recommend that the proposed expedition be
authorized, and that Mr. Russell be at once invited to organize and conduct
it, under the auspices of the Society.

Very respectfully,
G. K. GILBERT,
EVERETT HAYDEN,
WILLARD D. JOHNSON,
Committee on Exploration.

NOTES.

La Carte de France, dite de l'Etat Major, par M. J. Collet. Paris, 1887. 8vo,
pp. 92, with 4 plates.—This pamphlet describes the great "Staff Map" of
France, recently completed, giving its history, the methods employed in the
field and office work, the contents of the map, and the means of
representing the various features therein described. The scale of the map is
1:80,000. Relief is represented by hachures, for drawing which approximate
contour lines have been located, but these are not otherwise used. A great
variety of cultural features are shown, many of which are ephemeral, and
which contribute to the overloading of the map with details. Moreover, as
the time which has ordinarily elapsed between the survey and the issuance
of the work in printed form is ten or twelve years, most of this culture has
become not only of no value but misleading by the time it is published.

Page 364

The account of the organization and methods by which the map has been
produced is of special interest. The primary triangulation upon which it is
based is one of the most elaborate and accurate ever executed in any
country. No expense has been spared in this direction. Within this
triangulation is a secondary triangulation, also very elaborate, from the
stations of which numerous additional points are cut in, or located by
unclosed triangles. All this work is of the highest order of excellence, being
infinitely more accurate than the map requires. With this, however, the
accuracy appears to end. The detail consists of the map, or the map proper,
little more than a compilation of commune cadastral plans. These were
fitted to the triangulation points and to one another, a process which appears
to have been by no means easy of satisfactory accomplishment. This
adjustment having been completed, the culture was brought up to date of
survey and a survey was made of the relief features by the use of such
inferior instruments as the clinometer compass and chain.

The principal and obvious criticism upon such work is that it is top-heavy.
The triangulation is far more elaborate than is required, while the provision
for making the map itself is by no means comparable with it: it is as far
below the requirements of the scale as the triangulation is above it.

This leads up to a broader proposition, which may be stated thus: That the
general tendency of surveying organizations is in the direction illustrated by
that of the "French Staff." Organized originally for map-making, they
progress little by little in the direction of devoting their energies to geodetic
work, while at the same time the topographic work proper, for which they
were created, is belittled and neglected. As a consequence the latter
depreciates in quality and diminishes in quantity; the main purpose of the
organization is lost, and a mere means becomes the ultimate end of the
work. This tendency should be recognized in map-making organizations.
The weakness of our modern maps is seldom in the primary control. It is
easy to do triangulation of sufficient accuracy for the control of maps upon
such scales as that above considered, little knowledge or experience being
required beyond that gained at our engineering schools; while the more
accurate triangulation, generally known as geodetic work, requires merely
better instruments, more time, and more experienced observers.

Page 365

The weak features of maps are generally the details, the part of the work
that, strange to say, is usually relegated to the lowest grade of professional
men. This weakness consists in an insufficiency of minor locations for the
control of the sketch and in unfaithful sketching. It is the sketching that
requires the most careful attention and the best and most experienced men.
The instrumental portion of the work is the least difficult; the artistic
portion, or sketching, is the most difficult. It would seem more logical and
would doubtless produce better results to reverse the usual order of
promotion and place the topographer above the triangulator. Moreover, the
triangulation should be regarded as merely a means for the correction of the
sketching, and it should be required only that it be of sufficiently high grade
to meet this condition. The minor locations should be sufficiently numerous
and well distributed to fully control and correct the sketching; and finally
the sketching should be as faithful a representation of the topography as is
consistent with the necessary generalization of the surface features.

H. G.

Polar Regions.—The Societe de Geographie of Paris in its Proceedings
publishes the following communication from M. Ch. Rabot on the new
Danish expedition engaged in the exploration of the eastern coast of
Greenland, under the command of Lieutenant Ryder, of the royal Danish
navy. The expedition has in view the examination of the unknown coast
between Franz-Josef fiord, in latitude 73°, and the most northerly point
reached by Commander Holm and Lieutenant Garde, about latitude 66°.
Lieutenant Ryder left Copenhagen June 7, 1891, in the Norwegian whaler
Hekla, which had been chartered by the Danish government. The first ice
was met on the 20th, in latitude 68° 12', longitude 13° 05' west. Unable to
pass through the pack to the Greenland shore after several attempts, the ship
proceeded northward, and in the vicinity of Jan Mayen made soundings and
successful dredgings. Several attempts to reach the coast of Greenland were
made from the 75th parallel southward, but without success up to July 2,
when the Hekla was in latitude 71° 31', longitude 6° 30' west. Since that
date there has been no direct news, but on July 26, in latitude 72° 40',

Page 366

longitude 14° 25' west, the English whaler Active saw the Hekla a few miles
to the northeast, heading to the south-southwest. On August 2 the Active, in
latitude 71° 40', approached within 12 miles of the coast, and on August 20,
in 70° 30', was within 7 miles of the mainland. In both instances the
intervening sea was free of ice. The English captain believes that the Hekla
made the eastern coast in about 71° 30'. The Hekla is provisioned for the
winter, and there is a prospect of marked success by the Danish officers in
their undertaking.

The Crossing of Tibet.—The explorations of Mr. Rockhill in Tibet and his
renewed attempt to reach Lassa, the "holy city" of that country, creates an
unusual interest for Americans in the account of the crossing of Tibet by M.
G. Bonvalot, Prince Henri d'Orleans, and P. Dedeken, published in the last
Bulletin of the Paris Geographical Society.

Six days' journey from Moscow brought the party through Russia and
Turkestan to Kouldja (45° N., 41° W.), in extreme western Mongolia.
Having obtained authority from the Chinese governor of the province to
proceed, the party, aggregating 15 in number, left that place September 12,
1889, with Batang, China, as an objective point. On October 5, after a
journey of about 450 miles, during which they crossed the Thian-chan
("heavenly") mountains by Narat pass, they camped at Korla, near
Bagratch-koul. Here they were warned that they could proceed no farther,
and the governor of Ili sent an order to arrest them. The mandarin and other
local authorities did not, however, actively oppose their departure, which
took place during the night of October 10, the party then consisting of 20
horsemen and 40 pack-animals. On October 28 they reached Kara-douran,
the western end of Lob-nor. A side trip by d'Orleans and Dedeken to Lob-
nor proved it to be no longer a lake but a series of swamps and sandy
islands, with the water nowhere more than four feet deep. Meantime
Bonavolot accumulated supplies and replaced from the hardy Mongols the
more timid among their camp-followers, the party being reduced to seven,
with a few extra men for a short distance.

Page 367

Quitting Tcharkalik on November 17, they followed the route taken by
Carey; but on the advice of the natives they resolved after crossing the
Altyn-tagh to go directly southward instead of turning eastward, and thus to
attempt a new route, on which they were beset by the usual physical
discomforts attendant on travel at great elevations. On these mountain
ranges they saw only wild sheep, blue hares, wild horses, crows and
partridges. On December 5, just south of a large salt lake (Ouzoun-tchour),
they, saw a caravan of Kalmouk pilgrims returning from Lassa by an
unknown route, which they refused to make known, and decided to
temporarily abandon their idea of reaching Batang and instead to go direct
to Lassa by retracing the caravan trail. From this point (about 38° 30' N. and
87° 30' W.) they proceeded directly southward. The region penetrated was
unknown, the winds violent the entire day, the desert treeless and without
water, the route lined with the carcasses of camels and their drivers, the
only fuel the dung of wandering yaks or caravan camels, and the trail so
indistinct that at times they marched by compass. The elevation gradually
and steadily increased to 15,000 and even 16,500 feet; the mountain fever
became worse, the storms more violent and continuous, and the temperature
ranged from 7° (–14° C.), with wind, at midday to 30° below zero (–33° C.)
at night. One by one their horses and camels died, and also an old Kirgese
who followed them. Extensive glaciers were passed, from which flow on
the one side the Salouen and Mekong into Indian ocean, and on the other
the Yang-tse to China sea. On January 8, 1890, they skirted a large unfrozen
lake named Montcalm, 50 miles long by 12 miles wide, and on January 14
traversed Duplex pass, 20,000 feet elevation. On the 31st they finally ran
across a man, a wild Tibetan, small, thin, with enormous lips, long knotted
hair, clothed in sheepskin and armed with a saber and flint-lock gun, whom
they called "appa" (father); he knew neither Chinese nor Mogul, but spoke
Tibetan of which the travelers knew scarcely a dozen words. Other
Tibetans, with flocks of sheep, soon appeared and sold them mutton, a little
salt, and rancid butter, and then followed on horseback for fifteen days
without losing sight of the explorers. Often they were counseled in Mogul
by those in authority to turn back.

In the middle of February they reached lake Nam-tso ("heaven"), or Tengri-
nor, a large frozen body of water. Out of 40 camels only 15 remained, and,
of 20 horses but one survived; three of the party of seven were in desperate

Page 368

state of health, while all were worn out and almost without provisions. They
were finally obliged to stop in a mountain pass of the Nindjin-tangla, which
led directly to Lassa, then not more than sixty miles distant. On February 17
the Tibetan authorities sent a large party to meet them and ask their
intentions. Mistaken for Russians, it took 13 days to convince the
authorities that they were French. They received presents from the
authorities and obtained costumes from Lassa, but found it impossible to
visit the "holy city." After 49 days of negotiation, on April 5, provided with
arms, provisions and horses, and also a safe permit from the Talia lama to
cross Tibet to Batang by an unknown route, they started eastward, on a
course nearly parallel to and north of Salouen river, reaching Sô and once
again seeing houses on April 15. They arrived at Batang early in June, their
route some distance west of it having joined the Imperial highway from
Pekin to Lassa over which l'Abbe Huc travelled. From Tatsien-lou, where
the French Tibetan mission is located, their route turned southward to Red
river, which was reached, at Manhoau, on September 21, when their journey
practically ended, as Hanoai was reached two days later.

An excellent map of the itinerary, by Prince Henri, accompanies the article.

A. W. G.

Third Annual Report on the Statistics of Railways in the United States to the
Interstate Commerce Commission, for the year ending June 30, 1890:
Washington, Government Printing Office, 1891 (advance copy, pp. 1–100).
—This pamphlet, by Professor Henry C. Adams, is issued in advance of the
full report, which is promised to comprise about 875 pages. It contains a
summary, digest and discussion of the full report.

It appears that the total railroad mileage on June 30, 1890, was 163,597, an
increase of 5,838 miles during the year. The increase came mainly from
southeastern and western states. This mileage was owned by 1,797 distinct
corporate bodies, but entirely controlled in one way or another by only 747
companies. To illustrate the extent to which consolidation of railroad
property has gone, it may be stated that 47.5 per cent of all railroad mileage

Page 369

is controlled by but forty companies, and that 65.4 per cent is controlled by
seventy-five companies. The greatest mileage controlled by one company is
6,053, operated by the Southern Pacific company.

The total capital and bonded debt of railroad companies was
$9,871,378,389, or $60,340 per mile. Stock and bonds were about equal in
amount. Mr. Adams estimates the value of railroad property by capitalizing
at 5 per cent the dividends and interest on bonds paid during the year,
reaching as a result $6,627,461,140, or about 2/3 of the nominal capital and
bonded debt. The justice of this method may fairly be questioned. A
comparison of the ruling prices of dividend-paying stocks with the rate per
cent of the dividend shows that 5 per cent stocks are above par and that 4
per cent stocks average nearly par. Moreover, it is well known that many
railroads are built and operated, not for their own immediate earnings but to
give value to other property of the companies, notably to lands, from the
sale or lease of which the companies derive profits. Again, many railroads
are built, not for present but for future profits, after they shall have induced
settlement of their territory; and, furthermore, numerous branch roads have
been built as defensive measures to prevent rivals from occupying territory;
and in many cases earnings are used in betterment of property instead of
distributing it as dividends. In all these cases the roads have value, although
they are not paying dividends.

Taking all these matters into account, it does not appear that the railroad
stocks of the country have, collectively, been watered to any great extent, if
by "watering" is meant expanding nominal values above actual values.

Concerning dividends paid on stock, Mr. Adams presents a table showing
that 63.76 per cent of all stock paid no dividends; that but 6.47 per cent paid
less than 4 per cent; that 25.26 per cent paid from 4 to 8 per cent, the
remainder paying above 8 per cent. It appears that in the northeastern states
much the highest dividends were paid, while in the west, so far as dividends
are concerned, the stockholders have to wait for future developments.

The total passenger mileage for the year was 11,847,785,617, a slight
increase over the previous year. The total freight mileage was
76,207,047,298, an increase of nearly 10 per cent over that of the previous
year. The gross earnings of the year were $1,051,877,632, and the operating

Page 370

expenses $692,093,971, leaving as the income from operations
$359,783,661. The income from other sources was $126,767,064, and the
total deductions from income were $384,792,138, leaving as the net income
$101,758,587, out of which there was paid as dividends on stock
$89,688,204.

The magnitude of the railway interests of the country is set forth in the
above enormous figures. It is still further emphasized by the fact that nearly
three-quarters of a million men are in the employ of this industry. Assuming
that each such employé supports two others besides himself, it is seen that
the railroad interest supports two and a quarter millions, or more than one
thirtieth of the inhabitants of the country.

H. G.

INDEX.

ABBE, CLEVELAND, cited on isostaths, 43
—, Record of communication by, viii
— — — discussion by, viii

ABORIGINES of South America, 7

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, Russian, Quotation from records of, 212

ADAMS, HENRY C., Review of report on railway operations by, 255

ADELUNG, J. C., Geographic work by, 211
—, Quotation from, on de l'Isle's map, 212, 213, 214

ADMIRALTY BAY, 56

Page 371

AFRICA, Area of, 32
—, Conquest and division of, 31
—, Natural divisions of, 238
—, Population of, 238
— (The Heart of); E. C. Hore, 238

AGASSIZ GLACIER, Ascent of, 147
— — named, 73

AGE of St. Elias range, 175

ALASKA (An expedition to Mount St. Elias,); I. C. Russell, 53
—, Boundaries of, 237
—, Early works concerning, 206
—, Report of committee on exploration in, 248

ALLEN, JAMES, cited on isostaths, 44

ALPENSTOCKS, Necessity for, 165

ALPINE glaciers, 176, 180

ALTON, EDMUND, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

ALVORD, H. E., Remarks by, at field meeting, x

AMAZON, Discovery of the, 11
—, Sketch of the, 4

AMENDMENT to by-laws proposed, xii

ANDES, General description of the, 1

ANEMOMETER formula devised by C. F. Marvin, 49

ANGOT, A., Reference to work of, 46

Page 372

ANTIQUITIES of Peru, 8

ARCHANGELICA, Mention of, 89, 114

ARGENTINE REPUBLIC, Sketch of, 19

ASIA, Exploration in, 253

ATREVIDA, Mention of the, 63, 92, 105

AURIFEROUS sands from Yakutat bay, 196

AVALANCHES, 145, 155

BAIE DE MONTI, 56
— named by La Pérouse, 60

BAKER, MARCUS, cited on early eclipses, 220
— — — Mount St. Elias, 232
—, Explorations by, 70, 72
—, Reference to bibliography by, 58
—, Record of discussion by, viii, ix

BASE LINE, Measurement of, 86

BATES, H. W., Quotation from, on South America, 29

BEAR, Meeting with the, 94, 109

BELCHER, SIR EDWARD, Explorations by, 68, 69

BELL, A. GRAHAM, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

BELL, CHARLES J., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

BELLIN, S., Geographic work by, 207

Page 373

BERING BAY, Mention of, 56

BERING'S first voyage (The cartography and observations of); A. W. Greely,
205
— provisions, 219

BERING, VITUS, Explorations by, 58

BERG, M., cited on thunderstorms, 44

BIEN, MORRIS, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

BIGELOW, F. H., Record of communication by, viii

BIRNIE, JR., ROGERS, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

BLACK GLACIER, Brief account of, 101, 104

BLODGETT, J. H., Record of discussion by, vii, ix

BLOSSOM ISLAND, Description of, 113, 122

BOARD ON GEOGRAPHIC NAMES, Institution of the, 39

BONVALOT, G., Crossing of Tibet by, 253

BOURSIN, HENRY, Mention of, 79

BRAZIL, Revolution in, 36
—, Sketch of, 17

BROKA, GEORGE, Explorations by, 73, 74

BUACHE, PHILLIPE, Geographic work by, 208

BUCHAN, ALEX., Reference to work of, 44

Page 374

BUCKLE, SIR HENRY, Quotation from, on tropical America, 29

BY-LAWS, Proposed amendment to the, xii

CAMP hands, 166

CARPENTER, Z. T., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

CARTOGRAPHY, Discussion of, 251
— (The) and Observations of Bering's First Voyage; A. W. Greely, 205

CASCADE GLACIER named, 144

CENTURY COMPANY, Offer of coöperation by, 249

CHAIX HILLS named, 73

CHARIOT, THE, Mention of, 140

CHATHAM, Mention of, 66

CHERIKOF, ALEXEI, Explorations of, 58

CHINA, Exploration in, 253

CHRISTIE, J. H., Member of expedition, 76
—, Work of, 82, 83, 84, 96, 103, 112, 113, 123, 162

CLIMATE of South America, 6

CLOVER, RICHARDSON, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY, Explorations by, 70, 72
—, Offer of coöperation by, 249

Page 375

COLD WAVES, Prediction of, 51

COLLETT, M. J., Review of map described by, 250

COMMERCE of South America, 17, 19, 23

COOK, CAPTAIN JAMES, Explorations of, 58

CORDILLERAS of South America, 1

CORWIN CLIFFS, Mention of, 138

CORWIN (The) in Disenchantment bay, 100
— Return of the, 163

CREVASSES, 181, 182
— at Pinnacle pass, 130

CROSS SOUND, visited by Vancouver's expedition, 67

CRUMBACK, J. H., Member of expedition, 76
—, Work of, 96, 103, 122, 125, 129, 131, 135, 137

CURTIS, W. E., Record of communication by, xi

CYCLONES, Theory of, 42

DAGELET, M., Mention of, 60

DAHLGREN, ULRICA, Presentation of flag by, viii

DALL, W. H., cited on Bering's first voyage, 205
— — — — supplies, 219
— — — de l'Isle's map, 218
— — — early eclipses, 219
— — — Mount St. Elias, 231

Page 376

—, Explorations by, 70, 72
—, Quotation from, on map by de l'Isle, 207
—, Record of discussion by, vii
—, Reference to bibliography by, 58

DALTON, JOHN, Glacier named for, 98
—, Mention of, 73

D'ANVILLE, M., cited on early eclipses, 229

DAVIS, W. M., Reference to meteorologic review by, 47

DEDEKEN, P., Crossing of Tibet by, 253

DEFINITION of formations in St. Elias region, 167

DEKALB, COURTENAY, Record of communication by, ix

DE L'ISLE, J. N., Authenticity of map by, 211, 213
—, Geographic work by, 206
—, Map by, 207
—, Quotation from, on eclipses, 220

DE MONTI BAY, Arrival at, 79

DESCUBIERTA (The), Mention of, 63

DESENGAÑO BAY, named by Malaspina, 63

DEVIL'S CLUB (Panax horridum), Mention of, 95, 115

DIGGES' SOUND, named by Vancouver, 68

DILLER, J. S., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

DIP at Pinnacle pass, 140

Page 377

DISCOVERY (The), Mention of, 66

DISENCHANTMENT BAY, Canoe trip in, 96, 103
—, Last view of, 163
—, Mention of, 56
—, visited by Malaspina, 63, 64

DIXON, CAPTAIN GEORGE, Explorations of, 60, 62

DOBBINS, J. W., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

DOBBS, ARTHUR, Geographic work by, 210

DOME PASS named, 146

DONEY, L. S., Member of expedition, 76
—, Work of, 85, 158, 159, 160, 162

D'ORLEANS, PRINCE HENRI, Crossing of Tibet by, 253

DOUGLASS, E. M., Record of discussion by, xi

DOUGLASS, CAPTAIN, Explorations of, 62

DRY BAY, Mention of, 55

DU BOCAGE, BARBIC, Geographic work by, 211
—, Quotation from, on de l'Isle's map, 216

DU FOSSE, E., cited on early publications, 207

DU HALDE, PÈRE, Geographic work by, 206
—, Quotation from, on de l'Isle's map, 218

EARTHQUAKES, South American, 2

Page 378

ECLIPSES, Early, observed in Kamshatka, 219, 229

EIFFEL TOWER, Use of, in meteorology, 46

EKHOLM, NILS, cited on isostaths, 43

ELDORADO, Early accounts of, 14

ELECTION of officers, xii

ESPERANZA, POINT, Mention of, 14, 85

EXPEDITION (An) to Mount St. Elias, Alaska; I. C. Russell, 53

EXPLORATION in Alaska, 248

FARENHOLT, LIEUTENANT COMMANDER O. F., of U. S. S. Pinta, 79

FAULTED pebble from Pinnacle pass, 171

FAULTS 83, 136
—, Thrust, in Hitchcock range, 118

FERREL, WILLIAM, cited on cyclones, 42
—, Reference to treatise by, 47

FINLEY, J. P., Reference to work of, 50

FLORAL HILLS, Brief account of, 105, 108

FLORAL PASS, Brief account of, 105, 108, 110

FORMATIONS of the St. Elias region, 167

FOSSILS at Pinnacle pass, 140
—, Description of, of Yakutat system, 172

Page 379

FOSSIL PLANTS, Report on, by Lester F. Ward, 199, 200

FRANCE, Review of Staff Map of, 250

GABBRO on the Marvine glacier, 123

GALIANO, DON DIONISIO ALCALA, Mention of, 63

GALIANO GLACIER, Visit to, 89, 90

GANNETT, HENRY, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75
—, Instructions from, 194
—, Review of railway operations by, 255
— — — Staff Map of France, by, 250

GANNETT, S. S., Computation of height of Mount St. Elias, by, 235

GEOGRAPHIC names, Board of, 39

GEOGRAPHY of the Air; A. W. Greely, 41
— — — Land; H. G. Ogden, 31

GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, Acknowledgments to, 40
—, Instructions from, 192, 193, 194
—, Offer of coöperation by, 249

GEOLOGY of the St. Elias region, 167, 174, 190, 191

GILBERT, G. K., Instructions from, 192, 193
—, Record of discussion by, vii, ix, x
—, Remarks by, at field meeting, x

Page 380

—, Report on exploration by, 250

GLACIAL currents, 187
— river, Example of, 183
— streams, 183, 184

GLACIER BAY, Mention of, 67

GLACIERS in Disenchantment bay in 1792, 64, 65, 97
— — — — observed by Malaspina, 64, 65
— — — — — — Puget, 67, 68
— of the St. Elias region, 176
— west of Icy bay, 187

GRACE, M. P., Financial operations by, 23

GREELY, A. W., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75
— cited on Mississippi floods, 38
—; Geography of the Air, 41
—, Note by, on polar regions, 252
— — — — the crossing of Tibet, 253
—, Record of communication by, vii, viii, xi
—; The Cartography and Observations of Bering's First Voyage, 205

GUIANA, Sketch of, 13

GUIDES, Use of, in ascending St. Elias, 166

GUYOT GLACIER named, 73

HAENKE, D. TADEO, Haenke island named for, 65

HAENKE ISLAND, Condition of, when seen by Malaspina, 63, 64, 65, 97
—, Visit to, 96, 103

Page 381

HANN, JULIUS, cited on cyclones, 42

HAYDEN, DR. F. V., Glacier named for, 108

HAYDEN, EVERETT, Contributions to exploration fund by, 75
—, Record of discussion by, vii, viii, ix, xi
—, Report on exploration by, 250

HAYDEN GLACIER, Brief account of, 108, 110, 111

HAYS, J. W., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

HAZEN, H. A., Reference to work of, 50

HEIGHT and position of St. Elias, 189, 190

HENDRIKSEN, REVEREND CARL J., Mention of, 80, 83

HILL, S. A., Reference to work of, 47

HILL, R. T., Record of communication by, xiii

HITCHCOCK, PROFESSOR EDWARD, Range named for, 112

HITCHCOCK RANGE, Brief account of, 112
— from Pinnacle pass, 133
—, Structure of, 118

HOOGEWERFF, J. A., Record of communication by, viii

HOOPER, CAPTAIN C. L., Navigation of Disenchantment bay, 56, 100
—, Offer of coöperation by, 249

HORE, E. C., Record of address by, vii
—; The Heart of Africa, 238

HOSMER, E. S., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Page 382

—, Return of, 83
—, Volunteer assistant, 76

HOTCHKISS, JED., Record of communication by, ix, x
—, Testimonial to, x

HOVEY, H. C., Record of communication by, x
—, Remarks by, at field meeting, x

HOWELL, E. E., Record of communication by, xi

HUBBARD, GARDINER G., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75
—, Glacier named for, 99
—, Presentation of flag by, viii
—, Record of presidential address by, xiii
—; South America: Annual address by the President, 1

HUBBARD GLACIER, Brief description of, 99

HUC, L'ABBÉ, Route of, 255

HUGHES, T. MCKENNEY, Record of communication by, x

ICEBERGS, Formation of, 98, 99, 101, 102
— in Yakutat bay, Description of, 87

ICE tunnels, 184

INCAS of Peru, 8

INDIANS of South America, 7

INSTRUCTIONS from Geological Survey, 192, 193, 194
— — National Geographic Society, 194

IRVING, PROFESSOR R. D., Mountain named for, 144

Page 383

JACKSON, SHELDON, Record of discussion by, ix

JOHNSON, J. B., Record of discussion by, xi

JOHNSON, WILLARD D., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75
—, Exploration planned by, 75
—, Record of discussion by, vii
—, Report on exploration by, 250

JUDD, J. G., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

JUNGEN, ENSIGN C. W., Mention of, 81

KAMSHATKA, Cartography of, 217
—, Early eclipses in, 219, 229

KERR, MARK B., assigned as an assistant, 75
— cited on Mount St. Elias, 39
—, Report on topographic work by, 195

KHANTAAK ISLAND, Village on, 79, 80

KING, HARRY, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

KNAPP, HON. LYMAN E., Mention of, 79

KNIGHT ISLAND, Scenery near, 83
— named by Puget, 68

KNOWLTON, F. H., Report on fossil plants, 199

LA BOUSSOLE, Mention of, 58

Page 384

LAKE CASTANI named, 73

LAKELETS on the glaciers, 119, 120

LAKES, Abandoned beds of, near Blossom island, 116

LA PÉROUSE, J. F. S., Explorations of, 58, 60

LA PLATA river, Sketch of, 5

LASSA, recent attempt to reach, 253

L'ASTROLABE, Mention of, 58

LAURIDSEN, P., cited on early maps, 215
—, Quotation from, on de l'Isle's map, 217

LEACH, BOYNTON, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

LEVÉE systems of the Mississippi, 37

LIBBEY, PROFESSOR WILLIAM, Explorations by, 72, 73

LINDENKOHL, A., Computation of position of Mount St. Elias by, 235

LINDSLEY, W. L., Member of expedition, 76
—, Work of, 122, 131, 134, 135, 139, 144, 149, 150, 153, 157, 158, 164

LITTLEHALES, G. W., Record of discussion by, vii

LITUYA BAY, Mention of, 55

LOB-NOR, Character of, 253

LOGAN, SIR W. E., Mountain named for, 141

LONDON MISSIONARY SOCIETY, Acknowledgments to, 247

Page 385

LUCIA GLACIER, Brief account of, 92
— —, Crossing of, 105, 106, 108, 109

LYNN CANAL, Mention of, 78

MALASPINA, ALEJANDRO, cited on Mount St. Elias, 231
—, Explorations of, 62, 66

MALASPINA GLACIER, Character of, 187
— described and named, 71, 72
—, Excursion on, 120, 121, 162
— from Blossom island, 118, 119
—, Mention of, 56

MALDONADO, Reference to, 62, 63

MAPS of Alaska, Rare, 206
— (Staff) of France, Review of the, 250

MARVIN, C. F., Reference to work of, 48

MARVINE, A. R., Glacier named for, 112

MARVINE GLACIER, Account of, 112, 122, 124

MCCARTENEY, C. M., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

MCGEE, W J, Record of communication by, xiii
—, Record of discussion by, x, xi

MELVILLE, G. W., Record of communication by, viii

MENDENHALL, T. C., Record of discussion by, xi

METEOROLOGY, Condition of, 41

Page 386

MEYER, HUGO, Reference to work of, 47

MIRAGE in Yakutat bay, 87

MISSISSIPPI RIVER, Flood of, 37

MONSOONS, Characteristics of, 47

MONGOLIA, Exploration in, 255

MOON, Mountains of the, 240

MORAINES, 195
—, Medial, on the Marvine glacier, 123
— on the Malaspina glacier, 134
— near Yakutat bay, 191

MOUNTAINS of South America, 1

MOUNT AUGUSTA, Avalanches on the sides of, 145
— Elevation of, 117

MOUNT BERING, Height and condition of, 65

MOUNT COOK, Appearance of, 92
— named, 72
—, Rocks composing, 92

MOUNT FAIRWEATHER, Height of, 69

MOUNT LOGAN named, 141

MOUNT MALASPINA, Elevation of, 117
— named, 72

MOUNT NEWTON named, 146

Page 387

MOUNT ST. ELIAS, Expedition to, 53
— (see St. Elias, Mount).

MOUNT VANCOUVER named, 72

MUIR GLACIER, Visit to, 78, 79

MULGRAVE, LORD, Port Mulgrave named for, 60

NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC SOCIETY, Instructions from, 194

NÉVÉ fields, 180, 181, 182

NEWELL, F. H., Record of communication by, xi

NEWTON GLACIER, Ascent of, 150

NEWTON, HENRY, Mountain named for, 146

NEW YORK TIMES, Expedition of the, 72, 73

NICARAGUA CANAL, Progress of the, 37

NOLIN, J. B., Geographic work by, 211

NOMENCLATURE, Geographic, 39

NORDHOFF, CHARLES, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

NORRIS GLACIER, Mention of, 78

NUNATAK in Lucia glacier, 106

OFFICERS, Election of, xii

Page 388

OGDEN, H. G.; Geography of the Land, 31
—, Record of communication by, xi
—, Record of discussion by, viii, xi

OIL stoves, Use of, 164

OREL, Mention of the, 70

ORINOCO RIVER, Sketch of, 3

ORTHOGRAPHY of geographic names, 39

ORTON, JAMES, Quotation from, on South America, 28

OTKRYTIE, Mention of the, 69

OUTFIT necessary for Alaskan expeditions, 165

PANAX HORRIDUM, 95, 115

PAMPAS, Characteristics of, 19

PANAMA CANAL project, Revival of the, 37

PAN-AMERICAN congress, Work of the, 36
— railway route, 27

PARTRIDGE, WILLAIM, Member of expedition, 76
—, Work of, 158, 159, 162

PARTSCH, DR., Reference to work of, 46

PEARY, R. E., Record of communication by, viii

PERU, Incas of, 8

Page 389

—, Sketch of, 22

PHIPPS, C. J., Port Mulgrave named for, 60

PIEDMONT glaciers, Characteristics of, 122, 176, 185, 186
— —, Example of, 120, 121
— type of glaciers, Mention of, 57

PIMPLUNA rocks, Mention of, 70, 187

PINNACLE PASS cliffs, Account of, 132, 137
— —, Height of, 137
— —, View from, 132
—, Description of, 130, 132
— named, 130

PINNACLE SYSTEM, Description of rocks of, 167
— named, 131

PINTA, Mention of the, 79, 81

PIZARRO, GONZALO, Discovery of the Amazon by, 11

PLANTS on Blossom island, 114

POINT ESPERANZA, Camp at, 82, 84, 85

POINT GLORIOUS named, 137

POINT RIOU, Mention of, 69

POLAR regions, Recent work in, 252

POMORTSEW, DR., Reference to work of, 46

POPULATION of Africa, 238
— of South America, 6, 15

Page 390

PORT MULGRAVE, 56
— named by Dixon, 60

POWELL, J. W., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75
—, Record of communication by, viii
— — — discussion by, x
— — — introductory remarks by, xiii

POWELL, WILLIAM B., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

PUERTO DEL DESENGAÑO, Mention of, 56

PUGET, PETER, Explorations of, 66, 68

PYRAMID HARBOR, Mention of, 78

QUEEN CHARLOTTE, Mention of the, 60
—, Voyage on the, 78, 79

RABOT, CH., cited on polar exploration, 252

RAILROADS, South American, 25
—, Statistics of, 255

RALEIGH, SIR WALTER, Expeditions by, 14

Page 391

RATIONS, 164

REPORT on sands from Yakutat bay by J. Stanley-Brown, 196

RESOLUTION relating to publication, xii

REVENUE MARINE SERVICE, Offer of coöperation by, 249

REYNOLDS, J. J., Remarks by, at field meeting, x

RIO DE LA PLATA, Sketch of, 5

RIVERS, Glacial, 183
— of South America, 3

ROCKHILL, W. W., Reference to explorations by, 253

ROPE CLIFF named, 149

ROUTE (New), Suggested, 163, 164

RUSSELL, I. C.; An Expedition to Mount St. Elias, 53
— cited on Mount St. Elias, 39
—, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75
—, Height and Position of Mount St. Elias, 231
—, Proposed exploration by, 249
—, Record of communication by, vii, xi
— — — discussion by, vii, ix

RUSSELL, THOMAS, Acknowledgments to, 62
— cited on cyclones, 43
—, Reference to work of, 51

RUSSIAN Academy of Sciences, Quotation from records of, 212

"RUSSIAN OFFICER," Geographic work by the, 209
—, Identity of the, 222

Page 392

—, Quotation from the, on de l'Isle's map, 215, 217
— — — — — — writings, 221

SALMON fishing, 162

SANDS, Auriferous, from Yakutat bay, 196

SAN FRANCISCO RIVER, Sketch of, 5

SANGAI, Active vulcanism of, 2

SCHWATKA, LIEUTENANT FREDERICK, Explorations by, 72, 73

SERPENTINE on the Marvine glacier, 123

SETON-KARR, H. W., Explorations of, 72, 73

SEWARD GLACIER, Crevasses on, 133, 179, 180
—, Crossing of, 142
—, Description of, 177, 178, 179

SEWARD, HON. W. H., Glacier named for, 129

SHARP, BENJAMIN, Record of communication by, xiii

SHENDUN, Field meeting at, ix, x

SIEMENS, WERNER VON, cited on air currents, 45

SITKA, Arrival at, 79

SNOW crests, Figures of, 143
— line, Description of Alpine glaciers above, 180
— — — — — — below, 183
— —, Elevation of, 92, 111
— on mountain crests, 182

Page 393

SOUNDINGS in Disenchantment bay, 56

SOUTH AMERICA: Annual address by the President; Gardiner G. Hubbard, 1

SPRUNG, A., cited on air currents, 45

STAMY, THOMAS, Member of expedition, 76
—, Work of, 137, 139, 144, 150, 153, 157, 158, 160

STANLEY-BROWN, J., Record of communication by, vii
—, Report on sands from Yakutat bay by, 196

ST. ELIAS, Described by La Pérouse, 59, 60
—, Discovery of, by Bering, 58
— expedition, Review of, 39
—, First full view of, 135
— (Height and position of Mount); I. C. Russell, 231
— — — — — 40, 189, 190
— — — — — determined by La Pérouse, 60
— — — — — — — Tebenkof, 69
— — — — — — — Malaspina, 64, 65, 66
— range, Age of, 175
— —, Character of peaks of, 175
— region, Glaciers of the, 176
— schist, Description of rocks of, 167, 173
—, Suggested new route to, 163, 164
— uplift, 190

STEIN, ROBERT, Translations by, 59, 64, 65, 66

STEPNIAK, SERGIUS, Record of address by, viii

STRAIT OF ANNAN, 56

STRUCTURE, 174

Page 394

STRUVE, CH., Acknowledgments to, 221

STRUVE, O., cited on manuscript records, 220

SWISS guides in Alaskan exploration, 166

SULPHUR, Mention of the, 69

TAKU GLACIER, Mention of, 78

TAKU INLET, Visit to, 78

TANGANYIKA, LAKE, Characteristics of, 241

TEBENKOF, CAPTAIN, Notes on Alaska by, 69, 70

TERRACE on northern shore of Yakutat bay, 82, 85
— point, Brief account of, 106

THUNDERSTORMS, Relation of, to air-pressure, 44

THOMPSON, GILBERT, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

TIBET, Note on the crossing of, 253

TIDE-WATER glaciers defined, 101

TOPOGRAPHIC work, Report on, 195

TOPHAM, EDWIN, Explorations by, 73, 74

TOPHAM, W. H., Explorations by, 73, 74
—, Reference to map by, 177

TORNADOES, Results of, 50

Page 395

TRADE, South American, 23

TRIANGULATION, Commencement of, 86

TUCKER, J. RANDOLPH, Remarks by, at field meeting, x

TUNNELS, Ice, 184

TYNDALL GLACIER named, 73

TYNDALL, J., cited on marginal crevasses, 127

VAN BEBBER, A., Reference to work of, 47

VANCOUVER, CAPTAIN GEORGE, Explorations by, 66, 68

VERATRUM VIRIDE, Mention of, 114

VOLCANOES of the Andes, 2

WARD, LESTER F., Report on fossil plants, 199, 200

WAXEL, SWEN, Quotations from, on de l'Isle's map, 223
—, Translations from letter by, 224
—, Work of, 222

WHITE, THOMAS, Member of expedition, 76
—, Work of, 158, 160

WILLIAMS, C. A., Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

WILLIAMS, WILLIAM, Explorations by, 73, 74

WILLIS, BAILY, Contribution to exploration fund by, 75

Page 396

WILSON, H. M., Record of communication by, ix

YAKUTAT BAY, Arrival at, 79
—, Base camp on western shore of, 86, 89
—, Shores of described, 57
—, Synonomy of, 56

YAKUTAT INDIANS described by Dixon, 61
— system, Description of rocks of, 167
— — named, 131

Page 397

*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE NATIONAL
GEOGRAPHIC MAGAZINE, VOL. III. (COMPLETE), 1891 ***

Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

Page 398

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are

Page 399

located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.

Page 400

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived from
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.

Page 401

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing,
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:

• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”

• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.

• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.

• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project

Page 402

Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to

Page 403

you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg

Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the

Page 404

efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of
life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.

The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment

Page 405

including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a

Page 406

copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in
compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.

This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.

Page 407

PDF language

简体中文 https://pdftoflip.com/view.php?t=85a8e601a2bd82334f587ac0ff859075&bl=zh Translating…
Español https://pdftoflip.com/view.php?t=85a8e601a2bd82334f587ac0ff859075&bl=es Translating…
Français https://pdftoflip.com/view.php?t=85a8e601a2bd82334f587ac0ff859075&bl=fr Translating…
Deutsch https://pdftoflip.com/view.php?t=85a8e601a2bd82334f587ac0ff859075&bl=de Translating…
日本語 https://pdftoflip.com/view.php?t=85a8e601a2bd82334f587ac0ff859075&bl=ja Translating…
한국어 https://pdftoflip.com/view.php?t=85a8e601a2bd82334f587ac0ff859075&bl=ko Translating…
Português https://pdftoflip.com/view.php?t=85a8e601a2bd82334f587ac0ff859075&bl=pt Translating…
Русский https://pdftoflip.com/view.php?t=85a8e601a2bd82334f587ac0ff859075&bl=ru Translating…
العربية https://pdftoflip.com/view.php?t=85a8e601a2bd82334f587ac0ff859075&bl=ar Translating…